HP | C50 | User's Manual | HP c50 User's Manual

TeemTalk® 5.0
for Windows CE & XPe
User's Guide
USA
Neoware, Inc.
3200 Horizon Drive
King of Prussia, PA 19406
Tel: +1-610-277-8300
Fax: +1-610-771-4200
Email: info@neoware.com
UK
Neoware UK Ltd
The Stables, Cosgrove
Milton Keynes MK19 7JJ
Tel: +44 (0) 1908 267111
Fax: +44 (0) 1908 267112
Email: teem-info@neoware.com
TeemTalk
Software Support
Telephone: +1-610-277-8300
Web: http://www.neoware.com/support/
Software Version 5.0.1
October 2004
Neoware UK Ltd,
The Stables, Cosgrove,
Milton Keynes, MK19 7JJ
Tel: +44 (0) 1908 267111
Fax: +44 (0) 1908 267112
TeemTalk © 1988-2004 Neoware UK Ltd, All Rights Reserved.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)
The material in this manual is for information purposes only
and is subject to change without notice. Neoware UK Ltd
accepts no responsibility for any errors contained herein.
Trademarks
TeemTalk is a registered trademark of Neoware UK Ltd.
ADDS Viewpoint A2 is a trademark of Applied Digital Data Systems Inc.
AIX is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
D100, D200 and D410 are trademarks of Data General.
Dataspeed is a registered trademark of AT&T.
DEC, VT52, VT100, VT131, VT220, VT300, VT320 and VT340 are registered
trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation.
Hazeltine is a trademark of Esprit Systems, Inc.
HP700/92, HP700/94, HP700/96, HP2392A and HP2622A are trademarks of Hewlett
Packard Company.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks, and Windows and Excel are
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Prime is a registered trademark and PT250 is a trademark of Prime Computer, Inc.
Retrographics and VT640 are registered trademarks of Digital Engineering, Inc.
Sun, PC-NFS and NFS are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Tandem, NonStop and LXN are trademarks of Tandem Computers Inc.
Tektronix is a registered trademark of Tektronix, Inc.
TeleVideo is a registered trademark, and TeleVideo 910, 910+, 925, 950 and 955 are
trademarks of TeleVideo Systems, Inc.
Westward is a registered trademark of Telemetrix, Inc.
WYSE is a registered trademark, and WY-50, WY-50+ and WY-60 are trademarks of
Wyse Technology Inc.
All other product names are trademarks of their respective manufacturers.
© 1988-2004 Neoware UK Ltd, All Rights Reserved.
Before reproduction of this material in part or in whole, obtain
written consent from Neoware UK Ltd.
Contents
Contents
Introduction ....................................................... 1-1
About This User's Guide ............................................................... 1-1
Terms & Conventions .................................................................... 1-3
Getting Started.................................................. 2-1
WBT Session Configuration .......................................................... 2-1
Using The Connection Wizard .......................................................... 2-1
Terminal Emulation Configuration ................................................... 2-4
Emulation Options ...................................................................... 2-4
Graphics Mode ............................................................................ 2-6
DEC Suite Options ..................................................................... 2-6
BQ 3107 Option .......................................................................... 2-7
HP 700-92/96 Option .................................................................. 2-7
IBM 3151 Option ........................................................................ 2-7
IBM 3270 Options ...................................................................... 2-7
IBM 5250 Options ...................................................................... 2-8
TCP/IP Connection Settings ............................................................. 2-9
TN3270 Options ....................................................................... 2-11
TN5250 Options ....................................................................... 2-13
5250 Printer Options ................................................................. 2-15
SSL Connection Settings ................................................................. 2-18
Notes About Certificates .......................................................... 2-19
SSH Connection Settings ................................................................ 2-21
SSH Key File Permissions ........................................................ 2-25
Modem Connection Settings ........................................................... 2-26
Serial Connection Settings .............................................................. 2-27
Automate Login Process ................................................................. 2-29
Printer Port Settings......................................................................... 2-31
GUI Overrides ................................................................................. 2-36
Aux Port Settings ............................................................................. 2-38
Contents-1
Contents
Session Management (Windows XPe) ......................................... 2-39
Logged On As System Administrator ............................................. 2-39
Logged On As A User ..................................................................... 2-39
TeemTalk for Windows CE Display ............................................ 2-41
Setup Menus (Windows CE) ........................................................... 2-41
The Button Tools (Windows CE) ................................................... 2-42
The Soft Buttons (Windows CE) .................................................... 2-43
TeemTalk for Windows XPe Display .......................................... 2-44
The Menu Bar (Windows XPe) ....................................................... 2-44
The Toolbar (Windows XPe) .......................................................... 2-45
The Soft Buttons (Windows XPe) ................................................... 2-45
The Status Bar ............................................................................. 2-46
Hotspots ....................................................................................... 2-47
AT&T 4410 Emulation ................................................................ 2-48
Viewdata Mode ............................................................................ 2-49
Keyboard Configuration ................................... 3-1
Keyboard Mapping ........................................................................ 3-1
Defining Key Functions ................................................................. 3-1
Defining A Key Or Key Combination .............................................. 3-2
Key Combinations & Sequences ....................................................... 3-3
Specifying Characters ....................................................................... 3-3
Compose Character Sequences ..................................................... 3-4
Mouse Functions .............................................. 4-1
Introduction ................................................................................... 4-1
Redefining Mouse Functions ......................................................... 4-1
Selecting & Copying Text .............................................................. 4-2
Moving The Cursor In Block Mode ............................................... 4-2
Send Keyword ................................................................................ 4-3
Show & Action Hotspots ............................................................... 4-3
Emulating Middle Mouse Button .................................................. 4-3
The Toolbar ........................................................ 5-1
Using The Toolbar ........................................................................ 5-1
The Predefined Button Tools ......................................................... 5-1
Contents-2
Contents
Redefining The Toolbar................................................................. 5-3
Adding Buttons .................................................................................. 5-3
Adding A Space Between Buttons .................................................... 5-4
Removing A Button Or Space ........................................................... 5-4
Saving The Button Tools .................................................................. 5-4
Assigning User-Defined Functions ................................................... 5-5
Setup Menus ..................................................... 6-1
Displaying & Closing Menus ........................................................ 6-1
Using The Menus ........................................................................... 6-2
Dialog Boxes ................................................................................. 6-3
Default Settings ............................................................................. 6-4
Specifying Characters In Setup Entries ........................................ 6-4
Creating A Connection Template (CE) ......................................... 6-5
Selecting A Connection Template (CE)......................................... 6-6
Saving The Session Configuration (XPe) ...................................... 6-6
Save Using Current Session Name ................................................... 6-6
Save Using New Session Name ........................................................ 6-7
Selecting A Session Configuration (XPe) ...................................... 6-7
Menu Descriptions ........................................................................ 6-9
File Menu ........................................................................................... 6-9
Edit Menu ........................................................................................ 6-23
Settings Menu .................................................................................. 6-24
Emulation Settings .......................................................................... 6-26
HP 700-92/96 Settings ..................................................................... 6-30
PT250 Settings ................................................................................. 6-36
IBM 3151 Settings ........................................................................... 6-39
Wyse Settings .................................................................................. 6-43
TA6530 Settings .............................................................................. 6-48
IBM 3270 Settings ........................................................................... 6-50
Notice Board Setup ......................................................................... 6-54
IBM 5250 Settings ........................................................................... 6-56
Unisys T27 Settings ......................................................................... 6-61
General Settings ........................................................................ 6-61
Environments Settings .............................................................. 6-63
Tab Settings .............................................................................. 6-68
BQ 3107 Settings ............................................................................. 6-69
Serial Settings .................................................................................. 6-72
Contents-3
Contents
Auxport Setup .................................................................................. 6-74
Terminal Settings ............................................................................ 6-75
Tab Stops ......................................................................................... 6-82
Local Editing ................................................................................... 6-83
Block Transmission ......................................................................... 6-85
Tek 4014 Settings ............................................................................ 6-89
GIN Mouse Definitions ................................................................... 6-91
Attributes ......................................................................................... 6-92
Define Keyboard Macros ................................................................ 6-97
Defining A Key Or Key Combination ..................................... 6-98
Specifying Characters ............................................................... 6-99
Soft Buttons ................................................................................... 6-100
Programming A Soft Button ................................................... 6-101
Specifying Characters ............................................................. 6-102
Mouse Button Actions ................................................................... 6-103
Button Tools .................................................................................. 6-105
Adding Buttons ....................................................................... 6-105
Adding A Space Between Buttons ......................................... 6-106
Removing A Button Or Space ................................................ 6-106
Saving The Button Tools ........................................................ 6-106
Assigning User-Defined Functions ........................................ 6-106
DEC VT Emulations .......................................... 7-1
Session Configuration ................................................................... 7-1
WBT Mode ........................................................................................ 7-1
Non-WBT Mode ................................................................................ 7-2
The Status Bar ............................................................................... 7-4
Horizontal Scrolling ...................................................................... 7-5
Keyboard Mapping ........................................................................ 7-5
Typing Direction For Hebrew Language .......................................... 7-8
BQ 3107 Emulation ........................................... 8-1
Session Configuration ................................................................... 8-1
WBT Mode ........................................................................................ 8-1
Non-WBT Mode ................................................................................ 8-2
The Status Bar ............................................................................... 8-3
Keyboard Mapping ........................................................................ 8-4
Contents-4
Contents
DG 410/412 Emulation ...................................... 9-1
Session Configuration ................................................................... 9-1
WBT Mode ........................................................................................ 9-1
Non-WBT Mode ................................................................................ 9-2
Keyboard Mapping ........................................................................ 9-3
Key Functions .................................................................................... 9-3
Key Codes .......................................................................................... 9-5
HP 700-92/96 Emulation ................................. 10-1
Session Configuration ................................................................. 10-1
WBT Mode ...................................................................................... 10-1
Non-WBT Mode .............................................................................. 10-2
Display Configuration ................................................................. 10-3
Keyboard Mapping ...................................................................... 10-3
Buttons & Function Keys ............................................................ 10-5
Mode Selection ................................................................................ 10-5
Configuration Selection .................................................................. 10-8
Device Control ................................................................................. 10-8
Device Modes ................................................................................ 10-10
Margins, Tabs & Start Column ..................................................... 10-11
Key Programming ..................................................................... 10-13
Character Display Attributes .................................................... 10-16
IBM 3270 Emulation ........................................ 11-1
Introduction ................................................................................. 11-1
Session Configuration ................................................................. 11-1
WBT Mode ...................................................................................... 11-1
Non-WBT Mode .............................................................................. 11-2
Network Virtual Terminal Mode ................................................. 11-4
IBM 3287-1 Printer Support ....................................................... 11-4
SysReq Key Support .................................................................... 11-4
The Status Line ............................................................................ 11-5
Text Display Options ................................................................... 11-9
Keyboard Mapping .................................................................... 11-10
Record & Playback Keystrokes Facility ................................... 11-12
Recording Keystrokes ................................................................... 11-12
Contents-5
Contents
Playback Keystrokes ..................................................................... 11-13
Editing Macros .............................................................................. 11-13
Error Codes .................................................................................... 11-14
Notice Board Facility ................................................................ 11-15
Introduction ................................................................................... 11-15
Key Functions ................................................................................ 11-15
Copying Screen Data To The Display .......................................... 11-15
Copying Screen Data To A Function Key .................................... 11-16
IBM 5250 Emulation ........................................ 12-1
Introduction ................................................................................. 12-1
Session Configuration ................................................................. 12-1
WBT Mode ...................................................................................... 12-1
Non-WBT Mode .............................................................................. 12-3
Network Virtual Terminal Mode ................................................. 12-5
The Status Line ............................................................................ 12-5
Keyboard Mapping ...................................................................... 12-6
Word Processing Mode ................................................................... 12-6
Text Display Options ................................................................... 12-8
Record & Playback Keystrokes Facility ..................................... 12-9
Recording Keystrokes ..................................................................... 12-9
Playback Keystrokes ..................................................................... 12-10
Error Codes .................................................................................... 12-10
Fax Image Support .................................................................... 12-11
IBM 3151 Emulation ........................................ 13-1
Introduction ................................................................................. 13-1
Session Configuration ................................................................. 13-1
WBT Mode ...................................................................................... 13-1
Non-WBT Mode .............................................................................. 13-2
The Status Bar ............................................................................. 13-3
Keyboard Mapping ...................................................................... 13-4
Defining Function Keys ............................................................... 13-6
MDIS Prism Emulations ................................. 14-1
Session Configuration ................................................................. 14-1
WBT Mode ...................................................................................... 14-1
Contents-6
Contents
Non-WBT Mode .............................................................................. 14-2
Keyboard Mapping ...................................................................... 14-3
PT250 Emulation ............................................. 15-1
Session Configuration ................................................................. 15-1
WBT Mode ...................................................................................... 15-1
Non-WBT Mode .............................................................................. 15-2
The Status Line ............................................................................ 15-3
Keyboard Mapping ...................................................................... 15-5
Displaying Alternate Characters ................................................ 15-7
Siemens 97801 Emulation .............................. 16-1
Session Configuration ................................................................. 16-1
WBT Mode ...................................................................................... 16-1
Non-WBT Mode .............................................................................. 16-2
Keyboard Mapping ...................................................................... 16-3
TA6530 Emulation ........................................... 17-1
Session Configuration ................................................................. 17-1
WBT Mode ...................................................................................... 17-1
Non-WBT Mode .............................................................................. 17-2
The Status Line ............................................................................ 17-3
Operating Modes ......................................................................... 17-4
The Rule Cursor .......................................................................... 17-5
Keyboard Mapping ...................................................................... 17-5
Unisys T27 Emulation ..................................... 18-1
Session Configuration ................................................................. 18-1
WBT Mode ...................................................................................... 18-1
Non-WBT Mode .............................................................................. 18-2
The Status Bar ............................................................................. 18-3
Keyboard Mapping ...................................................................... 18-4
Wyse Emulations ............................................ 19-1
Session Configuration ................................................................. 19-1
WBT Mode ...................................................................................... 19-1
Contents-7
Contents
Non-WBT Mode .............................................................................. 19-2
Display Format ........................................................................... 19-4
Status Line Messages .................................................................. 19-4
Keyboard Mapping ...................................................................... 19-5
Initialization Commands ................................ 20-1
Introduction ................................................................................. 20-1
Command Summary .................................................................... 20-2
Host Connection .......................................................................... 20-5
Session Configuration ................................................................. 20-7
Display......................................................................................... 20-9
Keyboard & Mouse ................................................................... 20-20
Auxiliary Port ............................................................................ 20-21
Virtual Key Names ............................................ A-1
Character Sets .................................................. B-1
Host Command Summary................................ C-1
Product Specification ....................................... D-1
Contents-8
Introduction
1
Introduction
This chapter introduces the contents of this User's Guide.
About This User's Guide
This User's Guide describes how to use TeemTalk version 5.0 for Windows CE and
XPe. Most of the functionality is the same for both Windows CE and XPe versions,
but where there are differences, the text will indicate them. Most of the dialog box
illustrations show the Windows CE version of TeemTalk.
Note that your version of TeemTalk may not support every emulation or feature
described in this User's Guide.
The User's Guide is divided into the following chapters and appendices:
Chapter 1:
Introduction
Introduces the contents of this User's Guide.
Chapter 2:
Getting Started
Describes how to configure a session and describes various display
features.
Chapter 3:
Keyboard Configuration
Describes how to assign functions to keys and how to use the
Compose Character function to generate special characters.
Chapter 4:
Mouse Functions
Describes the special functions assigned to the left mouse button
and how to redefine them.
Chapter 5:
The Toolbar
Describes how to use the TeemTalk for Windows XPe toolbar and
assign functions to the buttons.
Chapter 6:
Setup Menus
Describes all the commands and setup dialog boxes that can be
accessed via drop-down menus in the command bar.
1-1
Introduction
Chapter 7:
DEC VT Emulations
Describes features of the DEC VT emulations.
Chapter 8:
BQ 3107 Emulation
Describes features of the Bull BQ 3107 emulation.
Chapter 9:
DG 410/412 Emulation
Describes features of the Data General D410/412 emulation.
Chapter 10: HP700-92/96 Emulation
Describes features of the Hewlett Packard HP700/92 emulation.
Chapter 11: IBM 3270 Emulation
Describes features of the IBM 3270 emulation.
Chapter 12: IBM 5250 Emulation
Describes features of the IBM 5250 emulation.
Chapter 13: IBM 3151 Emulation
Describes features of the IBM 3151 emulation.
Chapter 14: MDIS Prism Emulations
Describes features of the McDonnell Douglas Prism-8, Prism-9 and
Prism-12 terminal emulations.
Chapter 15: PT250 Emulation
Describes features of the Prime PT250 emulation.
Chapter 16: Siemens 97801 Emulation
Describes features of the Siemens 97801 emulation.
Chapter 17: TA6530 Emulation
Describes features of the Tandem 6530 emulation.
Chapter 18: Unisys T27 Emulation
Describes features of the Unisys T27 emulation.
Chapter 19: Wyse Emulations
Describes features of the Wyse WY-50, WY-50+ and WY-60
emulations.
Chapter 20: Initialization Commands
Describes commands that can be included in the registry and on the
command line to specify the emulator start-up configuration.
Appendix A: Virtual Key Names
Lists all the virtual key names that enable you to include a
specific key function in a user definition.
Appendix B: Character Sets
Shows the supported character set code tables.
1-2
Introduction
Appendix C: Host Command Summary
Lists the host commands that are supported in each terminal emulation mode.
Appendix D: Product Specification
Describes the level of support provided by each terminal emulation.
Terms & Conventions
This User's Guide uses the following terms and conventions.
1. When references to keys on the keyboard are shown linked by a + (plus
sign), this means that two or more keys have to be pressed at the same
time. For example, 'press Alt + F' means press and hold down the Alt key,
press the F key then release both keys.
2. 'Click' means position the mouse pointer over an element on the display
then quickly press and release the specified mouse button.
3. 'Double click' means position the mouse pointer over an element on the
display then quickly press and release the specified mouse button twice in
quick succession.
4. 'Drag the pointer' means hold down the left mouse button (or button
assigned with the select function) and slide the mouse so that a selection
box is displayed.
1-3
Introduction
Notes
1-4
Getting Started
2
Getting Started
This chapter describes how to configure a session and describes various
display features.
WBT Session Configuration
Using The Connection Wizard
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration in WBT
mode. The options available are described in detail in the following sections.
1. Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the
Add button to display the New Connection dialog box.
2. Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK. The Connection Information
dialog box will be displayed.
3. Specify the language to be used in all menus and dialog boxes by making a
selection in the Operating Language list at the bottom of the dialog box.
2-1
Getting Started
4. Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in
the Connection Name box.
5. Select the terminal emulation required in the Emulation list box.
6. If additional configuration options are displayed, make the relevant selections.
Refer to the Terminal Emulation Configuration section later in this chapter for
details.
Clicking the International Settings button will display keyboard language and
character set options for the selected terminal emulation. Refer to the relevant
emulation settings dialog box description in the Setup Menus chapter for details.
(Note that the DEC VT options are located in the Emulation and Terminal
Settings dialog boxes.)
7. Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box.
For a TCP/IP connection, click the TCP/IP button and enter the name or internet
address of the host computer in the Host Name box. Selecting the Host Rollover
On Connection Fail option will present four Host Name entry boxes. The
emulator will attempt to connect to each specified host in turn until one is successful. Click Advanced for Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings
section later in this chapter for details.
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to display
configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section later in this
chapter for details.
For a serial connection, click the Serial button, specify the communications port in
the Connect To box, then click Advanced for additional serial options. Refer to
the Serial Connection Settings section later in this chapter for details.
2-2
Getting Started
The optional SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) protocol enables authenticated and
encrypted communication between clients and servers. Refer to the SSL Connection section later in this chapter for details.
The optional SSH (Secure Shell) client/server protocol is used to encrypt and
transmit data securely over a network, with authentication (proof of client identity)
provided by a password and/or key. To enable an SSH connection, this option
must be selected and the Telnet Port Number option set to the host's SSH port (22
is the default for SSH). When a Telnet connection is initiated, the SSH Connection dialog box will be displayed prompting the user for authentication. Refer to
the SSH Connection section later in this chapter for details.
Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information
dialog box, then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box.
8. The Advanced Options dialog box provides access to additional settings which
are described later in this chapter.
If you are running TeemTalk for Windows XPe and are logged on as system
administrator, there will be two Session stored... options to enable a session to be
created or modified either for yourself (current user) only, or for all users. Refer to
the Session Management section later in this chapter for details.
9. When you have made your selections, click Finish to return to the Terminal
Connection Manager.
10. In the Terminal Connection Manager, display the Connections list, select the
session name you specified earlier in step 4, then click the Connect button.
2-3
Getting Started
Terminal Emulation Configuration
Emulation Options
The Emulation options in the Connection Wizard Connection Information dialog
box are as follows:
The ADDS A2 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
ADDS Viewpoint A2 terminal, as emulated by the Wyse WY-50/50+/60 terminals.
Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details.
The AIXTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive an X
terminal using X Windows.
The ANSI BBS emulation is a derivative of the ANSI device driver ANSI.SYS
supplied with all DOS based PCs and which provides the screen management for the
DOS console screen. PC based UNIX systems and Bulletin Board Systems (BBS)
often rely on the ANSI emulation when being accessed by a PC.
The AT 386 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
AT&T AT 386 terminal.
The ATT4410 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
AT&T Dataspeed 4410 terminal. Refer to the AT&T 4410 Emulation section later in
this chapter for details.
The BQ 3107 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
Bull BQ 3107 terminal. Refer to the BQ 3107 Emulation chapter for details.
The DG 410/412 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
Data General D410 and D412 terminals. Refer to the DG 410/412 Emulation chapter
for details.
The HP 700-92/96 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive
the Hewlett Packard 700/92, 2392A, 2622A, 70094 and 70096 terminals. This
emulation is described in detail in the HP 700-92/96 Emulation chapter.
The HZ1500 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
Hazeltine 1500 terminal, as emulated by the Wyse WY-50/50+/60 terminals. Refer to
the Wyse Emulations chapter for details.
The IBM 3151 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
IBM 3151 terminal. Refer to the IBM 3151 Emulation chapter for information on this
emulation.
The IBM 3270 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
IBM 3270 terminal. Note that the initial display will be an ASCII text screen known as
Network Virtual Terminal mode (NVT mode for short). The setting of the IBM 3270
Model option determines the size of the display and whether or not extended attributes
are supported. Refer to the IBM 3270 Emulation chapter for details.
2-4
Getting Started
The IBM 5250 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive IBM
5250 type alphanumeric terminals. This emulation can be used for connection to an
IBM AS/400, System/36 or System/38. Note that the initial display will be an ASCII
text screen known as Network Virtual Terminal mode (NVT mode for short). Refer to
the IBM 5250 Emulation chapter for details.
The MDI P12\P8 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive
the McDonnell Douglas Prism-12 and Prism-8 terminals. Refer to the MDIS Prism
Emulations chapter for details.
The MDI Prism-9 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive
the McDonnell Douglas Prism-9 terminal. Refer to the MDIS Prism Emulations
chapter for details.
The PT250 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
Prime PT250 terminal. Refer to the PT250 Emulation chapter for details.
Sco Console is an emulation of the SCO UNIX box.
The Siemens 97801 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive
the Siemens 97801 terminal. Refer to the Siemens 97801 Emulation chapter for details.
The Stratus V102 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive
the Stratus V102 terminal.
The TA6530 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
Tandem 6530 terminal. This emulation is described in the TA6530 Emulation chapter.
The TVI 910, TVI 920 and TVI 925 emulations provide compatibility with software
designed to drive the TeleVideo 910+, 920 and 925 terminals, respectively, as
emulated by the Wyse WY-50/50+/60 terminals. Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter
for details.
The TVI 950 and TVI 955 emulations provide compatibility with software designed
to drive the TeleVideo 950 and 955 terminals, respectively.
The Unisys T27 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
Unisys T27 terminal. Refer to the Unisys T27 Emulation chapter for details.
The Viewdata 40, Viewdata 80 and Viewdata Split modes enable access to a
viewdata service using one of three display formats, as described in the Viewdata
Mode section later in this chapter.
The VT PCTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed for the PC
Term mode supported by DEC. This is the same as the VT510 emulation except that
keyboard scan codes are sent on key press/release instead of ASCII codes by default.
The VT52 and VT100 emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC
VT52 and VT100 terminals, respectively. Refer to the DEC VT Emulations chapter for
details.
The VT500 7-Bit and VT500 8-Bit emulations enable you to run applications written
for the DEC VT320 terminal, the difference is in their treatment of 8-bit control codes.
2-5
Getting Started
When VT500 7-Bit is selected, all 8-bit codes are converted to their 7-bit equivalents,
whereas VT500 8-Bit leaves 8-bit codes unchanged. If you are using VT200
applications, select VT500 7-Bit. Refer to the DEC VT Emulations chapter for details.
The VT+HP220 emulation is based on the VT500 terminal series and includes the HP
function keys F1 - F8 (not user programmable). The terminal ID is set to VT220.
The VT100+ emulation is an enhanced version of the VT100 emulation that provides
additional functionality such as colours. It is the same as the VT-UTF8 emulation
except that it only supports ASCII characters 0-127 (decimal).
The VT-UTF8 emulation is an enhanced version of the VT100 emulation that
supports non-English and drawing characters. It supports localization of the singlebyte and double-byte character sets and all other languages supported by Windows.
Additional functionality, such as colours, is also provided.
The WY50, WY50+ and WY60 emulations provide compatibility with software
designed to drive the Wyse WY-50, WY-50+ and WY-60 terminals, respectively.
Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for information on these emulations.
The WYSE PCTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed for the
PC Term personality supported by Wyse. Keyboard scan codes are sent on key press/
release instead of ASCII codes by default.
Graphics Mode
The Graphics Mode option is only available if your version of TeemTalk supports
graphics emulations and the Emulation option is set to one of the DEC VT, Ansi
BBS, AIXTerm, AT 386 or Sco Console emulations. The setting determines the
graphics mode that will be entered when the host sends graphics commands.
The ReGIS emulation enables you to run applications written for the DEC VT340
terminal in ReGIS mode.
The Tek4014 emulation enables you to run applications written for the Tektronix
4010 and 4014 terminals.
The VT640 emulation enables you to run applications written for the Retrographics
VT640 terminal.
The W2119 emulation enables you to run applications written for the Westward 2119
terminal.
DEC Suite Options
The VT Terminal ID option applies to the DEC VT emulations. It specifies what is
reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification request. (Note that not
all features of the specified terminal may be supported.)
The Cursor Moves Right to Left option applies to the DEC VT, Ansi BBS,
AIXTerm, AT 386 and Sco Console emulations. It enables you change the direction in
which the text cursor moves across the display.
2-6
Getting Started
The High Function Terminal option is displayed when the AIXTerm emulation is
selected. This enables you to switch between HFT (High Function Terminal) mode
(default) and VT100 mode.
BQ 3107 Option
The VIP Mode option enables you to set the VIP mode to 7700 or 7760.
HP 700-92/96 Option
The HP Model option specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a
terminal identification request. This can be set to 70092 (default), 2392A, 2622A,
70094 or 70096. (Not all features of the specified terminal may be supported.)
IBM 3151 Option
The setting of the IBM 3151 Model option identifies the terminal model being
emulated in response to a terminal identification request from the host. Model 11
supports only one viewport containing 24 or 25 rows and 80 columns. Model 31
supports up to three viewports (80 or 132 columns wide) and pass-through printing.
IBM 3270 Options
The setting of the IBM 3270 Model option specifies what is reported back to the host
in response to a terminal identification request. (Note that not all features of the
specified terminal may be supported.) TN3287 printing is supported by selecting
3287-1.
One of four display sizes can be selected:
3278/9-2
3278/9-3
3278/9-4
3278/9-5
24 rows by 80 columns
32 rows by 80 columns
43 rows by 80 columns
27 rows by 132 columns
3278 settings with the E extension provide support for the following extended
attributes (these are supported by the 3279 as standard):
3270 Field Attributes
Extended Highlighting
Foreground Colour
Query Reply Inbound Structured Fields
The setting of the Left Ctrl acts as Reset Key option determines whether or not the
left Control key performs the same function as the Reset key.
2-7
Getting Started
The setting of the Right Ctrl acts as Enter Key option determines whether or not the
right Control key performs the same function as the keypad Enter key.
IBM 5250 Options
The IBM 5250 Model option specifies what is reported back to the host in response to
a terminal identification request. (Note that not all features of the specified terminal
may be supported.) The terminal models and their display characteristics are listed
below:
Model
Display
Rows x Columns
5291_1
5292_2
5251_11
3179_2
3196_A1
3180_2
3477_FC
3477_FG
3486_BA
3487_HA
3487_HC
5555_B01
5555_C01
Monochrome
Colour
Monochrome
Colour
Monochrome
Monochrome
Colour
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Colour
Monochrome
Colour
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80 (default)
24 x 80
24 x 80 and 27 x 132
24 x 80 and 27 x 132
24 x 80 and 27 x 132
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80
The printer models are listed below:
3812-1
5553-B01
Single byte printer
Double byte printer
If double byte character sets (e.g. Japanese) are supported and you wish to use them,
then select either 5555_B01 (monochrome) or 5555_C01 (colour) for display, or
5553-B01 for printing.
The setting of the IBM 5250 Monochrome option will match the normal display
characteristic of the selected IBM 5250 model by default. Note that the emulation of all
IBM 5250 models supports both monochrome and colour display. When monochrome
is selected, characters will be displayed in green and intense fields will be displayed in
white. When monochrome is not selected, the settings specified in the Attributes
dialog box (described in the Setup Menus chapter) will be used for the display.
The setting of the Left Ctrl acts as Reset Key option determines whether or not the
left Control key performs the same function as the Reset key.
The setting of the Right Ctrl acts as Enter Key option determines whether or not the
right Control key performs the same function as the keypad Enter key.
The setting of the Carriage Return acts as Enter Key option determines whether or
not the Return key performs the same function as the keypad Enter key.
2-8
Getting Started
TCP/IP Connection Settings
The TCP/IP Telnet Configuration dialog box can be displayed from the Connection
Wizard Host Information dialog box by setting the Connection Type to TCP/IP
then clicking the Advanced button, or the New Connection dialog box when in nonWBT mode by selecting TCP/IP in the Type list box then clicking the Configure
button.
Note that the options available and the default settings depend on the current terminal
emulation.
Host Port Number
This enables you to specify the Telnet port number. The default Telnet port number,
23, can be substituted with any valid 16 bit port number. Specifying a number outside
the valid range will cause the setting to default to 1.
If an SSH (Secure Shell) connection is to be made, set this to the host's SSH port
number (22 is the default for SSH).
Local Port Number
This enables you to specify the local Telnet port number if required. Setting this to 0
will cause the number to be allocated automatically.
Telnet Name
This enables you to override the name that will be reported for the terminal type over
Telnet.
Enable Keep Alives
Selecting this option will prevent the session from being disconnected from the host by
an inactivity timeout.
2-9
Getting Started
Connection Timeout (Secs:)
This enables you to specify how many seconds the emulator has to attempt to make a
host connection before it either attempts to connect to the next host (if Host Rollover
is specified in the Host Connection dialog box) or it issues a Connection Failed message. The default 0 setting will cause the emulator to use the stack default timeout.
Suppress Echo
When selected, this will will prevent the emulator from generating the Telnet echo
option on connection.
Suppress 3270 Regime
When running the IBM 3270 emulation, the setting of this option determines whether
or not support for the Telnet "3270 regime" option is suppressed.
Suppress TN3270E
When running the IBM 3270 emulation, the setting of this option determines whether
or not support of TN3270E is suppressed. When this option is not selected (i.e.
TN3270E is not suppressed), additional options are available by clicking the 3270
Options button. These are described in the TN3270 Options section.
Suppress TN5250E
When running the IBM 5250 emulation, the setting of this option determines whether
or not support of TN5250E is suppressed. When this option is not selected (i.e.
TN5250E is not suppressed), additional options are available by clicking the 5250
Options button. These are described in the TN5250 Options section.
Force Negotiation
These settings determine whether or not the Telnet Binary or EOR options are supported. Both are set to no by default.
No
Will not force any negotiations. It will leave it up to the
host to decide what to do.
DO
Will force negotiation. The host will be informed that the
option is supported.
DONT
Will force negotiation. A negotiation packet will be sent
to the host telling it that the option is not supported.
Break Settings
The setting of these options determine whether or not a timing mark (TM) and/or
carriage return (CR) is sent with a Telnet break packet. A timing mark is sent by default.
2-10
Getting Started
Send Location
This enables you to enter the location of this terminal which may be used by the host
to provide a list of users currently logged in giving their name and location.
TN3270 Options
This dialog box is displayed by clicking the 3270 Options button in the TCP/IP
Telnet Configuration dialog box when TN3270 is not suppressed.
Connect
This specifies the name of the device which the server will be requested to assign to the
Telnet session; it may be used when requesting either a terminal or a printer session.
You can return the local host name by entering %s after the device name. To return the
user name, enter %u after the device name. You can specify how many characters of
the name is returned in each case. For example, %.3s will return the first three
characters of the local host name, and %-.3s will return the last three characters.
To automatically assign a new device name for each successive connection, either
enter %dN% after the name, where N is a decimal value, or %xN%, where N is a
hexadecimal value. Each time the host requests the device name a counter will be
substituted into the device name. If the host rejects the device name as in use the
counter will be incremented modulus N and the name retried until all possibilities have
been tried, at which point the emulation will report a device name rejected error.
For example, TEST%d4% will give TEST1 on all connections until the host rejects
the name as in use, in which case TEST2 will be used. If this is already in use then
TEST3 is used, or if already in use then TEST0. These values are preserved over
2-11
Getting Started
power off, so the first connection of any given power on may not be TEST1. Assume
that the start point is random.
Note: There are separate counters for the IBM 3270 and IBM 5250
emulations.
When you achieve a TN3270E connection, the LU device name that you are
connected as will be displayed on the status line. If the specified device is rejected by
the server or host, then an error message box will be displayed indicating the reason.
Associate
This is available when the IBM 3270 Model option is set to 3287-1 (a printer). It is
used to request that the device name of the printer associated with a particular terminal
is assigned to this Telnet session. The name of the terminal is specified here. (This is
implemented as described in RFC 1647.)
TN3270E Options
TN3270E in implemented as described in RFC 1647. These options should not be
changed unless required by your System Administrator.
The Bind setting determines whether or not the server is allowed to send the SNA
Bind image and Unbind notification to the emulator.
When Responses is selected, positive and negative response handling is supported. It
allows the server to reflect to the emulator any and all definite, exception, and no
response requests sent by the host application.
When SysReq is selected, some (or all, depending on the server) of the functions of
the SysReq key will be emulated and the server in an SNA environment.
The LU1 and LU3 Printer options are available when the IBM 3270 Model option is
set to 3287-1 (a printer). They enable you to specify which printer type(s) to support.
2-12
Getting Started
TN5250 Options
This dialog box is displayed by clicking the 5250 Options button in the TCP/IP
Telnet Configuration dialog box when TN5250 is not suppressed and the IBM 5250
Model is not set to 3812-1 or 5553-B01 (printers). Refer to the next section for 5250
Printer Options.
Device Name
This enables you to enter the name of the device which the server will be requested to
assign to this Telnet session.
You can return the local host name by entering %s after the device name. To return the
user name, enter %u after the device name. You can specify how many characters of
the name is returned in each case. For example, %.3s will return the first three
characters of the local host name, and %-.3s will return the last three characters.
To automatically assign a new device name for each successive connection, either
enter %dN% after the name, where N is a decimal value, or %xN%, where N is a
hexadecimal value. Each time the host requests the device name a counter will be
incremented modulus N and substituted into the device name.
For example, TEST%d4% will give TEST1 on first connect, TEST2 on second,
TEST3 on third, TEST0 on fourth, TEST1 on fifth and so on.
TEST%d100% will give TEST1 on first connect, TEST2 on second, ... TEST99 on
99th, TEST0 on 100th, TEST1 on 101st and so on.
These values are preserved over power off, so the first connection of any given power
on may not be TEST1. Assume that the start point is random. In addition there is a
single counter for the unit so concurrent sessions will start from subsequent values. For
example, if session one uses TEST1 then session two will use TEST2.
Where a device name collision occurs (i.e. the device name is already in use on the
host) the host will ask again for the device name during the same connection. In this
2-13
Getting Started
case TEST1, TEST2, ... may all be tried in one connection until the host accepts one,
or all possibilities have been tried. In the latter case the same name is sent twice in
succession to indicate to the host all names have been tried.
If concurrent 5250 sessions are started before a previous session has negotiated an
acceptable device name, it is possible that the two sessions will access the counter
simultaneously and not all possible names will be tried by each session. This should
not cause a problem unless the separate sessions use different modulo values (for
example, session one device name TEST%d4% and session two device name
ANOTHER%d100%) or are connecting to different hosts.
Note: There are separate counters for the IBM 3270 and IBM 5250
emulations.
User, Password, Library , Menu
These options enable you to specify the initial entries required on the standard startup
screen so that it can be bypassed. Each entry can be a maximum of ten characters.
Program
This enables you to specify the name of the initial program to run. The entry can be a
maximum of ten characters.
2-14
Getting Started
5250 Printer Options
This dialog box is displayed by clicking the 5250 Options button in the TCP/IP
Telnet Configuration dialog box when TN5250 is not suppressed and the IBM 5250
Model is set to 3812-1 (a printer).
Device Name
Specifies the name of the printer device.
IGC Feature
This is always set to Don't Report.
Transform
Specifies whether the printer will use the host print transform function to generate
ASCII printer data. This is always set to Yes. The Mfg. Type and Model option must
specify the printer manufacturer, type and model.
Mfg. Type and Model
Specifies the manufacturer, type and model of the printer. The entry must exactly
match an AS400 printer type string, including the * (asterisk) character. The following
valid entries are for the IBM AS/400 V3R1. Note that the list can change according to
AS/400 settings.
*IBM2380
*IBM3816
*IBM4019
*IBM4039HP
*IBM42011
*IBM42023
*IBM4212
*IBM2381
*IBM3912HP
*IBM4019HP
*IBM4070
*IBM42012
*IBM42071
*IBM4216
*IBM2390
*IBM3916HP
*IBM4029
*IBM4070EP
*IBM42013
*IBM42072
*IBM4226
*IBM2391
*IBM39302
*IBM4029HP
*IBM4072
*IBM42021
*IBM42081
*IBM4230
*IBM3812
*IBM39303
*IBM4037
*IBM4076
*IBM42022
*IBM42082
*IBM4232
2-15
Getting Started
*IBM47121
*IBM5152
*IBM6404
*IBM6412EP
*HPIIID
*HP500
*CPQPM15
*EPAP5500
*EPFX1170
*EPLQ870
*EPSQ1170
*NECP2200XE
*OKI184IBM
*OKI393IBM
*OKI810
*PAN1124IEP
*PAN1654EP
*PAN2624EP
*PAN4451HP
*IBM47122
*IBM5201
*IBM6404EP
*HPII
*HPIIIP
*HP520
*CPQPM20
*EPDFX5000
*EPLX810
*EPLQ1070
*EPEPL7000
*NECP5200
*OKI320IBM
*OKI590IBM
*OKI820
*PAN1180EP
*PAN1695EP
*PAN4410HP
*IBM47221
*IBM5202
*IBM6408
*HPIID
*HPIIISI
*HP550C
*EPAP2250
*EPDFX8000
*EPLQ510
*EPLQ1170
*EPEPL8000
*NECP5300
*OKI321IBM
*OKI591IBM
*OKI3410
*PAN1180IEP
*PAN2123EP
*PAN4420HP
*IBM47222
*IBM5204
*IBM6408EP
*HPIIP
*HP4
*HP560C
*EPAP3250
*EPFX850
*EPLQ570
*EPLQ2550
*NECP2
*NECP6200
*OKI390IBM
*OKI400
*PAN1123EP
*PAN1191EP
*PAN2124EP
*PAN4430HP
*IBM4770
*IBM5216
*IBM6412
*HPIII
*HP310
*HPPAINT
*EPAP5000
*EPFX870
*EPLQ860
*EPSQ870
*NECP2200
*NECP6300
*OKI391IBM
*OKI800
*PAN1124EP
*PAN1624EP
*PAN2180EP
*PAN4450IHP
*MSGQ Name
Specifies the name of the message queue to which operational messages for the printer
are to be sent.
*MSGQ Library
Specifies the message queue library.
Font
Specifies the font identifier and point size used by the single-byte printer (e.g. 11).
Formfeed
This is always set to Don't Report. The Paper Source 1 option is used to specify the
paper format to be used.
Paper Source 1 & 2
These options specify the paper format to be used. The possible settings are:
Don't Report
*NONE
2-16
No value returned.
No paper source is defined.
*MFR
The system determines the paper type used based on
the manufacturer, type and model of the printer.
*LET
Letter-sized paper (8.5 x 11 inches).
Getting Started
*LEGL
Legal-sized paper (8.5 x 14 inches).
*EXEC
Executive-sized paper (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
*A4
A4-sized paper (210 mm x 297 mm).
*A5
A5-sized paper (148 mm x 210 mm).
*B5
B5-sized paper (182 mm x 257 mm).
*C80
Continuous-form paper, 8.0 inches wide
(Paper Source 1 only).
*C132
Continuous-form paper, 13.2 inches wide
(Paper Source 1 only).
*A3
A3-sized paper (297 mm x 420 mm).
*B4
B4-sized paper (257 mm x 364 mm).
*LEDG
Ledger-sized paper (11 inches x 17 inches).
Envelope Hopper
This specifies the envelope format to be used. The possible settings are:
Don't Report
*NONE
*MFR
*B5
*MON
No value returned.
No envelope source is defined.
The system determines the envelope type used based on
the manufacturer, type and model of the printer.
B5-sized envelopes (176mm x 250mm).
Monarch-sized envelopes (3.875 x 7.5 inches).
*N9
Number 9-sized envelopes (3.875 x 8.875 inches).
*N10
Number 10-sized envelopes (4.125 x 9.5 inches).
*C5
C5-sized envelopes (162mm x 229mm).
*DL
DL-sized envelopes (110mm x 220mm).
ASCII 899 Support
Specifies whether the single-byte printer has ASCII code page 899 installed. Selecting
Don't Report will cause no value to be returned.
WSCST Name
Specifies the name of the object containing pointers to the work station customizing
tables.
WSCST Library
Specifies the library name of the object containing pointers to the work station
customizing tables.
2-17
Getting Started
SSL Connection Settings
The optional SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) protocol enables authenticated and
encrypted communication between clients and servers.
Before anyone can connect to a server the system administrator must make available a
copy of the root certificate used to sign the server’s identity certificate and the number
of the telnet port the server is listening on (the default for secure telnet is 992).
Additionally the system administrator may issue each user or terminal with their own
password protected client certificate.
To make an SSL connection:
1. Select the SSL option in the Connection Wizard Host Information dialog box, or
from the New Connection dialog Type list box when running TeemTalk.
2. Display the Telnet Options dialog box and change the port to the number
specified by the system administrator then click OK.
3. Click the Advanced or Configure button to display the SSL Connection dialog
box.
4. If you have not already installed the root certificate you will have been given to
verify the server you are going to connect to, click Add under Root Certificates
and choose the file containing the certificate. This will import the certificate and
add its name to the list.
5. If the server you are going to connect to requires you to have a client certificate,
choose the relevant certificate from the Client Certificate drop down list.
6. If you have not already installed your client certificate, click Add under Client
Certificate and choose the file containing the certificate. This will import the
certificate and add its name to the list.
2-18
Getting Started
7. You may optionally enter your Password for the client certificate here too. If you
check Save this password will be stored, encrypted, along with the certificate itself.
Please note this is a security risk as anyone who can acquire a copy of your registry
will be able to use your certificate.
8. Once you have configured the certificates click OK and then Connect in the New
Connection dialog box.
9. Login as usual when the telnet login prompt appears.
Error Messages
Could not connect TCP/IP socket.
The most likely causes of this error are that the service is not running on the server
or the port number is incorrect.
Could not connect SSL socket. Please check that your client certificate is correct.
This message is returned if the server refuses the SSL connection. The most likely
causes are that the server is expecting a client certificate but none has been
specified or the client certificate specified is invalid for some reason. This error
may also be seen if the server is running an incompatible version of SSL.
TeemTalk currently supports SSL2, SSL3 and TLS.
The server’s certificate cannot be verified.
The server’s identity certificate was not signed by any of the root certificates
installed in TeemTalk. TeemTalk will not connect to a host it cannot verify.
Common name does not match host name.
The common name is part of the server’s certificate. SSL assumes this will match
the host name given in the Host Name box in the Connection Wizard, or Connect
To box in the New Connection dialog box. If they do not match TeemTalk will
not connect to the host.
Notes About Certificates
The SSL Protocol uses three types of certificate:
1. Server certificates. These are always sent by the server to the client to validate the
server’s identity. SSL handles them internally and they are never saved on the
client.
2. Client certificates. These are sent by the client, only if the server requests them, and
validate the client’s identity. The client will need to store these locally. Usually a
client will only have one certificate to validate it on a particular server but different
servers may require different client certificates.
2-19
Getting Started
3. CA (Certificate Authority) or root certificates. These are used to authenticate the
other two types. The client will need to store these locally.
Storage of Certificates
TeemTalk stores its certificates in the Registry as binary values. The following keys
are used:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Neoware\Security\SSL\CA Certificates
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Neoware\Security\SSL\Client Certificates
CA (root) Certificates are stored unencrypted. The value name in the registry is in the
form HHHHHHHH.UU where HHHHHHHH is the hash of the certificate's internal
name and UU is a unique number. The UU section is to allow different certificates
which happen to have the same hash value co-exist. This follows the convention used
by openSSL file based system. TeemTalk will automatically discard any duplicate
certificates.
Client Certificates are stored encrypted. The value name may be any valid string of
characters.
Acquiring New Certificates
There are two ways a client may acquire new certificates. They may be added directly
to the registry keys detailed above or they may be installed on the file system and
imported manually by TeemTalk.
Adding to the Registry
New CA (root) Certificates should be added to the CA Certificates key with a value
name in the form NEWXXXXXXXX where XXXXXXXX is a unique number.
Whenever it uses its certificate's, TeemTalk first scans the registry for any value name
NEW*. If it finds one it checks that it is not a duplicate and then renames it with the
correct hash.unique name.
New Client certificates should be added to the Client Certificate key. They may be
given any value name. Obviously if a value already exists with the same name it will
be overwritten. TeemTalk uses this value name to identify the certificate to the user
and to link particular certificates to particular sessions.
Importing from the File System
The SSL Connection dialog box allows users to add both CA and Client certificates
by picking files from the file system. These files should be in PEM certificate format
and the Client file should include both the certificate and the encrypted private key.
An imported client certificate’s registry name will be the original filename minus any
path or extension.
2-20
Getting Started
SSH Connection Settings
The optional SSH (Secure Shell) client/server protocol is used to encrypt and transmit
data securely over a network, with authentication (proof of client identity) provided by
a password and/or key.
To enable an SSH connection, select the SSH option in the Connection Wizard Host
Information dialog box or, when running TeemTalk, in the New Connection dialog
box Type list box. The Telnet Port Number option must be set to the host's SSH port
(22 is the default for SSH).
SSH Connection using Username and Password
1. Select the SSH option in the Connection Wizard Host Information dialog box, or
from the New Connection dialog Type list box when running TeemTalk.
2. Display the Telnet Options dialog box and change the Port Number to the host's
SSH port (22 is the default for SSH) then click OK.
3. Click the Advanced or Configure button to display the SSH Connection dialog
box.
4. Enter your username and password, ensuring that Password is selected. Then click
OK.
5. Click the Connect button. TeemTalk will attempt to make the connection.
If the username and/or password are invalid, TeemTalk will prompt you to re-enter
them. (Note that some servers will not allow you to change the username at this
point.) To work round this, if you see your username is incorrect, click Cancel to
abort the connection and then restart as step 1.
If your password has expired, TeemTalk will prompt you to enter a new one.
2-21
Getting Started
SSH Connection to an openSSH Server using a Key File
1. Select the SSH option in the Connection Wizard Host Information dialog box, or
from the New Connection dialog Type list box when running TeemTalk.
2. Display the Telnet Options dialog box and change the Port Number to the host's
SSH port (22 is the default for SSH) then click OK.
3. Click the Advanced or Configure button to display the SSH Connection dialog
box.
4. If you have already created a keyfile, go to step 19.
5. To create a new key file, click Generate Key to display the SSH Key Generation
dialog box.
2-22
Getting Started
6. Enter a Filename. This is the name the key will be stored under in the registry and
the name displayed in the Keyfile drop down list in the previous dialog box.
7. Select the type of key you wish to create. openSSH servers support both DSA and
RSA keys. Other servers may only support one or the other.
8. Both key generation algorithms require a group of large prime numbers to generate
the key. Generating these primes can take a several minutes. As the same primes
can be used for generating different keys we have split generating primes and
generating keys into two separate options. Clicking New Group will generate a
new set of primes for the selected algorithm. Clicking New Key will create a new
key of the algorithm type specified using the existing group of primes. If no group
of primes already exists for that algorithm the New Key option will generate them
automatically. The two algorithms do not share the same prime number group
because they require their primes to be generated in different ways.
9. Click Generate Key to create a new key. You will be prompted for a passphrase to
encrypt your private key.
10. Enter the Passphrase and Confirm it.
If you check the Save box your password will be stored, encrypted, in the registry
along with your key. Please bear in mind that this is a security risk. Although noone will be able to read your password in the registry, anyone who can get a copy
of your registry settings can use them to logon as you.
11. The Key generated is actually a private/public key pair. The private key, and
optionally the password to decrypt it, will be stored in your registry. The public
key will be displayed in the SSH Key Generation dialog box.
2-23
Getting Started
12. To make use of your key you need to copy it on to the server.
13. Select all in the text box and then copy to put the key into the Windows clipboard.
14. Logon to your server using username and password.
15. In your home directory you need to have a sub-directory called .ssh. You may
have to create this directory yourself. Within the .ssh directory you need a file
called authorized_keys. Again if it is not there you will have to create it.
16. Using whatever editor is available on your server you need to paste the key into
the file and save it.
17. If the authorized_keys file does not exist you can just do the following:
cat > authorized_keys
Edit | Paste from the TeemTalk menu.
Control C
18. Finally logon and restart from step 1.
19. Select your key file from the drop down list.
20. Enter your passphrase (if it has not been saved) and click OK.
21. Click the Connect button. TeemTalk will attempt to connect to the host.
2-24
Getting Started
SSH Connection to an SSH Communications Security Tectia
Server using a Key File
1. Follow the instructions in the previous section for using a keyfile with openSSH
up to and including step 12.
2. If they do not already exist you need to create a directory ~/.ssh2 and a text file
within it called authorization.
3. Create another text file and paste your key into it. For example:
cat > mykey.pub
Control V
Control C
4. Add the following line to the authorization file :
key mykey.pub
5. You then have to edit your key file as follows:
Remove ssh-dsa or ssh-rsa from the start of the key.
Remove Comment from the end of the key.
Insert the following lines before the key:
—— BEGIN SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ——
Subject: Your name
Comment:
And add the following line after the key:
—— END SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ——
6. You should then be able to connect to the server using your keyfile.
SSH Key File Permissions
If you find that public key authentication does not work when you have copied your
public key to authorized_keys, it is probably because the file permissions on
$HOME, $HOME/.ssh or $HOME/.ssh/authorized_keys are more permissive than
SSH allows by default. This may be resolved by executing the following on the server:
$ chmod go-w $HOME $HOME/.ssh
$ chmod 600 $HOME/.ssh/authorized_keys
If this is not possible for some reason, an alternative is to set StrictModes no in
sshd_config, however this is not recommended.
More information can be found at http://www.openssh.com/faq.html.
2-25
Getting Started
Modem Connection Settings
The Modem Settings dialog box can be displayed from the Connection Wizard Host
Information dialog box by setting the Connection Type to Modem then clicking the
Advanced button, or the New Connection dialog box when in non-WBT mode by
selecting Modem in the Type list box then clicking the Configure button.
This enables you to define a particular modem configuration which can be saved under
a specific name for future selection in the Host Information dialog box.
1. If this is a new configuration, enter a name to identify it in the Configuration
Name box.
2. Select a Modem from the list box below. The Configure button provides access
to the standard Microsoft dialog boxes for specifying port settings and call options.
3. Enter the Country Code, Area Code and Telephone Number.
4. Click the Dialing Properties button to display the standard Microsoft dialog
boxes for specifying a variety of dialing formats.
5. If you want the country and area codes to be ignored when dialing, select Force
Local. If you want the area code dialed even if you are in that area, select Force
long distance.
6. Click OK to save the settings and the name you assigned to this configuration will
appear in the Modem configuration selection box in the main Host Information
dialog box.
2-26
Getting Started
Serial Connection Settings
The Serial Configuration dialog box can be displayed from the Connection Wizard
Host Information dialog box by setting the Connection Type to Serial then clicking
the Advanced button, or the New Connection dialog box when in non-WBT mode
by selecting Serial in the Type list box then clicking the Configure button.
Baud Rate
Factory default: 9600
This specifies the transmit and receive baud rates for the port selected for host communications.
Parity
Factory default: None
This option specifies the parity mode for each transmitted character. If the number of
Data Bits is 8, set this option to None.
Selecting Odd will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7
bits add up to an even number, and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number.
Selecting Even will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7
bits add up to an odd number, and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number.
Mark parity will set every eighth bit to 1 and Space parity every bit to 0.
Flow Control
Factory default: Input
This option specifies the type of flow control used by the line port to communicate
readiness to transmit or receive data from the host.
None
Input
Output
In/Out
Hardware
-
No flow control
XON/XOFF on received data
XON/XOFF on transmitted data
XON/XOFF on transmitted & received data
DTR/CTS hardware flow control.
2-27
Getting Started
Data Bits
Factory default: 8
This option specifies the number of data bits sent for each transmitted character.
Stop Bits
Factory default: 1
This specifies the number of stop bits sent for each transmitted character.
Transmit Rate
Factory default: Unlimited
The setting of this option determines the maximum effective baud rate that the
emulatortransmits terminal reports and data sent as a result of pasting data to the host.
Local Echo
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether keyboard entered characters are displayed on the screen as well as sent to the host. When unselected, characters are not
displayed when they are transmitted unless the host 'echoes' them back.
2-28
Getting Started
Automate Login Process
The Automate Login Process dialog box enables you to automate part or all of the
host login procedure.
The settings in this dialog box enable you to specify what is sent to the host in
response to prompts displayed on the screen.
1. If an initiation string is required by the host when you first make a connection,
select the Set Initiation String option, enter the required characters in the Initiate
with box (the Respond With box in the illustration above), then click the Add
button. The initiation string will be added to the Script window on the right.
2. The Wait For options enable you to specify the prompt or keyboard locked or
unlocked command that the automatic login process is to wait for before proceeding. Some systems are case sensitive, so make sure your Text entries follow the
correct conventions for your system.
Note: When running the IBM 3270 or IBM 5250 emulation, Text
entries are only applicable in NVT mode.
3. Enter the response required in the Respond With box. In order for a text entry to
be sent to the host it must be followed by a carriage return command. This is
specified by selecting C. Return in the list of predefined commands in the list box
below then clicking the Insert button. A <CR> will appear in the Respond With
box.
You can also enter a predefined key function in the Respond With box by
selecting Key Definition in the list of predefined commands in the list box below,
selecting one of the virtual key names listed in the box below that, then clicking
the Insert button. The Virtual Key Names appendix lists the predefined key
functions available for each emulation.
2-29
Getting Started
The list of predefined commands that can be inserted include UserName (indicated by <UN>) and Password (indicated by <PW>). Selecting either of these
will cause a dialog box to pop-up when logging on to the host prompting the user
to enter a name or password, respectively. You can also delay the script response
by 2 seconds by inserting Delay (2s) (indicated by <D>) or 0.255 seconds by
inserting Pause (0.255) (indicated by <P>).
4. When you have finished specifying the response to a particular prompt, click the
Add button to add the definition to the Script window on the right.
The script will perform the actions in the order displayed in the Script window. To
change the order of the script lines, use the up and down arrow buttons to the right
of the Script window.
5. Repeat this procedure for each prompt as required.
If you want to edit one of the script lines, select the line in the Script window then
click Remove to send it to the edit boxes on the left. Make the change(s) then click
Add to send it back to the script. Note that this will now be the last line of the
script.
6. When the Script window contains all the required responses to the relevant
prompts in the correct order, click Finish.
2-30
Getting Started
Printer Port Settings
The Printer Port Settings dialog box provides several print options. The options
available depend on whether you are running TeemTalk for Windows CE or XPe.
TeemTalk for Windows CE
TeemTalk for Windows XPe
2-31
Getting Started
CE - Direct Print Data To The Print Manager
The Current System Printer Driver box displays the name of the currently selected
system printer when both the Use Network Printer (LPR) and Print Direct To Port
options are not selected.
Clicking the Configure button will display a Print Manager dialog box which enables
you to specify printer settings.
If you find a through print results in data being split into lines, each treated as a
separate print job, specify a time in the Seconds Close Delay box (e.g. 5 seconds).
This will enable the next line of data to be sent before the print job is assumed to have
finished and therefore prevents the print job from being closed prematurely. When set
to 0, printing will not start until a ‘print end of job’ command is received from the
host. Entering any other number will cause printing to start after the specified number
of seconds have elapsed, regardless of whether the ‘print end of job’ command has
been received from the host. If you require the port to be kept open all the time (to stop
the printer resetting) enter -1 (minus one).
XPe - Direct Print Data To The Print Manager
The Printer list box lists the printers handled by the Print Manager. You can select
from this list when the Use Network Printer (LPR) option is not selected.
Clicking the Advanced button will display the standard Print Manager dialog box
which enables you to specify printer settings.
The Microsoft Windows Print Manager normally controls all print formatting,
translates host characters to supported printer characters, and also provides a spooling
facility. A disadvantage of using the Print Manager is that any print formatting escape
sequences received from the host are stripped. If you want to use the Print Manager but
disable its print formatting process so that the original escape sequences from the host
are retained, select the PassThru option. (Note that the PassThru option will be
unselectable if the printer driver currently selected does not support this facility.)
If you find a through print results in data being split into lines, each treated as a
separate print job, specify a time in the Seconds Close Delay box (e.g. 5 seconds).
This will enable the next line of data to be sent before the print job is assumed to have
finished and therefore prevents the print job from being closed prematurely. When set
to 0, TeemTalk will not start printing until it receives a ‘print end of job’ command
from the host. Entering any other number will cause TeemTalk to print after the
specified number of seconds have elapsed, regardless of whether the ‘print end of job’
command has been received from the host. If you require the port to be kept open all
the time (to stop the printer resetting) enter -1 (minus one).
2-32
Getting Started
Direct Print Data To A Specific Port
To direct print data to a specific port, select Print Direct To Port and specify the
Printer Port.
Selecting the FormFeed Terminator option will cause the printer to advance the
paper to the top of the form when it has finished printing.
The Output Character Set option enables you to specify the character set used for
printing when Print Direct To Port is selected. This allows non-ISO Latin-1 printers
to be used.
Selecting Auto Line Feed will cause the printer to print at the beginning of the next
line when a carriage return command is received.
When a serial port is selected, clicking the Configure button will display a dialog box
in which you can specify the baud rate, parity, flow control, data bits and stop bits
settings. These options are described in the Serial Settings section.
If supported, clicking the Advanced button will display a dialog box that enables you
to send printer-specific commands to specify, for example, font size, colour, or page
header and footer.
2-33
Getting Started
CE - Direct Print Data To A Network Printer
To direct print data to a printer on the network when running Windows CE, select Use
Network Printer (LPR) and enter the LPD Hostname. Clicking the Configure
button will display a dialog box which enables you to specify various print settings.
You must specify the Printer Name. The Job Name and User Name entries are
optional (the User Name will default to root if none is specified). The Number of
Copies to print is set to 1 by default. You can specify how many times the LPR
protocol will attempt to execute the print job before cancelling by setting the number
of Retries and the number of seconds delay between each attempt. When Add Banner
is selected, information about this print job will be printed with it. You can display a
message box which will indicate the progress of the print job by selecting Debug
Information.
If supported, clicking the Advanced button will display a dialog box that enables you
to send printer-specific commands to specify, for example, font size, colour, or page
header and footer.
2-34
Getting Started
XPe - Direct Print Data To A Network Printer
To direct print data to a printer on the network when running Windows XPe, select
Use Network Printer (LPR) and enter the LPD Hostname. Clicking the Configure
button will display a dialog box which enables you to specify various print settings.
You must specify the Printer Name. The Job Name and User Name entries are
optional (the User Name will default to root if none is specified). You can specify
how many times the LPR protocol will attempt to execute the print job before
cancelling by setting the number of Retries and the number of seconds delay between
each attempt.
Clicking the Advanced button will display a dialog box that enables you to send
printer-specific commands to specify, for example, font size, colour, or page header
and footer. When Add Banner is selected, information about this print job will be
printed with it. You can display a message box which will indicate the progress of the
print job by selecting Debug Information.
2-35
Getting Started
GUI Overrides
The GUI Overrides dialog box enables you to disable various GUI items and also
enables you to specify how the emulator responds when the host closes the connection.
Clicking the Disable Elements button will display another dialog box enabling you to
disable any of the command bar elements.
The Disable Status Bar and Disable Scroll Bar options allow you to disable the
status bar and scroll bar, respectively.
The Disable Clipboard Accelerators option will disable the Ctrl + C (copy) and Ctrl
+ V (paste) keyboard commands.
The Action on Host Close options enable you to specify how the emulator responds
when the host closes the connection. Selecting Display Options will cause a dialog
box to be displayed with the following three options. Selecting Shutdown will cause
the emulator to shutdown. Selecting Stay Alive will keep the emulator running.
2-36
Getting Started
Selecting Reconnect will cause the emulator to attempt to reconnect to the host.
By default, a warning message will be displayed if you attempt to exit the emulator
while a host connection is still active. You can disable this message by selecting the No
connection warning on close option.
If supported, the optional Enable PC-Style Windowing option enables multiple
windows to be displayed when running CE version 4.2 and above.
The Mouse Cursor Style option enables you to choose from a range of cursor styles.
2-37
Getting Started
Aux Port Settings
The Aux Port Settings dialog box enables you to specify a COM or LPT port for
bidirectional output when in any DEC VT mode, ANSI BBS, Sco Console, HP 70092/96 or IBM 3151 mode.
The Functionality options enable you to set the auxiliary port as bidirectional and
specify that it is to be opened at start-up.
Clicking the Configure button will display a dialog box in which you can specify
settings for the COM port. The options in it are described in the Serial Settings section
earlier in this chapter.
2-38
Getting Started
Session Management (Windows XPe)
The way that TeemTalk for Windows XPe sessions are created or modified depends
on whether you are logged on as a system administrator, or as a user without
administrative privileges.
Logged On As System Administrator
If you are logged on as a system administrator, you can either create a unique session
only for your own use, or you can create session templates that are available to all
users of the system. The session templates can only be modified by the system
administrator. However, a user can load a session template, change the setup settings
then save the session to create their own local copy based on the template. This copy
will have the same name as the session template.
In order to create a new session, TeemTalk must be started without a session (i.e. not
started by clicking on a desktop icon or by selecting a session from the Start menu).
To create a session only for your own use, select the Session stored for current user
only option in the Save Session As dialog box before saving the session.
To create a session template for all users, select the Session stored for all users of
system option in the Save Session As dialog box before saving the session.
When TeemTalk is started without a session (i.e. not started by clicking on a desktop
icon or by selecting a session from the Start menu), the name of each available session
template will be listed in the Open Session dialog box together with the letter T to
indicate that they are templates.
When a user loads a template, modifies the settings then saves the session, a local copy
of the template will be made with the same name, but with the changed settings. This
copy will replace the template in the list of session configurations displayed in the
Open Session dialog box. Note that the T template indicator will no longer be
displayed. If the user deletes this session, the original template will be listed instead.
The user cannot delete session templates.
Logged On As A User
If you are logged on as a user without administrative privileges, you can load a session
template created by the system administrator, modify the setup to suit your
requirements, then save a local copy of it.
When TeemTalk is started without a session (i.e. not started by clicking on a desktop
icon or by selecting a session from the Start menu), the name of each available session
template will be listed in the Open Session dialog box together with the letter T to
indicate that they are templates.
2-39
Getting Started
When you load a template, modify the settings then save the session, a local copy of
the template will be made with the same name, but with the changed settings. This
copy will replace the template in the list of session configurations displayed in the
Open Session dialog box. Note that the T template indicator will no longer be
displayed. If you delete this session, the original template will be listed instead. As a
user you cannot delete session templates.
2-40
Getting Started
TeemTalk for Windows CE Display
The TeemTalk for Windows CE command bar provides access to a series of menus
and buttons that enable you to configure the terminal emulator and perform various
functions.
Note: The buttons available depend on whether or not you are in
WBT mode.
Setup Menus (Windows CE)
Three menus can be displayed from the command bar. These are headed File, Edit and
Settings.
Note: The options available in the menus depend on whether or not
you are in WBT mode.
Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for a complete discussion on selecting and using the
options in these menus.
2-41
Getting Started
The Button Tools (Windows CE)
The TeemTalk for Windows CE button tools provide a quick way of actioning
commands or displaying setup dialog boxes by just clicking a button.
Displays the New Connection dialog box for making a serial or
network host connection.
Closes the current host connection.
Displays the Open Session dialog box. This enables you to load
a particular setup configuration.
Saves the current session configuration.
Displays the Printer Setup dialog box.
Displays the Print Screen dialog box for producing a hardcopy
of screen data in a particular format.
Copies selected data to the clipboard.
Pastes clipboard data at the current cursor position.
Displays help information.
Toggles display of the soft buttons on and off and selects the
level.
Toggles display of the soft buttons on and off and selects the
level.
2-42
Getting Started
The Soft Buttons (Windows CE)
A set of soft buttons are provided which can be programmed so that they perform
various functions when clicked. You can toggle between command bar and soft button
display either by clicking the following buttons:
or by pressing the keys Ctrl + Alt + Left Cursor or Ctrl + Alt + Right Cursor. (Note
that you can assign these functions to any other keys using the virtual key names
CB_NEXT and CB_PREV.)
You can define up to four soft button levels. Level 1 is displayed by default. Each
level consists of twelve programmable buttons, providing a combined total of 48
programmable buttons. Levels stored off-screen can be 'scrolled' into view by clicking
one of the arrow buttons.
The soft buttons are programmed using the Soft Buttons dialog box, which is
displayed by selecting Settings in the menu bar then Soft Buttons... Refer to the Setup
Menus chapter for information on programming the buttons.
2-43
Getting Started
TeemTalk for Windows XPe Display
The Menu Bar (Windows XPe)
The TeemTalk for Windows XPe menu bar provides access to three menus that enable
you to perform various functions and configure TeemTalk for compatibility with the
application.
Note: The options available in the menus depend on your version
of TeemTalk.
To display a menu:
Mouse:
Click the title of the menu required.
Keyboard:
Hold down the Alt key and press the key bearing the underlined
character in the menu title. For example, pressing Alt + F will display
the File menu.
Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for a complete description of all the menu options.
2-44
Getting Started
The Toolbar (Windows XPe)
A toolbar is displayed below the TeemTalk for Windows XPe menu bar. This displays
a series of buttons which provide a quick way of actioning commands or displaying
setup dialog boxes when clicked.
You can redefine all the buttons and add or remove buttons from the toolbar using the
Button Tools dialog box. Refer to the chapter entitled The Toolbar for a complete
description of all the default buttons and how to redefine the toolbar.
The Soft Buttons (Windows XPe)
A set of soft buttons can be displayed along the bottom of the TeemTalk for Windows
XPe window. These can be programmed so that they perform various functions when
clicked.
There are four soft button levels. Each level consists of twelve programmable buttons,
providing a combined total of 48 programmable buttons. You can display all four
levels at the same time if required. All levels are accessible even if not all are
displayed, levels stored off-screen can be 'scrolled' into view by clicking the Level
button.
The soft buttons are programmed using the Soft Buttons dialog box, which is
displayed by selecting Settings in the menu bar then Soft Buttons... The setting of the
Visible Levels option determines how many soft button levels are displayed. Refer to
the Setup Menus chapter for information on programming the buttons.
2-45
Getting Started
The Status Bar
Along the bottom of the display is a status bar which shows the status of various
operations and enables you to switch between modes. The information displayed in the
status bar depends on the current terminal emulation. The following description applies
when running any of the DEC VT terminal emulations, though some of the fields and
buttons will be applicable to other emulations as well.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Item 1:
This displays two LEDs. The first LED indicates whether or not you are
connected to the host. It will show red when not connected and green
when you are connected. The second LED indicates whether or not data is
being sent to or from the host. It will show dull green when there is no
activity, red when data is being sent to the host, and bright green when
data is being received from the host.
Item 2:
This button enables you to switch between Local and Online mode. The
label indicates the mode you will switch to if the button is clicked.
Item 3:
This button enables you to Pause or Resume scrolling data in the window.
The label indicates the action that will be taken if the button is clicked.
Item 4:
Indicates the current terminal emulation.
Item 5:
This displays the active session (always 1), the current page number
(always 1), and the line,column location of the text cursor.
Item 6:
This indicates whether Overstrike Mode or Insert Mode is currently
selected. In Overstrike Mode (default), new characters will replace
already existing characters at the cursor position. When Insert Mode is
selected, new characters will be inserted at the cursor position without
deleting existing characters, which will move to the right.
Item 7:
This will display Edit when the terminal emulation is in Edit mode.
Item 8:
This will display the time in 24 hour format when in DEC VT500 mode if
the VT525 set time command has been received from the host.
Item 9:
Indicates the status of the printer as follows:
None signifies that the printer is not turned on or not connected, or not
installed in Microsoft Windows.
2-46
Getting Started
Not Ready signifies that the printer is not ready to receive data for
printing.
Ready signifies that the printer is ready to receive data for printing.
Auto signifies that the emulation is in Auto Print mode in which the
current cursor line is sent to the printer when a command for the cursor to
move to the next line is issued.
Controller signifies that the emulation is in Printer Controller mode in
which the host has direct control over the printer. Print screen commands
issued from the keyboard or mouse will be ignored.
ErrGen indicates that an error has occurred and a message box will be
displayed indicating the error.
Item 10:
This indicates the keyboard mode. It will be blank when the keyboard is in
normal mode and will display DEC when in DEC mode. You can toggle
between normal and DEC mode by pressing the keys Alt + Num Lock
together.
Item 11:
Indicates the status of the aux port as follows:
Ready indicates that the aux port is ready for bidirectional output.
In Use indicates that the aux port is currently busy.
Hotspots
A hotspot facility is provided which enables you to invoke a function by clicking on a
keyword displayed on the screen. For example, an application may display information
relating to keys you can press to perform a particular function. Instead of pressing the
key on the keyboard, you could invoke the function by holding down the Control key
and clicking the mouse pointer on the key name on the display (assuming default
mouse configuration).
Hotspots are supported in ALL terminal emulation modes. A set of default keywords is
provided for each mode. These keywords relate to key functions specific to the
emulation. For example, in VT500 mode you can tap on the word Help displayed on
the screen and the emulator will execute the function associated with the Help key.
You can identify hotspots that are currently present in display memory by assigning
the Show Hotspots function to a key + mouse button combination using the Mouse
Button Actions dialog box (refer to the Mouse Functions chapter for details). Holding
down the relevant key and left mouse button will cause all colour attributes to be
temporarily removed from the display and the hotspots will be highlighted with a red
background. Releasing the key and left mouse button will return the display to its
original state.
2-47
Getting Started
AT&T 4410 Emulation
When running the AT&T 4410 emulation the display size is 80 (or 132) columns by
25 lines with a scroll region of 24 lines. A row of function buttons is displayed along
the bottom of the window. These correspond to the function keys F1 through F8 on
the keyboard.
You can action a programmed function either by pressing the function key or click-ing
the equivalent button displayed on the screen. The middle button has no function when
clicked.
To program the function keys, press any F1 - F8 key shifted. The Program Function
Keys menu will be displayed.
Each line relates to one particular function key and its button. The two fields following
the f-key number allow you to enter a two line label of up to sixteen
characters for the equivalent button on the screen. These are followed by the definition
line which contains an escape sequence by default. Each definition can contain up to
50 ASCII characters.
To program an f-key, press the F1 key to move the cursor to the relevant line and use
the cursor keys to move from one section of the line to another. You must press the F1
key to end each definition line entry so that extra space characters are not sent to the
host. Note that using the cursor keys to move to the next line will cause the remainder
of the definition line to be sent as spaces.
When you have finished defining the f-keys, press F7 to save the definitions and exit
from the menu. If you want to exit without saving the settings, press F8.
2-48
Getting Started
Viewdata Mode
You can select one of three display formats for viewdata mode: 40 column, 80 column,
or Split Screen. Selecting Viewdata 40 or 80 mode will enable a single viewdata page
of 40 or 80 columns wide by 24 lines deep to be displayed. Viewdata Split enables
simultaneous display of two pages side by side, each page consisting of 24 lines and
40 columns. Receipt of a clear screen command will move the cursor to the home
position of the opposite page and its contents will be erased ready for the next page.
The keys mapped as PF1 through PF4 have the following functions in viewdata
mode:
PF1: *
PF3: Reveal
PF2: #
PF4: Exit to ANSI mode
2-49
Getting Started
Notes
2-50
Keyboard Configuration
3
Keyboard Configuration
This chapter describes how to configure the keyboard, define key
functions and compose special characters.
Keyboard Mapping
The keyboard is mapped as close as possible to the terminal being emulated. An
llustration showing the mapping of key functions on the 101/102 key Enhanced AT
style keyboard layout is shown in each terminal emulation chapter.
Special key functions supported by each terminal emulation can be mapped to keys
using the predefined macros listed in the Define Key Macros dialog box as
described in the next section.
Defining Key Functions
You can redefine the function of keys on the keyboard using the Define Keyboard
Macros dialog box which is displayed by selecting Keyboard Macros in the Settings
menu.
3-1
Keyboard Configuration
This enables you to redefine the function of most of the keys on your keyboard,
including the key combinations listed below:
Key
Shift + Key
Control + Key
Control + Shift + Key
Alt + Key
Alt + Shift + Key
Alt + Control + Key
Alt + Control + Shift + Key
Each definition may contain a string of up to 127 characters. The combined total of all
the characters that may be programmed into keys is determined by the 127 character
limit per definition and the amount of memory available in your PC.
The Predefined Macros box enables you to select from a list of standard functions
associated with the current terminal emulation. Clicking the arrow button will display a
list box in which the names of valid key functions (called virtual key names) are
shown. The Virtual Key Names appendix lists all the functions and associated virtual
key names for each terminal emulation.
A key macro may be actioned automatically on start-up, or transmitted to the host or
actioned locally when the key or key combination is pressed. This is determined by
selecting Normal, Remote, Local or Startup in the list box when defining the key.
Selecting Normal will cause the macro to be processed according to the current
operating mode when the key or key combination is pressed.
The Current Macro Definitions box displays the key and key combinations that are
currently defined. The Type column indicates whether the macro is processed as
normal (blank), remote (R), local (L) or on start-up (S).
You can remove the selected definition or delete all the definitions by clicking the
relevant Remove button.
Defining A Key Or Key Combination
1. Click in the Program Key box then press the key or key combination to define.
The current definition will be displayed.
2. Click in the With box then enter the new definition, or make a selection from the
list of Predefined Macros then click Apply.
3. Specify how the macro is to be processed by selecting either Normal, Remote,
Local or Startup in the list box.
4. Click the Add button to accept the definition. The new definition will be added to
the Current Macro Definitions list.
5. To save the definitions, click OK to exit, then select Save Session As in the File
menu, make sure the Keyboard Macros box is checked, then click OK.
3-2
Keyboard Configuration
Key Combinations & Sequences
You can program a key to perform the function of a combination or sequence of keys.
For example, you can cause the F1 key to perform the same function as pressing the
keys Alt + F4 together, or pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4.
Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names
appendix. The virtual key name has to be enclosed by the < and > characters in the key
definition box. You may omit the VK_ and VT_ (etc.) parts of the virtual key name.
To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more other
keys together, type the < character followed by the virtual key names linked together
with + (plus sign) characters and ending with the > character.
For example, to program the F1 key so that when it is pressed it performs the same
function as pressing the keys Alt + F4 together, enter the following characters in the
key definition box: <ALT+F4>
To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of keys
one after the other, enter each virtual key name in the order required, enclosing each
virtual key name with the < and > characters. Each enclosed virtual key name must
immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces. For
example, to program the A key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function
as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following characters in the key
definition box: <F2><F3><F4>
Specifying Characters
There are various ways in which you can specify a particular character. For example,
the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five entries:
_027
\033
\u001B
^[
\e
Decimal value (underscore character followed by a 3-digit number).
Octal value (backslash character followed by a 3-digit number).
Unicode value (backslash and u characters then unicode value).
Control key value (^ represents the control key on the keyboard).
Additional value for ESC.
The following 'backslash' values can be used:
\u Unicode introducer
\n Line feed
\r Carriage return
\e Escape
Note that as the \ and ^ characters are used as value introducers, to enter these as
character values you need to precede them with a backslash character, i.e. enter \ as \\
and ^ as \^.
The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value \u20ac.
3-3
Keyboard Configuration
Compose Character Sequences
Compose character sequences can be used to generate codes for characters not shown
on your keyboard. The characters that can be composed depend on the setting of the
Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box and the Preferred
Char. Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box.
When Character Set Mode is is set to National, only characters found in the
character set that corresponds to the selected keyboard nationality can be composed.
When Multinational is selected, the emulator is in Multinational mode and characters from all national keyboard layouts may be composed.
The tables of characters that are used in Multinational mode depend on the setting of
the Preferred Char. Set option. When this is set to DEC-MCS, the ASCII (7-bit)
and DEC Additional (8-bit) character sets are used. When this option is set to ISO
Latin-1, the ASCII (7-bit) and ISO Latin-1 Additional (8-bit) character sets are used.
The Character Sets appendix shows all the tables of characters that may be selected.
If a character is a diacritical symbol (e.g. ´ or ¨) and this symbol does not appear on
the keyboard, an equivalent character can be used in some cases. The diacritical
symbols and the possible substitutes are shown below. There are no equivalents for
the circumflex accent and tilde mark.
Diacritical Mark
Equivalent Character
´
¨
`
°
'
"
'
*
Acute accent
Umlaut
Grave accent
Ring mark
Apostrophe
Double quote
Single quote
Asterisk or degree sign
To compose a character, first find the character you wish to compose in the left hand
column of the following tables. The two characters shown in the right hand column
are the keys that are used to create it. Several alternatives may be given for
generating the same character. A compose sequence is initiated by pressing the keys
Alt + C together, followed by the key bearing the first character then the key bearing
the second character.
Note: The compose character sequence can also be initiated by
pressing a key defined with the COMPOSE virtual key
name.
A compose character sequence may be abandoned before completion by pressing the
Delete key. Pressing Alt + C (or the key defined with the COMPOSE virtual key
name) again before completing a compose character sequence will cause it to be
abandoned and a second sequence to be started. An invalid compose character
sequence will cause the bell to sound.
3-4
Keyboard Configuration
The following tables use several conventions:
The keys bearing the characters used to compose a special character may be
pressed in any order unless (in order) is specified.
(DEC Multinat.) indicates that the character can only be composed if the
Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to
Multinational, and the Preferred Char. Set option in the Terminal Settings
dialog box is set to DEC-MCS.
(Latin-1) indicates that the character can only be composed if the Character
Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational and the Preferred Char. Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog
box is set to ISO Latin-1.
If a nationality is specified with the character description, for example
(Dutch), then the character can only be composed when the Character Set
Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to National and the
system is configured for the relevant language.
3-5
Keyboard Configuration
COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES
"
quotation mark
¨ space
ª
feminine ordinal
indicator
a-
#
number sign
++
«
double open
angle brackets
<<
'
apostrophe
' space
°
degree sign
a a or A A
(Multinational)
or A A or a A
(National)
±
plus or
minus sign
+-
2
superscript 2
2^
3
superscript 3
3^
µ
micro sign
/u
@
commercial at
aa
(Multinational)
(National)
opening bracket
((
\
back slash
//
]
closing bracket
))
¶
paragraph sign
p!
^
circumflex
accent
^ space
·
centred period
.^
`
grave accent
` space
1
superscript 1
1^
{
opening brace
(-
º
masculine
ordinal indicator
o_
|
vertical line
/^
»
double closed
angle brackets
>>
}
closing brace
)-
1
/4
fraction
one quarter
14
/2
fraction
one half
12
/4
fraction threequarters (Dutch)
34
¡
tilde
inverted !
¢
cent sign
£
pound sign
¥
yen sign
§
section
sign
or
/<
~ space
1
!!
3
c / or C /
c | or C |
l - or L l = or L =
y - or Y y = or Y =
s o or S O or s !
S ! or s 0 or S 0
(National & Multinational)
National includes s O or S o
¤
currency sign
C
copyright sign
xo
x0
co
c0
or
or
or
or
XO
X0
CO
C0
A_
° space
[
~
3-6
0^
or
or /
(in order)
or
P!
or
(in order)
(in order)
(in order)
fl
Florin (Dutch)
fl
ij
i j sign (Dutch)
ij
¿
inverted ?
??
À
A grave
A`
Á
A acute
A'
Â
A circumflex
A^
Ã
A tilde
A~
U
(in order)
(in order)
O_
Keyboard Configuration
COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES (continued)
¨A
Û
U circumflex
U^
A*
or A °
(degree sign)
Ü
U umlaut
U"
or
¨U
A E diphthong
AE
Ÿ
Y umlaut
(DEC Multinat.)
Y"
or
¨Y
Ç
C cedilla
/u
ß
German small
sharp s
ss
È
E grave
E`
à
a grave
a`
É
E acute
E'
á
a acute
a'
Ê
E circumflex
E^
â
a circumflex
a^
Ë
E umlaut
E"
ã
a tilde
a~
Ì
I grave
I`
ä
a umlaut
a"
or
¨a
Í
I acute
I'
å
a ring
a*
Î
I circumflex
I^
æ
a e diphthong
ae
Ï
I umlaut
I"
ç
c cedilla
c,
Ñ
N tilde
N~
è
e grave
e`
Ò
O grave
O`
é
e acute
e'
Ó
O acute
O'
ê
e circumflex
e^
Ô
O circumflex
O^
ë
e umlaut
e"
Õ
O tilde
O~
ì
i grave
i`
Ö
O umlaut
O"
í
i acute
i'
Œ
O E diphthong
(DEC Multinat.)
OE
(in order)
î
i circumflex
i^
Ø
O slash
O/
ï
i umlaut
i"
Ù
U grave
U`
ñ
n tilde
n~
Ú
U acute
U'
ò
o grave
o`
Ä
A umlaut
A"
Å
A ring
Æ
or
(in order)
or /
(in order)
¨E
or
or
U
¨I
or
¨O
or a °
(degree sign)
(in order)
(comma)
or
or
¨e
¨i
3-7
Keyboard Configuration
COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES (continued)
ó
o acute
o'
—
soft (syllable)
hyphen (Latin-1)
--
ô
o circumflex
o^
R
registered trademark (Latin-1)
RO
õ
o tilde
o~
–
macron
(Latin-1)
-^
ö
o umlaut
o"
/4
three quarters
(Latin-1)
34
œ
o e diphthong
(DEC Multinat.)
oe
÷
division sign
(Latin-1)
-:
ø
o slash
o/
multiplication
sign (Latin-1)
xx
ù
u grave
u`
´
acute accent
(Latin-1)
''
ú
u acute
u'
¨
dieresis (umlaut)
(Latin-1)
" " or
" space
û
u circumflex
u^
Y´
Y acute
(Latin-1)
Y'
y´
y acute
(Latin-1)
y'
capital Icelandic
thorn (Latin-1)
(in order)
ü
ÿ
N
S
P
¬
3-8
u umlaut
¨o
or
(in order)
u"
¨u
or
3
¨y
TH
y"
no break space
(Latin-1)
space space
small Icelandic
thorn (Latin-1)
th
broken vertical
bar (Latin-1)
||
capital Icelandic
Eth (Latin-1)
-D
logical not
(Latin-1)
-,
small Icelandic
Eth (Latin-1)
-d
or
!^
(in order)
D
_^
(in order)
y umlaut
or
or
(in order)
Mouse Functions
4
Mouse Functions
This chapter describes the special functions assigned to the mouse and
how to redefine them.
Introduction
You can assign up to six special functions to the left and right mouse buttons when
used in conjunction with modifier keys. The following functions are defined by
default:
Left Button
Right Button
Normal:
Shift:
Control:
Control + Shift:
Alt:
Double Click:
Select
Extend Selection
Action Hotspot
Select Rectangle
Move Cursor
Select Word
Edit Copy
Edit Paste
Unassigned
Unassigned
Send Keyword
Unassigned
Redefining Mouse Functions
You can redefine the functions assigned to the mouse buttons using the Mouse
Button Actions dialog box, which is displayed from the Settings menu.
4-1
Mouse Functions
This enables you to specify the functions of the left and right mouse buttons when
clicked on their own or in conjunction with modifier keys. You can assign up to six
functions to each button, either entering your own definition in the same format as
described for keyboard macros and soft buttons, or selecting from a list of standard
built-in functions. Clicking one of the arrow buttons will display a drop-down list box
which lists all the standard functions that can be assigned:
Unassigned
Select
Extend Selection
Edit Copy
Edit Paste
Show Hotspots
Action Hotspot
Move Cursor
Send CR
Send Keyword
Middle Button
Select Rectangle
Select Word
Select and Copy
Cursor Select
Rectangular Select and Copy
The setting of the Highlight When Actioned option determines whether or not a
visual indication is given that a function has been actioned when a hotspot is clicked.
Selecting & Copying Text
You can use the mouse buttons to copy and paste text. The region of the display that
will be selected for copying depends on whether you use the Select, Select and Copy,
Select Rectangle, Rectangular Select and Copy or Select Word function.
The Select function will select all text from the start position to the finish position,
working left to right across the entire width of the display, whereas the Select Rectangle function will only select text contained within the rectangular area defined by the
start position (top left corner) and the finish position (bottom right corner). The Select
Word function will cause the word under the mouse cursor to be selected.
The Select and Copy function is the same as Select but will also copy the selected
data to the Clipboard automatically. The Rectangular Select and Copy function is the
same as Select Rectangle but will also copy the selected data to the Clipboard
automatically.
Moving The Cursor In Block Mode
When the emulator is in any of the local block modes you can use the mouse instead of
the cursor keys to position the text cursor using the Move Cursor function. To
position the text cursor, move the mouse pointer to the position required, hold down
the Alt key then click the left mouse button.
The Cursor Select function does the same as Move Cursor, but when running the
IBM 3270 or IBM 5250 emulation it also performs a cursor select.
4-2
Mouse Functions
Send Keyword
The Send Keyword function enables you to click on any delimited word displayed on
the screen and it will be sent to the host, as long as the word is not already defined as a
hotspot. Keyword delimiters are space, NULL, / , : = ( ) [ and ].
Show & Action Hotspots
A hotspot facility is provided which enables you to invoke a function by clicking the
mouse pointer on a keyword displayed on the screen. For example, an application may
display information relating to keys you can press to perform a particular function.
Instead of pressing the key on the keyboard, you could invoke the function by holding
down the Alt key and clicking the mouse pointer on the displayed key name
(assuming default mouse configuration).
Hotspots are supported in ALL terminal emulation modes. A set of default hotspot
keywords is provided for each mode. These relate to key functions specific to the
emulation. For example, in VT500 mode you can click on the word Help displayed on
the screen and the emulator will execute the function associated with the Help key.
You can identify hotspots that are currently present in display memory by using the
Show Hotspots function. All colour attributes will be temporarily removed from the
display and the hotspots will be highlighted with a red background.
Emulating Middle Mouse Button
You can assign the function of the middle button found on a three button mouse to any
button or button and key combination by using the Middle Button option.
4-3
Mouse Functions
Notes
4-4
The Toolbar
5
The Toolbar
This chapter describes how to use and redefine the TeemTalk for
Windows XPe toolbar.
Using The Toolbar
The TeemTalk for Windows XPe toolbar provides a quick way of actioning
commands or displaying setup dialog boxes by just clicking a button.
You can customize the toolbar by adding or removing buttons to suit your
requirements using the Button Tools dialog box, which is displayed from the Settings
menu.
The Predefined Button Tools
The toolbar displayed by default contains a series of buttons defined with functions
found in the setup menus. These functions are listed below and described in the Setup
Menus chapter.
Displays the New Connection dialog box for making a serial or
network host connection.
Displays the Open Session dialog box. This enables you to load
a particular setup configuration.
Displays the Save Session As dialog box. This enables you to
specify how the current session configuration is to be saved.
5-1
The Toolbar
Copies selected data to the clipboard.
Pastes clipboard data at the current cursor position.
Displays the Printer Setup dialog box. This enables you to
select any printer that is configured in Microsoft Windows.
Will produce a hardcopy of screen data.
Displays the Attributes dialog box. This enables you to specify
the colours used in the emulation workspace and how text with
attributes is displayed.
Displays the Keyboard Macros dialog box. This shows the
mapping of your keyboard and enables you to redefine the
function of keys.
Displays the Soft Buttons dialog box for defining the function
of soft buttons.
Displays the Mouse Button Actions dialog box for assigning
up to six functions to the left mouse button.
Displays the Button Tools dialog box for redefining the
toolbar.
Displays information about your version of TeemTalk.
5-2
The Toolbar
Redefining The Toolbar
Selecting Button Tools from the Settings menu will display a dialog box that enables
you to redefine the toolbar.
The Current Tool box displays the toolbar button and its function that is currently
selected for editing, or located where a new button is to be inserted to its left in the
toolbar. Clicking the down-arrow button to the right will display all the current toolbar
buttons in order in a box below. This enables you to select a new button position for
display in the Current Tool box. Click the down-arrow button again to return to the
Button and Command selection display.
The Visible option enables you to specify whether or not the toolbar is displayed.
Adding Buttons
1. Click the down-arrow button to the right of the Current Tool box to display the
buttons currently in the toolbar.
2. Click on the button which will be to the right of the new button to be added so that
it is displayed in the Current Tool box.
3. Click the down-arrow button again to display the Command options.
4. Select a button bitmap from the Buttons list.
You can add your own bitmaps to the standard bitmap list by clicking the Add
Custom Bitmap button and selecting the bitmap files to load. Buttons will be
automatically generated using the bitmaps in these files.
5-3
The Toolbar
5. Specify the command to be performed when this button is clicked either by
selecting from the Commands list or by typing your own definition in the
Current Tool text box.
6. Click the Insert at Current button.
7. Click OK when you have finished. The toolbar will immediately be updated.
Adding A Space Between Buttons
1. Click the down-arrow button to the right of the Current Tool box to display the
buttons currently in the toolbar.
2. Click on the button which will be to the right of the space to be added so that it is
displayed in the Current Tool box.
3. Click the down-arrow button again to display the Command options.
4. Select the [Space] option at the top of the Commands list box.
5. Click the Insert at Current button.
6. Click OK when you have finished. The toolbar will immediately be updated.
Removing A Button Or Space
1. Click the down-arrow button to the right of the Current Tool box to display the
buttons currently in the toolbar.
2. Click on the button or space to be deleted so that it is displayed in the Current
Tool box.
3. Click the down-arrow button again to display the Command options.
4. Click the Delete Current button to remove the button or space from the toolbar.
5. Click OK when you have finished.
Saving The Button Tools
When you have finished defining button tools you can save them so that they will be
reasserted when the emulator is loaded or reset by selecting Save Session in the File
menu.
5-4
The Toolbar
Assigning User-Defined Functions
You can enter a definition of your own in the Current Tool text box. The definition
can contain key functions and control characters to be actioned as well as normal text.
Specifying Key Functions
You can cause a key function to be actioned by including the virtual key name of the
key enclosed by the < and > characters. You may omit the VK_ and VT_ parts (etc.)
of the virtual key name. For example, the Enter key would be specified as <ENTER>.
To send the function of a key combination, type the < character followed by the virtual
key names linked together with + characters and ending with the > character. For
example, Alt F4 would be specified as <ALT+F4>.
To send the function of a sequence of keys one after the other, enter each virtual key
name in the order required, enclosing each virtual key name with the < and >
characters. Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous
enclosed virtual key name with no spaces. For example, F2 then F3 then F4 would be
specified as <F2><F3><F4>.
Specifying Characters
There are various ways in which you can specify a particular character. For example,
the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five entries:
_027
\033
\u001B
^[
\e
Decimal value (underscore character followed by a 3-digit number).
Octal value (backslash character followed by a 3-digit number).
Unicode value (backslash and u characters then unicode value).
Control key value (^ represents the control key on the keyboard).
Additional value for ESC.
The following 'backslash' values can be used:
\u Unicode introducer
\n Line feed
\r Carriage return
\e Escape
Note that as the \ and ^ characters are used as value introducers, to enter these as
character values you need to precede them with a backslash character, i.e. enter \ as \\
and ^ as \^.
The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value \u20ac.
5-5
The Toolbar
Notes
5-6
Setup Menus
6
Setup Menus
This chapter describes the options available in the setup menus and
dialog boxes.
Displaying & Closing Menus
The following menus can be displayed from the command bar:
Note: The options available in the menus depend on whether or not
you are in WBT mode.
To display a menu:
Mouse:
Click on the title of the menu required.
Keyboard:
Hold down the Alt key and press the key bearing the underlined
character in the menu title. For example, pressing Alt + F will display
the File menu.
6-1
Setup Menus
To close a menu:
Mouse:
Click anywhere outside the menu.
Keyboard:
Press the Alt key.
Using The Menus
The menu options follow several conventions:
Options that are displayed dimmed are not applicable to the current mode of operation
and cannot be selected. An example of this is the IBM 5250 option in the Settings
menu. This can only be selected when the IBM 5250 emulation is running.
Options that include an underlined character may be actioned by pressing the key
bearing that character. For example, pressing the X key while the File menu is
displayed will cause the emulator to shut down.
Options that are not followed by an ellipsis (...) perform a particular function when
selected. For example, selecting Reset Terminal in the File menu will perform a
terminal reset.
Options that are followed by an ellipsis indicate that a dialog box will be displayed
with all the selections applicable to that option. For example, selecting Emulation... in
the Settings menu will display a dialog box in which you can specify various
emulation settings.
To select a menu option:
Mouse:
Click the menu option.
Keyboard:
Method 1: If the option includes an underlined character, press the key
bearing that character. For example, pressing X while the File menu is
displayed will cause the emulator to shut down.
Method 2: Use the up or down arrow keys to highlight the option
required then hit Return.
6-2
Setup Menus
Dialog Boxes
Selecting an option which is followed by an ellipsis (...) will cause a dialog box to be
displayed. The example shown below is displayed by selecting the Block
Transmission... option in the Settings menu.
There are four basic methods for changing settings within the dialog boxes.
Options preceded by a check box, such as Send Unprotected Only in the example
above, are true or selected when the box contains a ✔, and false or unselected when the
box is empty. Click the pointer in the box to toggle the setting on or off, or press the
spacebar on the keyboard.
When a group of options preceded by round buttons are enclosed in a box, such as the
PF Key Effect options in the example above, only one of these options is selected or
true at any one time. The currently selected option is indicated by a button with a dark
centre. These buttons behave just like radio buttons in that clicking one will cause the
previously selected button to be deselected.
Some options require you to type information in a text box, such as the End of Line
Characters option.
When an option has many possible settings, these will be shown in a list box. The
Alpha Emulation option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is an example of this.
To make a selection using the mouse, click the arrow button to display a drop-down
list box then click on the setting required. If the list is long a scroll bar may be
displayed. To make a selection using the keyboard, press the up or down cursor keys
to cycle through the available settings until the one required is highlighted in the box.
6-3
Setup Menus
To select a dialog box option:
Mouse:
Click the check box, button or list box. The current setting is highlighted
or surrounded by a dotted rectangle, or both.
Keyboard:
Move to the option to be changed either by holding down the Alt key
and pressing the key bearing the character underlined in the option, if
one is displayed, or press the Tab key to move forward through the
options (left to right, top to bottom), or Shift + Tab to move backwards,
until the required option is highlighted. Press the Spacebar to toggle
check boxes or buttons on or off.
To close a dialog box without actioning changes:
Mouse:
Click the Cancel button.
Keyboard:
Press the Tab or Shift + Tab keys to move the cursor until it rests over
the Cancel button and press Return or the Spacebar.
To close a dialog box and action changes:
Mouse:
Click the OK button.
Keyboard:
Press Return.
Default Settings
You can restore the factory default settings of all the setup options by selecting the
Factory Default option in the File menu.
Some dialog boxes include a Default button to enable the default settings of options
contained in the dialog box to be reasserted.
Specifying Characters In Setup Entries
There are various ways in which you can specify a particular character in a setup entry.
For example, the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five
entries:
_027
\033
\u001B
^[
\e
6-4
Decimal value (underscore character followed by a 3-digit number).
Octal value (backslash character followed by a 3-digit number).
Unicode value (backslash and u characters then unicode value).
Control key value (^ represents the control key on the keyboard).
Additional value for ESC.
Setup Menus
The following 'backslash' values can be used:
\u Unicode introducer
\n Line feed
\r Carriage return
\e Escape
Note that as the \ and ^ characters are used as value introducers, to enter these as
character values you need to precede them with a backslash character, i.e. enter \ as \\
and ^ as \^.
The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value \u20ac.
Creating A Connection Template (CE)
When running TeemTalk for Windows CE, you can save the current session
configuration as a connection template. To make the emulator automatically attempt to
make a host connection using the same settings the next time it is loaded, display the
File menu and select the Save Session option.
You can create multiple connection templates when the terminal is not in WBT mode,
any one of which can be selected for use. The procedure is as follows:
1. In the File menu, select the Save Session As... option to display the following
dialog box.
2. In the Saved Items box, indicate which settings are to be saved by checking the
boxes next to the relevant options.
3. In the Save As File Name text box, enter a descriptive name to enable it to be
identified for future selection. This description will be listed in the Open Session
dialog box.
4. Click the OK button to save the template settings. If you specified a descriptive
name that already exists, a message box will ask you to confirm whether or not
you want to overwrite the existing name with the new settings.
6-5
Setup Menus
Selecting A Connection Template (CE)
The Open Session dialog box enables you to select a connection template to use when
the terminal is not in WBT mode. This is displayed by selecting Open Session... in the
File menu.
The Description list box displays the names of connection templates that were created
using the Save Session As dialog box. The descriptive name of the connection
template currently in use is highlighted. The factory default connection template is
Untitled. Clicking one of the descriptions then the OK button will cause the dialog
box to close and the connection template associated with the chosen description will be
actioned.
You can specify a particular connection template to use by default by clicking the
required description, checking the Save As Default check box, then clicking the OK
button. To delete a connection template, select the description then click the Delete
button.
Saving The Session Configuration (XPe)
When running TeemTalk for Windows XPe, you can either save the session
configuration using the current session name, or you can save it under a new session
name if TeemTalk was started without a session (i.e. not started by clicking on a
desktop icon or by selecting a session from the Start menu).
Save Using Current Session Name
To save the session configuration using the current session name, select Save Session
in the File menu. If you were using a session template and modified the settings, a
local copy of the template will be made with the same name, but with the changed
settings. This copy will replace the template in the list of session configurations
displayed in the Open Session dialog box. Note that the T template indicator will no
longer be displayed.
6-6
Setup Menus
Save Using New Session Name
If TeemTalk for Windows XPe was started without a session (i.e. not started by
clicking on a desktop icon or by selecting a session from the Start menu), you can
save the session configuration under a new name:
1. In the File menu, select Save Session As... option to display the following dialog
box.
2. In the Saved Items box, indicate which settings are to be saved by checking the
boxes next to the relevant options.
3. In the Save As File Name text box, enter a descriptive name (up to 132 characters
long) to enable it to be identified for future selection. This description will be listed
in the Open Session dialog box.
4. Click the OK button to save the session. If you specified a session name that
already exists, a message box will ask you to confirm whether you want to
overwrite the existing session name with the new settings.
Selecting A Session Configuration (XPe)
If TeemTalk for Windows XPe was started without a session (i.e. not started by
clicking on a desktop icon or by selecting a session from the Start menu), you can use
the Open Session dialog box to select a session configuration for TeemTalk to load.
This is displayed by selecting Open Session... in the File menu.
6-7
Setup Menus
The Defined Sessions list box displays one-line descriptions of session configurations
that were created using the TeemTalk Connection Wizard or the Save Session As
dialog box when running TeemTalk. The session configuration currently loaded is
highlighted. Clicking on a defined session then the OK button will cause TeemTalk to
load that session configuration.
The session configuration that TeemTalk will load by default on startup is indicated by
a letter D next to its name. You can change the default selection by selecting the
required session description then clicking the Save As Default button.
Session templates created by the system administrator are indicated by the letter T after
the session name. Refer to the Session Management section in the Getting Started
chapter for details.
You can delete any session configurations except templates by selecting the
description then clicking the Delete button. Note that if the session deleted was a copy
of a template (which will have the same name), the template version will reappear in
the Defined Sessions list, as indicated by the letter T.
6-8
Setup Menus
Menu Descriptions
The following pages describe the options available in all the menus and associated
dialog boxes. The descriptions begin by showing the menu or dialog box as it is
displayed on the screen. The factory default setting is shown below each option title
where applicable.
File Menu
Factory Default...
This will restore the factory default settings of all the setup options. A message box
will be displayed asking you to confirm whether or not you want to assert the factory
default settings. Click the OK button to assert the factory defaults.
Reset Terminal
This will reset the current terminal emulation mode.
6-9
Setup Menus
New Connection...
(Not available in WBT mode)
Factory default: Serial, Com 1
This will display a dialog box that enables you to make a host connection.
The Type list box specifies the type of host connection that is to be made.
The Connect To box specifies the port or host to communicate with. You can either
make a selection from the list or enter a valid host name or internet address.
The host connection will be closed if you change the settings in the New Connection
dialog box and attempt to connect, if you log out of the host, or the host closes the
connection. Warning messages will be displayed if the host closes the connection, or
you attempt to open a new session or exit the emulator while a session is open.
Making A Serial Host Connection
To connect to a serial host, select Serial in the Type list box (default), then select the
Com port required in the Connect To list box. Click the Configure... button to
display the Serial Settings dialog box and make sure the settings match that of the
host. Click OK then Connect.
Note: These options are described in the Serial Settings section
later in this chapter and only apply when the connection type
is set to Serial.
6-10
Setup Menus
Making A Network Host Connection
To connect to a network host node, select TCP/IP in the Type list box. The Connect
To box will display the available devices on the network. Select the name of the device
required or enter the host name or IP address. If the session was created using the
Connection Wizard and the Host Rollover On Connection Fail option was selected,
you can specify up to three more hosts in the boxes below. The emulator will attempt
to connect to each specified host in turn until one is successful.
Clicking the Telnet Options button will display a dialog box with additional options.
These are described in the Getting Started chapter.
Clicking the Connect button or the name of the host in the Connect To list box twice
will cause the emulator to attempt to connect to the specified host. If a connection
cannot be made because the network driver is not installed or the host node name is
invalid, an error message will indicate this. Failure to connect for any other reason will
result in a Connection Failed message.
Making A Modem Host Connection
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to display
configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for
details. When you have made the relevant selections, click OK then Connect.
6-11
Setup Menus
Making An SSL Or SSH Host Connection (if supported)
The optional SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) protocol enables authenticated and
encrypted communication between clients and servers. Refer to the SSL Connection
section in the Getting Started chapter for details.
The optional SSH (Secure Shell) client/server protocol is used to encrypt and transmit
data securely over a network, with authentication (proof of client identity) provided by
a password and/or key. To enable an SSH connection, this option must be selected and
the Telnet Port Number option set to the host's SSH port (22 is the default for SSH).
When a Telnet connection is initiated, the SSH Connection dialog box will be
displayed prompting the user for authentication. Refer to the SSH Connection section
in the Getting Started chapter for details.
Open Session...
(Not available in WBT mode)
TeemTalk for Windows CE
This enables you to select a connection template. The following dialog box will be
displayed.
The Description list box displays the names of connection templates that were created
using the Save Session As dialog box. The name of the connection template currently
in use is highlighted. The factory default connection template is Untitled. Selecting
one of the descriptions then clicking the OK button will cause the dialog box to close
and the connection template associated with the chosen description to be actioned.
You can specify a particular connection template to use by default by clicking the
required description, checking the Save As Default check box, then clicking the OK
button. To delete a connection template, select the description then click the Delete
button.
TeemTalk for Windows XPe
This option is only available if TeemTalk for Windows XPe was started without a
session (i.e. not started by clicking on a desktop icon or by selecting a session from the
Start menu). It enables you to select a session configuration for TeemTalk to load. The
following dialog box will be displayed.
6-12
Setup Menus
The Defined Sessions list box displays one-line descriptions of session configurations
that were created using the TeemTalk Connection Wizard or the Save Session As
dialog box when running TeemTalk. The session configuration currently loaded is
highlighted. Clicking on a defined session then the OK button will cause TeemTalk to
load that session configuration.
The session configuration that TeemTalk will load by default on startup is indicated by
a letter D next to its name. You can change the default selection by selecting the
required session description then clicking the Save As Default button.
Session templates created by the system administrator are indicated by the letter T after
the session name. Refer to the Session Management section in the Getting Started
chapter for details.
You can delete any session configurations except templates by selecting the
description then clicking the Delete button. Note that if the session deleted was a copy
of a template (which will have the same name), the template version will reappear in
the Defined Sessions list, as indicated by the letter T.
Close Session
(Not available in WBT mode)
This will close the current session.
Save Session
Selecting this option will save the current session configuration.
TeemTalk for Windows XPe
If you were using a session template and modified the settings, a local copy of the
template will be made with the same name, but with the changed settings. This copy
will replace the template in the list of session configurations displayed in the Open
Session dialog box. Note that the T template indicator will no longer be displayed.
6-13
Setup Menus
Save Session As...
(Not available in WBT mode)
TeemTalk for Windows CE
This will display a dialog box that enables you to save the current session
configuration as a connection template.
You can create multiple connection templates, any one of which can be selected for
use. The procedure is as follows:
1. In the Saved Items box, indicate which settings are to be saved by checking the
boxes next to the relevant options.
2. In the Save As File Name text box, enter a descriptive name to enable it to be
identified for future selection. This description will be listed in the Open Session
dialog box.
3. Click the OK button to save the template settings. If you specified a descriptive
name that already exists, a message box will ask you to confirm whether or not
you want to overwrite the existing name with the new settings.
TeemTalk for Windows XPe
This option is only available if TeemTalk for Windows XPe was started without a
session (i.e. not started by clicking on a desktop icon or by selecting a session from the
Start menu). It will display a dialog box that enables you to save the current session
configuration under a new name.
The procedure is as follows:
1. In the Saved Items box, indicate which settings are to be saved by checking the
boxes next to the relevant options.
2. In the Save As File Name text box, enter a descriptive name (up to 132 characters
long) to enable it to be identified for future selection. This description will be listed
in the Open Session dialog box.
6-14
Setup Menus
3. Click the OK button to save the session. If you specified a session name that
already exists, a message box will ask you to confirm whether you want to
overwrite the existing session name with the new settings.
Startup Options...
(Not available in WBT mode)
The following dialog box will be displayed when this option is selected.
This enables you specify whether the emulator is to make a host connection using the
default connection template, display the New Connection dialog box, or display the
Open Session dialog box when it is loaded (but not when it is reset). Refer to the
relevant descriptions earlier in this section for information on these dialog boxes.
Printer Setup...
This will display a dialog box that enables you to specify print settings. The options
available depend on whether you are running TeemTalk for Windows CE or XPe.
6-15
Setup Menus
TeemTalk for Windows CE
TeemTalk for Windows XPe
6-16
Setup Menus
You can direct print data to a printer handled by the Print Manager, a specific port, or a
network printer.
CE - Direct Print Data To The Print Manager
When running TeemTalk for Windows CE, the Current System Printer Driver box
displays the name of the currently selected system printer when both the Use Network
Printer (LPR) and Print Direct To Port options are not selected.
Clicking the Setup button will display a Print Manager dialog box that enables you to
specify printer settings.
If you find a through print results in data being split into lines, each treated as a
separate print job, specify a time in the Seconds Close Delay box (e.g. 5 seconds).
This will enable the next line of data to be sent before the print job is assumed to have
finished and therefore prevents the print job from being closed prematurely. When set
to 0, printing will not start until a ‘print end of job’ command is received from the
host. Entering any other number will cause printing to start after the specified number
of seconds have elapsed, regardless of whether the ‘print end of job’ command has
been received from the host. If you require the port to be kept open all the time (to stop
the printer resetting) enter -1 (minus one).
XPe - Direct Print Data To The Print Manager
When running TeemTalk for Windows XPe, the Printer list box lists the printers
handled by the Print Manager. You can select from this list when the Use Network
Printer (LPR) option is not selected.
Clicking the Setup button will display a Print Manager dialog box that enables you to
specify printer settings.
The Microsoft Windows Print Manager normally controls all print formatting,
translates host characters to supported printer characters, and also provides a spooling
facility. A disadvantage of using the Print Manager is that any print formatting escape
sequences received from the host are stripped. If you want to use the Print Manager but
disable its print formatting process so that the original escape sequences from the host
are retained, select the PassThrough option. (Note that the PassThruogh option will
be unselectable if the printer driver currently selected does not support this facility.)
If you find a through print results in data being split into lines, each treated as a
separate print job, specify a time in the seconds Close Delay box (e.g. 5 seconds). This
will enable the next line of data to be sent before the print job is assumed to have
finished and therefore prevents the print job from being closed prematurely. When set
to 0, TeemTalk will not start printing until it receives a ‘print end of job’ command
from the host. Entering any other number will cause TeemTalk to print after the
specified number of seconds have elapsed, regardless of whether the ‘print end of job’
command has been received from the host. If you require the port to be kept open all
the time (to stop the printer resetting) enter -1 (minus one).
6-17
Setup Menus
Direct Print Data To A Specific Port
To direct print data to a specific port, select Print Direct To Port and specify the
Printer Port.
Selecting the FormFeed Terminator option will cause the printer to advance the
paper to the top of the form when it has finished printing.
The Output Character Set option enables you to specify the character set used for
printing when Print Direct To Port is selected. This allows non-ISO Latin-1 printers
to be used.
Selecting Auto Line Feed will cause the printer to print at the beginning of the next
line when a carriage return command is received.
When a serial port is selected, clicking the Setup button will display a dialog box in
which you can specify the baud rate, parity, flow control, data bits and stop bits
settings. These options are described in the Serial Settings section.
If supported, clicking the Advanced button will display a dialog box that enables you
to send printer-specific commands to specify, for example, font size, colour, or page
header and footer.
6-18
Setup Menus
CE - Direct Print Data To A Network Printer
To direct print data to a printer on the network when running TeemTalk for Windows
CE, select Use Network Printer (LPR) and enter the LPD Hostname. Clicking the
Setup button will display a dialog box that enables you to specify various print
settings.
You must specify the Printer Name. The Job Name and User Name entries are
optional (the User Name will default to root if none is specified). The Number of
Copies to print is set to 1 by default. You can specify how many times the LPR
protocol will attempt to execute the print job before cancelling by setting the number
of Retries and the number of seconds delay between each attempt. When Add Banner
is selected, information about this print job will be printed with it. You can display a
message box which will indicate the progress of the print job by selecting Debug
Information.
If supported, clicking the Advanced button will display a dialog box that enables you
to send printer-specific commands to specify, for example, font size, colour, or page
header and footer.
6-19
Setup Menus
XPe - Direct Print Data To A Network Printer
To direct print data to a printer on the network when running TeemTalk for Windows
XPe, select Use Network Printer (LPR) and enter the LPD Hostname. Clicking the
Setup button will display an LPD Device Settings dialog box that enables you to
specify various print settings.
You must specify the Printer Name. The Job Name and User Name entries are
optional (the User Name will default to root if none is specified). You can specify
how many times the LPR protocol will attempt to execute the print job before
cancelling by setting the number of Retries and the number of seconds delay between
each attempt.
Clicking the Advanced button will display a dialog box that enables you to send
printer-specific commands to specify, for example, font size, colour, or page header
and footer. When Add Banner is selected, information about this print job will be
printed with it. You can display a message box which will indicate the progress of the
print job by selecting Debug Information.
6-20
Setup Menus
Print Screen
This enables you to produce a hardcopy of data displayed on the screen. The Print
Screen dialog box will be displayed when a printer handled by the Print Manager is
selected in the Printer Setup dialog box.
The Text option is selected by default and the printer resolution and scaling options
are not accessible. Clicking the OK button with Text selected will cause a fast print of
the screen using Unicode.
Selecting Graphics will print all the data in the emulation workspace, both graphics
and text, when the OK button is clicked. The hardcopy output will be an almost exact
representation of the emulation workspace. Note that a graphics print will take a lot
longer than a text print.
The Use Printer Resolution option is available when Graphics print is selected. This
will force a dot for dot print of the screen on the printer and generally produces a small
print, depending on the printer resolution. When this option is not selected
(unchecked), the emulator will try and print as large an image as possible on the
printer's paper. Both methods can print in landscape or portrait format, depending on
the current setup of the printer.
Selecting the Auto Wrap option will cause the printer to automatically move to the
beginning of the next line when the right margin is reached.
The Centre Image on Paper option is available when Graphics print is selected. This
will ensure that the graphics image is printed centrally on the paper.
The Scaling option is available when Graphics print is selected. This enables the
image to be scaled to suit your preference. When the Use Printer Resolution option is
selected, you can scale the image up, and when unselected you can scale the image
down. (Scaling up when Use Printer Resolution is not selected may result in loss of
some of the image.)
The Graphics Image option is available when Graphics print is selected. This enables
you to specify how the graphics image is to be printed. Clicking the arrow button next
to the text box will cause four print options to be displayed. These options allow you
to print the graphics image as displayed (Normal by default), with black and white
6-21
Setup Menus
reversed, with colour converted to monochrome, or colour converted to monochrome
with black and white reversed.
Once a screen print is initiated by clicking OK, another dialog box will be displayed
while the screen data is being spooled out to the print manager. This enables you to
terminate the print process before data is actually printed.
Print Buffer
This will send a copy of all the data contained in the window buffer to the currently
selected printer.
Auto Print
This toggles auto print mode on and off, as indicated by a tick when auto print mode is
on. Auto print mode causes each line of data to be transmitted to the printer when the
cursor moves to a new line as a result of a carriage return, line feed, vertical tab, or
form feed.
Cancel Print
This will cancel the current Print Screen or Print Buffer function.
Eject Page
This option enables data that has been spooled to the printer to be printed.
Exit
This option will cause the emulator to shut down.
6-22
Setup Menus
Edit Menu
Clipboard Text
Clipboard Graphics
Selecting one of these options will enable selected text or graphics to be copied to the
clipboard when the Copy command is used. The Paste and Select All commands will
also be enabled. A tick will be displayed next to the option when it is selected.
Copy
The Copy commands become available when data has been selected. They will cause
the currently selected text or graphics to be copied to the clipboard. The data can then
be inserted in a different position or another file using the Paste command. The next
block of data that is copied will delete the previous block on the clipboard.
The first Copy option enables you to perform a standard copy. The last three options
are only available when Clipboard Graphics is selected. They enable you to copy the
graphics image with black and white reversed, with colour converted to monochrome,
or both.
Paste
This will cause data that has been copied to the clipboard to be pasted at the current
cursor position. The same block of data may be pasted repeatedly as the clipboard
stores it until the Copy command is used again.
Select All
This will cause the window contents (not the entire buffer) to be selected.
Clear Buffer
This will erase the contents of the window and the scroll buffer.
6-23
Setup Menus
Settings Menu
The English, French and German options enable you to select the language that will
be used in all menus and dialog boxes.
The following dialog boxes can be displayed from this menu. Note that the dialog
boxes used to configure specific emulations can only be displayed when the relevant
emulation is running.
Emulation Settings
HP 700-92/96 Settings
PT 250 Settings
IBM 3151 Settings
Wyse Settings
TA 6530 Settings
IBM 3270 Settings
IBM 5250 Settings
6-24
- for specifying the terminal emulation, keyboard
nationality and the answerback string.
- for configuring the HP 700-92/96 emulation.
- for configuring the Prime PT250 emulation.
- for configuring the IBM 3151 emulation.
- for configuring the Wyse 50/50+/60, TVI 910+/
920/925, ADDS A2 and HZ 1500 emulations.
- for configuring the Tandem 6530 emulation.
- for configuring the IBM 3270 emulation.
- for configuring the IBM 5250 emulation.
Setup Menus
Unisys T27 Settings
BQ 3107 Settings
Serial Settings
Auxport Settings
Terminal Settings
Local Editing
-
Block Transmission
-
Tek 4014 Settings
-
GIN Mouse Definitions
-
Attributes
-
Keyboard Macros
Soft Buttons
Mouse Button Actions
Button Tools
-
for configuring the Unisys T27 emulation.
for configuring the Bull BQ 3107 emulation.
for specifying serial communication settings.
for specifying auxilliary port settings.
for specifying terminal and display settings.
for specifying DEC VT Block (Edit) mode local
editing functions.
for specifying DEC VT Block (Edit) mode text
formatting and transmission.
for specifying graphics text settings, screen mapping
resolution and GIN termination characters. (Graphics
versions of TeemTalk only.)
for defining GIN mouse button codes. (Graphics
versions of TeemTalk only.)
for assigning colours and specifying how
characters with attributes are displayed.
for redefining the function of keys.
for defining soft button functions.
for defining mouse functions.
TeemTalk for Windows XPe only - for defining the
toolbat/floating button palette.
6-25
Setup Menus
Emulation Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Emulation in the Settings menu.
Alpha Emulation
(Not available in WBT mode)
The setting of this option determines the current alpha emulation mode.
The ADDS A2 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
ADDS Viewpoint A2 terminal, as emulated by the Wyse WY-50/50+/60 terminals.
Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details.
The AIXTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive an X
terminal using X Windows.
The ANSI BBS emulation is a derivative of the ANSI device driver ANSI.SYS
supplied with all DOS based PCs and which provides the screen management for the
DOS console screen. PC based UNIX systems and Bulletin Board Systems (BBS)
often rely on the ANSI emulation when being accessed by a PC. In ANSI BBS mode
the screen size is adjusted to 25 lines and the Preferred Char. Set option in the
Terminal Settings dialog box is automatically set to Ansi. The setting of the Ansi
Code Page option in this dialog box determines the characters available in the ANSI
BBS set.
The AT 386 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
AT&T AT 386 terminal.
The ATT4410 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
AT&T Dataspeed 4410 terminal. Refer to the AT&T 4410 Emulation section in the
Getting Started chapter for details.
The BQ 3107 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
Bull BQ 3107 terminal. Refer to the BQ 3107 Emulation chapter for details.
6-26
Setup Menus
The DG 410/412 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
Data General D410 and D412 terminals. Refer to the DG 410/412 Emulation chapter
for details.
The HP 700-92/96 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive
the Hewlett Packard 700/92, 2392A, 2622A, 70094 and 70096 terminals. This
emulation is described in detail in the HP 700-92/96 Emulation chapter.
The HZ1500 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
Hazeltine 1500 terminal, as emulated by the Wyse WY-50/50+/60 terminals. Refer to
the Wyse Emulations chapter for details.
The IBM 3151 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
IBM 3151 terminal. Refer to the IBM 3151 Emulation chapter for details.
The IBM 3270 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
IBM 3270 terminal. Note that the initial display will be an ASCII text screen known as
Network Virtual Terminal mode (NVT mode for short). The setting of the IBM 3270
Model option in the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box determines the size of the display
and whether or not extended attributes are supported. Refer to the IBM 3270
Emulation chapter for details.
The IBM 5250 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive IBM
5250 type alphanumeric terminals. This emulation can be used for connection to an
IBM AS/400, System/36 or System/38. Note that the initial display will be an ASCII
text screen known as Network Virtual Terminal mode (NVT mode for short). Refer to
the IBM 5250 Emulation chapter for details.
The MDI P12\P8 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive
the McDonnell Douglas Prism-12 and Prism-8 terminals. Refer to the MDIS Prism
Emulations chapter for details.
The MDI Prism-9 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive
the McDonnell Douglas Prism-9 terminal. Refer to the MDIS Prism Emulations
chapter for details.
The PT250 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
Prime PT250 terminal. Refer to the PT250 Emulation chapter for details.
Sco Console is an emulation of the SCO UNIX box.
The Siemens 97801 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive
the Siemens 97801 terminal. Refer to the Siemens 97801 Emulation chapter for details.
The Stratus V102 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive
the Stratus V102 terminal.
The TA6530 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
Tandem 6530 terminal. This emulation is described in the TA6530 Emulation chapter.
The TVI 910, TVI 920 and TVI 925 emulations provide compatibility with software
designed to drive the TeleVideo 910+, 920 and 925 terminals, respectively, as
6-27
Setup Menus
emulated by the Wyse WY-50/50+/60 terminals. Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter
for details.
The TVI 950 and TVI 955 emulations provide compatibility with software designed
to drive the TeleVideo 950 and 955 terminals, respectively.
The Unisys T27 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
Unisys T27 terminal. Refer to the Unisys T27 Emulation chapter for details.
The Viewdata 40, Viewdata 80 and Viewdata Split modes enable access to a
viewdata service using one of three display formats, as described in the Viewdata
Mode section in the Getting Started chapter.
The VT PCTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed for the PC
Term mode supported by DEC. This is the same as the VT510 emulation except that
keyboard scan codes are sent on key press/release instead of ASCII codes by default.
The VT52 and VT100 emulations enable you to run applications written for the DEC
VT52 and VT100 terminals, respectively. Refer to the DEC VT Emulations chapter for
details.
The VT500 7-Bit and VT500 8-Bit emulations enable you to run applications written
for the DEC VT320 terminal, the difference is in their treatment of 8-bit control codes.
When VT500 7-Bit is selected, all 8-bit codes are converted to their 7-bit equivalents,
whereas VT500 8-Bit leaves 8-bit codes unchanged. If you are using VT200
applications, select VT500 7-Bit. Refer to the DEC VT Emulations chapter for details.
The VT+HP220 emulation is based on the VT500 terminal series and includes the HP
function keys F1 - F8 (not user programmable). The terminal ID is set to VT220.
The VT100+ emulation is an enhanced version of the VT100 emulation that provides
additional functionality such as colours. It is the same as the VT-UTF8 emulation
except that it only supports ASCII characters 0-127 (decimal).
The VT-UTF8 emulation is an enhanced version of the VT100 emulation that
supports non-English and drawing characters. It supports localization of the singlebyte and double-byte character sets and all other languages supported by Windows.
Additional functionality, such as colours, is also provided.
The WY50, WY50+ and WY60 emulations provide compatibility with software
designed to drive the Wyse WY-50, WY-50+ and WY-60 terminals, respectively.
Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for information on these emulations.
The WYSE PCTerm emulation provides compatibility with software designed for the
PC Term personality supported by Wyse. Keyboard scan codes are sent on key press/
release instead of ASCII codes by default.
Graphics Emulation
Factory default: ReGIS
This option is only available if this version of TeemTalk supports graphics emulations
and the Alpha Emulation option is set to one of the DEC VT, Ansi BBS, AIXTerm,
6-28
Setup Menus
AT 386 or Sco Console emulations. The setting determines the graphics mode that will
be entered when the host sends graphics commands.
The ReGIS emulation enables you to run applications written for the DEC VT340
terminal in ReGIS mode.
The Tek4014 emulation enables you to run applications written for the Tektronix
4010 and 4014 terminals.
The VT640 emulation enables you to run applications written for the Retrographics
VT640 terminal.
The W2119 emulation enables you to run applications written for the Westward 2119
terminal.
VT Terminal ID
Factory default: VT420
This specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification
request. Either select from the list of IDs or edit the text box and enter a different terminal identity. (Not all features of the specified terminal may be supported.)
National
Factory default: Unselected
This will only be available if the system is configured for a language that supports
national replacement character sets.
The setting of this option determines the type of character set used to generate
characters. When selected, a character set specific to the selected keyboard nationality
is used. When unselected (default) the emulator is in Multinational mode, a character
set consisting of two tables of characters is used. This enables characters from any
keyboard nationality to be generated.
Tertiary Device Attribute
When the emulator is in VT420 mode (Emulation set to VT500 and Terminal ID set
to VT420), this option enables you to specify the tertiary device attribute report that is
sent in response to a request from the host.
Answerback String
This option enables you to specify the Answerback string that is sent to the host in
response to an ANSI mode enquiry command. The string may be up to 30 characters
long.
Answerback Concealed
Factory default: Unselected
Selecting this option will cause the Answerback string specified in the text box above
to be locked from change and displayed as asterisks. Note that deselecting this option
will cause the Answerback string to be deleted.
6-29
Setup Menus
HP 700-92/96 Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting HP 700-92/96 in the Settings menu.
Local Echo
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether keyboard entered characters are
displayed on the screen as well as sent to the host. When unselected, characters are not
displayed when they are transmitted to the host unless the host 'echoes' them back.
Caps Lock
Factory default: Unselected
This determines whether the full 128-character ASCII range can be generated, or only
Teletype-compatible codes.
When this option is unselected, all 128 ASCII characters can be generated. When
selected, unshifted alphabetic keys will generate their shifted equivalents. For example,
the A key unshifted will generate an uppercase A, and the {, | and } keys will generate
[, \, and ], respectively. The key for generating ~ and ` is disabled.
XmitFnctn (A)
Factory default: Unselected
This option determines whether escape sequences generated by control and function
keys are sent to the host or only to the terminal emulation.
When unselected, escape sequences are only sent to the terminal emulation. When
selected, escape sequences are sent to the host. If the Local Echo option is selected, the
sequences will also be sent to the terminal emulation.
6-30
Setup Menus
SPOW (B)
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of the SPace OverWrite option determines whether or not keyboard
entered spaces overwrite existing characters. When unselected, keyboard entered
spaces will overwrite existing characters.
Selecting this option will cause the SPOW latch to be enabled. The latch can then be
activated by a carriage return. When activated, keyboard entered spaces will cause the
cursor to move forward without deleting characters that already exist. The latch can be
deactivated by a tab, line feed or home-up command. This will cause spaces to
overwrite existing characters as normal.
InhEolWrp (C)
Factory default: Unselected
The Inhibit End of line Wrap option determines whether characters wrap to the next
line when the right margin is reached. When selected (i.e. inhibited), on reaching the
right margin, the last character position will be overwritten with every new character
received until a carriage return or other cursor movement command is issued.
LineTx (D)
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether data is sent a line or a page at a time
when in Edit mode.
When this option is selected, data will be transmitted a line at a time. When unselected,
data will be transmitted a page at a time. Page data will either be from the beginning of
display memory or from the current cursor position.
InhHndShk (G)
InhDC2 (H)
Factory default: Unselected
The combined setting of these two options determine the type of handshaking used
when blocks of data are transmitted to the host.
One of three types of handshake may be used:
1. No handshake. Blocks of data are sent immediately when the relevant transmit key
is pressed.
2. DC1 handshake. Data is only sent to the host when the host sends an ASCII DC1
control code to request it.
3. DC1/DC2/DC1 handshake. The host sends an ASCII DC1 control code, to which
the emulator replies by sending a DC2 code if ready to transmit. The host sends
the DC1 code again to cause the data block to be transmitted.
6-31
Setup Menus
The type of handshake used for block transfers is determined by the type of block
transfer to be performed, the mode that the HP70092 emulation currently operating in
(character, block line, block page, or modify mode), and the setting of these two
options.
The setting of these two options will have the following general effect:
InhHndShk only selected:
The DC1/DC2/DC1 handshake or no handshake will be used.
InhDC2 only selected:
The DC1 handshake or no handshake will be used.
InhHndShk and InhDC2 selected:
No handshake will be used.
Enq/Ack Pacing
Factory default: Selected
The setting of this option determines whether the Hewlett Packard ENQ ACK
handshake is used or not. When selected, the host can send an ASCII ENQ (enquiry)
control code at the end of transmission asking if the data has been processed, to which
the emulator will reply by sending an ACK (acknowledge) code when it has. Note that
this form of handshaking has the lowest priority after hardware and XON/XOFF
handshaking.
EscXfer
Factory default: Unselected
This option determines whether escape sequences relating to the display are sent when
the display memory is transferred to the printer.
When unselected, escape sequences relating to the display are not sent to the printer.
When selected, each line transferred to the printer will begin with an escape sequence
to select the primary character set and stop any character enhancements. When escape
sequences relating to the display are encountered within the data (for example, to
change the character set), they will be sent to the printer.
Destructive Backspace
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether or not pressing the Backspace key will
cause characters to be deleted.
CR = CR/NULL
Factory default: Unselected
This option must only be selected if you are going to use the QEDIT application. It
overcomes a bug within QEDIT that ignores the LF character if the terminal transmits
CR/LF. Inserting a NULL after the CR character cures the problem.
6-32
Setup Menus
Display Form Feeds
Factory default: Selected
When selected, this will cause form feeds to be represented on the display as FF
characters.
Ignore Form Feeds
Factory default: Unselected
When the emulator receives a form feed command from the host it normally results in
a line feed on the display in HP 700/92 mode. Selecting this option will cause the
emulator to ignore all form feed commands received from the host.
Return Def
Factory default: ^M (i.e. CR)
This enables you to define the function of the Return key. Up to two characters may
be used to define the key. If a second character is a space, it will be ignored.
To change the current definition, delete the definition displayed in the text box and
type in the new one, either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value
of the ASCII character.
For example, the default code for the Return key function, CR (carriage return), can
be entered by typing the characters ^ and M, representing the keys Ctrl + M which,
when pressed together would generate the CR code.
Decimal values are entered as three-digit numbers immediately preceded by an
underscore character. Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero. For
example, the decimal value of CR is 13, so this would be entered as _013. Refer to the
ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references.
Start Column
Factory default: 1
This text box is used to specify the start column for transmitted data when no logical
start-of-text pointer is present and the Return or Enter keys are pressed in Modify
Line or Modify All mode.
Usually a start-of-text pointer is automatically generated to designate the leftmost
character in the current line if it is the last line of data in display memory. This pointer
will remain in display memory until the line is deleted. If the line has no start-of-text
pointer, data transmission will begin at the start column specified by this option. The
column range is from 1 to 80 inclusive.
Note: The setting of this option may be temporarily redefined using
one of the Margin/Tab/Col function keys. See the HP700/92
Emulation chapter for details.
6-33
Setup Menus
FldSeparator
Factory default: ^_ (i.e. US)
This text box is used to specify the ASCII character used to indicate the end of each
protected field (except the last) that is sent in Edit Mode.
To change the current definition, delete the definition displayed in the text box and
type in the new one, either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value
of the ASCII character. For example, the default ASCII character US can be entered by
typing the characters ^ and _, representing the keys Ctrl + _ which, when pressed
together would generate the US code.
Decimal values are entered as three-digit numbers immediately preceded by an
underscore character. Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero. For
example, the decimal value of US is 31, so this would be entered as _031. Refer to the
ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references.
BlkTerminator
Factory default: ^^ (i.e. RS)
This text box is used to specify the ASCII character sent to the host to indicate the end
of a data block transmission.
To change the current definition, delete the definition displayed in the text box and
type in the new one, either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value
of the ASCII character. For example, the default ASCII character RS can be entered by
typing the character ^ twice, representing the keys Ctrl + ^ which, when pressed
together would generate the RS code.
Decimal values are entered as three-digit numbers immediately preceded by an
underscore character. Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero. For
example, the decimal value of RS is 30, so this would be entered as _030. Refer to the
ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references.
Terminal ID
Factory default: 70092
This specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification
request. (Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported.)
Clicking the arrow button will display a drop-down list box showing the available
settings, 70092, 2392A, 2622A, 70094 or 70096. If you are using the keyboard, press
the up or down arrow keys until the setting required is displayed. You can either select
from this list or enter a different terminal identity in the text box.
6-34
Setup Menus
Pages
Factory default: 4
In HP 700-92/96 mode the display area is 80 or 132 columns by 24 lines with 168
lines stored off-screen, giving a total display memory of 192 lines. This option enables
you to specify whether display memory is divided into 2, 4, 6 or 8 pages.
Typeahead Enabled
Factory default: Unselected
When the emulator is connected to an HP 3000, you normally have to wait for the host
to send a prompt before you can enter new data at the keyboard, otherwise the data is
ignored. Selecting this option will enable you to type continuously without waiting for
the prompt. Data is stored in the keyboard buffer and each time the emulator receives a
prompt it will send a line of data to the host. Block mode also supports typeahead.
Host Prompt Character
Factory default: ^Q (i.e. DC1)
Some hosts send a prompt character to the terminal to indicate that they are ready to
receive the next line or block of data. This option enables you to specify the prompt
character for your particular host. Most hosts either use the DC1 (^Q) character (e.g.
HP 3000) or no prompt (^@) character.
When Typeahead Enabled is selected, the emulator will wait for the specified prompt
character from the host before transmitting the next line from the keyboard buffer.
6-35
Setup Menus
PT250 Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting PT 250 in the Settings menu.
Screen Format
Factory default: 80 x 24
The setting of this option determines the display memory format, the number of lines
and columns that are displayed, and the amount of data transmitted to the host when
the emulation is in Block mode (as determined by the setting of the Block Mode
option in this dialog box).
Selecting 80 x 24 will enable 24 rows of 80 columns to be displayed at the same time.
In Block mode, this specifies 1-page mode transmission.
Selecting 80 x 48 will enable 80 columns by 24 rows to be displayed, while another 24
rows are stored off-screen in the display buffer. These may be scrolled into view using
the scroll bar. In Block mode, this specifies 2-page mode transmission.
Selecting 132 x 27 will enable 27 rows of 132 columns to be displayed at the same
time, useful for spreadsheets. In Block mode, this specifies 1-page mode transmission.
Selecting 80 x 25 will enable 25 rows of 80 columns to be displayed at the same time.
In Block mode, this specifies 1-page mode transmission.
Block Mode
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines how data is transmitted to the host.
When unselected, each character entered from the keyboard is immediately sent to the
host which processes it then echoes it back to the display.
When Block mode is selected, characters are displayed but not sent to the host until the
Enter key is pressed. The size of the block of characters is determined by the Line
Block Mode option.
6-36
Setup Menus
Line Block Mode
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines how much data is transmitted when the emulation
is in Block mode and the Enter key is pressed.
When unselected, the contents of the screen (page) will be sent to the host. When
selected, the contents of the current cursor line will be sent.
Multinational Character Sets
Factory default: Selected
The setting of this option determines which characters may be generated from the
keyboard.
When unselected, the character set for the keyboard nationality specified in the
Emulation Settings dialog box is mapped to G0, the default character set mode (as
indicated on the status line). In effect, national characters from the Additional character
set are swapped with Standard (ASCII) characters to form the National set mapped to
G0, so the Additional set contains the missing ASCII characters. This means that you
can still generate the full range of ASCII and Additional characters by using the Char
Set function (refer to the PT250 Emulation chapter for details).
When this option is selected, both ASCII and Additional characters are available,
enabling characters from any keyboard nationality to be generated.
Truncate At End Of Line
Factory default: Selected
This option determines what happens to received characters when the rightmost
column of the display is reached.
When unselected, on reaching the end of the line, the next character will be placed in
the first column of the following line. When this option is selected, following
characters will not be displayed.
Screen Wrap
Factory default: Unselected
When screen wrap is selected, display memory is treated in a circular fashion. When
the cursor reaches the last line it will automatically wrap to the first line again, and vice
versa.
When screen wrap is unselected, the cursor will not move above the first line or below
the last line.
6-37
Setup Menus
Received LF is CR/LF
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines how the emulation interprets received line feed
characters. Selecting it will cause a carriage return command to be appended to every
line feed command received.
Received CR is CR/LF
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines how the emulation interprets received carriage
return characters. Selecting it will cause a line feed command to be appended to every
carriage return command received.
Margin Bell Enabled
Factory default: Unselected
This option enables or disables an audible warning when the cursor approaches the
right margin (column 71 or 123).
8-Bit Mode
Factory default: Unselected
This option determines whether characters are transmitted to the host in 7-bit or 8-bit
format.
When unselected, 8-bit characters are converted into 7-bit equivalents, so shift-in,
shift-out characters are generated. When this option is selected, all characters are
transmitted unchanged.
Swap Fnn/PFnn Keys
Factory default: Unselected
This option enables you to swap the functions of the keys mapped as PF1 through
PF12 on your keyboard with the functions they have when used with the Alt key. For
example, when this option is selected, PF11 will function as Help when pressed on its
own, and as PF11 when used in conjunction with Alt.
6-38
Setup Menus
IBM 3151 Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting IBM 3151 in the Settings menu.
Operating Mode
Factory default: Echo
The setting of this option determines how keyboard entered data is sent to the host and
displayed on the screen.
In Echo mode, keyboard entered data is sent only to the host. The host is then
responsible for returning the data to the display.
In Character mode, keyboard entered data is sent simultaneously to the host and the
display.
In Block mode, keyboard entered data is displayed and processed locally, allowing
you to edit it before a block of data is sent to the host.
Row and Column
Factory default: 24 x 80
This option enables you to select one of several display formats:
24 rows x 80 columns
25 rows x 80 columns
24 rows x 132 columns
25 rows x 132 columns
28 rows x 80 columns
28 rows x 132 columns
6-39
Setup Menus
Note that the contents of the display will be cleared when you change the display
format.
Turnaround Char
Factory default: CR
This option specifies the line turnaround character (LTC) that is generated when a
Read command is received or one of the block data transmission keys is pressed. Note
that selecting DC3 will disable the XON/XOFF inbound and outbound pacing
characters.
Forcing Insert
Factory default: Both
This option specifies how an insert command affects displayed data when the screen is
full.
When set to Off, you will not be able to perform an insert operation.
When set to Line, you will be able to insert one or more lines, using the Ins Ln key for
example. The contents of the current and all following lines will move down the
number of lines inserted, causing the lines originally at the bottom of the display to be
discarded.
When set to Character, you will be able to insert one or more characters in the current
line. Characters to the right of the cursor position will move along. If the Auto Wrap
option is set to No, then characters originally at the end of the current line will be
discarded. If set to Yes, characters on all following lines will move along, forcing
characters at the end of the last line to be discarded.
When set to Both, the function of the Line and Character settings will be enabled.
Insert Character
Factory default: Space
The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing the Insert key.
When set to Space, a space character will be inserted after the current cursor position.
When set to Mode, the emulation will enter Insert mode when the Insert key is
pressed.
Tab Operation
Factory default: Field
The setting of this option determines whether tab stops are according to field attribute
characters or column-tab definitions.
When set to Field, tab stops in a formatted page are provided by field attribute
characters. Column-tab definitions are ignored.
6-40
Setup Menus
When set to Column, tab stops are provided by column-tab definitions. Field attribute
characters are ignored.
Enter Key
Factory default: Return
This option enables you to specify whether the Enter key performs the same function
as the Return key or the Send key.
Return Key
Factory default: Field
This option specifies whether or not the cursor can enter a line within a protected field
when the Return key is pressed.
When set to Field, the result of pressing the Return key is determined by the setting of
the Auto New Line option and the cursor will move to the next unprotected line.
When set to New Line, the result of pressing the Return key is determined by the
setting of the Auto New Line option.
Send Operation
Factory default: Page
The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing the Send and Send Line
keys.
When set to Page, the contents of the current page will be sent to the host when Send
is pressed, or the current line if Send Line is pressed.
When set to Line, the contents of the current line will be sent to the host when Send is
pressed, or the current page if Send Line is pressed.
Auto Wrap
Factory default: Selected
The setting of this option determines what happens to the cursor and data sent to the
display when the end of the current line is reached.
When selected, the cursor will automatically move to the beginning of the next line.
Note that this will always be the case in block mode or in a formatted page regardless
of the setting of this option.
When unselected, the cursor will remain at the end of the current line and each new
character sent to the display will overwrite the character already occupying the cursor
position.
6-41
Setup Menus
Auto LF
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option in conjunction with that of the Auto New Line option
determines the destination of the cursor when the Return key is pressed or the CR
character is received.
When both this and the Auto New Line options are unselected, the cursor will move
to the first position of the current line when the Return key is pressed or the CR
character is received.
When this is unselected and Auto New Line is selected, the cursor will move to the
first position of the next line when the Return key is pressed.
When this is selected and Auto New Line is unselected, the cursor will move to the
first position of the next line when the Return key is pressed or the CR character is
received.
When both this and the Auto New Line options are selected, the cursor will move to
the first position of the line after the next line when the Return key is pressed.
Auto New Line
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing the Return key.
When unselected, the Return key will generate a CR (carriage return) character.
When selected, the Return key will generate a CR and an LF (line feed) character.
Terminal ID
Factory default: Unspecified
This specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification
request. The terminal ID can be up to 20 characters long. (Note that not all features of
the specified terminal may be supported.)
Model
Factory default: 11
This option identifies the terminal model being emulated in response to a terminal
identification request from the host. Model 11 supports only one viewport containing
24 or 25 rows and 80 columns. Model 31 supports up to three viewports (80 or 132
columns wide) and pass-through printing.
6-42
Setup Menus
Wyse Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Wyse in the Settings menu. Note that some
of the settings apply to the TVI 910+, TVI 920, TVI 925, ADDS A2 and HZ 1500
emulations in addition to the Wyse emulations. Also, some settings may not apply to
the particular Wyse emulation currently running. Selecting a setting that is not
applicable to the current emulation will cause the emulator to use the default setting for
that emulation when the dialog box is exited.
Note: The Tab Stops dialog box displayed by clicking the Set Tabs
button is described later in this chapter, after the Terminal
Settings description.
Lines
Factory default: 24
This option applies to the WY-50+ and WY-60 emulations and specifies the number
of data lines displayed on the screen below the status line. Note that the other
emulations only support 24 lines and a label line.
24
25
42
43
24 data lines and a label line at the bottom.
25 data lines but no label line.
42 data lines and a label line at the bottom.
43 data lines but no label line.
6-43
Setup Menus
Page Size
Factory default: 1 x Lines
This option applies to the WY-50+ and WY-60 emulations and specifies the size of a
page in display memory in multiples of the Lines setting. Note that the other
emulations only support 1 x Lines.
The 1 + Rest setting will divide the display memory into two pages, the first
containing the number of lines specified by the Lines option, the second containing all
the remaining lines.
Note that changing the page format will cause the entire display memory to be cleared,
the cursor will move to the home position and the scroll margin will be reset.
Status Line
Factory default: Standard
This option applies to all emulations and enables you to specify the type of status line
displayed at the top of the screen, or remove it from the display.
Both the Standard and Extended status lines display messages about the state of the
emulation or application. The Extended status line displays additional editing status
messages. Refer to the Wyse Emulations chapter for details.
Block End
Factory default: US / CR
This option applies to all emulations and specifies the ASCII characters used to
indicate the end of a line and a block when a block of data is sent to the host.
When set to US / CR, the line terminator is a US character and the block terminator is
a CR character. When set to CRLF / ETX, the line terminators are the CR and LF
characters, and the block terminator is an ETX character.
Attribute Type
Factory default: Page
The setting of this option determines whether display attributes are active to the end of
the line or the end of the page. The Character setting only applies to the WY-60
emulation and causes attributes to only apply to characters written to the screen. The
WY-50, ADDS A2 and HZ 1500 emulations only support the Page setting.
Code Page
Factory default: PC Multinational 437
This option determines the set of characters that form the second half of the
multinational character set when in multinational mode (as set by the Character Set
Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box).
6-44
Setup Menus
ASCII Font
Factory default: WY ASCII
This option determines whether the Wyse ASCII or PC standard character set is used
as the first half of the multinational character set when in multinational mode (as set by
the Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box).
WPRT Attribute
Factory default: Dim
This option applies to all emulations and enables you to specify the appearance of
write-protected characters on the display. They can be displayed in reverse video,
dimmed or blinking. The WY-50+ and WY-60 emulations also support the underline
and invisible attributes.
Multiple Page
Factory default: Unselected
This option applies to the WY-50+, WY-60 and all the TVI emulations. It determines
whether or not more than one page of display memory can be accessed. When selected,
all pages will be accessible. See also the Auto Page option.
Note that the TVI emulations support two pages of 24 lines each when this and the
Auto Page options are selected, regardless of the Lines and Page Size settings.
80 / 132 Clears
Factory default: Unselected
This option applies to the WY-50+ and WY-60 emulations and determines whether or
not data is cleared from the display when the number of columns is changed. The
screen is always cleared when the number of columns is changed in the other
emulations.
Economy 80
Factory default: Unselected
This option applies to the WY-50+ and WY-60 emulations and enables 80 column
display with more lines of display memory.
Auto Scroll
Factory default: Selected
This option applies to all emulations and determines what happens when the cursor is
moved beyond the last line of the current page. When selected, the displayed data
scrolls up and the cursor remains on the last line. When unselected, the cursor moves to
the top of the same page.
6-45
Setup Menus
Auto Page
Factory default: Unselected
This option applies to the WY-50+, WY-60 and all the TVI emulations. It determines
what happens when the cursor reaches the top or bottom of the page.
When unselected, the cursor either moves to the top of the same page or data scrolls up
from the bottom, as determined by the setting of the Auto Scroll option. When
selected, a new page of memory will be displayed.
Note: The other emulations will always display a new page of
memory.
Auto Wrap
Factory default: Selected
The setting of this option determines whether characters wrap to the next line when the
right margin is reached. When unselected, on reaching the right margin, the last
character position will be overwritten by every new character received.
DEL = DestBS
Factory default: Unselected
This option applies to the WY-50+ and WY-60 emulations and determines what effect
an ASCII DEL character has on displayed characters. The other emulations ignore the
DEL character.
When unselected, the DEL character is ignored. When selected, the DEL character is
interpreted as a destructive backspace, causing the character to the left of the cursor to
be deleted and the cursor to move into that position.
Margin Bell
Factory default: Unselected
This option applies to all emulations and specifies whether or not an audible warning
sounds when the cursor reaches a specified column. The default bell column number is
72 in 80 column mode and 124 in 132 column mode.
Enhance
Factory default: Selected
When this option is selected, the emulator will recognize an additional set of Wyse
codes which are not normally supported by specific non-Wyse terminals.
Answerback Mode
Factory default: Unselected
This option applies to all emulations and specifies whether or not an answerback
message is automatically sent to the host in response to an ASCII ENQ character.
6-46
Setup Menus
Send ACK
Factory default: Selected
This option applies to all emulations and specifies whether or not an ASCII ACK
character is sent to the host port after certain commands have been executed.
Block Mode
Factory default: Unselected
This option applies to all emulations. In Block mode, keyboard entered data is
displayed and processed locally, allowing you to edit it before a block of data is sent to
the host. When Block mode is disabled, data is sent to the host as it is entered at the
keyboard.
Colour Support
Factory default: Unselected
When this option is selected, an additional set of host commands will be recognized to
determine the colours used for the display. Wyse 350 colour commands will be
recognized in all modes except Wyse 60, which will use Wyse 60 colour commands.
Application Key Mode
Factory default: Unselected
When application key mode is selected, the function keys and certain editing keys will
send application codes when pressed, regardless of whether or not the keys have been
redefined. When this option is not selected, the keys will send their programmed
definitions.
CR=CR/NULL
Factory default: Selected
This option allows you to disable the NULL being automatically sent on CR.
6-47
Setup Menus
TA6530 Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting TA 6530 in the Settings menu.
Power On Mode
Factory default: Conversational
This option determines the operating mode that is in effect when the TA6530
emulation is entered.
Note: Changing the current setting will not take effect until you reload the emulation, so you will need to save the new setting
before exiting the emulation.
Conversational and Block modes are normally used for applications running on a
NonStop host system, and ANSI mode for applications running on an LXN host
system. Save the new setting before exiting the emulation by selecting Save Session in
the File menu.
Packet Block
Factory default: OFF
This option specifies whether you want to use packet blocking for X.25 communications line support, and if so, the size of the packet block. The size may be set to any of
the listed 128-byte increments, or, by setting this option to OFF, the default size of
260 bytes.
Status Border
Factory default: Selected
This option enables you to display a thin border which separates the status line from
the rest of the lines on the display.
Telserv Format
Factory default: Selected
The setting of this option determines how network data is treated. When selected, data
will be treated in Tandem network server (Telserv) format. When unselected, data will
be treated in serial format.
6-48
Setup Menus
Return Function
Factory default: Unselected
This option specifies whether or not the function of the Enter key is defined by the
application when in Block mode. When selected, the key is regarded as an application
specific function key. Normally this should be unselected.
Bell On
Factory default: Selected
This option enables or disables an audible tone which is heard when the emulation
warns you about something. This needs to be selected when you want to use the Bell
Column feature.
Bell Column
Factory default: 0
This option enables you to specify a particular column on the display which will cause
an audible warning to sound when the cursor passes through it.
The valid range of column numbers is 1 to 80. Setting this option to 0 will disable the
feature. The Bell On option must be selected for this feature to work.
6-49
Setup Menus
IBM 3270 Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting IBM 3270 in the Settings menu.
IBM 3270 Model
Factory default: 3278-2-E
This specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification
request. (Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported.)
TN3287 printing is supported by selecting 3287-1.
One of four display sizes can be selected:
3278/9-2
3278/9-3
3278/9-4
3278/9-5
24 rows by 80 columns
32 rows by 80 columns
43 rows by 80 columns
27 rows by 132 columns
3278 settings with the E extension provide support for the following extended
attributes (these are supported by the 3279 as standard):
3270 Field Attributes
Extended Highlighting
Foreground Colour
Query Reply Inbound Structured Fields
6-50
Setup Menus
Numeral Swap
Factory default: Unselected
When using a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard, this will cause all numbers
to be displayed using the National character set when in Latin mode.
Symbol Swap
Factory default: Unselected
Selecting this option will cause symbols such as brackets to be displayed the correct
way round when typing in right-to-left mode.
Rule Line
Factory default: Cross
A rule can be displayed across the emulation workspace at the cursor position by
pressing the keys Alt + Page Down, which toggles it on and off. The setting of this
option determines whether it is displayed as a horizontal rule, vertical rule or both.
Follows Cursor
Factory default: Unselected
When the rule is displayed in the emulation workspace, the setting of this option
determines whether or not the rule follows the cursor when it moves.
Notice Board Options
This will display the Notice Board Setup dialog box as described in the next section.
Keyboard Unlock Delay
Factory default: 0
This option is available when the IBM 3270 Model is not set to a printer. When the
keyboard is unlocked by the host, this specifies a delay in milliseconds before
characters are sent.
Print Bypass Character
This option is available when the IBM 3270 Model option is set to a printer. The
Start Seq box enables you to enter the character or sequence of characters that initiate
a print bypass.
The end sequence that terminates the print bypass can be specified either by entering
the actual characters in the End Seq box when Specify End Sequence is selected, or
by specifying the number of characters that make up the end sequence in the End
Length box when End on Non-Hex is selected.
If no End Seq is entered, the bypass is assumed to be for a single pair of characters
only. If an End Seq is specified, characters in the data stream between the start and end
are interpreted as encoded ASCII. For example, “1B0A” becomes ASCII 27 10 (ESC
LF).
6-51
Setup Menus
Selecting End on Non-Hex enables you to specify the number of characters that make
up the end sequence in the End Length box. The bypass will then terminate as soon as
a non-hexadecimal character is received (any character except in the range 0 through 9
and A through F) followed by the end sequence.
Characters can be entered in several ways. For example, to specify the ASCII escape
character, you can enter either _027, \u001B, \e, \033, or even ^[.
Font
This enables you to specify the font to be used for displaying characters. The available
settings depend on the fonts installed.
Telnet Options
Clicking the Telnet Options button will display a dialog box with additional options.
These are described in the Getting Started chapter.
National Character Settings & APL2
This enables you to select the character set to be used. The IDs of the code page,
character set and CCSID used for the currently selected language are displayed under
the User Specified button. Clicking User Specified will display a dialog box that
enables you to change these settings.
There are separate Code Page, Character Set and CCSID entries for the Single Byte
Character Set (SBCS) and, if supported, Double Byte Character Set (DBCS). These
should only be changed by the System Administrator. If they have been changed and
you wish to restore the default settings, click the Default button in the IBM 3270
Settings dialog box. The following table shows the default settings.
6-52
Setup Menus
Default Language, Codepage & Character Set Settings
Language
Type
Codepage
Char Set
English (US)
SBCS
37
697
CCSID
37
English (UK)
SBCS
285
697
285
500
Belgian
SBCS
500
697
Canadian French
SBCS
37
697
37
Danish
SBCS
277
697
277
Finnish
SBCS
278
697
278
German
SBCS
273
697
273
Dutch
SBCS
37
697
37
Italian
SBCS
280
697
280
Swiss French
SBCS
500
697
500
Swiss German
SBCS
500
697
500
Swedish
SBCS
278
697
278
Norwegian
SBCS
277
697
277
French
SBCS
297
697
297
Spanish
SBCS
284
697
284
Portuguese
SBCS
37
697
37
Japanese Kanji + Katakana
SBCS
290
1172
290
DBCS
300
1001
930
Korean
SBCS
833
1173
833
DBCS
834
934
933
Simplified Chinese
SBCS
836
1174
836
DBCS
837
937
937
Traditional Chinese
SBCS
37
1175
37
DBCS
835
935
935
Hebrew New Code
SBCS
424
941
424
Hebrew Old Code
SBCS
803
941
424
Thai
SBCS
838
1176
838
Greek
SBCS
875
925
875
Cyrillic
SBCS
880
960
880
Turkish
SBCS
1026
1152
1026
1025
Russian
SBCS
1025
1150
Czech
SBCS
870
959
870
Slovak
SBCS
870
959
870
Polish
SBCS
870
959
870
Icelandic
SBCS
871
697
871
Arabic
SBCS
420
697
285
6-53
Setup Menus
Notice Board Setup
This dialog box is displayed by clicking the Notice Board Setup button in the IBM
3270 Settings dialog box, or by pressing the keys Alt + F2. Refer to the Notice Board
Facility section in the IBM 3270 Emulation chapter for information on how to use the
Notice Board.
Notice Board Enabled
Factory default: Unselected
When this option is selected, pressing the Zoom key will toggle the display between
full screen (i.e. the screen currently containing the cursor) and split screen (host screen
and Notice Board) mode. The following Zoom Settings options determine which is
displayed above the other. Note that the host screen contains the same number of rows
and columns whether displayed full screen or in split screen.
Zoom Settings
Factory default: Below Host
These toggle settings determine whether the Notice Board is displayed above or below
the host screen. When viewing the display, pointers at each end of the dividing line
between the two screens indicate which is the host screen.
Copy to F-Key Enabled
Factory default: Unselected
This enables the facility for copying screen data to a function key. Refer to the
Copying Screen Data To A Function Key section in the IBM 3270 Emulation chapter
for details.
6-54
Setup Menus
Copy Only User Fields to F-Key
Factory default: Selected
This will enable only data contained in user entry fields in the selected area to be
copied to a function key. Refer to the Copying Screen Data To A Function Key section
in the IBM 3270 Emulation chapter for details.
Copy All Data to F-Key
Factory default: Unselected
This will enable all screen data (protected and unprotected) in the selected area to be
copied. Refer to the Copying Screen Data To A Function Key section in the IBM 3270
Emulation chapter for details.
Copy Function Enabled
Factory default: Unselected
This determines whether the copy functions are available for copying selected data to
another area of the display or to a function key.
Single Step Macros
Factory default: Unselected
Selecting this option will enable an Fn key macro to be played one keystroke at a time
by pressing the spacebar for each keystroke after issuing a play Fn key command. The
status line will display the contents of the macro and the cursor position in the status
line indicates the point that has been reached in the macro play back. Refer to the Play
Back Keystrokes section in the IBM 3270 Emulation chapter for details.
6-55
Setup Menus
IBM 5250 Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting IBM 5250 in the Settings menu.
IBM 5250 Model
Factory default: 3179_2
This specifies what is reported back to the host in response to a terminal identification
request. (Note that not all features of the specified terminal may be supported.) The
terminal models and their display characteristics are listed below:
6-56
Model
Display
Rows x Columns
5291_1
5292_2
5251_11
3179_2
3196_A1
3180_2
3477_FC
3477_FG
3486_BA
3487_HA
3487_HC
Monochrome
Colour
Monochrome
Colour
Monochrome
Monochrome
Colour
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Colour
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80 (default)
24 x 80
24 x 80 and 27 x 132
24 x 80 and 27 x 132
24 x 80 and 27 x 132
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80
Setup Menus
5555_B01
5555_C01
Monochrome
Colour
24 x 80
24 x 80
The printer models are listed below:
3812-1
5553-B01
Single byte printer
Double byte printer
If double byte character sets are supported, then select either 5555_B01 (monochrome)
or 5555_C01 (colour) for display, or 5553-B01 for printing.
Keyboard Type
The settings of the Keyboard Type and National Character Settings options below
will reflect the default settings for the chosen language and should only be changed by
the System Administrator. If they have been changed and you wish to restore the
default settings in this dialog box, click the Default button.
Unlock Delay
Factory default: 0
When the keyboard is unlocked by the host, this specifies a delay in milliseconds
before characters are sent.
Rule Line
Factory default: Cross
A rule can be displayed across the emulation workspace at the cursor position by
pressing the keys Alt + Page Down, which toggles it on and off. The setting of this
option determines whether it is displayed as a horizontal rule, vertical rule or both
(cross).
Follows Cursor
Factory default: Unselected
When the rule is displayed in the emulation workspace, the setting of this option
determines whether or not the rule follows the cursor when it moves.
Numeral Swap
Factory default: Unselected
When using a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard, this will cause all numbers
to be displayed using the National character set when in Latin mode.
Symbol Swap
Factory default: Unselected
Selecting this option will cause symbols such as brackets to be displayed the correct
way round when typing in right-to-left mode.
6-57
Setup Menus
Telnet Options
Clicking the Telnet Options button will display a dialog box with additional options.
These are described in the Getting Started chapter.
Monochrome
Factory default: Depends on terminal type
By default the setting of this option will match the normal display characteristic of the
IBM 5250 Model selected, as shown in the list above. In the emulator, all terminal
types support both monochrome and colour display.
When monochrome is selected, characters will be displayed in green and intense fields
will be displayed in white. When monochrome is not selected, the settings specified in
the Attributes dialog box will be used for the display.
Ignore Host Cursor Style
Factory default: Unselected
Selecting this option will cause the emulator to ignore any commands from the host to
change the cursor style.
Enhanced UI
Factory default: Unselected
Selecting this option will enable support of the IBM 5250 Extended User Interface for
generating windows on the screen. (Note that menus and scroll bars are not supported.)
Hide WP Controls
Factory default: Unselected
This enables you to toggle the display of word processing characters on and off.
Field Minus Justification
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether pressing the Field Minus key affects the
last digit (unselected) or the space following the last digit (selected).
Font
This enables you to specify the font to be used for displaying characters. The available
settings depend on the fonts installed.
National Character Settings
This enables you to select the character set to be used. The IDs of the code page and
character set used for the currently selected language are displayed under the User
Specified button. Clicking User Specified will display a dialog box that enables you
to change these settings.
6-58
Setup Menus
There are separate entries for the Single Byte Character Set (SBCS) and, if supported,
Double Byte Character Set (DBCS). These should only be changed by the System
Administrator. If they have been changed and you wish to restore the default settings,
click the Default button in the IBM 5250 Settings dialog box. The following table
shows the default settings.
If double byte character sets (e.g. Japanese) are supported and you wish to use them,
then set the IBM 5250 Model to either 5555_B01 (monochrome) or 5555_C01
(colour) for display, or 5553-B01 for printing.
6-59
Setup Menus
Default Language, Character Set & Codepage Settings
Language
KBDTYPE
SBCS
CODEPAGE
37
English (US)
USB
697
English (UK)
UKB
697
285
Belgian
BLI
697
500
Canadian French
CAI
697
500
Danish
DMB
697
277
Finnish
FNB
697
278
German
AGB
697
273
Dutch
NEB
697
37
Italian
ITB
697
280
Swiss French
SFI
697
500
Swiss German
SGI
697
500
Swedish
SWB
697
278
Norwegian
NWB
697
277
French
FAB
697
297
Spanish
SPB
697
284
DBCS
CODEPAGE
Portuguese
PRB
697
37
Japanese Kanji + Katakana
JKB
1172
290
300
Korean
KOB
1173
833
834
Simplified Chinese
RCB
1174
836
837
Traditional Chinese
TAB
1175
37
835
Hebrew New Code
NCB
Hebrew Old Code
941
424
941
803
Thai
THB
1176
838
Greek
GNB
925
875
Cyrillic
CYB
960
880
Turkish
TRB
1152
1026
1025
Russian
RUB
1150
Czech
CSB
959
870
Slovak
SKB
959
870
Polish
POB
959
870
Icelandic
ICB
697
871
697
420
Arabic
6-60
CHARSET
Setup Menus
Unisys T27 Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Unisys T27 in the Settings menu.
General Settings
Protocol
Factory default: None
This can be set to None, Poll/Select or Point to Point.
Selecting Poll/Select will enable up to three environments. Only one environment can
be enabled when Point to Point is selected.
Tx Number
Factory default: 0
This specifies a sequence of numbers to ensure correct sequencing of messages sent
between the Unisys T27 emulation and the host. The valid numbers are as follows:
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
None
0/1 no checking
@/A no checking
0/1 checking
@/A checking
0/1, with * reset
@/A with * reset
0-9
0-99
0-999
0-9 with * reset
0-99 with * reset
0-999 with * reset
The * reset option enables the host or the Unisys T27 emulation to resequence by
sending an asterisk, for example, after a system failure, to ensure synchronization.
6-61
Setup Menus
Group Select Character
Factory default: ^D
This specifies a single character address so that the host can simultaneously transmit to
all terminals with that address.
Address
Factory default: ^D’
This enables you to specify a two-character group poll address that enables the host to
simultaneously poll all terminals with that address.
Downstream Terminal Port
Factory default: None
This specifies the port used to send transmissions to other terminals.
Beep on NAK
Factory default: Selected
Specifies whether an audible warning is emitted when the Unisys T27 emulation sends
a negative acknowledgement of a select received from the host.
Fast Select enabled
Factory default: Selected
Selecting this option will cause the Unisys T27 emulation to accept fast select, group
select, and broadcast select messages while not in receive ready mode.
Monitor mode enabled
Factory default: Unselected
When enabled, line activity is monitored and messages being transmitted to and from
stations on the data communications line to which you are connected are displayed.
Pass through printing enabled
Factory default: Unselected
Enables or disables pass through printing.
Return key in forms exits field
Factory default: Unselected
This determines the effect of the Return key in forms mode. When unselected, it
moves to the next line.
6-62
Setup Menus
Use optional poll/select characters
Factory default: Unselected
Specifies whether the optional poll select sequence, 7B 7C hex, is to be used instead of
the standard sequence 70 71 hex (default).
Environments Settings
Lines per page
Factory default: 24
This specifies the number of lines allocated to each logical page of data in the range 1
to 256.
Chars per line
Factory default: 80
This specifies the width of the page as 40, 80 or 132 characters.
Lines per Screen
Factory default: 24
This specifies the number of text lines to be displayed per full screen in the rage 0 to
24. Note that lines can be displayed as single-height or double-height as determined by
the setting of the Lines are double height option.
Alt US Char
Factory default: ^_
This specifies the character to be used as the unit separator. This will be converted into
a US character when you invoke forms mode.
Alt RS Char
Factory default: ^^
This specifies the character to be used as the record separator. This will be converted
into an RS character when you invoke forms mode.
Pages
Factory default: 2
This determines the number of pages in each environment, in the range 1 to 24.
Env
Factory default: 1
An environment is an area of memory reserved for exclusive use by applications. Up
to three environments can be defined (depending on the Protocol setting) and this
option specifies the number of the current environment definition.
6-63
Setup Menus
Address
Factory default: ^D’
The address can be any two characters, except NUL and SYNC, that uniquely identify
a T27 environment in a host network.
ID
Factory default: ENVMNT 1
This enables you to specify a name, up to eight characters long, which will be
displayed on the screen to identify the current environment.
Append CR to LF
Factory default: Unselected
When selected, all line feed characters received from the host will be appended with
carriage return characters.
Append LF to CR
Factory default: Selected
When selected, all carriage return characters received from the host will be appended
with line feed characters.
Append LF to Return key
Factory default: Unselected
This determines the result of pressing the Return key. When unselected, only a
carriage return is performed. When selected, a carriage return and line feed is
performed.
Auto form field advance
Factory default: Selected
The setting of this option determines whether the text cursor moves to the next
unprotected field when the current unprotected US field is filled.
CLR clears unprotected only
Factory default: Unselected
This specifies whether the page-clearing function clears all characters (default) or only
unprotected characters.
Cursor is a block (else underline)
Factory default: Selected
The cursor can be displayed as a block or underline character, depending on the setting
of this option.
6-64
Setup Menus
Cursor is hidden
Factory default: Unselected
The cursor can be displayed or hidden, depending on the setting of this option.
Cursor is static
Factory default: Selected
The cursor can be displayed as static or blinking, depending on the setting of this
option.
Cursor wrap around
Factory default: Selected
When selected, when the cursor reaches the last data position on the screen it will
automatically move to the home position.
DC1 clears line
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether the line is cleared or the emulator stays
in receive mode when a DC1 character is received.
DC2 advances dcp
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether the DCP (data comm pointer) is
advanced or forms are toggled when a DC2 character is received.
Display CR from host
Factory default: Unselected
When this option is selected, carriage return characters received from the host are
displayed.
Display CR from keyboard
Factory default: Unselected
When this option is selected, carriage return characters entered using the keyboard are
displayed.
Display ETX from host
Factory default: Unselected
When this option is selected, an ETX character received from the host will be stored at
the DCP (data comm pointer) location when the emulation is in nonforms mode.
6-65
Setup Menus
Display HT when tabbing from host
Factory default: Unselected
When this option is selected, an HT character is displayed when a tab character is
received in a message from the host.
Display HT when tabbing from keyboard
Factory default: Unselected
When this option is selected, an HT character is displayed when the Tab key is
pressed.
ETX advance
Factory default: Unselected
This determines the response of the Unisys T27 emulation when an ETX character is
received.
FF clears tabs
Factory default: Unselected
This determines whether the tabs are cleared when a form feed character is received.
Form delimiters visible
Factory default: Selected
This determines whether form delimiter characters are displayed as a graphic (default)
or as a blank.
Form xmit to cursor
Factory default: Selected
This determines how the XMIT key works in forms mode.
Insert key inserts space
Factory default: Selected
The setting of this option determines whether the Insert key inserts a space when
pressed.
Line at a time xmit
Factory default: Unselected
This determines how much data can be transmitted to the host at a time.
When this option is not selected, a message as large as one full page of data can be
transmitted. When selected, only the line containing the text cursor can be transmitted.
6-66
Setup Menus
Lines are double height
Factory default: Unselected
This determines whether each line is single-height (normal) or double-height.
Lower case lockout
Factory default: Unselected
When selected, this will cause the LOCK key to be on so that only UPPERCASE
characters can be generated.
SOH clears screen
Factory default: Unselected
When selected, this will cause the Unisys T27 emulation to automatically clear the
screen whenever it receives an SOH character.
SOH exits forms
Factory default: Selected
When selected, this will cause the Unisys T27 emulation to automatically exit forms
mode whenever it receives an SOH character.
SO/SI XTN
SO/SI XLT
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of these options determine the effect of the ESC SO and ESC SI
sequences when receiving or transmitting data.
When receiving from the host, the setting of the SO/SI XTN option determines
whether the sequences are used to switch between standard and extended character sets
(selected), or reverse highlight and underline (unselected).
When transmitting to the host, the setting of both options determine the sequences
used for switching between standard and extended character sets, and reverse highlight
and underline as follows:
XTN
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
XLT
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SO
Reverse Video
SI
Underline
Extended
Sent as
Sent as
Begin
SO
ESC’.
ESC’.
ESC’.
SI
ESC’/
ESC’/
ESC’/
ESC SO
SO
ESC SO
SO
Characters
End
ESC SI
SI
ESC SI
SI
The SO (shift out) and SI (shift in) sequences allow switching between two sets of
characters: the standard character set and the extended character set. Each set consists
of 128 characters. When an ESC SO sequence is received from the host, the emulation
6-67
Setup Menus
displays all subsequent characters from the extended character set until an ESC SI
sequence is received to switch back to the normal character set.
The Unisys T27 emulation transmits an ESC SO sequence when it encounters
extended characters in its display buffer and an ESC SI when standard characters are
to be sent. There is no automatic shift in (ESC SI) at the end of a data transmission
block.
SPCFY key sends hex values
Factory default: Unselected
This determines whether the SPCFY key transmits in hexadecimal or ASCII (default).
SPCFY key sends page number
Factory default: Unselected
This determines whether the SPCFY key transmits the page number in addition to the
column and row information it usually sends.
VT page advance
Factory default: Unselected
If the emulation is configured for 32 lines per page, vertical tabs are set on lines 1, 9,
17 and 25 when this option is selected.
Xmit printer status
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether the Unisys T27 emulation informs the
host of the current printer status.
Tab Settings
This enables you to set tab stops for each environment.
Tab stops are set every eight columns by default when the Type option is set to Fixed,
as indicated by the T character above the relevant column numbers.
Individual tab stops can be toggled on or off by setting the Type option to Variable
then clicking the mouse pointer on or above the relevant column number.
To save the tab stops, click the Apply button.
To remove all the tab stops when in Variable mode, click the Clear button. Note that
switching from Fixed to Variable mode will clear all the default tabs. To restore the
default tabs, click the Default button.
The Show Ruler option enables a tab ruler to be displayed on the 25th line of the
screen.
6-68
Setup Menus
BQ 3107 Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting BQ 3107 in the Settings menu.
Operating Mode
Factory default: Block
In Block mode, keyboard entered data is displayed and processed locally, allowing
you to edit it before a block of data is sent to the host. In Character mode, keyboard
entered data is sent simultaneously to the host and the display.
VIP Mode
Factory default: 7760
The VIP mode can be set to 7700 or 7760.
Rendition Mode
Factory default: VIP
The setting of this option determines whether VIP or SDP display attributes are used.
Transmit Terminator
Factory default: ETX
This specifies the last character that is sent to indicate the end of a block transmission.
The character can be ETX, EOT or CR.
Partition 0
Factory default: Message Row
The display is divided into two partitions numbered 0 and 1. Partition 0 is a single line
that can be used to display status reports and messages either at the bottom or top of
the display, as determined by the setting of the Message Row option. Partition 1 is a
page of 24 lines. The setting of this option determines whether Partition 0 is Blank or
used as a Message Row.
6-69
Setup Menus
Message Row
Factory default: At Row 25
The setting of this option determines whether the message row (Partition 0) is at the
top or bottom of the display.
Blink Displayed As
Factory default: Caret
In VIP mode the start of a flashing field can be indicated by a caret or space character.
Blank Displayed As
Factory default: Tilde
In VIP mode the start of a blank field can be indicated by a tilde or space character.
Fill Character
Factory default: Asterix
When inserting or deleting characters, the setting of this option determines whether a
Space or Asterisk character is displayed.
At Page Overflow
Factory default: Stop
The setting of this option determines what happens when the cursor reaches the bottom
of the screen. Selecting Stop will cause the cursor to stop at the last position. Scroll
will cause the display to shift up one line and move the cursor to the new last line,
while Wrap will move the cursor to the top of the screen.
Auto Tabbing
Factory default: Selected
When an unprotected field is filled, the setting of this option determines whether or not
the cursor automatically moves to the next field.
Auto Wrap Tabbing
Factory default: Unselected
When the last unprotected field on the screen is filled, the setting of this option
determines whether or not the cursor automatically moves back to the first field on the
screen.
Function Keys
The keys mapped as FKC1 to FKC12 on your keyboard can be programmed to send
control sequences or messages when pressed. The button underneath the FKC text
entry boxes enables you to toggle the display of shifted and unshifted functions.
6-70
Setup Menus
The T (Type) box entry determines what happens to the programmed contents of an
FKC key when pressed. This can have the value 0, 1 or 2. When set to 0, the contents
of the Message box will be sent to the host. When set to 1, the contents of the Message
box together with text that can be transmitted from the screen will be sent to the host.
When set to 2, the contents of the Message box will not be sent to the host but will will
appear on the screen to the right of the cursor position.
The FC box has no function.
The Message box entry can consist of any alphanumeric characters. Control characters
can also be entered either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value
of the ASCII character. For example, the ASCII character ESC can be entered by
typing the characters ^[, where ^ represents the Ctrl key.
Decimal values are entered as three-digit numbers immediately preceded by an
underscore character. Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero. For
example, the decimal value of ESC is 27, so this would be entered as _027. Refer to
the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal
references.
6-71
Setup Menus
Serial Settings
When the terminal is not in WBT mode, this dialog box is displayed by selecting
Serial in the Settings menu, or by clicking the Configure... button in the New
Connection dialog box when the connection type is set to Serial. Note that the port
for serial communications is selected via the New Connection dialog box which is
displayed from the File menu.
Baud Rate
Factory default: 9600
This specifies the transmit and receive baud rates for the port selected for host
communications.
Parity
Factory default: None
This option specifies the parity mode for each transmitted character. If the number of
Data Bits is 8, set this option to None.
Selecting Odd will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7
bits add up to an even number, and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number.
Selecting Even will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7
bits add up to an odd number, and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number.
Mark parity will set every eighth bit to 1 and Space parity every bit to 0.
Flow Control
Factory default: Input
This option specifies the type of flow control used by the line port to communicate
readiness to transmit or receive data from the host.
None
Input
Output
6-72
- No flow control
- XON/XOFF on received data
- XON/XOFF on transmitted data
Setup Menus
In/Out
- XON/XOFF on transmitted & received data
Hardware - DTR/CTS hardware flow control.
Data Bits
Factory default: 8
This option specifies the number of data bits sent for each transmitted character.
Stop Bits
Factory default: 1
This specifies the number of stop bits sent for each transmitted character.
Transmit Rate
Factory default: Unlimited
The setting of this option determines the maximum effective baud rate that the
emulator transmits terminal reports and data sent as a result of pasting data to the host.
On Line
Factory default: Selected
When this option is selected, normal two-way communication between the emulator
and the host is enabled. When unselected, the emulator is in Local mode and data will
not be sent to, or received from the host. Data typed on the keyboard will be displayed
on the screen or actioned if a control command is typed.
Local Echo
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether keyboard entered characters are
displayed on the screen as well as sent to the host. When unselected, characters are not
displayed when they are transmitted unless the host 'echoes' them back.
6-73
Setup Menus
Auxport Setup
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Auxport in the Settings menu. It enables
you to specify a COM or LPT port for bidirectional output when in any DEC VT
mode, ANSI BBS, Sco Console, HP 700/92 or IBM 3151 mode.
The Functionality options enable you to set the auxiliary port as bidirectional and
specify that it is to be opened at start-up.
Clicking the Configure button will display a dialog box in which you can specify
settings for the COM port. The options in it are described in the Serial Settings section
earlier in this chapter.
6-74
Setup Menus
Terminal Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Terminal in the Settings menu.
Note: The Tab Stops dialog box displayed by clicking the Set Tabs
button is described in the next section.
Display Rows
Factory default: 24
This specifies the number of text rows that can be viewed in the workspace at any one
time out of the total number stored in memory. This can be set to a maximum of 64.
Note that the number of rows stored in memory is specified by the Memory Rows
option.
Display Columns
Factory default: 80
This option enables you to specify a width of 80 or 132 columns for the workspace.
When set to 132, the setting of the Use 80 Column Font option determines whether
all 132 columns are displayed using a narrow font, or only 80 columns at a time using
the normal (80 column) font, with the ability to scroll horizontally to view the
remaining columns.
Use 80 Column Font
Factory default: Unselected
This option specifies which font to use when the Display Columns option is set to
132. When unselected, a narrow font will be used so that all 132 columns are visible in
the window. When selected, only 80 columns will be visible using the normal font,
with the remaining columns stored off-screen. You can scroll horizontally to view the
hidden columns by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the Left or Right Cursor
keys.
6-75
Setup Menus
Memory Rows
Factory default: 144
This option determines the number of text rows that are stored in memory. This can be
set from 0 to 528 rows by default. The Display Rows option specifies the number of
memory rows that can be viewed in the workspace at any one time.
Memory Page Size
Factory default: 24
When the emulator is in VT420 mode, the display memory of 144 lines can be divided
into several pages, up to a maximum of six pages of 24 lines each. The setting of this
option determines the number of lines on a page and therefore how many pages are
available. Note that the page size can be larger than the Display Rows setting, in
which case you can scroll the page up or down in the window by holding down the
Ctrl key and pressing the Up or Down Cursor keys. When the emulator is in any
mode other than VT420, the page size is the same as the Display Rows setting.
Memory Page Width
Factory default: 80
This option specifies the width of display memory for DEC VT modes, in the range 80
to 132 columns. When the number of Display Columns is less than the page width
specified here, you can scroll horizontally to view the hidden columns by holding
down the Ctrl key and pressing the Left or Right Cursor keys.
Cursor Type
Factory default: Block
This enables you to specify how the text cursor is displayed. Select from the following:
Underline
Block
Static Underline
Static Block
Hidden
Status Line
Factory default: Unavailable
This option determines whether or not the 25th screen line is used as a status line when
the emulator is in any DEC VT terminal emulation mode. When Unavailable or Host
Writable is selected, the host can write application-specific messages to the 25th line.
Selecting None will prevent this.
Ignore Numlock
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether or not the Num Lock key toggles Num
Lock mode on and off when pressed. When selected, the Num Lock key will perform
the function defined by the terminal emulation.
6-76
Setup Menus
Keyboard Type
Factory default: 101\102
(Windows XPe only)
This TeemTalk for Windows XPe option enables driver-less support for a 122 or 108key keyboard instead of the standard 101\102-key keyboard.
Preferred Font
This enables you to specify the font to be used for displaying characters. The available
settings depend on the fonts installed.
Preferred Char. Set
Factory default: DEC-MCS
This enables you to specify the character set to be used for displaying characters.
The DEC-MCS, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2 settings enable you to specify the 8bit character set that is used within VT320 mode when the Character Set Mode
option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational. The DEC MCS
and both ISO Latin character sets consist of two tables of characters. The first table,
ASCII 7-bit, is common to all three sets and provides standard alphabetic, numeric and
symbolic characters, and control codes. The second (8-bit) table differs between the
three sets and provides various special and multinational characters and additional
control codes, as shown in the Character Sets appendix.
The Ansi setting will use the PC (ANSI) character set specified by the Ansi Code
Page option. The ANSI BBS emulation will use this character set by default.
When ISO Hebrew is selected, the following key functions will be enabled:
Ctrl + Alt + F1
Select Multinational 8-bit mode and left-to-right typing.
Ctrl + Alt + F2
Select National 7-bit mode (lowercase English characters will be
displayed as Hebrew) and right-to-left typing.
Ctrl + Alt + F3
Toggle between left-to-right and right-to-left typing.
Ansi Code Page
Factory default: 437
This option specifies the character set used for display when the Preferred Char. Set
option is set to Ansi. Note that selecting the ANSI BBS emulation will automatically
set the preferred font to Ansi.
The character set mappings (code pages) supported are 437 for normal usage (default)
and 850, 858 or 1250 for multinational usage. Each set consists of two tables of
characters. The first table is the standard ASCII character set. The second table
contains special characters which differ between the sets. Refer to the Character Sets
appendix for details.
6-77
Setup Menus
When PC Hebrew 862 is selected, the following key functions will be enabled:
Ctrl + Alt + F1
Select Multinational 8-bit mode and left-to-right typing.
Ctrl + Alt + F2
Select National 7-bit mode (lowercase English characters will be
displayed as Hebrew) and right-to-left typing.
Ctrl + Alt + F3
Toggle between left-to-right and right-to-left typing.
Save Screen Before Clearing
Factory default: Unselected
This applies to all DEC 'VT' emulations except VT340 and VT420. It determines the
effect of a clear screen command received from the host. When unselected, the
contents of the current page will be cleared. When selected, the contents of the current
page will be saved and the display will scroll to the next page.
Save Scrolled Lines
Factory default: Unselected
If a scroll region is set, selecting this option will cause data scrolled out of the region to
be stored in a history buffer.
Vertical Coupling
Factory default: Selected
The setting of this VT420 mode option determines what happens when the application
moves the cursor to a line not currently displayed in the window when the number of
displayed lines is less than the page size. When selected, the display will automatically
scroll vertically to keep the cursor in view. When unselected, the display will remain
static and the cursor will move off-screen to the relevant line stored in memory. You
can scroll the display to view the lines stored off-screen by holding down the Ctrl key
and pressing the Up or Down Cursor keys.
Horizontal Coupling
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this DEC VT mode option determines what happens when the cursor
moves beyond the last column displayed in the window when there are more columns
stored off-screen. When selected, the display will automatically scroll horizontally to
keep the cursor in view. When unselected, the display will remain static and the cursor
will move off-screen. To scroll horizontally to view the hidden columns, hold down
the Ctrl key and press the Left or Right Cursor keys.
Page Coupling
Factory default: Selected
The setting of this VT420 mode option determines the effect of a remote command to
move the cursor to another page. When selected, the page to which the cursor is moved
6-78
Setup Menus
is automatically displayed. When unselected, the display remains unchanged and the
cursor moves off-screen to the relevant page stored in memory.
Auto Wrap
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether characters wrap to the next line when the
right margin is reached. When unselected, on reaching the right margin, the last
character position will be overwritten by every new character received.
Auto New Line
Factory default: Unselected
When selected, this will cause a carriage return command to be appended to every line
feed command received.
Auto Line Feed
Factory default: Unselected
When selected, this will cause a line feed command to be appended to every carriage
return command received.
Application Keypad
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing keys in the keypad on the
right side of the keyboard.
When unselected, the keypad is in numeric mode and keys will generate the characters
shown on the key caps. When selected, the keypad is in application mode and keys
will generate control functions when pressed. The top row of four keys act as the
equivalent DEC function keys PF1 through PF4.
Application Cursor Keys
Factory default: Unselected
When this option is selected the cursor keys will generate application program codes
when pressed. Unselected, the keys will generate normal cursor movement commands.
Display Controls
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether received control codes are actioned or
displayed. When selected, a representation of most control codes will be displayed on
the screen.
6-79
Setup Menus
Display Error Codes
Factory default: Selected
This option determines whether or not a chequerboard symbol is displayed when the
delete code is received.
Jump Scroll
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether data is scrolled one or several lines at a
time when the window becomes full. Data will scroll up several lines at a time when
this is selected.
80 / 132 Clears Screen
Factory default: Selected
This option determines whether or not data is cleared from the display when the
number of columns is changed.
Backspace = DEL
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether or not a backspace command performs a
delete.
Ignore Nulls
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether Null characters received from the host
are actioned or ignored.
High Function Terminal
Factory default: Selected
This applies to the AIXTerm emulation. It enables you to switch between HFT (High
Function Terminal) mode (default) and VT100 mode.
Cursor Moves Right to Left
Factory default: Unselected
This applies to the DEC VT, AIXTerm, Ansi BBS, AT 386 and Sco Console
emulations. It enables you change the direction in which the text cursor moves across
the display.
Copy Right to Left
Factory default: Unselected
This applies to the DEC VT, AIXTerm, Ansi BBS, AT 386 and Sco Console
emulations. It enables the copy commands to function in right to left display mode.
6-80
Setup Menus
Keyboard Sends Scan Codes
Factory default: Unselected
This applies to the DEC VT520, VT PC-Term and Wyse PC-Term emulations. It
determines whether keyboard scan codes or ASCII codes are sent to the host on key
press/release. Note that this cannot be selected at the same time as the Keyboard Sends
Position Codes option.
Keyboard Sends Position Codes
Factory default: Unselected
This applies to the DEC VT520, VT PC-Term and Wyse PC-Term emulations. It
determines whether keyboard position codes or ASCII codes are sent to the host on key
press/release. Note that this cannot be selected at the same time as the Keyboard Sends
Scan Codes option.
Auto Resize
Factory default: Unselected
This applies to the DEC VT520 emulation only. When this option is selected, the
window size will automatically be adjusted each time the buffer size is changed either by
the host or through setup. The following table indicates the window size (lines per
screen) that is used for the specified number of lines per page.
Lines per Page:
Lines per Screen:
24
26
25
26
36
43
42
43
43
43
48
52
52
52
72
52
6-81
Setup Menus
Tab Stops
This dialog box is displayed by clicking the Set Tabs button in the Terminal Settings
or Wyse Settings dialog box.
Tab stops can be set for the DEC VT, ANSI and SCO Console emulations using the
Tab Stops dialog box displayed from the Terminal Settings dialog box, and for the
Wyse emulations by using the Tab Stops dialog box displayed from the Wyse
Settings dialog box.
Tab stops are set every eight columns by default, as indicated by the T character below
the relevant column numbers. If you want tab stops to be set at regular intervals other
than every 8th column, enter the number of columns required between each tab stop
next to the Set Every button, then click the button. Individual tab stops can be toggled
on or off by clicking the mouse pointer above or below the relevant column number.
To remove all the tab stops, click the Clear All button. To save the current tab stops,
select Save Session in the File menu.
6-82
Setup Menus
Local Editing
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Local Editing in the Settings menu.
Edit Operation
Factory default: Unavailable
The setting of this option determines whether Local Editing mode can be selected and
how editing is performed.
Selecting Unavailable will prevent you or the host from entering Edit mode.
Selecting Edit will cause text to be stored in page memory so that it can be edited
locally. This enables the host to get on with other tasks. A block of data will be
transmitted to the host when the Enter key is pressed.
Selecting Interactive will cause characters to be sent to the host as soon as they are
typed at the keyboard. The host will perform editing functions.
Edit Key Action
Factory default: Immediate
When this option is set to Immediate, Edit mode will be entered immediately when
the Shift + Delete key combination is pressed without waiting for the host to send the
command to enter.
When set to Deferred, pressing Shift + Delete will cause a code to be sent to the host
asking permission to enter Edit mode. The host will reply by sending the 'Enter Edit
Mode' command.
Clear Unprotected
Factory default: Selected
The setting of this option determines which characters can be erased by the host or
user. When selected, only unprotected characters can be erased, protected characters
will be left untouched. When unselected, both protected and unprotected characters
can be erased.
6-83
Setup Menus
Attributes Cleared
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines the effect of an erase command on character
attributes.
When selected, both attributes and characters will be cleared from display memory
when an erase command is issued.
When this option is unselected, all video attributes currently used will remain in
display memory when an erase command is issued. This will result in new characters
being displayed with the video attributes associated with their positions on the display.
Protect From Host
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether or not the host can overwrite protected
characters.
6-84
Setup Menus
Block Transmission
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Block Transmission in the Settings menu.
The options in this dialog box only apply to the block mode functionality supported
by the DEC 'VT' terminal emulations. The block mode settings that are supported by
other terminal emulations are specified in their respective dialog boxes.
Send Unprotected Only
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether protected characters can be sent to the
host or not.
When unselected, both protected and unprotected characters will be sent to the host
when the Enter key is pressed. When selected, only unprotected characters will be sent
to the host when the Enter key is pressed.
Send Only Selected Areas
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether all characters or only those in selected
areas on the current page are sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed.
When unselected, all characters on the current page will be sent when the Enter key is
pressed. When selected, this option will enable only the characters in selected areas to
be sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed. The setting of the Send All Selected
Areas option determines which selected areas are sent.
6-85
Setup Menus
Send All Selected Areas
Factory default: Selected
When the Send Only Selected Characters option is selected, the setting of this option
determines whether all selected areas on a page are sent to the host when the Enter key
is pressed, or only the area containing the cursor.
When selected, this option will enable all selected areas to be sent to the host. When
unselected, only the selected area containing the cursor will be sent to the host.
Line Transmission On
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether data is sent to the host a single line at a
time or a full or partial page at a time when the Enter key is pressed.
When selected, a single line of valid characters will be sent to the host. In this mode the
Return key has the same function as Enter. When unselected, a full or partial page
will be sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed. The size of the page is
determined by the setting of the Send Partial Page and Transmit Protocol options.
Send Font Information
Factory default: Selected
The setting of this option determines whether character set selection sequences for all
character sets represented in the data block are transmitted to the host, or whether
spaces are substituted for characters not contained in the current character set.
When selected, the character set selection sequences for all character sets represented in
the data block will be sent. When unselected, characters which are not contained in the
currently selected National or Multinational character set will be substituted with
spaces.
Send Record Separators
Factory default: Selected
The setting of this option determines whether or not a record separator (RS) code is
appended to each field of data when a block is transmitted to the host. Record
separator codes are used as markers between each field when this option is selected.
Send Spaces Compressed
Factory default: Unselected
This option determines how spaces and empty character fields within a block of data
are sent to the host.
When unselected, a space character will be sent for each empty character position.
When selected, a record separator code (RS) will be sent in place of empty character
positions. The last field on a line will contain end of line characters as specified by the
End of Line Characters option.
6-86
Setup Menus
Send Partial Page
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether a partial page or data in the scrolling
region is sent to the host when the Enter key is pressed and the Line Transmission
On option is unselected.
When selected, this option will enable a partial page to be sent to the host. The format
of the partial page is determined by the setting of the Transmit Protocol option. When
unselected, the contents of the scrolling region will be sent to the host when the Enter
key is pressed.
PF Key Effect
Factory default: None
This option determines how unshifted PF keys work in Local Editing mode.
When set to None, the unshifted function of PF keys will be disabled.
When set to Breakthrough, unshifted PF keys will function immediately when
pressed if they have been assigned functions by application software.
When set to As TX Prefix, the function of unshifted PF keys will be sent to the host
before a block of data is transmitted.
When set to As TX Suffix, the function of unshifted PF keys will be sent to the host
after a block of data is transmitted.
Send Key Effect
Factory default: Immediate
The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing the Enter key when
sending data to the host.
When Immediate is selected, data will be sent to the host immediately without waiting
for permission to transmit.
When Deferred is selected, a code will be sent to the host notifying it that data is ready
for transmission. The keyboard will be locked until the host requests that the data is
transmitted.
Transmit Protocol
Factory default: ANSI
The setting of this option determines whether a partial page of data is transmitted in
ANSI or VT131 format when the Send Partial Page option is selected.
When ANSI is selected, Local Editing mode will function according to ANSI
(American National Standards Institute) rules.
When VT131 is selected, Local Editing mode will function in the same way as a
VT131 terminal. Select this option when running software written for the VT131.
6-87
Setup Menus
End of Line Characters
Factory default: ^M (i.e. CR)
This text box is used to specify the characters that are to indicate the end of a line in a
data block.
To change the current definition, delete the definition displayed in the text box and
type in the new one, either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value
of the ASCII character.
For example, the default ASCII character CR can be entered by typing the characters ^
and M, representing the keys Ctrl + M which, when pressed together would generate
the CR code.
Decimal values are entered as three-digit numbers immediately preceded by an
underscore character. Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero. For
example, the decimal value of CR is 13, so this would be entered as _013.
Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal
references.
End of Block Characters
Factory default: None
This specifies the characters that are to indicate the end of a block of data.
To change the current definition, delete the definition displayed in the text box and
type in the new one, either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value
of the ASCII character.
For example, the ASCII character CR can be entered by typing the characters ^
and M, representing the keys Ctrl + M which, when pressed together would generate
the CR code.
Decimal values are entered as three-digit numbers immediately preceded by an
underscore character. Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero. For
example, the decimal value of CR is 13, so this would be entered as _013.
Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal
references.
6-88
Setup Menus
Tek 4014 Settings
This dialog box is only available if your version of TeemTalk supports graphics
emulations. It is displayed when running the Tek 4014 emulation by selecting Tek
Graphics in the Settings menu.
Auto New Line
Factory default: Unselected
When selected, this will cause a carriage return command to be appended to every line
feed command received.
Auto Line Feed
Factory default: Unselected
When selected, this will cause a line feed command to be appended to every carriage
return command received.
Dual Margin
Factory default: Unselected
This option enables a second margin for graphics text. When selected, the window will
be divided vertically into two halves. The cursor will move to the top of the second
margin after it has reached the last column of the bottom line of the first margin. Text
will then fill the right half of the window.
Destructive Backspace
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether the graphics text character preceding the
current cursor position will be deleted or not when the Backspace key is pressed.
6-89
Setup Menus
Screen Mapping
Factory default: 1024 (x) by 768 (y)
This option enables you to select the correct resolution for screen addressing when in
Tek 4014 or Westward 2119 graphics modes.
For Tek 4014 mode select 1024 (x) by 768 (y) resolution (default).
For Westward 2119 mode select 1024 (x) by 784 (y) resolution.
Gin Terminators
Factory default: ^M^D (i.e. CR EOT)
This option enables you to specify the termination character(s) that follow a GIN
address transmission. A maximum of 6 characters can be entered.
To change the current definition, delete the definition displayed in the text box and
type in the new one, either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal value
of the ASCII character(s).
For example, the ASCII character CR can be entered by typing the characters ^
and M, representing the keys Ctrl + M which, when pressed together would generate
the CR code.
Decimal values are entered as three-digit numbers immediately preceded by an
underscore character. Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero. For
example, the decimal value of CR is 13, so this would be entered as _013.
6-90
Setup Menus
GIN Mouse Definitions
This dialog box is only available if your version of TeemTalk supports graphics
emulations. It is displayed by selecting GIN Mouse in the Settings menu.
This enables you to specify the code which each mouse button sends when it is pressed
and released. Each definition can consist of a maximum of 10 characters.
The default settings are shown in the dialog box above and can be reasserted once
changed by clicking the Default button.
Control characters are entered either as the control key character equivalent or the
decimal value of the ASCII character. For example, the ESC (escape) character can be
entered by typing the characters ^ and [, representing the keys Ctrl + [ which, when
pressed together would generate the ESC character.
Decimal values are entered as three-digit numbers immediately preceded by an
underscore character. Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero. For
example, the decimal value of ESC is 27, so this would be entered as _027.
6-91
Setup Menus
Attributes
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Attributes in the Settings menu. It enables
you to specify the colours used in the emulation workspace and how text with
attributes is displayed.
To change the way a screen element is displayed, select the relevant item from the
Screen Element list box, for example, Bold (BD) for characters with the bold
attribute. The settings of the other options in the dialog box will change to reflect the
settings currently assigned to the screen element, and the Sample Text window will
show how the screen element is actually displayed with these settings.
Text with attributes can be displayed in various ways. For example, characters with the
underline attribute can be displayed as standard (e.g. underlined only), as a particular
colour only (e.g. green without the underline), or with both attribute and a specific
colour (e.g. underlined and green). The Attribute options allow you to enable or
disable any of the attributes normally associated with the currently selected screen
element. Note that the Column Sep (CS) option is only applicable to the IBM 5250
emulation, and the Hidden option is only applicable to the Wyse 60 emulation.
The setting of the Use Colours option in the Preferences box determines whether or
not a specific colour is assigned to the text attribute. When the Use Colours option is
selected, the colour of the screen element can be changed by tapping on the required
colour block in the palette of Foreground and/or Background colours. The two
palettes enable you to specify a different colour for text (foreground) and text cell
(background).
6-92
Setup Menus
Screen Element
This list box enables you to select the screen element for definition.
The Ansi Palette option allows you to specify which set of eight Foreground and
Background colour indices are used when ANSI colour escape sequences are
received. Either the upper or lower eight colours in the Foreground and Background
palettes can be selected. The current eight colours are enclosed within a box. To
change the current set of eight, just tap on any colour in the set required.
The list box also enables you to select various display options, depending on the
current terminal emulation mode:
Normal
Screen
Bold (BD)
Underline (UL)
Flashing (FL)
Inverse (IV)
UL+BD
FL+BD
FL+UL
IV+FL
IV+BD
IV+UL
FL+BD+UL
IV+UL+BD
IV+FL+BD
IV+FL+UL
IV+FL+BD+UL
When running the IBM 5250 emulation, the list of character attributes is extended to
include the column separator (CS) attribute.
When running the IBM 3270 emulation, the list box will allow selection of the
following items:
Unprotected Normal
Unprotected Bold
Protected Normal
Protected Bold
Status BG
Attribute
The list of attribute options allow you to enable or disable the actual display of
attributes associated with the selected screen element. Note that the Column Sep (CS)
option is only applicable to the IBM 5250 emulation, and the Hidden option is only
applicable to the Wyse 60 emulation.
Use Colours
When selected, the currently selected screen element will be displayed in the colours
highlighted in the Foreground and Background colour palettes. For default display,
deselect this option.
Inverse Colours
Factory default: Unselected
When this option is selected, characters with the inverse attribute will have the text
(foreground) colour swapped with that of the text cell (background).
6-93
Setup Menus
Swap Black/White
Factory default: Unselected
When selected, anything that has the white attribute will be displayed as black, and
vice versa.
AutoColour
Factory default: Unselected
This option is only applicable to the DEC VT terminal emulations. When selected,
displayed characters are colour coded according to type. For example, all numeric
characters are displayed in one colour while all alphabetic characters are displayed in
another. Deselecting this option will display characters according to the settings in this
dialog box.
Ansi Colours Disabled
Factory default: Unselected
Selecting this option will cause ANSI colour commands to be ignored.
Colours Cleared With Attributes
Factory default: Selected
The setting of this option determines whether or not the foreground and background
colours are cleared to the default colours when an ANSI clear attributes command is
received.
Attributes Use Normal BG
Factory default: Unselected
This option only applies to the IBM 3270 emulation. If attribute indicators take up
character positions on the screen, you can force those positions to display the normal
background colour instead of the attributes by selecting this option.
Use Italic with Intensity
Factory default: Unselected
Selecting this option will cause any characters that have the intensity (bold) attribute to
be italicized.
Use Bold Font
Factory default: Unselected
Selecting this option will cause all characters to be displayed using a bold font.
Non Anti-alias Font
Factory default: Unselected
Selecting this option will prevent characters from overlapping when using a low
display resolution in Microsoft Windows ClearType display mode.
6-94
Setup Menus
Customizing The Colour Selection
You can change any of the 16 colours displayed in the Foreground and Background
colour palettes. To do this, select the colour you wish to change in one of the palettes
then click the Set Colour... button to display the Colour dialog box.
This shows the basic and custom colours currently available for selection. If you want
to use one of these, click on the colour required then tap OK.
If you want to define a different custom colour, click the Define button to display the
colour definition facilities.
This provides two methods for specifying a different colour, one visual and the other
numeric. All the settings initially displayed relate to the colour selected in the
Attributes dialog box and shown in the large Colour box. When you start changing
any of the settings, the Colour box will display the new colour.
Visual Method
The full range of colours available is displayed in the large colour selection box. A
target cursor is positioned over the currently selected colour. To select a new colour
you can either click on the colour required or drag the target cursor over it. The colour
displayed in the Colour box will change accordingly. The lightness of the selected
colour can be altered by dragging the triangular pointer up or down the vertical bar to
6-95
Setup Menus
the right. When you have the required colour, click the Add to Custom Colours
button to apply the change to the set of custom colours.
Numeric Value Method
The numeric value of Hue, Lightness and Saturation, or the Red, Green and Blue
percentage values can be entered directly in the text boxes. The colour displayed in the
Colour box will change accordingly. When you have the required colour, click the
Add to Custom Colours button to apply the change to the set of custom colours.
6-96
Setup Menus
Define Keyboard Macros
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Keyboard Macros in the Settings menu.
The Define Keyboard Macros dialog box enables you to redefine the function of
most of the keys on your keyboard, including the key combinations listed below:
Key
Shift + Key
Control + Key
Control + Shift + Key
Alt + Key
Alt + Shift + Key
Alt + Control + Key
Alt + Control + Shift + Key
Each definition may contain a string of up to 127 characters. The combined total of all
the characters that may be programmed into keys is determined by the 127 character
limit per definition and the amount of memory available in your PC.
The Predefined Macros box enables you to select from a list of standard functions
associated with the current terminal emulation. Clicking the arrow button will display a
list box in which the names of valid key functions (called virtual key names) are
shown. The Virtual Key Names appendix lists all the functions and associated virtual
key names for each terminal emulation.
A key macro may be actioned automatically on start-up, or transmitted to the host or
actioned locally when the key or key combination is pressed. This is determined by
selecting Normal, Remote, Local or Startup in the list box when defining the key.
Selecting Normal will cause the macro to be processed according to the current
operating mode when the key or key combination is pressed.
The Current Macro Definitions box displays the key and key combinations that are
currently defined. The Type column indicates whether the macro is processed as
normal (blank), remote (R), local (L) or on start-up (S).
6-97
Setup Menus
You can remove the selected definition or delete all the definitions by clicking the
relevant Remove button.
Defining A Key Or Key Combination
1. Click in the Program Key box then press the key or key combination to define.
The current definition will be displayed.
2. Click in the With box then enter the new definition, or make a selection from the
list of Predefined Macros then click Apply.
3. Specify how the macro is to be processed by selecting either Normal, Remote,
Local or Startup in the list box.
4. Click the Add button to accept the definition. The new definition will be added to
the Current Macro Definitions list.
5. To save the definitions, click OK to exit, then select Save Session As in the File
menu, make sure the Keyboard Macros box is checked, then click OK.
Key Combinations & Sequences
You can program a key to perform the function of a combination or sequence of keys.
For example, you can cause the F1 key to perform the same function as pressing the
keys Alt + F4 together, or pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4.
Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names
appendix. The virtual key name has to be enclosed by the < and > characters in the key
definition box. You may omit the VK_ and VT_ (etc.) parts of the virtual key name.
To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more other
keys together, type the < character followed by the virtual key names linked together
with + (plus sign) characters and ending with the > character.
For example, to program the F1 key so that when it is pressed it performs the same
function as pressing the keys Alt + F4 together, enter the following characters in the
key definition box:
<ALT+F4>
To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of keys
one after the other, enter each virtual key name in the order required, enclosing each
virtual key name with the < and > characters. Each enclosed virtual key name must
immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces. For
example, to program the A key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function
as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following characters in the key
definition box:
<F2><F3><F4>
6-98
Setup Menus
Specifying Characters
There are various ways in which you can specify a particular character. For example,
the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five entries:
_027
\033
\u001B
^[
\e
Decimal value (underscore character followed by a 3-digit number).
Octal value (backslash character followed by a 3-digit number).
Unicode value (backslash and u characters then unicode value).
Control key value (^ represents the control key on the keyboard).
Additional value for ESC.
The following 'backslash' values can be used:
\u Unicode introducer
\n Line feed
\r Carriage return
\e Escape
Note that as the \ and ^ characters are used as value introducers, to enter these as
character values you need to precede them with a backslash character, i.e. enter \ as \\
and ^ as \^.
The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value \u20ac.
6-99
Setup Menus
Soft Buttons
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Soft Buttons in the Settings menu.
TeemTalk for Windows CE
A set of soft buttons can be displayed in the command bar either by clicking one of the
two arrow buttons, or by pressing the keys Ctrl + Alt + Left Cursor or Ctrl + Alt +
Right Cursor. These soft buttons can be programmed so that they perform various
functions when clicked.
You can define up to four soft button levels. Level 1 is displayed by default. Each
level consists of twelve programmable buttons, providing a combined total of 48
programmable buttons. Levels stored off-screen can be 'scrolled' into view by clicking
the arrow buttons.
TeemTalk for Windows XPe
A set of soft buttons can be displayed along the bottom of the window. These can be
programmed so that they perform various functions when clicked.
There are four soft button levels. Each level consists of twelve programmable buttons,
providing a combined total of 48 programmable buttons. The Visible Levels setting
determines the number of levels displayed. All levels are accessible even if they are not
displayed, levels stored off-screen can be ‘scrolled’ into view by clicking the Level
6-100
Setup Menus
button. Each level can be assigned a title which will be displayed under the Level
button by entering up to eight characters in the Title box.
The soft buttons can be removed from the display by setting the Visible Levels option
to 0.
You can display the soft buttons in a separate window by deselecting the Attached
option. If you close the Soft Buttons window, you can display it again by setting the
Visible Levels option to anything other than 0, then clicking OK. The current position
and size of the Soft Buttons window can be saved so that it is displayed the same way
the next time TeemTalk is loaded. To do this, select the Save Session As option in the
File menu, make sure the Soft Buttons option is checked, then click OK.
Programming A Soft Button
1. Select the Level number.
2. Select the Button number.
3. Check the Local check box to make the button definition action locally, or
uncheck it to transmit the definition to the host when the button is pressed.
4. Enter a Name to be displayed on the button, up to ten characters long.
5. Enter the button definition in the Command box, or make a selection from the list
of Predefined Macros then click Apply.
6. Click the Add button to accept the definition. The new definition will be added to
the Current Definitions list.
7. To save the definitions, click OK to exit, then select Save Session As in the File
menu, make sure the Soft Buttons box is checked, then click OK.
Key Combinations & Sequences
You can program a soft button to perform the function of a combination or sequence
of keys. For example, you can cause a button to perform the same function as pressing
the keys Alt + F4 together, or pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4.
Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names
appendix. The virtual key name has to be enclosed by the < and > characters in the key
definition text box. You may omit the VK_ and VT_ (etc.) parts of the virtual key
name.
To program a soft button so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more
other keys together, type the < character followed by the virtual key names linked
together with + (plus sign) characters and ending with the > character.
6-101
Setup Menus
For example, to program a button so that when it is pressed it performs the same
function as pressing the keys Alt + F4 together, enter the following characters in the
Command box:
<ALT+F4>
To program a button so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of
keys one after the other, enter each virtual key name in the order required, enclosing
each virtual key name with the < and > characters. Each enclosed virtual key name
must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces. For
example, to program the A key so that when it is pressed it performs the same function
as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following characters in the
Command box:
<F2><F3><F4>
Specifying Characters
There are various ways in which you can specify a particular character. For example,
the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five entries:
_027
\033
\u001B
^[
\e
Decimal value (underscore character followed by a 3-digit number).
Octal value (backslash character followed by a 3-digit number).
Unicode value (backslash and u characters then unicode value).
Control key value (^ represents the control key on the keyboard).
Additional value for ESC.
The following 'backslash' values can be used:
\u Unicode introducer
\n Line feed
\r Carriage return
\e Escape
Note that as the \ and ^ characters are used as value introducers, to enter these as
character values you need to precede them with a backslash character, i.e. enter \ as \\
and ^ as \^.
The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value \u20ac.
6-102
Setup Menus
Mouse Button Actions
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Mouse Button Actions in the Settings
menu.
This enables you to specify the function of the left and right mouse buttons when they
are clicked on their own or in conjunction with modifier keys. You can assign up to six
functions to each button, either entering your own definition in the same format as
described for keyboard macros and soft buttons, or selecting from a list of standard
built-in functions. Clicking one of the arrow buttons will display a drop-down list box
which lists all the standard functions that can be assigned:
Unassigned
Select
Extend Selection
Edit Copy
Edit Paste
Show Hotspots
Action Hotspot
Move Cursor
Send CR
Send Keyword
Middle Button
Select Rectangle
Select Word
Select and Copy
Cursor Select
Rectangular Select and Copy
The Select function will select all text from the start position to the finish position,
working left to right across the entire width of the display, whereas the Select Rectangle function will only select text contained within the rectangular area defined by the
start position (top left corner) and the finish position (bottom right corner). The Select
Word function will cause the word under the mouse cursor to be selected.
The Select and Copy function is the same as Select but will also copy the selected
data to the Clipboard automatically. The Rectangular Select and Copy function is the
same as Select Rectangle but will also copy the selected data to the Clipboard
automatically.
The Show Hotspots and Action Hotspots functions are described in the Hotspots
section of the Getting Started chapter. The Send Keyword function is very similar to
6-103
Setup Menus
the hotspot feature. It enables you to send delimited text displayed on the screen to the
host just by clicking on it. Delimiters are the same as for hotspots.
The Move Cursor function can be used in any of the local block modes as a quick
way of positioning the text cursor within a block of text. To position the text cursor,
move the mouse pointer to the position required, hold down the modifier key(s)
assigned with the function then click the left mouse button.
The Cursor Select function does the same as Move Cursor, but when running the
IBM 3270 or IBM 5250 emulation it also performs a cursor select.
The Middle Button setting enables you to make the left or right button (and key
combination) of a two button mouse emulate the middle button of a three button
mouse.
The setting of the Highlight When Actioned option determines whether or not a
visual indication is given that a function has been actioned when a hotspot is clicked.
6-104
Setup Menus
Button Tools
(TeemTalk for Windows XPe only)
This TeemTalk for Windows XPe dialog box is displayed by selecting Button Tools
in the Settings menu. It enables you to redefine the button tools displayed in the toolbar.
The Current Tool box displays the toolbar button and its function that is currently
selected for editing, or located where a new button is to be inserted to its left in the
toolbar. Clicking the down-arrow button to the right will display all the current toolbar
buttons in order in a box below. This enables you to select a new button position for
display in the Current Tool box. Click the down-arrow button again to return to the
Button and Command selection display.
The Visible option enables you to specify whether or not the toolbar is displayed.
Adding Buttons
1. Click the down-arrow button to the right of the Current Tool box to display the
buttons currently in the toolbar.
2. Click on the button which will be to the right of the new button to be added so that
it is displayed in the Current Tool box.
3. Click the down-arrow button again to display the Command options.
4. Select a button bitmap from the Buttons list.
You can add your own bitmaps to the standard bitmap list by clicking the Add
Custom Bitmap button and selecting the bitmap files to load. Buttons will be
automatically generated using the bitmaps in these files.
6-105
Setup Menus
5. Specify the command to be performed when this button is clicked either by
selecting from the Commands list or by typing your own definition in the
Current Tool text box.
6. Click the Insert at Current button.
7. Click OK when you have finished. The toolbar will immediately be updated.
Adding A Space Between Buttons
1. Click the down-arrow button to the right of the Current Tool box to display the
buttons currently in the toolbar.
2. Click on the button which will be to the right of the space to be added so that it is
displayed in the Current Tool box.
3. Click the down-arrow button again to display the Command options.
4. Select the [Space] option at the top of the Commands list box.
5. Click the Insert at Current button.
6. Click OK when you have finished. The toolbar will immediately be updated.
Removing A Button Or Space
1. Click the down-arrow button to the right of the Current Tool box to display the
buttons currently in the toolbar.
2. Click on the button or space to be deleted so that it is displayed in the Current
Tool box.
3. Click the down-arrow button again to display the Command options.
4. Click the Delete Current button to remove the button or space from the toolbar.
5. Click OK when you have finished.
Saving The Button Tools
When you have finished defining button tools you can save them so that they will be
reasserted when the emulator is loaded or reset by selecting Save Session in the File
menu.
Assigning User-Defined Functions
You can enter a definition of your own in the Current Tool text box. The definition
can contain key functions and control characters to be actioned as well as normal text.
6-106
Setup Menus
Specifying Key Functions
You can cause a key function to be actioned by including the virtual key name of the
key enclosed by the < and > characters. You may omit the VK_ and VT_ parts (etc.)
of the virtual key name. For example, the Enter key would be specified as <ENTER>.
To send the function of a key combination, type the < character followed by the virtual
key names linked together with + characters and ending with the > character. For
example, Alt F4 would be specified as <ALT+F4>.
To send the function of a sequence of keys one after the other, enter each virtual key
name in the order required, enclosing each virtual key name with the < and >
characters. Each enclosed virtual key name must immediately follow the previous
enclosed virtual key name with no spaces. For example, F2 then F3 then F4 would be
specified as <F2><F3><F4>.
Specifying Characters
There are various ways in which you can specify a particular character. For example,
the ESC character can be specified using any one of the following five entries:
_027
\033
\u001B
^[
\e
Decimal value (underscore character followed by a 3-digit number).
Octal value (backslash character followed by a 3-digit number).
Unicode value (backslash and u characters then unicode value).
Control key value (^ represents the control key on the keyboard).
Additional value for ESC.
The following 'backslash' values can be used:
\u Unicode introducer
\n Line feed
\r Carriage return
\e Escape
Note that as the \ and ^ characters are used as value introducers, to enter these as
character values you need to precede them with a backslash character, i.e. enter \ as \\
and ^ as \^.
The Euro character can be specified by entering the unicode value \u20ac.
6-107
Setup Menus
Notes
6-108
DEC VT Emulations
7
DEC VT Emulations
This chapter describes features of the DEC VT terminal emulations.
Session Configuration
WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in chapter
2.
1. Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the
Add button to display the New Connection dialog box.
2. Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK. The Terminal Emulation
Client Connection Wizard - Connection Information dialog box will be
displayed.
3. Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in
the Connection Name box.
4. Select the DEC VT terminal emulation required in the Emulation list box.
The VT52 and VT100 emulations enable you to run applications written for the
DEC VT52 and VT100 terminals, respectively.
The VT500 7-Bit and VT500 8-Bit emulations enable you to run applications
written for the DEC VT320 terminal, the difference is in their treatment of 8-bit
control codes. When VT500 7-Bit is selected, all 8-bit codes are converted to
their 7-bit equivalents, whereas VT500 8-Bit leaves 8-bit codes unchanged. If
you are using VT200 applications, select VT500 7-Bit.
5. Specify the required VT Terminal ID setting.
6. Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box.
For a TCP/IP connection, click the TCP/IP button, enter the name or internet
address of the host computer in the Host Name box, then click Advanced for
7-1
DEC VT Emulations
additional Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to
display configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, click the Serial button, specify the communications port
in the Connect To box, then click Advanced for additional serial options. Refer
to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information
dialog box, then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box.
7. Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager.
8. In the Terminal Connection Manager, display the Connections list, select the
session name you specified earlier in step 3, then click the Connect button.
Non-WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is not in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in the
Setup Menus chapter.
1. Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation... to
display the Emulation Settings dialog box.
2. Select the DEC VT terminal emulation required in the Alpha Emulation list box.
The VT52 and VT100 emulations enable you to run applications written for the
DEC VT52 and VT100 terminals, respectively.
The VT500 7-Bit and VT500 8-Bit emulations enable you to run applications
written for the DEC VT320 terminal, the difference is in their treatment of 8-bit
control codes. When VT500 7-Bit is selected, all 8-bit codes are converted to
their 7-bit equivalents, whereas VT500 8-Bit leaves 8-bit codes unchanged. If
you are using VT200 applications, select VT500 7-Bit.
3. Specify the required VT Terminal ID setting then click OK to close the dialog
box.
4. Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to
display the New Connection dialog box.
5. Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box.
For a TCP/IP connection, select TCP/IP, enter the name or internet address of
the host computer in the Connect To box, then click Configure for additional
Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for
details.
7-2
DEC VT Emulations
For a modem connection, select Modem, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure to display configuration options. Refer to
the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, select Serial, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure for additional serial options. Refer to the
Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
6. When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog
box, click the Connect button to make the connection.
Note: You can save these settings as a connection template using
the Save Session As dialog box. Refer to the Setup Menus
chapter for details.
7-3
DEC VT Emulations
The Status Bar
The status bar along the bottom of the display enables you to switch between modes
and show the status of various operations.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Item 1:
This displays two LEDs. The first LED indicates whether or not you are
connected to the host. It will show red when not connected and green
when you are connected. The second LED indicates whether or not data is
being sent to or from the host. It will show dull green when there is no
activity, red when data is being sent to the host, and bright green when
data is being received from the host.
Item 2:
This button enables you to switch between Local and Online mode. The
label indicates the mode you will switch to if the button is clicked.
Item 3:
This button enables you to Pause or Resume scrolling data in the window.
The label indicates the action that will be taken if the button is clicked.
Item 4:
Indicates the current terminal emulation.
Item 5:
This displays the active session (always 1), the current page number
(always 1), and the line,column location of the text cursor.
Item 6:
This indicates whether Overstrike Mode or Insert Mode is currently
selected. In Overstrike Mode (default), new characters will replace
already existing characters at the cursor position. When Insert Mode is
selected, new characters will be inserted at the cursor position without
deleting existing characters, which will move to the right.
Item 7:
This will display Lock when the keyboard is locked, or Edit when the
terminal emulation is in Edit mode.
Item 8:
This will display the time in 24 hour format when in DEC VT500 mode if
the VT525 set time command has been received from the host.
Item 9:
Indicates the status of the printer as follows:
None signifies that the printer is not turned on or not connected, or not
installed in Microsoft Windows.
Not Ready signifies that the printer is not ready to receive data for
printing.
Ready signifies that the printer is ready to receive data for printing.
7-4
DEC VT Emulations
Auto signifies that the emulation is in Auto Print mode in which the
current cursor line is sent to the printer when a command for the cursor to
move to the next line is issued.
Controller signifies that the emulation is in Printer Controller mode in
which the host has direct control over the printer. Print screen commands
issued from the keyboard or mouse will be ignored.
ErrGen indicates that an error has occurred and a message box will be
displayed indicating the error.
Item 10:
This indicates the keyboard mode. It will be blank when the keyboard is
in normal mode and will display DEC when in DEC mode. You can
toggle between normal and DEC mode by pressing the keys Alt + Num
Lock together. Refer to the illustrations in the Keyboard Mapping section
for the key functions available in each mode.
Item 11:
Indicates the status of the aux port as follows:
Ready indicates that the aux port is ready for bidirectional output.
In Use indicates that the aux port is currently busy.
Horizontal Scrolling
It is possible to make the width of display memory larger than the width of the
window by using the Memory Page Width option in the Terminal Settings dialog
box. When you want to view columns stored off-screen, you can scroll horizontally
by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the Left or Right Cursor keys.
Keyboard Mapping
The illustrations on the following pages show where DEC VT500 keyboard functions
are mapped to keys on the 101/102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout. Special key
functions that are provided on the DEC VT keyboard can be mapped to any key on
your keyboard by using the VT virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard
Macros dialog box.
The keyboard can be used in two modes, Normal and DEC. You can toggle between
the two modes by pressing the keys Alt + Num Lock together. The 10th item on the
status bar will display DEC when the keyboard is in DEC mode. The field will be
blank when in normal mode.
7-5
7-6
Alt key usage:
Normal key usage:
F12
PF2
F11
PF1
F13
PF3
F13
PF3
F14
HELP
F6
DO
F7
F17
F8
F18
F9
F19
F14
F10
F20
F12
BACKSPACE
DELETE
F11
INSERT
REMV
HERE
(SCRL) (SCRL) (SCRL)
(SCRL)
PREV NEXT
SELECT
SCREEN SCREEN
FIND
BREAK
NUMLK
DEC
/
*
+
,
,[ ]
Alt + Num Lock toggles between
Normal & DEC mode.
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
Functions in round brackets are generated when used in conjunction with Control.
Functions in square brackets are generated in application keypad mode.
PF4
DEC VT Emulations
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
Normal Mode
Alt key usage:
Normal key usage:
F12
PF2
F11
PF1
F13
HOLD
F11
PF3
F14
PF4
HELP
F6
DO
F7
F17
F8
F18
F9
F19
F14
F10
F20
F12
DELETE
F11
INSERT
REMV
HERE
PREV NEXT
NEXT
SCREEN SCREEN
FIND
SELECT
PF1
NORM
PF2
PF3
_
+
,
,[ ]
PF4
Alt + Num Lock toggles between
Normal & DEC mode.
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
Functions in square brackets are generated in application keypad mode.
BREAK
DEC VT Emulations
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
DEC Mode
7-7
DEC VT Emulations
Typing Direction For Hebrew Language
When ISO Hebrew or Ansi PC Hebrew 862 is selected as the Preferred Character
Set in the Terminal Settings dialog box, the following key functions will be enabled:
7-8
Ctrl + Alt + F1
Select Multinational 8-bit mode and left-to-right typing.
Ctrl + Alt + F2
Select National 7-bit mode (lowercase English characters will be
displayed as Hebrew) and right-to-left typing.
Ctrl + Alt + F3
Toggle between left-to-right and right-to-left typing.
BQ 3107 Emulation
8
BQ 3107 Emulation
This chapter describes the Bull BQ 3107 terminal emulation.
Session Configuration
WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in chapter
2.
1. Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the
Add button to display the New Connection dialog box.
2. Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK. The Terminal Emulation
Client Connection Wizard - Connection Information dialog box will be
displayed.
3. Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in
the Connection Name box.
4. Select the BQ3107 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box.
5. Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box.
For a TCP/IP connection, click the TCP/IP button, enter the name or internet
address of the host computer in the Host Name box, then click Advanced for
additional Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to
display configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, click the Serial button, specify the communications port
in the Connect To box, then click Advanced for additional serial options. Refer
to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
8-1
BQ 3107 Emulation
Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information
dialog box, then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box.
6. Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager.
7. In the Terminal Connection Manager, display the Connections list, select the
session name you specified earlier in step 3, then click the Connect button.
Non-WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is not in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in the
Setup Menus chapter.
1. Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation... to
display the Emulation Settings dialog box.
2. Select the BQ3107 terminal emulation required in the Alpha Emulation list box.
3. Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to
display the New Connection dialog box.
4. Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box.
For a TCP/IP connection, select TCP/IP, enter the name or internet address of
the host computer in the Connect To box, then click Configure for additional
Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for
details.
For a modem connection, select Modem, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure to display configuration options. Refer to
the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, select Serial, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure for additional serial options. Refer to the
Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
5. When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog
box, click the Connect button to make the connection.
Note: You can save these settings as a connection template using
the Save Session As dialog box. Refer to the Setup Menus
chapter for details.
8-2
BQ 3107 Emulation
The Status Bar
The status bar displayed along the bottom of the window will show the status of
various operations.
F1
F2
F3 F4
F5 F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13 F14 F15
Field 1:
This will always display RUN, indiocating that the line shown corresponds to normal operation.
Field 2:
Indicates whether you are in Block or Character mode. In Block mode,
keyboard entered data is displayed and processed locally, allowing you to
edit it before a block of data is sent to the host. In Character mode,
keyboard entered data is sent simultaneously to the host and the display.
You can change the mode using the Operating Mode option in the BQ
3107 Settings dialog box.
Field 3:
This will display a bell symbol when the terminal emulation receives a
BEL command from the host or when the user has pressed the wrong
key.
Field 4:
Not used.
Field 5:
Displays ERR when an error is detected.
Field 6:
Displays BSY when the host is busy processing data. The keyboard will
be locked when this is displayed.
Field 7:
This is used to display warning messages.
Field 8:
Not used.
Field 9:
Not used.
Field 10:
This will display P.DISCT when the printer is disconnected.
Field 11:
This will display OVERFLOW when there is a data overflow.
Field 12:
Indicates the current line and column position of the cursor relative to the
top left corner of the display, which is L01:C01.
Field 13:
This will display the current terminal emulation mode, 3107.
Field 14:
This will display MESS when a message is waiting to be displayed on
the status line.
Field 15:
This will display LINE when the emulation is online to the host, or
LOCAL when in local mode.
8-3
BQ 3107 Emulation
Keyboard Mapping
The illustration on the following page shows where BQ 3107 keyboard functions are
mapped to keys on the 101/102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout. Special key
functions that are provided on the BQ 3107 keyboard can be mapped to any key on
your keyboard by using the BQ virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard
Macros dialog box.
8-4
FKC1
BLINK
FKC7
FKC8
BACKSPACE
FKC9 FKC10 FKC11 FKC12
LOCAL EXTND
(D TAB)
(S TAB)
I LINE P RSET D MSG
H MSG
I CHAR HOME (L MSG)
D LINE ER EOP NEXT
ERASE
D CHAR (E EOL) LINE
Print Form Screen with Alt
P FRM
P PART
(P SCR)
[NUM]
NUM
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
Functions in round brackets are generated when the keys are shifted.
Functions in square brackets are generated when used with Alt.
FKC6
FKC5
FKC4
IN RIS2 SYSTM ONLNE MENU
FKC3
FKC1
FKC2
BLINK BLANK RESET IN PART
Control key usage:
Normal key usage:
(BACKTAB)
TAB
(CLEAR)
ESC
TXMIT
+
,
( )
BQ 3107 Emulation
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
8-5
BQ 3107 Emulation
Notes
8-6
DG 410/412 Emulation
9
DG 410/412 Emulation
This chapter describes the Data General D410/412 terminal emulation.
Session Configuration
WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in chapter
2.
1. Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the
Add button to display the New Connection dialog box.
2. Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK. The Terminal Emulation
Client Connection Wizard - Connection Information dialog box will be
displayed.
3. Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in
the Connection Name box.
4. Select the DG 410/412 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box. This
emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Data
General D410/412 terminal.
5. Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box.
For a TCP/IP connection, click the TCP/IP button, enter the name or internet
address of the host computer in the Host Name box, then click Advanced for
additional Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to
display configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
9-1
DG 410/412 Emulation
For a serial connection, click the Serial button, specify the communications port in
the Connect To box, then click Advanced for additional serial options. Refer to
the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information
dialog box, then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box.
6. Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager.
7. In the Terminal Connection Manager, display the Connections list, select the
session name you specified earlier in step 3, then click the Connect button.
Non-WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is not in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in the
Setup Menus chapter.
1. Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation... to
display the Emulation Settings dialog box.
2. Select the DG 410/412 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box. This
emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Data
General D410/412 terminal. Click OK to close the dialog box.
3. Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to
display the New Connection dialog box.
4. Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box.
For a TCP/IP connection, select TCP/IP, enter the name or internet address of
the host computer in the Connect To box, then click Configure for additional
Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for
details.
For a modem connection, select Modem, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure to display configuration options. Refer to
the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, select Serial, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure for additional serial options. Refer to the
Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
5. When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog
box, click the Connect button to make the connection.
Note: You can save these settings as a connection template using
the Save Session As dialog box. Refer to the Setup Menus
chapter for details.
9-2
DG 410/412 Emulation
Keyboard Mapping
The illustration on the following page shows where DG 410/412 keyboard functions
are mapped to keys on the 101/102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout. Special key
functions that are provided on the DG 410/412 keyboard can be mapped to any key
on your keyboard by using the DG virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard
Macros dialog box.
Key Functions
Local Print
The Local Print key is used to print the current window or initiate the Print Form
operation. You can print the contents of the current window starting with the row
containing the cursor by pressing the Local Print key on its own. Keyboard entered
data will be ignored while the print is in progress. You can abort the print operation
by pressing the Local Print key again.
You can initiate the Print Form operation by holding down the Shift key then
pressing Local Print. This performs the same function as Local Print pressed on its
own, except that only data appearing at full intensity will be printed when protected
text is disabled. When protected text is enabled, only unprotected text will be printed.
Cursor Type
This key enables you to change the appearance of the cursor. By default the cursor is
displayed as a reverse video block. Pressing and releasing the Cursor Type key one
or more times will cause the cursor display to change in the following order:
Blinking underline
Invisible cursor
Blinking reverse video block
Non-blinking reverse video block (default)
N/C
Pressing this key will cause the display of the current text region to toggle between
normal and compressed character spacing mode. In normal mode the display is 81
columns wide. Pressing the N/C key once will change the display width to 135
columns. Note that the margins will not be affected by this key.
9-3
9-4
F13
F1
F14
F2
Alt key usage:
Normal key usage:
ESC
F1
F13
F15
F3
F4
F6
F7
F8
F9
PRINT
C4
ER PG
EOL
HOME
C1
C2
DELETE
C3
LOCAL (CURS) (N/C)
PRINT SCROL HOLD
F10 F11 F12
NUM
LOCK
CURS
SCROL
N/C
ER PG
EOL
/
*
NEW
LINE
,
_
= Cursor Type
= Scroll Rate
= Normal/Compressed
= Erase Page
= Erase To End Of Line
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
Functions in brackets are generated when the keys are shifted.
F5
DG 410/412 Emulation
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
DG 410/412 Emulation
Composing Characters
The Data General D410 keyboard has a SPCL key which enables you to generate
characters from the DG International character set. You can generate the same
characters by using the method described for the DEC emulation. Refer to the
Compose Character Sequences section in the Keyboard Configuration chapter for
details.
Key Codes
The following table lists the decimal value of codes generated when keys that
emulate those found on the Data General keyboard are pressed alone or in conjunction with the Shift and/or Ctrl keys.
Note that each code shown is the second code generated when the key or key
combination is pressed, the first always being the code RS (Hex 1E).
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
C1
C2
C3
C4
UP
DOWN
LEFT
RIGHT
HOME
PRINT
Key
Shift
+ Key
Ctrl
+ Key
Ctrl + Shift
+ Key
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
112
92
93
94
95
17
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
96
88
89
90
91
23
26
25
24
8
1
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
48
-
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
32
-
9-5
DG 410/412 Emulation
Notes
9-6
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
10
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
This chapter describes features of the Hewlett Packard 700-92/96
terminal emulation.
Session Configuration
WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in chapter
2.
1. Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the
Add button to display the New Connection dialog box.
2. Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK. The Terminal Emulation
Client Connection Wizard - Connection Information dialog box will be
displayed.
3. Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in
the Connection Name box.
4. Select the HP 700-92/96 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box. This
emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Hewlett
Packard 700/92, 2392A, 2622A, 70094 and 70096 terminals.
5. Specify the required HP Model setting: 70092 (default), 2392A, 2622A, 70094
or 70096. This identifies the particular terminal model being emulated in
response to a terminal identification request from the host.
6. Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box.
For a TCP/IP connection, click the TCP/IP button, enter the name or internet
address of the host computer in the Host Name box, then click Advanced for
additional Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
10-1
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to display
configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter
2 for details.
For a serial connection, click the Serial button, specify the communications port
in the Connect To box, then click Advanced for additional serial options. Refer
to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information
dialog box, then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box.
7. Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager.
8. In the Terminal Connection Manager, display the Connections list, select the
session name you specified earlier in step 3, then click the Connect button.
Non-WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is not in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in the
Setup Menus chapter.
1. Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation... to
display the Emulation Settings dialog box.
2. Select the HP 700-92/96 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box.
This emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive the
Hewlett Packard 700/92, 2392A, 2622A, 70094 and 70096 terminals. Click OK
to close the dialog box.
3. Display the HP Settings dialog box from the Settings menu and specify the
required Terminal ID setting: 70092 (default), 2392A, 2622A, 70094 or 70096,
then click OK to close the dialog box.
4. Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to
display the New Connection dialog box.
5. Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box.
For a TCP/IP connection, select TCP/IP, enter the name or internet address of
the host computer in the Connect To box, then click Configure for additional
Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for
details.
For a modem connection, select Modem, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure to display configuration options. Refer to
the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, select Serial, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure for additional serial options. Refer to the
Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
10-2
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
6. When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog
box, click the Connect button to make the connection.
Note: You can save these settings as a connection template using
the Save Session As dialog box. Refer to the Setup Menus
chapter for details.
Display Configuration
When you run the HP 700-92/96 emulation the following buttons will appear along
the bottom of the display.
These buttons indicate the current function of keys F1 through F8 on the keyboard
and are described later in this chapter. The two numbers in the middle button indicate
the current line and column position of the cursor. The display area is 80 columns
wide by 24 lines deep by default, and 168 lines are stored off-screen. You can toggle
between 80 and 132 column display by pressing the function key F12, and you can
divide the display memory into 2, 4, 6 or 8 pages from the HP Settings dialog box, as
described in the Setup Menus chapter.
Keyboard Mapping
The following illustration shows where HP 700-92/96 keyboard functions are
mapped to keys on the 101/102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout. Special key
functions that are provided on the HP 700-92/96 keyboard can be mapped to any key
on your keyboard by using the HP virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard
Macros dialog box.
10-3
10-4
F1
Normal key usage:
F3
INSERT
LINE
F2
Control key usage:
F1
F4
INSERT DELETE CLEAR CLEAR
LINE LINE LINE PAGE
F6
F7
F8
SOFT HARD
RESET RESET
MENU UKEY
DEFS
USYST UKEYS
(SCR D)
(SCR U)
SCR = Scroll
DELETE HOME NEXT
CHAR DOWN PAGE
INSERT HOME PREV
MODE UP PAGE
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
Functions in brackets are generated when the keys are shifted.
F5
SELECT
TXMIT
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
Buttons & Function Keys
The buttons along the bottom of the HP 700-92/96 window indicate the current
function of keys F1 through F8 on the keyboard, each key and equivalent button
having several functions within the emulation. The buttons and equivalent function
keys enable selection of various operating modes and display configurations.
Clicking a button has the same effect as pressing the equivalent F# key. When a key
or button is attributed an on/off toggle action, the button will display an asterisk when
the function is selected.
The middle button displays the row and column position of the cursor. It has no other
function.
On entering HP 700-92/96 mode, the buttons and function keys enable various
operating modes to be selected. The buttons will show the Mode Selection configuration.
Mode Selection
The Mode Selection functions are displayed when the HP 700-92/96 emulation is
first entered. If the functions are changed while using the emulation, you can
redisplay the Modes menu by pressing the F9 key (the equivalent of the HP 700-92/
96 User System key), then F4.
Line Modify - F1
This function enables you to edit and retransmit an incorrectly entered command
string when the emulation is in Remote mode and Character mode and you are communicating interactively with the host. This saves you having to retype the entire
string again.
Note: This will not function when the emulation is in Block or
Format mode.
When the host causes an error message to be displayed indicating that the string has
been incorrectly entered, press the F1 key or click the equivalent button. An asterisk
will appear on the button indicating that the function is selected. Move the cursor to
the line containing the error, edit the line then press Return or Enter. This will cause
the edited string to be transmitted and Line Modify mode to be exited.
If after activating Line Modify mode you wish to cancel it, just press F1 or click the
button again.
10-5
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
Modify All - F2
This is similar to the Line Modify F1 function described previously, the only
difference being that the editing mode is not exited when Return or Enter is pressed.
F2 and its equivalent button acts as a toggle key, switching the mode on or off. The
setting may be saved by selecting Save Session in the File menu.
The F2 Modify All key and button enables you to edit and retransmit an incorrectly
entered command string when the emulation is in Character mode. This saves you
having to retype the entire string again.
Note: This will not function when the emulation is in Block or
Format mode.
When the host causes an error message to be displayed indicating that the string has
been incorrectly entered, press the F2 key. An asterisk will appear on the button
indicating that the function is selected. Move the cursor to the line containing the
error, edit the line then press Return or Enter. This will cause the edited string to be
transmitted. To exit Modify All mode, press F2 or click the button again.
Note: Even though this function is a special form of Block mode it
is completely separate from it and you do not need to enable
Block mode before using the Modify All function.
Block Mode - F3
Data may be transmitted to the host a character at a time or as a block of characters.
The F3 key and equivalent button toggles the form of data transmission between
Character mode and Block mode. The setting may be saved by selecting Save
Session in the File menu.
The emulation is in Character mode when the button does not display an asterisk.
Each character will be sent to the host as it is entered at the keyboard.
When Block mode is activated (as indicated by an asterisk), data entered at the
keyboard will not be sent to the host until the Enter key is pressed. In this mode,
displayed text may be edited locally before it is transmitted to the host. Control codes
such as CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are acted upon locally and are not
transmitted to the host when Enter is pressed.
Remote Mode - F4
The current setting of this button determines whether pressing an alphanumeric key
causes a character to be sent to the host (remote) or only to the display (local). The
button and F4 key toggles between Remote mode and Local mode. The setting may
be saved by selecting Save Session in the File menu.
The emulation is in Local mode when the button does not display an asterisk.
Pressing alphanumeric keys will cause characters to be sent to the display only.
When Remote mode is activated (as indicated by an asterisk), pressing alphanumeric
keys will cause characters to be sent to the host.
10-6
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
Terminal Test - F5
When this button or F5 key is pressed, the HP 700-92/96 emulation will perform a
self-test and display a test screen showing all the displayable characters.
Memory Lock - F6
This enables data to be locked on the display so that it is not scrolled off the top of
the window when display memory is full. Once enabled, it can only be disabled if
this button or F6 key is pressed again, a reset is performed, or the emulation is exited.
Placing the cursor on the first line and enabling Memory Lock will prevent data from
automatically scrolling off the top of the display when display memory is full.
Instead, the message 'MEMORY FULL Press RETURN to clear' will be displayed.
You may use the cursor keys to edit data already displayed. To disable the Memory
Lock and continue entering new data, press F6 or click the button again and position
the cursor immediately below the last line.
The Memory Lock function may also be used to lock a specific number of lines from
the top of the display, leaving the remaining lines to scroll past them. This is useful
when you want column headings or instructions to remain on the display. To lock a
specific number of lines, place the cursor on the last line to be locked and press F6 or
click the button. The lines from the top of the display down to the cursor line will
now be locked.
Note: You can edit data contained in locked lines but if new data
is inserted it may cause data on the last line of the locked
region to be pushed down into the scrolling region.
Display Functions - F7
This button and the F7 key toggles the Display Functions mode on or off. The effect
of activating Display Functions mode depends on whether the emulation is in Local
or Remote mode. In Local mode, activating Display Functions mode will cause subsequently received control codes and escape sequences to be displayed on the screen
but not actioned. Exceptions to this rule are the commands issued when the button or
F7 key is pressed and the carriage return and line feed commands, which will be
executed.
In Remote mode, activating Display Functions mode will cause subsequently
received control codes and escape sequences to be transmitted to the host but not
actioned locally. Exceptions to this rule are the commands issued when the button or
F7 key is pressed and the carriage return and line feed commands, which will be
executed. If the Local Echo option is enabled in the HP Settings dialog box (see the
Setup Menus chapter), commands will be displayed on the screen as well as transmitted to the host.
Note: If the XmitFnctn (A) option is selected in the HP Settings
dialog box, the button and F7 key will not deactivate
Display Functions mode.
10-7
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
Auto LF - F8
This button and the F8 key enables or disables Auto Line Feed mode. When enabled,
a line feed command is automatically appended to every carriage return command
generated from the keyboard. The setting may be saved by selecting Save Session in
the File menu.
Configuration Selection
This set of function buttons is displayed by pressing the F9 key (which is equivalent
to the HP 700-92/96 User System key). These functions enable you to access three
other sets of function labels.
Device Control - F1
Clicking this button or pressing F1 will cause the Device Control function labels to
be displayed. The buttons and keys F1 through F8 will function as described in the
following section entitled Device Control.
Margins/Tabs/Col - F2
Clicking this button or pressing F2 will cause the Margins/Tabs/Col function labels
to be displayed. The buttons and keys F1 through F8 will function as described in the
section entitled Margins, Tabs & Start Column.
Modes - F4
Clicking this button or pressing F4 will cause the Mode Selection function labels to
be displayed. The buttons and keys F1 through F8 will function as described in the
previous section entitled Mode Selection.
Device Control
This set of function buttons is displayed by pressing the F9 key (which is equivalent
to the HP 700-92/96 User System key) then F1. These functions enable you to select
the device(s) to which data is sent and also to copy portions of data from display
memory to the printer.
10-8
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
Device Modes - F1
Clicking this button or pressing F1 will cause the Device Modes function labels to be
displayed. The keys F1 through F8 will function as described in the following section
entitled Device Modes.
To Ext Dev - F2
This toggle function determines whether data is sent to the printer or not. Data will be
sent to the printer when an asterisk is displayed on this button.
To Display - F3
This toggle function determines whether data is sent to the display or not. Data will
be sent to the display when an asterisk is displayed on this button.
Advance Page - F4
When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function, clicking this
button or pressing F4 will cause paper in the printer to be advanced to the top of the
next page.
Advance Line - F5
When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function, clicking this
button or pressing F5 will cause paper in the printer to be advanced by one line.
Copy All - F6
When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function, clicking this
button or pressing F6 will cause a copy of all lines from and including the cursor line
to the last line in display memory to be sent to the printer.
The cursor will move to the leftmost column on the next line when the current line
has been printed. You can cancel printing at the end of the current line by pressing
Return.
Note: If the cursor is positioned on a line below the last displayable line of data, nothing will be sent to the printer.
Copy Page - F7
When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function, clicking this
button or pressing F7 will cause a copy of all lines from and including the cursor line
to the last line displayed on the screen to be sent to the printer.
The cursor will move to the leftmost column on the next line when the current line
has been printed. You can cancel printing at the end of the current line by pressing
Return.
Note: If the cursor is positioned on a line below the last displayable line of data, nothing will be sent to the printer.
10-9
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
Copy Line - F8
When a printer is connected and enabled by the To Ext Dev function, clicking this
button or pressing F8 will cause a copy of the line containing the cursor to be sent to
the printer. The cursor will move to the leftmost column on the next line when the
line has been printed.
Note: If the cursor is positioned on a line below the last displayable line of data, nothing will be sent to the printer. If the
cursor is positioned on an empty line between two blocks of
data, the printer will perform a carriage return and line
feed.
Device Modes
Device Control - F1
Clicking this button or pressing F1 will cause the Device Control function labels to
be displayed, enabling you to select the device(s) to which data is sent and also to
copy portions of data from display memory to the printer. The buttons and keys F1
through F8 will function as described in the previous section entitled Device Control.
Record Mode - F2
This is used to copy data received from the host to the printer and/or display,
depending on the setting of the To Ext Dev and To Display labels in the Device
Control menu.
Note: This function does not take effect when the emulation is in
Local mode. In Remote mode, received data is sent directly
to the selected device(s).
The keyboard will be disabled when Record mode is activated except for the F2 key
which is used to exit the mode.
Log Bottom - F3
When the cursor moves to the next line as a result of an explicit line feed or end-ofline wraparound, the line of data which the cursor has just moved from will be sent to
the printer when this function is activated. This enables you to create a hardcopy of
all the lines in the order in which they were entered via the keyboard or received from
the host.
Note: Both the emulation and the host must be using the ENQ/
ACK or Xon/Xoff handshakes or a baud rate that is no
higher than the rate supported by the printer.
10-10
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
Log Bottom remains activated until either this button or F3 is pressed again, Log
Top is activated, a reset is performed, or the emulation is exited.
Log Top - F4
When the display memory becomes full and more data is received from the host or
keyboard, lines of data from the top of the display are deleted to make way for the
new data. The Log Top function enables the data that is removed from the top of the
display to be sent to the printer when the To Ext Dev function is activated in the
Device Control menu.
Note: Both the emulation and the host must be using the ENQ/
ACK or Xon/Xoff handshakes or a baud rate that is no
higher than the rate supported by the printer.
Log Top remains activated until either this button or F4 is pressed again, Log
Bottom is activated, a reset is performed, or the emulation is exited.
Note: This function does not take effect when Memory Lock is
activated.
Margins, Tabs & Start Column
This set of function buttons is displayed by pressing the F9 key (which is equivalent
to the HP 700-92/96 User System key) then F2. These functions enable you to
redefine the start column, set tabs, and specify the left and right margins.
Start Column - F1
This function is used to temporarily redefine the start column for transmitted data
when no logical start-of-text pointer is present and the Return or Enter keys are
pressed in Modify Line or Modify All mode.
Note: The default start column is specified in the HP Settings
dialog box. Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for details.
Usually a start-of-text pointer is automatically generated to designate the leftmost
character in the current line if it is the last line of data in display memory. The pointer
will remain in display memory until the line is deleted. If the line has no start-of-text
pointer, data transmission will begin at the start column specified by this option. The
column range that can be specified is from 1 to 80, inclusive.
10-11
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
To change the current start column, move the cursor to the new starting point and
click this button or press the F1 key. The start column will revert to that specified
within setup when the emulation is reset or re-entered.
Set Tab - F2
This function enables tab stops to be defined. To define a tab stop, move the cursor to
the column to contain the tab and click this button or press F2.
Note: Tab stops that do not lie within the left and right margins
will be ignored when the Tab key is pressed. All tab stops
will be ignored when the emulation is in Format mode.
Clear Tab - F3
This function enables an individual tab stop to be cleared. To clear a tab stop, move
the cursor to the column containing it and click this button or press F3.
Clr All Tabs - F4
Clicking this button or pressing F4 will cause all defined tab stops to be cleared
(except the left margin which is an implicit tab stop).
Left Margin - F5
This function enables you to define the left margin. Margins determine the boundary
for certain cursor movement commands (such as carriage return and cursor home),
and insert character and delete character functions. Data to the left of this margin will
still be accessible. The left margin is an implicit tab stop.
When data received from the host or entered through the keyboard reaches the right
margin, the cursor will move to the specified left margin on the next line down (as
long as InhEolWrp is not selected in the HP Settings dialog box and, in the case of
keyboard-entered data, auto line feed mode is enabled).
To specify the left margin, place the cursor in the column for the margin location and
click this button or press F5. The left margin can be reset to column 1 by pressing F7
(this will also reset the right margin to column 80).
Note: Margins are disregarded when data is transferred from
display memory to the host. The margins will be cleared
when Format mode is enabled.
Right Margin - F6
This function enables you to define the right margin. Margins determine the boundary for certain cursor movement commands (such as carriage return and cursor
home), and insert character and delete character functions. Data to the right of this
margin will still be accessible.
10-12
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
When data received from the host or entered through the keyboard reaches the
specified right margin, the cursor will move to the left margin on the next line down
(as long as InhEolWrp is not selected in the HP Settings dialog box and, in the case
of keyboard-entered data, auto line feed mode is enabled).
To specify the right margin, place the cursor in the column for the margin location
and click this button or press F6. The right margin can be reset to column 80 by
pressing F7 (this will also reset the left margin to column 1).
Note: Margins are disregarded when data is transferred from
display memory to the host. The margins will be cleared
when Format mode is enabled.
Clr All Margins - F7
This function will reset both left and right margin settings so that the left margin is in
column 1 and the right margin in column 80.
Key Programming
The keys F1 through F8 and their equivalent buttons can be programmed by the host
or user to perform additional functions to those described in the previous section. The
keys may be assigned a string of alphanumeric characters and/or control codes, and
you can define whether the key string is executed locally or transmitted to the host, or
both. The buttons can also be programmed to display the new functions when in User
Keys mode.
User Keys mode is entered by pressing the F10 key. The f-key buttons displayed on
the screen will change to display the current User Key definitions. If no definitions
have been assigned, either by you or the host, the buttons will just display the legends
of each f-key as shown below.
To define the function of an f-key or equivalent button locally, press the keys Shift +
F10 to display the User Key Definition menu as shown overleaf. The menu can be
exited by pressing F9.
Default Definitions
While this menu is displayed the f-keys and equivalent buttons have the functions
shown by the buttons at the bottom of the window, so pressing F4 or the Default
Values button will cause the default key and button definitions to be asserted. The
default definitions will take effect once the User Key Definition menu is exited.
10-13
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
Key String Treatment
Each f-key and button definition displayed in the menu consists of two lines. The first
line begins with the f-key number followed by space then a one-character attribute
field. This field will contain either an uppercase L, T or N. These characters indicate
the following:
L :
T :
N :
The key string is executed locally.
The key string is transmitted to the host only.
The key string is treated as keyboard-entered data.
The default selection is T for all f-keys. To change this setting, use the Tab or Shift +
Tab keys to move the cursor over the field then press F2 (Next Choice button) or F3
(Previous Choice button) to cycle through the options until the one required is
displayed.
Function Indicator
The remainder of the first line is used to specify what is displayed on the screen
button to indicate its function. The default display shows the numbers of the f-keys.
The two fields following LABEL represent the upper and lower lines that can be
displayed on the button. To change the current definition, use the Tab or Shift + Tab
keys to move the cursor into the relevant field and type in the new definition which
can consist of a maximum of 16 characters, eight characters per field.
10-14
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
Key String Definition
The second line of each f-key definition contains the character string that is to be
displayed, executed, and/or transmitted to the host when the key or button is pressed.
The string may contain alphanumeric characters, control characters, and explicit
escape sequence characters entered when Display Functions mode is enabled by
pressing F7 or the Display Functns button.
The default f-key string begins with the characters EC which represent the escape
code that is used to begin each escape sequence. The EC characters are displayed in
the key definition line by pressing the Esc key or the keys Ctrl + [ together when
Display Functions mode is enabled. Note that you must enter the entire escape
sequence before disabling Display Functions mode (by pressing F7 again).
When Display Functions is enabled, the Return key may be used to insert carriage
return codes (CR) in the string. If Auto LF mode is selected in the Mode Selection
function menu, Return will generate a line feed (LF) code as well as carriage return.
To change an f-key/button string definition, use the Tab or Shift + Tab keys to move
the cursor onto the second line (the line following LABEL definition for that key/
button) and type in the new definition which can consist of a maximum of 80
characters.
When you have finished defining f-key/button strings, press the F9 key to exit the
menu. To enable the new definitions and display the relevant functions on the
buttons, press the F10 key.
Note: The host may reset the f-key definitions to their default
values if required by the application.
10-15
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
Character Display Attributes
The HP 700-92/96 emulation incorporates various display attributes which can be
enabled by host commands or from the keyboard by the user. These attributes are
listed in the table below.
When an attribute or set of attributes are enabled, they affect all subsequently
displayed characters until an end attribute command or another attribute command is
received, or the end of the line is reached. Attributes remain at the display location
where they were enabled and will not move when characters are inserted or deleted.
You can configure the f-keys and buttons so that they will enable these attributes
when pressed. To do this, display the User Key Definition menu by pressing the keys
Shift + F10 together. Use the Tab or Shift + Tab keys to position the cursor in the
first field next to the number of the f-key to be defined and press F2 until the letter L
for Local is displayed. Press Tab and type in the text that will appear in the display
label for the key, for example, Under in the first field and Line in the second for
Under Line. Press Tab to move down to the next line. Press F7 to enable Display
Functions mode then press Ctrl + [ together or the Esc key, followed by the characters &d and the attribute character, which for underline
is D.
The key definition should look like this if the F1 key was defined to enable the
underline attribute:
For any other attribute or combination of attributes, substitute the last character in the
second line (D in the example above) with the relevant character from the following
table.
@ A B C D E F G H
I
J K L M N O S
Half-Brightness
Underline
Inverse Video
Flashing
Invisible
End Attribute
When you have finished assigning character attribute commands to f-keys, press F9
to exit from the User Key Definition menu then F10 to enable the User Keys and
display the defined attribute labels.
10-16
IBM 3270 Emulation
11
IBM 3270 Emulation
This chapter describes features of the IBM 3270 terminal emulation.
Introduction
The IBM 3270 emulator provides emulation of all four models of the IBM 3278
alphanumeric terminal and also supports the IBM 3287-1 printer. The terminal
emulation supports Extended Attribute mode which allows different representation of
highlighted fields and permits host definition of text colours. (Note that you can
modify colours using the Attribute Settings dialog box but they cannot be saved as
colours are mapped differently in this mode.) The emulation also includes typeahead
capability so that you can continue to enter data without waiting for a prompt from the
host.
Session Configuration
WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in chapter
2.
1. Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the
Add button to display the New Connection dialog box.
2. Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK. The Terminal Emulation
Client Connection Wizard - Connection Information dialog box will be
displayed.
3. Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in
the Connection Name box.
4. Select the IBM 3270 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box.
11-1
IBM 3270 Emulation
5. Select the IBM 3270 Model which determines the size of the display and whether
or not extended attributes are supported. One of four display sizes can be selected:
3278/9-2
3278/9-3
3278/9-4
3278/9-5
24 rows by 80 columns
32 rows by 80 columns
43 rows by 80 columns
27 rows by 132 columns
Settings with the E extension provide support for the following extended attributes: 3270 field attributes, extended highlighting (blink, flash and underscore,
but not in combination), foreground colour, and query reply inbound structured
fields. These attributes are also supported by the 3279.
6. Specify if you want the right or left Control keys to perform the same function as
the keypad Enter or Reset keys, respectively.
7. Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box.
For a TCP/IP connection, click the TCP/IP button, enter the name or internet
address of the host computer in the Host Name box, then click Advanced for
additional Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to display
configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter
2 for details.
For a serial connection, click the Serial button, specify the communications port in
the Connect To box, then click Advanced for additional serial options. Refer to
the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information
dialog box, then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box.
8. Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager.
9. In the Terminal Connection Manager, display the Connections list, select the
session name you specified earlier in step 3, then click the Connect button.
Non-WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is not in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in the
Setup Menus chapter.
1. Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation... to
display the Emulation Settings dialog box.
2. Set the Alpha Emulation option to IBM3270, then click OK. The terminal will
now be in Network Virtual Terminal mode.
11-2
IBM 3270 Emulation
3. Display the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box if you wish to change the setting of the
IBM 3270 Model option which determines the size of the display and whether or
not extended attributes are supported. One of four display sizes can be selected:
3278/9-2
3278/9-3
3278/9-4
3278/9-5
24 rows by 80 columns
32 rows by 80 columns
43 rows by 80 columns
27 rows by 132 columns
Settings with the E extension provide support for the following extended attributes: 3270 field attributes, extended highlighting (blink, flash and underscore,
but not in combination), foreground colour, and query reply inbound structured
fields. These attributes are also supported by the 3279. Click OK to close the
dialog box.
4. Select Save Session in the File menu.
5. Select New Connection in the File menu to display the New Connection dialog
box.
6. Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box.
For a TCP/IP connection, select TCP/IP, enter the name or internet address of the
host computer in the Connect To box, then click Configure for additional Telnet
options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, select Modem, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure to display configuration options. Refer to
the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, select Serial, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure for additional serial options. Refer to the
Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
7. When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box,
click the Connect button to make the connection.
8. If necessary, enter the appropriate information to establish an IBM host session in
the Network Virtual Terminal mode screen.
9. When an IBM host session has been established, the screen will switch out of
Network Virtual Terminal mode and display the IBM 3270 emulation screen.
Note: You will be returned to the Network Virtual Terminal screen
when the connection to the IBM host has been closed.
11-3
IBM 3270 Emulation
Network Virtual Terminal Mode
Network Virtual Terminal (NVT) mode allows the operator to communicate with a
network gateway (in ASCII) for routing, logon etc, before the full IBM terminal
emulation protocol is established. NVT mode is indicated by the ? symbol in the
status line along the bottom of the display.
NVT mode displays an unformatted screen for data entry, allowing most of the
keyboard functionality for local editing. However, when the Enter key is pressed, the
line that the cursor is positioned on will be sent over Telnet as an ASCII string with
CR/LF terminators. The cursor will then be positioned at the start of the next line.
ASCII data received over Telnet will also be displayed at the current cursor position. A
CR character will be actioned as a 'new line' character, causing the cursor to move to
the start of the next line, scrolling the display if necessary. Once the appropriate details
have been entered to establish an IBM host session (which may be automatic), the
screen is cleared and switched into full IBM 3270 terminal emulation mode, as
indicated by the symbol in the status line.
IBM 3287-1 Printer Support
TN3287 printing is supported by setting the IBM 3270 Model option in the IBM
3270 Settings dialog box to 3287-1. When a new Telnet connection is made, the
display will change to show a message box which will indicate the current printer
status.
When printing commences a Print Abort box will be displayed enabling you to cancel
the print job. Note that this will stop print data being sent but will not disconnect you
from the host.
SysReq Key Support
When the SysReq option in the Telnet Options dialog box is selected, the key
mapped with the SysReq function enables you to toggle the display and keyboard
entries between the host operating system and the application. This enables you to
switch to the operating system and issue a LOGOFF command. When communicating
with the operating system the status line will display the symbol.
Note: Not all TN3270E servers provide full support of the SysReq
key.
11-4
IBM 3270 Emulation
The Status Line
The last line in the window is used to display status information in the form of
symbols and alphanumeric characters. A coloured line separates status information
from the rest of the display. Information is displayed in any of nine regions within the
status line as listed below.
1: Readiness & System Connection
Symbol
Colour
Column
Meaning
T
A
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
1
2
3
3
3
Telnet session running
Online (non-SNA)
Network Virtual Terminal mode
My job (IBM emulation screen)
Host operating system mode
Colour
Column
Meaning
Yellow
White
Red
Red
White
Red
10-18
10-13
10-15
10-14
10-17
10-13
Program check (nnn = error code)
Terminal wait
Numeric data only
Go elsewhere
System lock
Too much
?
2: Do Not Enter
Symbol
PROGnnn
NUM
SYSTEM
>
3: Typing Direction
Symbol
Colour
Column
Meaning
=>
<=
Blue
Blue
19
19
Typing direction left-to-right
Typing direction right-to-left
4: Bilingual Keyboard Mode
Symbol
Colour
Column
Meaning
N
L
Blue
Blue
20
20
National character set mode
Latin character set mode
5: TN3270E Device Name
Symbol
Colour
Column
Meaning
dddddddd
White
22-29
TN3270E actual device
name connected as
11-5
IBM 3270 Emulation
6: Shift
Symbol
Colour
Column
Meaning
NUM
Blue
43-45
Numeric lock on
Symbol
Colour
Column
Meaning
^
Blue
53
Insert mode on
Colour
Column
Meaning
Blue
Blue
73
73
Normal display
Right-to-left mirror display
7: Mode Symbol
8: Display Direction
Symbol
9: Cursor Position
Symbol
Colour
Column
Meaning
rr/cc or rr/ccc
White
75-80
Row/column cursor position
Readiness & System Connection
T
This indicates that a Telnet session is running.
A
This indicates that the protocol for communication between an
application program and the IBM 3270 emulation is not system
network architecture (SNA).
?
This indicates that the current screen is a Network Virtual Terminal screen. This screen is displayed when IBM 3270 mode is
entered before a telnet session has been initiated with the remote
host. This enables you to enter login text. Note that you will be
returned to this screen when you log off.
This indicates that the current screen is an IBM 3270 screen.
This screen will be displayed when you have initiated a Telnet
session with the host.
This indicates that you are currently communicating with the
host operating system, not the application.
11-6
IBM 3270 Emulation
Do Not Enter
The Do Not Enter ( ) symbol will appear when input from the keyboard or mouse
will not be accepted by the host (except Reset and SysReq). Symbols to the right of
this will indicate the reason. Pressing the Reset key will remove some of these symbols
from the status line. Note that the emulation includes typeahead capability so that in
most cases you can continue to enter data without waiting for the Do Not Enter
message to clear as the data will be stored until the host is ready.
PROGnnn Indicates that a programming error in the data from the host has
been detected, possibly due to incompatible application software. Press the Reset or SysReq key to remove this indicator
and unlock the keyboard.
Indicates that you must wait while the requested function is
performed.
NUM
Indicates that you tried to enter an invalid character into a numeric field when the numeric-lock feature was active. The
keyboard numeric-lock feature can be overridden by using a
Shift key. The keyboard can be unlocked and the indicator
removed by pressing the Reset key.
Indicates that you tried to enter data in the wrong location. This
will occur when you attempt to do any of the following:
Enter, insert, erase, or delete a character when the cursor is in a
protected field or at a field attribute location.
Perform a cursor-select operation when the cursor is not in a
valid cursor-select field.
The keyboard can be unlocked and the indicator removed by
pressing the Reset key.
SYSTEM
>
Indicates that you cannot enter any data because the application
program has disabled the keyboard following an entry.
Indicates that you attempted to insert characters into an unprotected field when the cursor was at the end of the field, or you
attempted to word wrap to the next line when there were not
enough spaces to enable a word wrap.
The keyboard can be unlocked and the indicator removed by
pressing the Reset key.
11-7
IBM 3270 Emulation
Typing Direction
=> or <=
This indicates the direction in which characters are displayed on
the screen when typed. The direction is toggled between left-toright (normal) and right-to-left by pressing the keys Shift + / on
the keypad.
Bilingual Keyboard Mode
N or L
This indicates whether the National (N) or Latin (L) character
set is active when a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard
is selected. Pressing the keys Shift + - on the keypad will toggle
between the two character sets.
Shift
NUM
This indicates that the numeric lock function is enabled and the
current cursor is in a numeric field. When the numeric lock
function is on, the current cursor is in an unprotected field and
the keyboard is in lowercase shift, you can only use the 0 to 9,
decimal sign (.), minus (-), and Dup keys.
Mode Symbol
^
This symbol indicates that the keyboard is in Insert mode. Already existing characters to the right of the cursor will move to
make room for new characters that are entered. Insert mode can
be disabled by pressing the Reset or SysReq key, or by performing any action that sends data to the host, such as pressing
the Enter, Clear, PA, or PF keys.
Display Direction
or
11-8
This indicates the orientation of the screen display. A right
arrow indicates normal left-to-right display, a left arrow indicates a right-to-left mirror image display. The display can be
toggled between the two directions by pressing the keys Shift +
Backspace.
IBM 3270 Emulation
Text Display Options
Display Right-to-Left
The contents of the screen can be displayed in reverse, i.e. as a right-to-left mirror
image, by pressing the keys Shift + Backspace. This is a toggle function, so pressing
the keys again will revert to normal left-to-right display. An arrow will be displayed on
the status line to indicate normal (right arrow) or mirror (left arrow) display.
Typing Direction
The direction in which characters are displayed on the screen when typed can be
toggled between normal left-to-right and right-to-left by pressing the keys Shift + / on
the keypad. The characters => or <= will be displayed on the status line to indicate the
current typing direction.
Selecting the Symbol Swap option in the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box will cause
symbols such as round or angle brackets to be displayed the correct way round when
typing right-to-left.
Close Key
If text has been typed using both typing direction modes in the same line or field, you
can force the right-hand text to join the left-hand text by pressing the keys Shift + * on
the keypad.
Push Mode
Push mode allows you to edit text whose direction is opposite the screen orientation. In
this mode the cursor orientation is reversed and a Push segment is created. Push mode
is toggled on/off by pressing the keys Ctrl + Shift + - (keypad minus).
Push mode has two secondary modes, Boundary mode and Edit mode.
Boundary mode is activated when Push mode is entered. The cursor will remain at its
current position while you type additional characters, and text will be pushed in the
opposite direction of the screen orientation.
Edit mode is activated when the cursor is moved from its Boundary position into the
Push segment area. In this mode, text can be edited within the Push segment while
typing in the field's natural direction.
Bilingual Keyboard Support
When a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard is selected, you can toggle
between the National and Latin character set by pressing the keys Shift + - on the
11-9
IBM 3270 Emulation
keypad. The character N or L will be displayed on the status line to indicate which
character set is currently active.
Selecting the Numeral Swap option in the IBM 3270 Settings dialog box will cause
all numbers to be displayed using the National character set when in Latin character set
mode.
Alternate Code Page
If a language supports two code pages (e.g. Hebrew New Code and Hebrew Old
Code), you can switch between the two by pressing the keys Ctrl + Shift + Alt + - on
the numeric keypad. This function can be assigned to a different key or key combination by using the IB_ALTCP virtual key name.
Keyboard Mapping
The illustration on the following page shows where IBM 3270 keyboard functions are
mapped to keys on the 101/102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout. Special key
functions that are provided on the IBM 3270 keyboard can be mapped to any key on
your keyboard by using the IB virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard
Macros dialog box.
11-10
QUIT
>
)
PRINT
SYSRQ
> Generates Field Tab with Ctrl.
(F17) (F18) RECRD PLAY
(F19) (F20)
F5
F6
F7
F8
MONO = Mono Case
CRSEL = Cursor Select
NEWLINE
(REVERSE DISP)
BACKSPACE
(F21) (F22) (F23)
F9
F10 F11 F12
FLCR = Flashing Cursor
ALTCR = Alternate Cursor
(CRSEL) [(FLCR)] [(ALTCR)] (F24)
(PAUSE)
CLEAR
P WRD
N WRD
P WRD = Previous Word
N WRD = Next Word
(DUP) (FIELD ZOOM
MARK) (PA3)
INS HOME PA1
D WRD ER INP RULE
(EOL) (COPY)
DEL ER EOF PA2
with Ctrl + Shift: NB COPY
with Ctrl: JUMP
PRINT
SYSRQ
5
0
2
1
INSERT
4
E EOF
+
_
3
ENTER
DEL
.
6
PA2
9
7
*
PA1
HOME
8
/
(TYPE (CLOSE [(PUSH)]
DIRECT) TEXT) (NAT/LAT)
D WRD = Delete Word
ER INP = Erase Input
ER EOF = Erase EOF
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
Functions in round brackets are generated when the keys are shifted.
Functions in square brackets are generated when used with Ctrl.
(F13) NB SET FN EDIT MONO
(F14) (F15) (F16)
F1
F2
F3
F4
Alt key usage:
Normal key usage:
<
(
<
(ATTN)
RESET
IBM 3270 Emulation
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
11-11
IBM 3270 Emulation
Record & Playback Keystrokes Facility
The record/playback keystrokes facility enables you to eliminate repetitive operations
by using the Fn keys to store, retrieve and display data. The Fn keys can store a total
of 1500 keystrokes. A sequence of recorded keystrokes may be interrupted so that
keystrokes can be entered manually before continuing with the recording or playback.
Note that local Fn key functions cannot be recorded.
The keys used to initiate recording and playback are shown below together with the
equivalent virtual key names which can be used to assign the functions to any key on
the keyboard:
Record:
Pause:
Quit:
Play:
Edit:
101/102 Key Keyboard
Virtual Key Names
Alt + F7
Shift + Pause
Alt + Escape
Alt + F8
Alt + F3
IB_RECORD
IB_PAUSE
IB_QUIT
IB_PLAY
IB_FEDIT
Recording Keystrokes
1. Press Record to enter Record mode.
The status line will display RECRD and a number from 0-1500 indicating the
number of new keystrokes that may be stored. A series of boxes displayed to the
right represent the Fn keys. A solid box indicates that the Fn key in that position is
currently storing recorded keystrokes.
2. Press the Fn key which will store the keystrokes. (On 101/102 keyboards you can
also use Shift + Fn.)
The status line will display R**** F* where R indicates you are in Record mode,
**** is the number of keystrokes that may be stored, and F* is the number of the
Fn key pressed.
Note: If you press a pre-recorded Fn key, its contents will be
replaced with the following keystrokes. You can also remove
the contents of the Fn key before recording by pressing the
Delete key.
3. Enter the keystrokes to be recorded. You may pause recording at any time to allow
keystrokes to be entered manually when played back by pressing Pause. To
continue recording, press Pause again.
Note: You can cancel the newly recorded keystrokes by pressing the
Quit key. This cancellation does not affect the previously
recorded keystrokes.
11-12
IBM 3270 Emulation
4. To finish and save the recording, press the Record key.
Playback Keystrokes
You can play back the contents of an Fn key as normal or one keystroke at a time. The
following procedure describes normal play back. For one keystroke play back, select
Single Step Macros in the Notice Board Setup dialog box.
1. Position the text cursor where the playback is to start.
2. Press the Play key to enter Play mode.
The status line will display PLAY and a series of boxes representing the Fn keys.
A solid box indicates that the Fn key in that position is currently storing recorded
keystrokes.
3. Press the Fn key storing the recorded data to play back.
Playback will begin immediately, as indicated by a P on the status line. All the
recorded keystrokes will be played back automatically. When playback is completed the P will disappear.
If the recorded keystrokes included Pause, then playback will halt at that point to
allow you to enter keystrokes manually. Press Play to resume playback from
where you stopped typing.
If you want to cancel during the playback operation, press the Quit key.
Editing Macros
1. Press Alt + F3.
2. Press the Fn key containing the macro to be edited.
The status line will display information about the Fn key macro as follows:
Item 1: Displays EDIT or INSERT depending on the current mode.
Item 2: Indicates the number of new keystrokes that may be stored.
Item 3: Displays the current Fn key number.
Item 4: Displays the cursor position within the macro (i.e. the number of keystrokes from the start of the macro).
Item 5: Displays the contents of the macro.
11-13
IBM 3270 Emulation
3. Use the Left or Right cursor keys to move the cursor one character position at a
time through the macro, or the Up or Down cursor keys to move 20 character
positions at a time.
4. If required, press the Insert key to toggle between Insert and Edit mode, as
indicated in the status line.
5. Make the required changes to the macro.
6. To save the edit, press Alt + F3.
7. Press Quit to exit.
Error Codes
The following error codes may appear on the status line if an error occurs during
recording or playback.
9001
Exceeded the maximum number of allowed keystrokes.
Remedy: Press the Record key to exit Record mode. To record a new
keystroke sequence, either:
a) Press the Record key and the target Fn key that has erasable data, then
enter the new data.
b) Press the Record key and the target Fn key that has erasable data, then
press the Delete key to erase the recorded data for that key.
9003
You pressed an invalid Fn key while performing the Record or Play
function.
Remedy: Press the Reset key.
9007
You pressed an invalid sequence key (e.g. Play) while performing the
Record function.
Remedy: Press the Reset key.
9010
While performing the Play function, you pressed an Fn key that does not
have a keystroke assigned to it.
Remedy: Press the Reset key.
9015
In communication mode, you pressed either the Quit or Pause key.
Remedy: Press the Reset key.
11-14
IBM 3270 Emulation
9019
In Record or Play mode. While the Record/play pause indicator was
displayed on the status line you pressed an invalid key (e.g. Play key in
Record mode, or Record key in Play mode).
Remedy: Press the Reset key.
Notice Board Facility
Introduction
The Notice Board is an area of the display in which copied data can be stored and
manipulated.
When the Notice Board is enabled (see Notice Board Setup dialog box), pressing the
Zoom key will toggle the display between full screen (i.e. the screen currently
containing the cursor) and split screen (host screen and Notice Board) mode. The
Zoom Settings options in the Notice Board Setup dialog box determine which screen
is displayed above the other. When viewing the display, pointers at each end of the
dividing line between the two screens indicate which is the host screen.
Key Functions
The keys used by default for Notice Board functions are shown below together with
the equivalent virtual key names which can be used to assign the functions to any key
on the keyboard.
NB Setup:
Zoom:
Jump:
NB Copy:
Copy:
101/102 Key Keyboard
Virtual Key Names
Alt + F2
Alt + Page Up
Ctrl + Page Up
Ctrl + Shift + Page Up
Shift + Page Down
IB_NB_SETUP
IB_NB_ZOOM
IB_NB_JUMP
IB_NB_COPY
IB_COPY
Copying Screen Data To The Display
1. Position the text cursor at the start of the area to be copied.
2. Press the Copy key to start the Copy function. Note that the status line will display
the key functions available.
3. Use the cursor keys to move the text cursor to the diagonally-opposite corner of
the display area to be copied. The currently selected area will be highlighted in
green. Note that you can toggle the position of the text cursor between the two
diagonally-opposite corners of the selected area by pressing the Return key.
11-15
IBM 3270 Emulation
4. Press F13 to copy the selected area. The copied area (i.e. the target) will be
highlighted in red.
5. Use the cursor keys to move the red target area to the required position on the
display. You can also use the Jump key to move the target area to the host screen
or Notice Board.
6. Press Enter on the numeric keypad to save the copied area at the current position
on the display.
Copying Screen Data To A Function Key
Note that the Notice Board Setup dialog box has several options which determine
whether this facility is enabled and whether all screen data in the selected area is
copied, or only data in user entry fields.
1. Position the text cursor at the start of the area to be copied.
2. Press the Copy key to start the Copy function. Note that the status line will display
the key functions available.
3. Use the cursor keys to move the text cursor to the diagonally-opposite corner of
the display area to be copied. The currently selected area will be highlighted in
green. Note that you can toggle the position of the text cursor between the two
diagonally-opposite corners of the selected area by pressing the Return key.
4. Press F14 to copy the selected area.
5. Press the function key required to store the copied data.
6. Press Enter on the numeric keypad to store the copied data in the chosen function
key.
11-16
IBM 5250 Emulation
12
IBM 5250 Emulation
This chapter describes features of the IBM 5250 terminal emulation.
Introduction
The IBM 5250 emulator provides emulation of 5250 type alphanumeric terminals,
both monochrome (green/white plus attributes) and colour. Colours may be modified
using the Attribute Settings dialog box. This emulation can be used for connection to
an IBM AS/400, System/36 or System/38. A typeahead capability is provided so that
you can continue to enter data without waiting for a prompt from the host.
Session Configuration
WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in chapter
2.
1. Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the
Add button to display the New Connection dialog box.
2. Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK. The Terminal Emulation
Client Connection Wizard - Connection Information dialog box will be
displayed.
3. Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in
the Connection Name box.
4. Select the IBM 5250 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box.
5. Select the IBM 5250 Model. This is reported back to the host in response to a
terminal identification request. (Note that not all features of the terminal model
may be supported.) This also allows you to specify whether the display is treated
12-1
IBM 5250 Emulation
as monochrome (green for normal characters, white for intense attribute) or colour
for attributes. The terminal models currently supported and their display characteristics are listed below.
Type
Display
Rows x Columns
5291_1
5292_2
5251_11
3179_2
3196_A1
3180_2
3477_FC
3477_FG
3486_BA
3487_HA
3487_HC
5555_B01
5555_C01
Monochrome
Colour
Monochrome
Colour
Monochrome
Monochrome
Colour
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Colour
Monochrome
Colour
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80 (default)
24 x 80
24 x 80 and 27 x 132
24 x 80 and 27 x 132
24 x 80 and 27 x 132
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80
The printer models supported are listed below:
3812-1
5553-B01
Single byte printer
Double byte printer
If double byte character sets (e.g. Japanese) are supported and you wish to use
them, then select either 5555_B01 (monochrome) or 5555_C01 (colour) for
display, or 5553-B01 for printing.
6. Specify if you want the right or left Control keys to perform the same function as
the keypad Enter or Reset keys, respectively.
7. Specify the IBM5250 Monochrome setting. Note that all IBM 5250 models
support both monochrome and colour display. When monochrome is selected,
characters will be displayed in green and intense fields will be displayed in white.
When monochrome is not selected, the settings specified in the Attributes dialog
box (described in the Setup Menus chapter) will be used for the display.
8. Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box.
For a TCP/IP connection, click the TCP/IP button, enter the name or internet
address of the host computer in the Host Name box, then click Advanced for
additional Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to display
configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter
2 for details.
For a serial connection, click the Serial button, specify the communications port in
the Connect To box, then click Advanced for additional serial options. Refer to
the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
12-2
IBM 5250 Emulation
Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information
dialog box, then click Next.
9. The following four dialog boxes provide further configuration options which are
described in chapter 2. Click Next to advance through the dialog boxes.
Automate Login Process
Printer Port Settings
GUI Overrides
Aux Port Settings
10. When you have made your selections, click Finish to return to the Terminal
Connection Manager.
11. In the Terminal Connection Manager, display the Connections list, select the
session name you specified earlier in step 3, then click the Connect button.
Non-WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is not in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in the
Setup Menus chapter.
1. Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation... to
display the Emulation Settings dialog box.
2. Set the Alpha Emulation option to IBM5250 then click OK. The terminal will
now be in Network Virtual Terminal mode.
3. Display the Settings menu and select IBM 5250... to display the IBM 5250
Settings dialog box.
4. Specify the IBM 5250 Model. This is reported back to the host in response to a
terminal identification request. (Note that not all features of the terminal model
may be supported.) This also allows you to specify whether the display is treated
as monochrome (green for normal characters, white for intense attribute) or colour
for attributes. The terminal models currently supported and their display characteristics are listed below.
Model
Display
Rows x Columns
5291_1
5292_2
5251_11
3179_2
3196_A1
3180_2
3477_FC
3477_FG
3486_BA
3487_HA
Monochrome
Colour
Monochrome
Colour
Monochrome
Monochrome
Colour
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80 (default)
24 x 80
24 x 80 and 27 x 132
24 x 80 and 27 x 132
24 x 80 and 27 x 132
24 x 80
24 x 80
12-3
IBM 5250 Emulation
3487_HC
5555_B01
5555_C01
Colour
Monochrome
Colour
24 x 80
24 x 80
24 x 80
The printer models supported are listed below:
3812-1
5553-B01
Single byte printer
Double byte printer
If double byte character sets (e.g. Japanese) are supported and you wish to use
them, then select either 5555_B01 (monochrome) or 5555_C01 (colour) for
display, or 5553-B01 for printing.
5. Specify the Monochrome setting. Note that all IBM 5250 models support both
monochrome and colour display. When monochrome is selected, characters will be
displayed in green and intense fields will be displayed in white. When monochrome is not selected, the settings specified in the Attributes dialog box (described in the Setup Menus chapter) will be used for the display.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
6. Select Save Session in the File menu.
7. Select New Connection in the File menu to display the New Connection dialog
box.
8. Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box.
For a TCP/IP connection, select TCP/IP, enter the name or internet address of the
host computer in the Connect To box, then click Configure for additional Telnet
options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, select Modem, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure to display configuration options. Refer to
the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, select Serial, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure for additional serial options. Refer to the
Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
9. When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box,
click the Connect button to make the connection.
10. If necessary, enter the appropriate information to establish an IBM host session in
the Network Virtual Terminal mode screen.
11. When an IBM host session has been established, the screen will switch out of
Network Virtual Terminal mode and display the IBM 5250 emulation screen.
Note: You will be returned to the Network Virtual Terminal screen
when the connection to the IBM host has been closed.
12-4
IBM 5250 Emulation
Network Virtual Terminal Mode
Network Virtual Terminal (NVT) mode allows the operator to communicate with a
network gateway (in ASCII) for routing, logon etc, before the full IBM terminal
emulation protocol is established. NVT mode is indicated by the absence of the
symbol in the status line along the bottom of the window. NVT mode displays an
unformatted screen for data entry, allowing basic keyboard functionality as a simple
ASCII terminal. In addition to data keys, other recognized keys are:
Clear
Enter
Newline
Backspace
Tab
clears the screen
sends a CR to the host
sends a CR to the host
sends a BS to the host
sends an HT to the host
Once the appropriate details have been entered to establish an IBM host session (which
may be automatic), the screen is cleared and switched into full IBM 5250 terminal
emulation mode, as indicated by the symbol in the status line.
The Status Line
The last line in the window is used to display status information in the form of
symbols and alphanumeric characters. A coloured line separates status information
from the rest of the display. Information is displayed in any of six regions within the
status line as listed below.
Region
Symbol
Colour
Column
Meaning
1
2
3
4
5
6
T
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Red
White
1
18
28
48
57
75-80
Telnet session running
On line (IBM 5250 mode)
Message waiting
Insert mode on
Input inhibited
Row/column cursor position
M
^
rr/cc or rr/ccc
The meaning of the symbols is as follows:
T Indicates that a Telnet session is running.
Indicates that the current screen is an IBM 5250 screen. This screen will be
displayed when you have initiated a Telnet session with the host.
M Indicates that the system has one or more messages waiting for you.
^ Indicates that the keyboard is in Insert mode. Already existing characters to the
right of the cursor will move to make room for new characters that are entered.
12-5
IBM 5250 Emulation
Insert mode can be disabled by pressing the Insert key again, pressing the Reset
key, or by performing any action that sends data to the host, such as pressing the
Enter, Clear, or PF keys.
Indicates when input from the keyboard or mouse will not be accepted by the host.
When this is because an error has occured, as shown in the error line, pressing the
Reset key will remove the error. Alternatively, more information can be obtained
by pressing the Help key. The only other keys available are Attn, SysReq and
Print. Note that the emulation includes typeahead capability so that in most cases
you can continue to enter data without waiting for the Do Not Enter message to
clear as the data will be stored until the host is ready.
Keyboard Mapping
The following illustration shows where IBM 5250 keyboard functions are mapped to
keys on the 101/102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout. Special key functions that are
provided on the IBM 5250 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by
using the AS virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box.
Word Processing Mode
The following keyboard functions are available when the IBM 5250 emulation is in
Word Processing mode:
Symbols Command
Begin Bold
Centre Text
Next Text Column
Half-Index Down
End Attribute
Find Stop Code
Start New Page
Required Page End
Insert Stop Code
Begin Underline
Word Underline
Half-Index Up
Beginning of Line
End of Line
Top of Page
End of Page
Insert Carrier Return
Required Space
Required Tab
12-6
Alt + A
Alt + B
Alt + C
Alt + D
Alt + H
Alt + J
Alt + N
Alt + P
Alt + R
Alt + S
Alt + U
Alt + W
Alt + Y
Alt + Cursor Left
Alt + Cursor Right
Alt + Cursor Up
Alt + Cursor Down
Alt + Field Exit
Alt + Space
Alt + Tab
)
RECRD
ROLL D
PA3
PLAY (F18) (F19) (F20)
(F17)
F6
F7
F8
F5
(F21)
F9
F10
F12
(NEWLINE)
FIELD EXIT
(REVERSE DISP)
BACKSPACE
F11
[CRSEL] (F22) (F23) (F24)
<FAST ROLL D FAST>
ROLL U
ER FLD = Erase Field
ER EOF = Erase EOF
PA1
PA2
PA3
(DUP) (F MRK)
INSERT HOME ROLL D
ER FLD RULE
DEL (EOL)
ER EOF ROLL U
CLEAR
SYSRQ TEST (PAUSE)
[L PRT]
PRINT
5
8
0
2
1
INSERT
4
ER EOF
7
HOME
FIELD
+
3
ENTER
DEL
.
6
ROLL U
ROLL D (FIELD
EXIT)
9
(TYPE (CLOSE [(PUSH)]
DIRECT) TEXT) (NAT/LAT)
HELP FIELD
/
MONO = Monochrome
CRSEL = Cursor Select
L PRT = Local Print
F MRK = Field Mark
EOL = End Of Line
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
Functions in round brackets are generated when the keys are shifted.
Functions in square brackets are generated when used with Ctrl.
QUIT (F14) (F15) [MONO]
(F16)
(F13)
F2
F3
F4
F1
Alt key usage:
Normal key usage:
(
(ATTN)
RESET
IBM 5250 Emulation
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
12-7
IBM 5250 Emulation
Text Display Options
Display Right-to-Left
The contents of the screen can be displayed in reverse, i.e. as a right-to-left mirror
image, by pressing the keys Shift + Backspace. This is a toggle function, so pressing
the keys again will revert to normal left-to-right display. An arrow will be displayed on
the status line to indicate normal (right arrow) or mirror (left arrow) display.
Typing Direction
The direction in which characters are displayed on the screen when typed can be
toggled between normal left-to-right and right-to-left by pressing the keys Shift + / on
the keypad. The characters => or <= will be displayed on the status line to indicate the
current typing direction.
Selecting the Symbol Swap option in the IBM 5250 Settings dialog box will cause
symbols such as round or angle brackets to be displayed the correct way round when
typing right-to-left.
Close Key
If text has been typed using both typing direction modes in the same line or field, you
can force the right-hand text to join the left-hand text by pressing the keys Shift + * on
the keypad.
Push Mode
Push mode allows you to edit text whose direction is opposite the screen orientation. In
this mode the cursor orientation is reversed and a Push segment is created. Push mode
is toggled on/off by pressing the keys Ctrl + Shift + - (keypad minus).
Push mode has two secondary modes, Boundary mode and Edit mode.
Boundary mode is activated when Push mode is entered. The cursor will remain at its
current position while you type additional characters, and text will be pushed in the
opposite direction of the screen orientation.
Edit mode is activated when the cursor is moved from its Boundary position into the
Push segment area. In this mode, text can be edited within the Push segment while
typing in the field’s natural direction.
Bilingual Keyboard Support
When a code page that supports a bilingual keyboard is selected, you can toggle
between the National and Latin character set by pressing the keys Shift + - on the
12-8
IBM 5250 Emulation
keypad. The character N or L will be displayed on the status line to indicate which
character set is currently active.
Selecting the Numeral Swap option in the IBM 5250 Settings dialog box will cause
all numbers to be displayed using the National character set when in Latin character set
mode.
Alternate Code Page
If a language supports two code pages (e.g. Hebrew New Code and Hebrew Old
Code), you can switch between the two by pressing the keys Ctrl + Shift + Alt + - on
the numeric keypad. This function can be assigned to a different key or key combination by using the AS_ALTCP virtual key name.
Record & Playback Keystrokes Facility
The record/playback keystrokes facility enables you to eliminate repetitive operations
by using the Fn keys to store, retrieve and display data. The Fn keys can store a total
of 1500 keystrokes. A sequence of recorded keystrokes may be interrupted so that
keystrokes can be entered manually before continuing with the recording or playback.
Note that local Fn key functions cannot be recorded.
The keys used to initiate recording and playback are shown below together with the
equivalent virtual key names which can be used to assign the functions to any key on
the keyboard:
Record:
Pause:
Quit:
Play:
101/102 Key Keyboard
Virtual Key Names
Alt + F4
Shift + Pause
Alt + LControl (see note)
Alt + F5
AS_RECORD
AS_PAUSE
AS_QUIT
AS_PLAY
Note: Quit is Alt + Left Control if Left Control is defined as the
Reset key.
Recording Keystrokes
1. Press Record to enter Record mode.
The status line will display RECRD and a number from 0-1500 indicating the
number of new keystrokes that may be stored. A series of boxes displayed to the
right represent the Fn keys. A solid box indicates that the Fn key in that position is
currently storing recorded keystrokes.
12-9
IBM 5250 Emulation
2. Press the Fn key which will store the keystrokes. (On 101/102 keyboards you can
also use Shift + Fn.)
The status line will display R**** F* where R indicates you are in Record mode,
**** is the number of keystrokes that may be stored, and F* is the number of the
Fn key pressed.
Note: If you press a pre-recorded Fn key, its contents will be
replaced with the following keystrokes. You can also remove
the contents of the Fn key before recording by pressing the
Delete key.
3. Enter the keystrokes to be recorded. You may pause recording at any time to allow
keystrokes to be entered manually when played back by pressing Pause. Pause
mode is indicated by R ^. To continue recording, press Pause again.
Note: You can cancel the newly recorded keystrokes by pressing the
Quit key. This cancellation does not affect the previously
recorded keystrokes.
4. To finish and save the recording, press the Record key.
Playback Keystrokes
1. Position the text cursor where the playback is to start.
2. Press the Play key to enter Play mode.
The status line will display PLAY and a series of boxes representing the Fn keys.
A solid box indicates that the Fn key in that position is currently storing recorded
keystrokes.
3. Press the Fn key storing the recorded data to play back.
Playback will begin immediately, as indicated by a P on the status line. All the
recorded keystrokes will be played back automatically. When playback is completed the P will disappear.
If the recorded keystrokes included Pause, then playback will halt at that point to
allow you to enter keystrokes manually. Press Play to resume playback from
where you stopped typing.
If you want to cancel during the playback operation, press the Quit key.
Error Codes
The following error codes may appear on the status line if an error occurs during
recording or playback.
12-10
IBM 5250 Emulation
9001
Exceeded the maximum number of allowed keystrokes.
Remedy: Press the Record key to exit Record mode. To record a new
keystroke sequence, either:
a) Press the Record key and the target Fn key that has erasable data, then
enter the new data.
b) Press the Record key and the target Fn key that has erasable data, then
press the Delete key to erase the recorded data for that key.
9003
You pressed an invalid Fn key while performing the Record or Play
function.
Remedy: Press the Reset key.
9007
You pressed an invalid sequence key (e.g. Play) while performing the
Record function.
Remedy: Press the Reset key.
9010
While performing the Play function, you pressed an Fn key that does not
have a keystroke assigned to it.
Remedy: Press the Reset key.
9015
In communication mode, you pressed either the Quit or Pause key.
Remedy: Press the Reset key.
9019
In Record or Play mode. While the Record/play pause indicator was
displayed on the status line you pressed an invalid key (e.g. Play key in
Record mode, or Record key in Play mode).
Remedy: Press the Reset key.
Fax Image Support
Fax images in Tiff, PCX and G3 format are supported. The following display facilities
are supported if the host provides them:
Scrollbars
These are displayed if the image is larger than the screen area
allocated to it.
EasyScroll
IBM term for scrolling by dragging the image with the mouse.
Zoom
Enables you to highlight an area of the image to magnify it so that
it fills the allocated space (the aspect ratio is preserved).
Additional functions such as rotation and colouring are controlled by the host.
12-11
IBM 5250 Emulation
Notes
12-12
IBM 3151 Emulation
13
IBM 3151 Emulation
This chapter describes features of the IBM 3151 terminal emulation.
Introduction
The IBM 3151 emulation is based on the native mode of the IBM 3151 Model 11
terminal. The emulation is configured using the IBM 3151 Settings dialog box which
is described in the Setup Menus chapter. The display is set to 24 rows by 80 columns
by default, but you can select one of four display formats from the IBM 3151
Settings dialog box:
24 rows x 80 columns
25 rows x 80 columns
24 rows x 132 columns
25 rows x 132 columns
Session Configuration
WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in chapter
2.
1. Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the
Add button to display the New Connection dialog box.
2. Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK. The Terminal Emulation
Client Connection Wizard - Connection Information dialog box will be
displayed.
3. Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in
the Connection Name box.
13-1
IBM 3151 Emulation
4. Select the IBM 3151 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box.
5. Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box.
For a TCP/IP connection, click the TCP/IP button, enter the name or internet
address of the host computer in the Host Name box, then click Advanced for
additional Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to
display configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, click the Serial button, specify the communications port
in the Connect To box, then click Advanced for additional serial options. Refer
to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information
dialog box, then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box.
6. Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager.
7. In the Terminal Connection Manager, display the Connections list, select the
session name you specified earlier in step 3, then click the Connect button.
Non-WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is not in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in the
Setup Menus chapter.
1. Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation... to
display the Emulation Settings dialog box.
2. Select the IBM 3151 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box.
3. Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to
display the New Connection dialog box.
4. Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box.
For a TCP/IP connection, select TCP/IP, enter the name or internet address of
the host computer in the Connect To box, then click Configure for additional
Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for
details.
For a modem connection, select Modem, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure to display configuration options. Refer to
the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, select Serial, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure for additional serial options. Refer to the
Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
13-2
IBM 3151 Emulation
5. When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog
box, click the Connect button to make the connection.
Note: You can save these settings as a connection template using
the Save Session As dialog box. Refer to the Setup Menus
chapter for details.
The Status Bar
The status bar along the bottom of the display shows the status of various operations.
1
2
3
4
Field 1:
(rrr,ccc) indicates the current row and column position of the cursor.
Field 2:
INSERT indicates that Insert mode is active when the Insert key is
pressed or when the Insert Character command is received. Note that the
message will not be displayed if the Insert Character option is not set
to Mode. Insert mode is exited by pressing the Insert or Reset key.
Field 3:
Indicates the current operating mode.
In BLOCK mode, keyboard entered data is displayed and processed
locally, allowing you to edit it before a block of data is sent to the host.
In CHAR mode, keyboard entered data is sent simultaneously to the host
and the display.
In ECHO mode, keyboard entered data is sent only to the host. The host
is then responsible for returning the data to the display.
Field 4:
HOLD SCREEN indicates that the Hold Screen key has been pressed to
suspend screen update. Press Hold Screen again to enable screen update.
INVALID KEY appears when you press an invalid key.
KEYS LOCKED appears when the keyboard is locked. The keys will be
unlocked when the Keyboard Unlock command is received or when the
Cancel key is pressed.
NUMERIC indicates the cursor is located in an unprotected numeric field.
PRINTING indicates that data is being sent to the printer.
SENDING indicates that data is being sent to the host.
WRONG PLACE appears when you press an invalid key in a protected
field or field attribute character position. It is also displayed when you
13-3
IBM 3151 Emulation
try to insert a character or line in a screen already full when the Forcing
Insert option is set to Off.
If two or more messages are sent to a particular field, then the message with the
highest priority will be displayed. Messages in field 4 are displayed in the following
order:
HOLD SCREEN
SENDING
PRINTING
KEYS LOCKED
INVALID KEY
WRONG PLACE
NUMERIC
Keyboard Mapping
The following illustration shows where IBM 3151 keyboard functions are mapped to
keys on the 101/102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout. Special key functions can
be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using the virtual key names listed in the
Define Keyboard Macros dialog box.
13-4
F1
Control key usage:
Normal key usage:
F2
S LINE
S MSG
F3
RESET PR MSG BREAK
Alt + F1 = RESET
ESC
(DEF F)
F4
F6
F7
F8
P SCR S MSG S LINE
F9
F10
MSG
SEND
RETURN
LF
F11 F12
PA2
2
PA1
1
0
5
4
.
3
PA3
6
9
S LINE
MSG
8
7
//
JUMP S MSG
ENTER
SEND
_
, (Alt)
= Send Message
= Send Line
= Print Message
= Print Screen
= Erase Input
DEL ER INP
S MSG
S LINE
PR MSG
P SCR
ER INP
INSERT HOME CLEAR
DEL LN
ER EOP
TAB
DELETE
ER EOF
INS LN
PRINT PRINT HOLD
LINE
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
Functions in brackets are generated when the keys are shifted.
F5
IBM 3151 Emulation
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
13-5
IBM 3151 Emulation
Defining Function Keys
The keys mapped as F1 through F12 can be redefined from the keyboard or by the
host. The function keys can store up to 128 characters between them and can include
escape sequences and ASCII control characters in addition to character strings. Here
we describe how to define a function key from the keyboard.
1. Display the function key menu by pressing the keys Shift + Esc.
DEF F: __ .........................................................................................................................
Field A
Field B
2. Specify the function key to be defined by entering a two-digit number in field A,
for example, 01 for F1, 12 for F12, then press Enter. Field B will display the
current definition of the function key.
DEF F: 01
E
C
a...................................................................................................................
AID
3. In field B, enter the new definition for the function key. This can include a
character string, escape sequence or control characters.
A control character is entered by typing the keyboard equivalent. For example,
the CR (carriage return) character is entered by pressing Ctrl + M. Refer to the
Character Sets appendix to find the keyboard equivalents of other control
characters.
The following example shows the definition entry for the F1 key so that it
displays New definition then performs a carriage return when pressed:
DEF F: 01 Pericom SoftwareCR ..........................................................................................
You can erase the character at the current cursor position by pressing the keys
Ctrl + 2. If you want to restore the default definition, press the Clear key while
the cursor is in field B.
4. Press the Send key to store the key definition. The function key menu will be
cleared to allow you to enter the next key definition. If you do not wish to save
the definition, press Ctrl + Shift + Esc instead of Enter.
Note that the function keys can store a maximum of 128 characters between
them. When this number is reached or exceeded, field A will start blinking and
any characters following the 128th character will be discarded.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 until you have finished defining function keys.
6. To exit from the function key menu, press Ctrl + Shift + Esc.
13-6
MDIS Prism Emulations
14
MDIS Prism Emulations
This chapter describes the MDIS Prism terminal emulations.
Session Configuration
WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in chapter
2.
1. Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the
Add button to display the New Connection dialog box.
2. Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK. The Terminal Emulation
Client Connection Wizard - Connection Information dialog box will be
displayed.
3. Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in
the Connection Name box.
4. Select the MDI P12\P8 or MDI Prism-9 terminal emulation in the Emulation list
box.
5. Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box.
For a TCP/IP connection, click the TCP/IP button, enter the name or internet
address of the host computer in the Host Name box, then click Advanced for
additional Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to display
configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter
2 for details.
14-1
MDIS Prism Emulations
For a serial connection, click the Serial button, specify the communications port in
the Connect To box, then click Advanced for additional serial options. Refer to
the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information
dialog box, then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box.
6. Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager.
7. In the Terminal Connection Manager, display the Connections list, select the
session name you specified earlier in step 3, then click the Connect button.
Non-WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is not in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in the
Setup Menus chapter.
1. Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation... to
display the Emulation Settings dialog box.
2. Select the MDI P12\P8 or MDI Prism-9 terminal emulation in the Alpha
Emulation list box.
3. Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to
display the New Connection dialog box.
4. Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box.
For a TCP/IP connection, select TCP/IP, enter the name or internet address of the
host computer in the Connect To box, then click Configure for additional Telnet
options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, select Modem, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure to display configuration options. Refer to
the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, select Serial, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure for additional serial options. Refer to the
Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
5. When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box,
click the Connect button to make the connection.
Note: You can save these settings as a connection template using
the Save Session As dialog box. Refer to the Setup Menus
chapter for details.
14-2
MDIS Prism Emulations
Keyboard Mapping
The following illustration shows where MDIS Prism keyboard functions are mapped
to keys on the 101/102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout. Special key functions that
are provided on the MDIS Prism keyboard can be mapped to any key on your
keyboard by using the MD virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros
dialog box.
14-3
14-4
F14
F2
F13
F1
Alt key usage:
Normal key usage:
TAB
(BACKTAB)
ESC
F1
F13
F3
F15
F4
F5
F17
F6
F18
F7
F8
F9
LINE SCRN
FEED DOWN
CLEAR HOME SCRN
UP
BACKSPACE
DEL
PRINT HOLD BREAK
SCRN
F10 F11 F12
ENTER
_
,
(SCRN R) (SCRN L) SCROL SCROL
UP DOWN
SCRL R SCRL L
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
Functions in brackets are generated when the keys are shifted.
F16
MDIS Prism Emulations
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
PT250 Emulation
15
PT250 Emulation
This chapter describes the Prime PT250 terminal emulation.
Session Configuration
WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in chapter
2.
1. Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the
Add button to display the New Connection dialog box.
2. Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK. The Terminal Emulation
Client Connection Wizard - Connection Information dialog box will be
displayed.
3. Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in
the Connection Name box.
4. Select the PT250 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box.
5. Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box.
For a TCP/IP connection, click the TCP/IP button, enter the name or internet
address of the host computer in the Host Name box, then click Advanced for
additional Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to display
configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter
2 for details.
For a serial connection, click the Serial button, specify the communications port in
the Connect To box, then click Advanced for additional serial options. Refer to
the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
15-1
PT250 Emulation
Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information
dialog box, then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box.
6. Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager.
7. In the Terminal Connection Manager, display the Connections list, select the
session name you specified earlier in step 3, then click the Connect button.
The PT250 emulation is configured using the PT250 Settings dialog box which is
described in the Setup Menus chapter.
Non-WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is not in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in the
Setup Menus chapter.
1. Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation... to
display the Emulation Settings dialog box.
2. Select the PT250 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box.
3. Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to
display the New Connection dialog box.
4. Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box.
For a TCP/IP connection, select TCP/IP, enter the name or internet address of the
host computer in the Connect To box, then click Configure for additional Telnet
options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, select Modem, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure to display configuration options. Refer to
the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, select Serial, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure for additional serial options. Refer to the
Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
5. When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box,
click the Connect button to make the connection.
Note: You can save these settings as a connection template using
the Save Session As dialog box. Refer to the Setup Menus
chapter for details.
The PT250 emulation is configured using the PT250 Settings dialog box which is
described in the Setup Menus chapter.
15-2
PT250 Emulation
The Status Line
The last line in the window is used to display a status line consisting of eleven fields
which show the status of various operations. The following illustration shows the
information that is displayed by default.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
Field 1:
Will display either ONLINE or LOCAL, depending on whether the
emulation is online to the host or in local mode.
Field 2:
Indicates whether the input line from the main port is connected.
DSR will be displayed when the Data Set Ready (DSR) connection is
active.
Pressing the Stop key to stop the host from transmitting data will cause
this field to display XOFF.
When this field is blank, the connection is inactive.
Field 3:
Indicates the mode of data transmission as follows:
CHAR indicates that the emulation is in Character mode in which each
character is sent to the host when it is typed at the keyboard.
CNTRL indicates that the emulation is in Control Representation mode in
which all received data and commands from the host or keyboard are
displayed but not acted upon.
LINE or PAGE indicates that the emulation transmits data a line or a page
at a time when the Enter key is pressed in Block mode.
Field 4:
Indicates how many pages are in the display memory, 1 or 2.
Field 5:
Indicates when in Block mode the type of data that is to be transmitted, as
determined by the application.
ALL indicates that all fields are transmitted to the host.
MODIFIED indicates that only fields that have changed are transmitted to
the host.
SELECTED indicates that only fields specified by the program are
transmitted to the host
UNPROTCT indicates that only unprotected fields are transmitted to the
host.
Field 6:
Indicates the currently selected character set or graphics mode as follows:
8B indicates the 8-bit ASCII character set.
G0 indicates the 7-bit ASCII character set (default).
G1 indicates a second 7-bit ASCII character set.
15-3
PT250 Emulation
GR indicates the Block Graphics character set.
LD indicates the Line Drawing character set.
Field 7:
Indicates the current transmission status as follows:
AUX SEND is displayed when data is being sent to an auxiliary device.
KEYBD LOCK is displayed when the keyboard is locked to prevent data
entry, usually set by the application.
MAIN SEND is displayed when a block of data is sent to the host.
SOFT LOCK is displayed when errors are detected. Pressing the Clear
key will correct this condition.
SYSTEM RDY is the default message that is displayed indicating that
everything is functioning correctly and that no block of data is being sent
to the host.
Field 8:
Displays terminal operation status messages. These are generally error
messages which can be cleared by pressing the Clear key for each message
displayed.
ALL GRAPHICS indicates that you have attempted to enter data in a
field reserved for graphics characters when in Block mode.
ALPHA ONLY indicates that you have attempted to enter non-alphabetic
data in a field reserved for alphabetic characters when in Block mode.
ALPHANUMERIC indicates that you have attempted to enter nonalphanumeric data in a field reserved for alphanumeric characters when in
Block mode.
FILL WHOLE indicates that every position in the field must be filled
with data before you can continue when in Block mode.
HOST RX OVFW indicates that at least one character of data has been
lost during a transmission from the host. This occurs when the host sends
data faster than the emulation can process it.
INVALID CMD indicates that an invalid control character or escape
sequence was received, or an invalid key was pressed.
KYBD OVFW indicates that at least one character of data has been lost
during a transmission from the keyboard to the host. This occurs when the
keyboard sends data faster than the host can process it.
MUST ENTER indicates that you must enter data in a specific field
before you can continue when in Block mode.
NUMERIC ONLY indicates that you have attempted to enter nonnumeric data in a field reserved for numeric characters when in Block
mode.
RX ERROR indicates that the emulation received incorrect data as a result
of a parity or framing error.
SCREEN FULL indicates that the emulation cannot display any more
characters that it may receive when in Block mode.
15-4
PT250 Emulation
Field 9:
Displays messages defined by the program or user.
Field 10:
Displays NUM when Num Lock is activated, otherwise this field is blank.
Field 11:
Displays INS when Insert mode is activated. In Replace mode (default),
this field is blank.
Keyboard Mapping
The following illustration shows where PT250 keyboard functions are mapped to keys
on the 101/102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout. Special key functions that are
provided on the PT250 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by
using the PT virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box.
15-5
15-6
F3
PF3
F4
PF4
A
CHARSET
Alt key usage:
Normal key usage:
TAB
BACKTAB
F1
PF1
4
EURO
F5
PF5
F6
F7
PF7
F8
PF8
F9
PF9
F10
PF10
CHARSET is a toggle function.
PF6
PF11
PF12
HELP MENU
HOME PGUP
CLEAR USM
SCR L SCR D SCR R
SCR U
SCR = Scroll
ERASE END PAGE
DEL BEGIN DOWN
INSERT
PRINT SCRL BREAK
SCRN LOCK STOP
00
- (CHM)
0
2
1
(INSERT)
3
ENTER
(DEL)
.
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
(HOME) ( ) (PGUP)
CANCL
7
8
9
( )
( )
+
4
5
6
(END) ( ) (PGDN)
NUMLK , (ULG)
ULG = Unlabelled Large
CHM = Change Mode
USM = Unlabelled Small
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
Functions in brackets are generated when Num Lock is OFF.
TAB functions as BACKTAB when shifted.
F2
PF2
F1
PF1
PT250 Emulation
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
PT250 Emulation
Displaying Alternate Characters
PT250 mode uses two character sets called Standard and Alternate to display
characters. Both sets incorporate all the characters contained in the ASCII (7-bit or
lower half) and PT250 Additional (8-bit or upper half) character set tables shown in
the Character Sets appendix.
When the emulation is in 7-bit mode, only the lower half (i.e 7-bit part) of the
Standard and Alternate character sets can be used, so the ASCII characters in the
Alternate character set are replaced by the PT250 Additional characters, which are then
treated as 7-bit characters.
You can toggle between Standard and Alternate character set mode by pressing the
keys Alt + A. This emulates the function of the Char Set key found on the PT250
keyboard, enabling you to display characters from the Additional character set which
are not available for the keyboard nationality you have selected in setup.
The following table lists the Standard ASCII characters in the left column with their
equivalent Additional characters in the right column of each block. Press the key
bearing the ASCII character to generate the Additional character when you are in
Alternate character set mode.
Alternate Equivalents Of Standard Characters
SP
0
°
@
À
P
D
`
à
p
!
¡
1
±
A
Á
Q
Ñ
a
á
q
ñ
"
¶
2
2
B
Â
R
Ò
b
â
r
ò
3
C
Ã
S
Ó
c
ã
s
ó
D
Ä
T
Ô
d
ä
t
ô
E
Å
U
Õ
e
å
u
õ
Ö
f
æ
v
ö
g
ç
w
÷
#
£
3
$
¤
4
%
¥
5
µ
6
¢
F
Æ
V
◆
G
Ç
W
H
È
X
Ø
h
è
x
ø
I
É
Y
Ù
i
é
y
ù
&
´
§
7
Ç
(
¨
8
)
©
9
*
ª
:
º
J
Ê
Z
Ú
j
ê
z
ú
+
«
;
»
K
Ë
[
1
/4
k
ë
{
û
,
<
Û
L
Ì
\
Ü
l
ì
|
ü
-
=
Y´
M
Í
]
1
/2
m
í
}
y´
>
3
/4
N
Î
^
n
î
~
?
¿
O
Ï
_
o
ï
DEL
.
/
®
1
ß
ÿ
15-7
PT250 Emulation
Notes
15-8
Siemens 97801 Emulation
16
Siemens 97801 Emulation
This chapter describes the Siemens 97801 terminal emulation.
Session Configuration
WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in chapter
2.
1. Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the
Add button to display the New Connection dialog box.
2. Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK. The Terminal Emulation
Client Connection Wizard - Connection Information dialog box will be
displayed.
3. Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in
the Connection Name box.
4. Select the Siemens 97801 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box.
5. Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box.
For a TCP/IP connection, click the TCP/IP button, enter the name or internet
address of the host computer in the Host Name box, then click Advanced for
additional Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to
display configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, click the Serial button, specify the communications port
in the Connect To box, then click Advanced for additional serial options. Refer
to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
16-1
Siemens 97801 Emulation
Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information
dialog box, then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box.
6. Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager.
7. In the Terminal Connection Manager, display the Connections list, select the
session name you specified earlier in step 3, then click the Connect button.
Non-WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is not in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in the
Setup Menus chapter.
1. Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation... to
display the Emulation Settings dialog box.
2. Select the Siemens 97801 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box.
3. Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to
display the New Connection dialog box.
4. Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box.
For a TCP/IP connection, select TCP/IP, enter the name or internet address of
the host computer in the Connect To box, then click Configure for additional
Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for
details.
For a modem connection, select Modem, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure to display configuration options. Refer to
the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, select Serial, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure for additional serial options. Refer to the
Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
5. When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog
box, click the Connect button to make the connection.
Note: You can save these settings as a connection template using
the Save Session As dialog box. Refer to the Setup Menus
chapter for details.
16-2
Siemens 97801 Emulation
Keyboard Mapping
The following illustration shows where Siemens 97801 keyboard functions are
mapped to keys on the 101/102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout. Special key
functions that are provided on the Siemens 97801 keyboard can be mapped to any
key on your keyboard by using the SI virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box.
16-3
16-4
F1
F2
P1
P2
P3
F6
F7
F8
F5
(F15) (F16) (F17) (F18)
P4
P5
F10 F11 F12
F9
(F19) (F20) (F21) (F22)
SCR L
SCR R
SCR = Scroll
DEL START
END NEXT
(D LINE) (HELP)
I WORD D WRD
INSERT
PRIOR
(I LINE) HOME
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
Functions in square brackets are generated when used with Ctrl + Shift.
F3 (F16)
F4
(F13) (F14)
F4
[CODE] CURSOR MODE
Alt key usage:
MODE
Normal key usage: F4
Control key usage: (F14)
BACKTAB
TAB
ESC
+
=
Siemens 97801 Emulation
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
TA6530 Emulation
17
TA6530 Emulation
This chapter describes features of the Tandem 6530 terminal emulation.
Session Configuration
WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in chapter
2.
1. Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the
Add button to display the New Connection dialog box.
2. Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK. The Terminal Emulation
Client Connection Wizard - Connection Information dialog box will be
displayed.
3. Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in
the Connection Name box.
4. Select the TA6530 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box.
5. Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box.
For a TCP/IP connection, click the TCP/IP button, enter the name or internet
address of the host computer in the Host Name box, then click Advanced for
additional Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to
display configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, click the Serial button, specify the communications port
in the Connect To box, then click Advanced for additional serial options. Refer
to the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
17-1
TA6530 Emulation
Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information
dialog box, then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box.
6. Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager.
7. In the Terminal Connection Manager, display the Connections list, select the
session name you specified earlier in step 3, then click the Connect button.
The Tandem 6530 emulation is configured using the TA6530 Settings dialog box
which is described in the Setup Menus chapter.
Non-WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is not in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in the
Setup Menus chapter.
1. Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation... to
display the Emulation Settings dialog box.
2. Select the TA6530 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box.
3. Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to
display the New Connection dialog box.
4. Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box.
For a TCP/IP connection, select TCP/IP, enter the name or internet address of
the host computer in the Connect To box, then click Configure for additional
Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for
details.
For a modem connection, select Modem, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure to display configuration options. Refer to
the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, select Serial, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure for additional serial options. Refer to the
Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
5. When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog
box, click the Connect button to make the connection.
Note: You can save these settings as a connection template using
the Save Session As dialog box. Refer to the Setup Menus
chapter for details.
The Tandem 6530 emulation is configured using the TA6530 Settings dialog box
which is described in the Setup Menus chapter.
17-2
TA6530 Emulation
The Status Line
The last (25th) line in the window is used to display messages and status information.
You can enable or disable display of a border which separates this line from the rest
of the lines above it by setting the Status Border option in the TA6530 Settings
dialog box accordingly.
The status line is divided into two fields. The first and leftmost field is used to display
messages of up to 64 characters in length. The second field displays the current
operating status and will usually display at least one of the following status
indicators:
ANSI
The emulation is operating in ANSI mode.
BLOCK
The emulation is operating in Block mode.
CNTRL
Display controls mode activated. In this mode, received control codes
will be displayed but not actioned.
CONV
The emulation is operating in Conversational mode.
HOLD
Hold screen is activated. The emulation stops processing incoming data
when the Ctrl + S keys are pressed in ANSI mode. To release the hold
state and continue normal processing, press Ctrl + Q.
INS
Insert mode is activated. In Block mode, keyboard entered characters are
inserted at the cursor position without overwriting already existing
characters.
LOCKED The keyboard has been temporarily locked by the application.
NUM
Num lock is activated. Num lock is toggled on and off by pressing the
keys Alt + Num Lock.
PROT
Block Protect mode enabled. Refer to the Block Mode section for details.
When the emulation detects an error, the status line will be temporarily replaced by
an error line which will display one of the following messages:
INVALID LANGUAGE SET REQUESTED
You tried to use an invalid national character set.
INVALID DATA
You tried to enter an invalid character in the current field when in Block protect
mode.
17-3
TA6530 Emulation
Operating Modes
The Tandem 6530 emulation operates in one of three main modes, Conversational,
Block, or ANSI. Conversational and Block modes are normally used for applications
running on a NonStop host system, and ANSI mode for applications running on the
LXN host system.
Conversational Mode
In Conversational mode, characters are sent to the host as you type them. This is
useful when applications need to interact with you on a character, word or line-byline basis.
Display memory is treated as one long page consisting of 400 lines, of which 24 lines
may be viewed at any one time. Lines above or below those currently displayed may
be scrolled into view using cursor or display control keys. Once all the display
memory has been used, new data will force all previous lines of data up one line so
that the first line is erased, ensuring that the oldest data is erased first.
The status line will display CONV when you are in Conversational mode.
Block Mode
In Block mode, characters are stored in a communications buffer and are not
transmitted to the host until the application requests them. The characters are then
sent as a block. This enables you to enter a large amount of data and edit it locally
before it is transmitted.
Block mode has two sub-modes: Block Nonprotect and Block Protect. In Block
Nonprotect mode you can enter any type of character at any position on the screen
(except on the 25th line). In Block Protect mode the application divides the screen
into protected and nonprotected areas called fields. The cursor cannot be moved into
protected fields, which may contain prompts or information or be empty. The cursor
can only be moved into unprotected fields, which may also define the type of
characters that can be entered.
In Block mode, display memory is divided into pages, the number of pages being
determined by the application.
The status line will display BLOCK when you are in Block mode, and PROT when
in Block Protect mode.
17-4
TA6530 Emulation
ANSI Mode
In ANSI mode, characters are sent to the host as you type them, and standard ANSI
(American National Standard Institute) functions are executed. Applications that run
on the LXN host system generally recognize and use these functions.
The status line will display ANSI when you are in ANSI mode.
The Rule Cursor
A cross-hair rule cursor can be displayed by pressing the keys Alt + Page Up. To return
to the normal cursor, press Alt + Page Down.
Keyboard Mapping
The following illustration shows where TA6530 keyboard functions are mapped to
keys on the 101/102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout. Special key functions that
are provided on the TA6530 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard
by using the TA virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog
box.
17-5
17-6
F1
ESC
F2
F12
Alt key usage:
Normal key usage:
TAB
(BACKTAB)
F11
(DEL)
BREAK
RESET
F3
F13
F4
F14
F6
F16
F7
F8
F9
F10 F11 F12
R DWN
R UP
R = Roll
)
(
*
)
6
) (PGDN)
(
9
) (PGUP)
+
,
2
1
3
ENTER
(CHAR INSERT) (C DEL)
.
0
4
(END)
(
5
8
7
(HOME) (
/
DELETE LINE
CHAR END
INS (DL) RULE C
OFF
PG DN
INSERT
LINE
with Control
DELETE
LINE
Ctrl+Shift+Alt = CLR ALL
R DWN R UP C/S TAB
INSERT HOME ON
CHAR
PG UP
RULE C
with Control
(PAGE)
PRINT ERASE RESET
SCRN LINE BREAK
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
Numeric keypad bracketed functions are generated when Num Lock is OFF.
Bracketed functions not on the Numeric keypad are generated when shifted.
F5
F15
TA6530 Emulation
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
Unisys T27 Emulation
18
Unisys T27 Emulation
This chapter describes features of the Unisys T27 terminal emulation.
Session Configuration
WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in chapter
2.
1. Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the
Add button to display the New Connection dialog box.
2. Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK. The Terminal Emulation
Client Connection Wizard - Connection Information dialog box will be
displayed.
3. Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in
the Connection Name box.
4. Select the Unisys T27 terminal emulation in the Emulation list box.
5. Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box.
For a TCP/IP connection, click the TCP/IP button, enter the name or internet
address of the host computer in the Host Name box, then click Advanced for
additional Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to display
configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter
2 for details.
For a serial connection, click the Serial button, specify the communications port in
the Connect To box, then click Advanced for additional serial options. Refer to
the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
18-1
Unisys T27 Emulation
Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information
dialog box, then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box.
6. Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager.
7. In the Terminal Connection Manager, display the Connections list, select the
session name you specified earlier in step 3, then click the Connect button.
The Unisys T27 emulation is configured using the Unisys T27 Settings dialog box
which is described in the Setup Menus chapter.
Non-WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is not in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in the
Setup Menus chapter.
1. Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation... to
display the Emulation Settings dialog box.
2. Select the Unisys T27 terminal emulation in the Alpha Emulation list box.
3. Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to
display the New Connection dialog box.
4. Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box.
For a TCP/IP connection, select TCP/IP, enter the name or internet address of the
host computer in the Connect To box, then click Configure for additional Telnet
options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, select Modem, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure to display configuration options. Refer to
the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, select Serial, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure for additional serial options. Refer to the
Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
5. When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box,
click the Connect button to make the connection.
Note: You can save these settings as a connection template using
the Save Session As dialog box. Refer to the Setup Menus
chapter for details.
The Unisys T27 emulation is configured using the Unisys T27 Settings dialog box
which is described in the Setup Menus chapter.
18-2
Unisys T27 Emulation
The Status Bar
LTIA
On: The host connection is active, but the Unisys T27
emulation does not have an active address.
Off: No line activity; or the Unisys T27 emulation
transmitted a character to the host, or the user
pressed LOCAL.
Blink: The host connection is active and the Unisys
T27 emulation has an active address.
ENQUIRY On: The host is unable to send a message to the keyboard
environment, press RCV to enable the keyboard
environment to receive data.
Off: The DCP (data comm pointer) page went into receive
mode; or the user pressed LOCAL.
LOCAL
On: The user pressed LOCAL; or the user pressed a key
when the cursor and the DCP (data comm pointer)
were in the same page.
Off: The Unisys T27 emulation is switched to transmit
or receive mode.
RCV
On: The keyboard environment is in receive mode (ready
to receive data) or is receiving data from the host; or
FSL, GSL, BSL was received while the T27 was in
transmit or local mode and the Fast Select enabled
option is selected in the Unisys T27 Settings dialog
box.
Off: Data has been received successfully; or the T27 went
into transmit mode by use of XMIT or SPCFY; or
the cursor and DCP are in the same page upon data
entry.
XMIT
On: The keyboard environment is transmitting data to the
host or is ready to transmit data.
18-3
Unisys T27 Emulation
Off: Transmission has been successfully completed or the
T27 is switched to local mode.
Keyboard Mapping
The following illustration shows where Unisys T27 keyboard functions are mapped to
keys on the 101/102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout. Special key functions that are
provided on the Unisys T27 keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by
using the UT virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box.
18-4
F2
Alt key usage:
Normal key usage:
F1
F1
ENV 1
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
MARK BOUND ETX UNDER
F9
SPLIT
F10
FULL
LOCAL RECVE
(SCR L) (SCR D) (SCR R)
(SCR U)
SCR = Scroll
(D LINE) (C EOP) NEXT
D CHR CL EOL PAGE
(I LINE) (CL ALL) PREV
I CHAR HOME PAGE
(PR ALL) RECALL
HELP
PR UNP STORE
XMIT
SPCFY
,
(SRCH
CHAR)
I LINE = Insert Line
D LINE = Delete Line
C EOP = Clear To End Of Page
CL EOL = Clear To End Of Line
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
Functions in brackets are generated when the keys are shifted.
ENV 1 ENV 2 ENV 3 CONFG
Unisys T27 Emulation
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
18-5
Unisys T27 Emulation
Notes
18-6
Wyse Emulations
19
Wyse Emulations
This chapter describes features of the Wyse WY-50, WY-50+ and
WY-60 terminal emulations.
Session Configuration
WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in chapter
2.
1. Click the Configure tab in the Terminal Connection Manager then click the
Add button to display the New Connection dialog box.
2. Select Terminal Emulation Client and click OK. The Terminal Emulation
Client Connection Wizard - Connection Information dialog box will be
displayed.
3. Enter a name which will identify this session configuration for future selection in
the Connection Name box.
4. Select the Wyse terminal emulation required in the Emulation list box.
The WY50, WY50+ and WY60 emulations provide compatibility with software
designed to drive the Wyse WY-50, WY-50+ and WY-60 terminals, respectively.
The ADDS A2 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive
the ADDS Viewpoint A2 terminal, as emulated by the Wyse WY-50/50+/60
terminals.
The HZ 1500 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive
the Hazeltine 1500 terminal, as emulated by the Wyse WY-50/50+/60 terminals.
The TVI 910+, TVI 920 and TVI 925 emulations provide compatibility with
software designed to drive the TeleVideo 910+, 920 and 925 terminals, respectively, as emulated by the Wyse WY-50/50+/60 terminals.
19-1
Wyse Emulations
5. Click Next to display the Host Information dialog box.
For a TCP/IP connection, click the TCP/IP button, enter the name or internet
address of the host computer in the Host Name box, then click Advanced for
additional Telnet options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in
chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, click the Modem button then click Advanced to display
configuration options. Refer to the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter
2 for details.
For a serial connection, click the Serial button, specify the communications port in
the Connect To box, then click Advanced for additional serial options. Refer to
the Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
Make the relevant selections then click OK to return to the Host Information
dialog box, then click Next to display the Advanced Options dialog box.
6. Click Finish to return to the Terminal Connection Manager.
7. In the Terminal Connection Manager, display the Connections list, select the
session name you specified earlier in step 3, then click the Connect button.
All the Wyse associated emulations are configured via the Wyse Settings dialog box
which is described in the Setup Menus chapter. Note that some settings may not apply
to the particular emulation currently running. Selecting a setting that is not applicable
to the current emulation will cause the emulator to use the default setting for that
emulation when the dialog box is exited.
Non-WBT Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for creating a session configuration when
the terminal is not in WBT mode. The options available are described in detail in the
Setup Menus chapter.
1. Display the Settings menu from the command bar and select Emulation... to
display the Emulation Settings dialog box.
2. Select the Wyse terminal emulation required in the Alpha Emulation list box.
The WY50, WY50+ and WY60 emulations provide compatibility with software
designed to drive the Wyse WY-50, WY-50+ and WY-60 terminals, respectively.
The ADDS A2 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive
the ADDS Viewpoint A2 terminal, as emulated by the Wyse WY-50/50+/60
terminals.
The HZ 1500 emulation provides compatibility with software designed to drive
the Hazeltine 1500 terminal, as emulated by the Wyse WY-50/50+/60 terminals.
19-2
Wyse Emulations
The TVI 910+, TVI 920 and TVI 925 emulations provide compatibility with
software designed to drive the TeleVideo 910+, 920 and 925 terminals, respectively, as emulated by the Wyse WY-50/50+/60 terminals.
3. Display the File menu from the command bar and select New Connection to
display the New Connection dialog box.
4. Select the type of host connection required in the Type list box.
For a TCP/IP connection, select TCP/IP, enter the name or internet address of the
host computer in the Connect To box, then click Configure for additional Telnet
options. Refer to the TCP/IP Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a modem connection, select Modem, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure to display configuration options. Refer to
the Modem Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
For a serial connection, select Serial, specify the communications port in the
Connect To box, then click Configure for additional serial options. Refer to the
Serial Connection Settings section in chapter 2 for details.
5. When you have specified the required settings in the New Connection dialog box,
click the Connect button to make the connection.
Note: You can save these settings as a connection template using
the Save Session As dialog box. Refer to the Setup Menus
chapter for details.
All the Wyse associated emulations are configured via the Wyse Settings dialog box
which is described in the Setup Menus chapter. Note that some settings may not apply
to the particular emulation currently running. Selecting a setting that is not applicable
to the current emulation will cause the emulator to use the default setting for that
emulation when the dialog box is exited.
19-3
Wyse Emulations
Display Format
Below the command bar (described in chapter 2) the display is divided into three areas
by default: the status line, the data area, and the label line.
The status line which is used to display information relating to the emulation and
messages from the application. The following section describes the status messages
that can be displayed by the emulation.
The data area is where data entered from the keyboard or the application is displayed.
The data area is set to 24 lines by 80 columns by default.
The label line is displayed at the bottom of the screen when the data area is set to 24 or
42 lines. This is can be used to display messages or function key labels defined by the
host.
Status Line Messages
The status line is divided into two sections. The left section displays messages relating
to the emulation and the right section is used to display messages from the host. The
type of status line displayed is determined by the setting of the Status Line option in
the Wyse Settings dialog box. The Extended status line provides similar information
to the Standard status line but with additional fields for displaying information on
local editing mode.
The emulation status messages are displayed in one of six or eight fields along the first
section of the status line, depending on whether the Standard or Extended status line is
displayed. The messages and their meanings are listed below.
FDX
1 2 3 4
001,001
5
6
7
8
Host Messages
Standard & Extended Status Line
Field 1:
Indicates the current keyboard mode.
CAPS indicates that Caps Lock is on. Press the Caps Lock key to toggle
the mode on and off.
LOCK indicates that the keyboard is locked. This takes precedence over
the CAPS and NUM messages.
NUM indicates that Num Lock is on. Press the Num Lock key to toggle
the mode on and off.
19-4
Wyse Emulations
Field 2:
Indicates the number of the page that is currently displayed. No message is
displayed when the current page is 0.
Field 3:
* indicates that Monitor mode is on. In this mode, received codes are not
actioned but displayed as symbolic representations.
Field 4:
Indicates the current operating mode.
FDX indicates full-duplex mode.
HDX indicates half-duplex mode.
LCL indicates local mode.
BLK indicates block mode.
HBLK indicates half-duplex block mode.
HLD indicates that display update has been suspended. Pressing the Hold
key will toggle display update on and off.
Field 5:
>AUX indicates that the emulation is in auxiliary print or transparent print
mode.
<AUX indicates that the emulation is in auxiliary receive mode.
=AUX indicates that the emulation is in auxiliary receive mode and
auxiliary print mode.
%AUX indicates that a print screen operation is in progress.
Standard Status Line
Field 6:
rrr-ccc indicates the current row and column position of the cursor.
Extended Status Line
Field 6:
PROT indicates that Protect mode is on.
Field 7:
WPRT indicates that Write-protect mode is on when in Protect mode.
Field 8:
INS indicates that Insert mode is on.
Keyboard Mapping
The following illustration shows where Wyse keyboard functions are mapped to keys
on the 101/102 key Enhanced AT keyboard layout. Special key functions that are
provided on the Wyse keyboard can be mapped to any key on your keyboard by using
the WY virtual key names listed in the Define Keyboard Macros dialog box.
19-5
19-6
F2
F1
F3
F13
F4
F14
F5
F15
F6
F16
F2
F12
F7
F8
F9
BACKSPACE
DELETE
F10 F11 F12
D = Delete
C = Clear
(REPL)
HOME PREV
INSERT
(D LIN) (C SCR)
NEXT
D CHR C LINE
PRINT FUNCT
(SEND) HOLD BREAK
INS CH with Alt
)
8
(
9
)
) (PREV)
0
2
1
(REPLACE)
+
3
ENTER
(DEL)
.
4
5
6
(C LINE) ( ) (NEXT)
(
7
(HOME) (
INS LIN with Ctrl
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
Numeric keypad bracketed functions are generated when Num Lock is OFF.
Bracketed functions not on the Numeric keypad are generated when shifted.
F1 - F6 function as F13 - F16 when shifted.
F12
F11
Alt key usage:
Normal key usage:
TAB
(BACKTAB)
ESC
Wyse Emulations
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
Initialization Commands
20
Initialization Commands
This chapter describes all the initialization commands that can be
included in the registry or on the command line to run the emulator.
Introduction
This chapter describes the registry entries and command line options that can be used
to specify how the emulator is initially run.
Registry entries for the emulator are read from a registry key under
HKLM\Software\Pericom\<product name> using Startup,Default or
Startup,NAME (where NAME is specified using the -N command line option).
Command line options are used to modify the configuration of the emulator on startup. They are entered after the name of the emulator and each option must be preceded
by a space. An option is immediately followed by its setting if one is required, without
a space in between.
The following section provides a summary of all the registry entries and command line
options supported by the emulator. This is followed by sections describing the
commands in detail, grouped according to their function.
20-1
Initialization Commands
Command Summary
Note that ◆ indicates the command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions
of the emulator.
■ indicates the command is only available if your version of TeemTalk supports
graphics emulations.
Host Connection
Command Function
Registry Entry
Command Line
Load Winsock on start-up
Exit on connection close/fail
No exit on connection close/fail
Reconnect on close/fail
New session warning message
Close connection on exit
none
ExitOnClose = "on"
ExitOnClose = "off"
ExitOnClose = "Connect"
SessionWarning = "off"
WarnExit = "off"
-LW
-E
-E1
-E2
-OS
-J
Session Configuration
Command Function
Registry Entry
Command Line
Start-up command group to action
Session configuration to use
Disable bell
◆ Enable debug (Capture/Replay)
◆ Enable debug, log send/receive
none
none
Bell = "off"
none
none
-Ngroupname
-SE"description"
-BE
-Debug
-Debug2Way
Display
Command Function
Registry Entry
Command Line
◆ Window minimized on start-up
◆ Window maximized on start-up
◆ Window full screen on start-up
◆ Disable window frame resize
Title to display in title bar
Subtitle to display in title bar
◆ Disable title bar
Disable Min/Max & Close buttons
◆ Disable Minimize button
◆ Disable Maximize button
Disable Close button
◆ Disable System menu
◆ Disable System & Min/Max
Disable Command bar
Disable Command bar
Disable tool buttons on cmd bar
WindowSize = "minimized"
WindowSize = "maximized"
WindowSize = "FullScreen"
none
none
none
none
none
MinimizeBox = "off"
MaximizeBox = "off"
MenuCloseItem = "off"
SystemMenu = "off"
SystemMenu = "none"
CommandBar = "off"
CmdBarTools = 0
CmdBarTools = 1
-MI
-MZ
-F
-WF
-T"title"
-ST"subtitle"
-TB
-SY
-MN
-MX
-MT
none
none
-CB
-MA
-TB
20-2
Initialization Commands
Disable toolbar
none
Disable menu bar/pop-ups, toolbar none
◆ Disable menu bar
none
◆ Disable menu bar & pop-ups
none
Disable File menu
FileMenu = "off"
Disable Factory item
Factory = "off"
Disable Reset item
Reset = "off"
Disable New Connection item NewConnection = "off"
Disable OpenSession item
OpenSession = "off"
Disable CloseSession item
CloseSession = "off"
Disable Save Session item
SaveSession = "off"
Disable Save Session As item
SaveSessionAs = "off"
Disable Start-up Options item
StartupOptions = "off"
Disable File Transfer item
FileTransfer = "off"
Disable FTP item
FTP = "off"
Disable Print Setup item
PrintSetup = "off"
Disable Print Screen item
PrintScreen = "off"
Disable Print Buffer item
Print Buffer = "off"
Disable Auto Print item
AutoPrint = "off"
Disable Cancel Print item
CancelPrint = "off"
Disable Eject Page item
EjectPage = "off"
Disable Exit item
Exit = "off"
Disable Edit menu
EditMenu = "off"
Disable Clipboard Text item
ClipboardText = "off"
Disable Clipboard Graphics item ClipboardGraphics = "off"
Disable Copy item
Copy = "off"
Disable Paste item
Paste = "off"
Disable Select All item
SelectAll = "off"
Disable Clear Buffer item
ClearBuffer = "off"
Disable Settings menu
SettingsMenu = "off"
Disable Attributes item
Attributes = "off"
Disable Block Transmission item BlockTransmission = "off"
Disable BQ3107 item
BQ3107 = "off"
Disable Emulation item
Emulation = "off"
■ Disable Graphics item
Graphics = "off"
Disable HP2392A item
hp2392a = "off"
Disable IBM 3151 item
Ibm3151 = "off"
Disable IBM 3270 item
Ibm3270 = "off"
Disable IBM5250 item
Ibm5250 = "off"
Disable Keyboard Macros item KeyboardMacros = "off"
Disable Local Editing item
LocalEditing = "off"
Disable Mouse Buttons item
MouseButtons = "off"
Disable Serial item
Serial = "off"
Disable Soft Buttons item
SoftButtons = "off"
Disable TA6526 item
ta6526 = "off"
Disable Terminal item
Terminal = "off"
-L
-CB1
-MB
-MB1
-MF
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
-MD
none
none
none
none
none
none
-MS
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
20-3
Initialization Commands
Disable Unisys T27 item
Disable Wyse item
◆ Disable Tools menu
Disable scroll bar
◆ Soft button levels displayed
Disable status bar & DEC status
Disable colour palette
Flashing characters in all sessions
Reflection 4 colour support
■ Graphics redraw on resize
■ Crosshaie cursor size
■ Save 4014 graphics display
■ Tek graphics area height
■ Tek graphics area width
■ Disable backing store
■ Enable plane masking
■ Disable sixel graphics scaling
UnisysT27 = "off"
Wyse = "off"
ToolsMenu = "off"
ScrollBar = "off"
ButtonLevels = 0-4
StatusLine = "off"
UsePalette = "off"
none
iR4Colours = 1
GraphicsRedraw = mode
CrosshairSize = 0-1024
SaveTekImage = "on"
GraphicsHeight = integer
GraphicsWidth = integer
BackingStore = "off"
PlaneMasking = "on"
ScaleSixels = "off"
none
none
-MO
-SB
-BL0-4
-V
-SP
-FB
-R4
-G0-4
-X0-1024
-P
-GHinteger
-GWinteger
-B
-PM
-Y
Keyboard & Mouse
Command Function
Registry Entry
Command Line
MDIS P9 emulation: convert £ to $
◆ Disable all mouse edit functions
◆ Enable all mouse edit functions
◆ Enable mouse highlighting only
MDCUK = "Yes"
MouseEdit = "off"
MouseEdit = "on"
MouseEdit = "disabled"
none
-ME1
-ME2
-ME0
Registry Entry
none
none
none
Command Line
-BA1
-BA2
-BA3
Auxiliary Port
Command Function
Set auxiliary port as bidirectional
Auxiliary port opened at start-up
Aux port opened & bidirectional
20-4
Initialization Commands
Host Connection
Load Winsock On Start-up
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -LW
Default Setting: Off
This will initialize the Winsock stack immediately when the emulator is started,
enabling dialup over PPP or SLIP to gain a connection to a service provider.
Action On Host Connection Close
Registry Entry:
ExitOnClose = "on"
emulator exits immediately
ExitOnClose = "off"
emulator does not exit
ExitOnClose = "connect" emulator attempts to
reconnect
Command Line: -E
emulator exits immediately
-E1 emulator does not exit
-E2 emulator attempts to reconnect
Default Setting: Message box displayed
When the host closes the connection or the connection fails, the emulator normally
displays a message box giving you the option to reconnect, cancel or exit. These
commands will disable the message box and cause the emulator to immediately
perform the required option.
Disable New Session Warning Message Box
Registry Entry: SessionWarning = "off"
Command Line: -OS
Default Setting: Enabled
A warning message is displayed by default when you attempt to open a new session
while a session is currently open. These commands enable you to disable the message
box so that the emulator automatically closes the current session and opens the new
session.
20-5
Initialization Commands
Disable 'Exit' Message Box
Registry Entry: WarnExit = "off"
Command Line: -J
Default Setting: Enabled
A message box will be displayed if you attempt to exit the emulator while a network
session is still active. These commands will disable the message box so that the
emulator automatically closes the network connection when it is exited.
20-6
Initialization Commands
Session Configuration
Start-up Command Group To Action
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -Nname
Default Setting: Default
You can specify more than one set of start-up commands in the registry. This enables
you to configure each instance of the emulator differently.
Each set of commands other than the default set must have the following heading in
the registry under HKLM\Software\Pericom\<product name>:
Startup,name
where name can be any unique identifying name. You can specify which set of startup commands the emulator is to use by including the following on the command line
for loading the emulator, where name is substituted with the actual name of the start-up
group required:
-Nname
If this command is not present then the emulator will use the start-up commands under
the Startup,Default heading.
Connection Template To Use
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -SE"description"
Default Setting: Untitled
This command enables you to override the default connection template used when the
emulator is loaded, as specified in the Open Session dialog box. The description must
exactly match the description assigned to a connection template already saved using
the Save Session As dialog box and must be enclosed by double-quotes.
Disable Bell
Registry Entry: Bell = "off"
Command Line: -BE
Default Setting: Enabled
These commands enable you to turn off the terminal bell.
20-7
Initialization Commands
Enable Debug (File Capture/Replay)
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -Debug
Default Setting: Disabled
This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator. It
enables the File Capture and File Replay options in the File menu which allow
received host data to be logged in a file then replayed.
Enable Debug Log Send & Receive
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -Debug2Way
Default Setting: Disabled
This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator. It
enables the File Capture and File Replay options in the File menu which allow
received host data and data sent to the host to be logged in a file then replayed.
20-8
Initialization Commands
Display
Window Minimized On Start-Up
Registry Entry: WindowSize = "minimized"
Command Line: -MI
Default Setting: Not applicable
These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator.
They will cause the window to be displayed as an icon when the emulator is loaded.
Window Maximized On Start-Up
Registry Entry: WindowSize = "maximized"
Command Line: -MA
Default Setting: Not applicable
These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator.
They will cause the window to be displayed at the maximum size possible when the
emulator is loaded, while retaining the default number of lines and columns and
including all window elements if enabled (title bar, soft buttons etc.).
Workspace Fills Screen On Start-Up
Registry Entry: WindowSize = "FullScreen"
Command Line: -F
Default Setting: Not applicable
These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator.
They will cause the emulation workspace to fill the entire display when the emulator is
loaded, while retaining the default number of lines and columns.
Disable Window Frame Resize
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -WF
Default Setting: Enabled
This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator. It
prevents the mouse from resizing the window by dragging the edge.
20-9
Initialization Commands
Window Title
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -T"title"
Default Setting: Emulator name
This enables you to specify the title that is to be displayed in the title bar. This is useful
when you are running more than one instance of the emulator. If no title is specified
then the name of your version of the emulator will be displayed.
Window Subtitle
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -ST"subtitle"
Default Setting: Untitled
This enables you to specify a subtitle for display in the title bar of a specific emulator
window. By default the subtitle is the name of the session.
Disable Title Bar
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -TB
Default Setting: on
This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator. It
will remove the title bar from the window.
Disable Min/Maximize & Close Buttons
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -SY
Default Setting: on
This will remove the Control (System) menu icon and the minimize and maximize
buttons from the emulator window.
20-10
Initialization Commands
Disable Minimize Button
Registry Entry: MinimizeBox = "off"
Command Line: -MN
Default Setting: on
These commands will remove the minimize button from the emulator window.
Disable Maximize Button
Registry Entry: MaximizeBox = "off"
Command Line: -MX
Default Setting: on
These commands will remove the maximize button from the emulator window.
Disable Close Window Items
Registry Entry: MenuCloseItem = "off"
Command Line: -MT
Default Setting: on
These commands will remove the Close window option from the Control (System)
menu and disable the close window (X) button at the top right corner of the emulator
window.
Disable System Menu
Registry Entry: SystemMenu = "off"
Command Line: None
Default Setting: on
This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator. It
will remove the System (Control) menu icon from the emulator window.
20-11
Initialization Commands
Disable System Menu & Min/Maximize Buttons
Registry Entry: SystemMenu = "none"
Command Line: None
Default Setting: on
This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator. It
will remove the System (Control) menu icon and the Minimize and Maximize buttons
from the emulator window.
Disable Command Bar
Registry Entry: CmdBarTools = 0
Command Line: -MA
Default Setting: on
This will disable the command bar.
Disable Command Bar
Registry Entry: CommandBar = "off"
Command Line: -CB
Default Setting: on
This will remove the Command bar (menus, tool buttons and soft buttons) from the
emulator window. Note that the menus can still be displayed by pressing the Alt key in
conjunction with the relevant keyboard accelerator. For example, pressing the keys Alt +
F will display the File menu.
Disable Tool Buttons On Command Bar
Registry Entry: CmdBarTools = 1
Command Line: -TB
Default Setting: on
This will disable the tool buttons on the command bar.
20-12
Initialization Commands
Disable Toolbar
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -L
Default Setting: on
This command will remove the toolbar from the window.
Disable Menu Bar, Pop-Up Menus & Toolbar
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -CB1
Default Setting: on
This will remove the menu bar and toolbar from the emulator window and prevent
access to pop-up menus using keyboard commands.
Disable Menu Bar
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -MB
Default Setting: on
This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator. It
will remove the menu bar from the emulator window.
Disable Menu Bar & Pop-Up Menus
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -MB1
Default Setting: on
This command is only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator. It
will remove the menu bar from the emulator window and prevent access to pop-up
menus using keyboard commands.
20-13
Initialization Commands
Disable File Menu
Registry Entry: FileMenu = "off"
Command Line: -MF
Default Setting: on
These commands will disable the File menu. Individual items in the File menu can be
disabled by using the following registry entries:
Disable Factory item
Disable Reset item
Disable New Connection item
Disable OpenSession item
Disable CloseSession item
Disable Save Session item
Disable Save Session As item
Disable Startup Options item
Disable File Transfer item
Disable FTP item
Disable Print Setup item
Disable Print Screen item
Disable Print Buffer item
Disable Auto Print item
Disable Cancel Print item
Disable Eject Page item
Disable Exit item
Factory = "off"
Reset = "off"
NewConnection = "off"
OpenSession = "off"
CloseSession = "off"
SaveSession = "off"
SaveSessionAs = "off"
StartupOptions = "off"
FileTransfer = "off"
FTP = "off"
PrintSetup = "off"
PrintScreen = "off"
Print Buffer = "off"
AutoPrint = "off"
CancelPrint = "off"
EjectPage = "off"
Exit = "off"
Disable Edit Menu
Registry Entry: EditMenu = "off"
Command Line: -MD
Default Setting: on
These commands will disable the Edit menu. Individual items in the Edit menu can be
disabled by using the following registry entries:
Disable Clipboard Text item
Disable Clipboard Graphics item
Disable Copy item
Disable Paste item
Disable Select All item
Disable Clear Buffer item
20-14
ClipboardText = "off"
ClipboardGraphics = "off"
Copy = "off"
Paste = "off"
SelectAll = "off"
ClearBuffer = "off"
Initialization Commands
Disable Settings Menu
Registry Entry: SettingsMenu = "off"
Command Line: -MS
Default Setting: on
These commands will disable the Settings menu. Individual items in the Settings menu
can be disabled by using the following registry entries:
Disable Attributes item
Disable Block Transmission item
Disable BQ3107 item
Disable Emulation item
Disable Graphics item (option)
Disable HP2392A item
Disable IBM 3151 item
Disable IBM 3270 item
Disable IBM5250 item
Disable Keyboard Macros item
Disable Local Editing item
Disable Mouse Buttons item
Disable Serial item
Disable Soft Buttons item
Disable TA6526 item
Disable Terminal item
Disable Unisys T27 item
Disable Wyse item
Attributes = "off"
BlockTransmission = "off"
BQ3107 = "off"
Emulation = "off"
Graphics = "off"
hp2392a = "off"
Ibm3151 = "off"
Ibm3270 = "off"
Ibm5250 = "off"
KeyboardMacros = "off"
LocalEditing = "off"
MouseButtons = "off"
Serial = "off"
SoftButtons = "off"
ta6526 = "off"
Terminal = "off"
UnisysT27 = "off"
Wyse = "off"
Disable Tools Menu
Registry Entry: ToolsMenu = "off"
Command Line: -MO
Default Setting: on
These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator.
They will disable the Tools menu.
Disable Scroll Bar
Registry Entry: ScrollBar = "off"
Command Line: -SB
Default Setting: on
These commands will remove the scroll bar from the window.
20-15
Initialization Commands
Soft Buttons Displayed
Registry Entry: ButtonLevels = 0-4
Command Line: -BL0-4
Default Setting: 1
These commands are only available for NT or XP embedded versions of the emulator.
A set of soft buttons is displayed at the bottom of the emulatoor window by default.
There are four soft button levels. Level 1 is displayed by default. Each level consists of
twelve programmable buttons, providing a combined total of 48 buttons. You can
display all four levels (48 buttons) at the same time if required. All levels are accessible
even if not all are displayed, levels stored off-screen can be 'scrolled' into view by
clicking the Level button.
You can specify how many soft button levels are actually displayed by using this
registry entry or command line option. All four levels can be displayed by specifying
4. Specifying 0 will cause no soft buttons to be displayed.
Disable Status Bar & DEC Status Line
Registry Entry: StatusLine = "off"
Command Line: -V
Default Setting: on
These commands will remove the status bar and DEC VT Status line at the bottom of
the window.
Disable Colour Palette
Registry Entry: UsePalette = "off"
Command Line: -SP
Default Setting: on
The colour palette used by the emulator can be disabled if it interferes with colours
used by other applications running at the same time.
20-16
Initialization Commands
Flashing Characters Enabled In All Sessions
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -FB
Default Setting: off
This enables characters with the flashing attribute to be displayed as such in all session
windows in addition to the currently focused window.
Reflection 4 Colour Support
Registry Entry: iR4colours = "on"
Command Line: -R4
Default Setting: off
These commands will cause the colours displayed by the emulator to be compatible
with Reflection 4 software.
Graphics Redraw On Resize
Registry Entry: GraphicsRedraw = “off” / “all” / “on”
Command Line: -G0-2
Default Setting: on
Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support graphics emulations. TeemTalk
logs ReGIS or Tek graphics data in local memory by default so that if the window is
resized the graphics can be quickly redrawn. This command enables you to prevent
logging of data, log graphics data only (default), or log both text and graphics (from
which TeemTalk will use just the graphics data when the window is resized). Note that
specifying redraw text and graphics may cause TeemTalk to run out of memory. The
valid settings are as follows:
-G
-G0
-G1
-G2
“off”
“off”
“on”
“all”
No redraw
No redraw
Redraw graphics
Redraw text & graphics
20-17
Initialization Commands
Crosshair Cursor Size
Registry Entry: CrosshairSize = 1-1024
Command Line: -X1-1024
Default Setting: 1024
Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support graphics emulations. This
command specifies the size of the graphics cursor, where size is a numeric value in the
range 1 to 1024, i.e. world coordinates.
Save 4014 Graphics Display
Registry Entry: SaveTekImage = “on”
Command Line: -P
Default Setting: off
Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support graphics emulations. This
specifies that the 4014 graphics display is saved when you switch to alpha mode so
that it is restored when you switch back to graphics mode.
Set Tek Graphics Height
Registry Entry: GraphicsHeight = <integer>
Command Line: -GH<integer>
Default Setting: Not applicable
Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support graphics emulations. This
specifies the height of the Tek graphics area in pixels.
Set Tek Graphics Width
Registry Entry: GraphicsWidth = <integer>
Command Line: -GW<integer>
Default Setting: Not applicable
Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support graphics emulations. This
specifies the width of the Tek graphics area in pixels.
20-18
Initialization Commands
Disable Backing Store
Registry Entry: BackingStore = “off”
Command Line: -B
Default Setting: on
Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support graphics emulations.When
TeemTalk is in ReGIS mode it automatically stores a copy of graphics data in memory
when graphics are initially drawn by the host in the window, a feature known as
‘backing store’. This enables graphics to be redrawn quickly from local memory when
the TeemTalk window is uncovered after being obscured by other windows, or when
the window is restored or maximized from an iconized state. The backing store feature
can be disabled so that graphics data sent from the host can be drawn up to 50% faster.
Enable Plane Masking
Registry Entry: PlaneMasking = “on”
Command Line: -PM
Default Setting: off
Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support ReGIS mode. When TeemTalk
is in ReGIS mode and you are using an application that uses multiple surfaces, you can
use this command to enable TeemTalk to support them. Note that your PC must have a
display adaptor that supports 256 colour mode and your system must be running in
this mode in order for multiple surfaces to be supported.
Disable Sixel Graphics Scaling
Registry Entry: ScaleSixels = “off”
Command Line: -Y
Default Setting: on
Only applicable to versions of TeemTalk that support graphics emulations. By default
the ReGIS sixel graphics display of 800x400 (world coordinates) is automatically
scaled to fit the current size of the TeemTalk window. This command will prevent
scaling of the image and cause the right and bottom edges of the image to be clipped to
fit the window if it is too big.
20-19
Initialization Commands
Keyboard & Mouse
Convert £ To $ (MDIS P9)
Registry Entry: MDCUK = "Yes"
Command Line: None
Default Setting: no
This command is only applicable to the MDIS P9 emulation. It will convert the £
character to $ and vice versa on the UK keyboard.
Disable Editing Functions
Registry Entry:
MouseEdit = "disabled" allows highlighting but no
copy/paste
MouseEdit = "off" all editing functions disabled
MouseEdit = "on" all editing functions enabled
Command Line: -ME0 allows highlighting but no copy/paste
-ME1 all editing functions disabled
-ME2 all editing functions enabled
Default Setting: All functions enabled
In some cases it may be necessary to disable the copy and paste function of the mouse
buttons to prevent accidental editing. This can be achieved by using one of these
commands.
When the editing functions are disabled, use the Edit menu options or the numeric
keypad keys Shift + . (i.e. Del) to copy and Shift + 0 (i.e. Ins) to paste instead.
20-20
Initialization Commands
Auxiliary Port
Set Aux Port As Bidirectional
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -BA1
Default Setting: Disabled
This causes the auxiliary port to be set as bidirectional.
Aux Port Opened At Start-Up
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -BA2
Default Setting: Disabled
This causes the auxiliary port to be opened on start-up.
Aux Port Opened & Bidirectional
Registry Entry: None
Command Line: -BA3
Default Setting: Both functions disabled
This causes the auxiliary port to be opened on start-up and set as bidirectional.
20-21
Initialization Commands
Notes
20-22
Virtual Key Names
A
Virtual Key Names
This appendix lists all the supported virtual key names which enable
you to include a specific key function in a user definition.
Standard Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
0-9
A-Z
Alt (right)
Apps
Apostrophe
Backspace
Break
Clear
Comma
Compose Character
Control (left)
Control (right)
Copy
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Data Talk
Delete
End
Equal
Escape
Euro Sign
Execute
Exit Emulator
F1 - F12
Help
Hold Screen
Home
Hyphen
Insert
VK_0 - VK_9
VK_A - VK_Z
VK_RALT
VK_APPS
VK_APOSTROPHE
VK_BACK
VK_BREAK
VK_CLEAR
VK_COMMA
VK_COMPOSE
VK_CONTROL
VK_RCONTROL
VK_COPY
VK_DOWN
VK_LEFT
VK_RIGHT
VK_UP
VK_DATATALK
VK_DELETE
VK_END
VK_EQUAL
VK_ESCAPE
VK_EUROSIGN
VK_EXECUTE
VK_EXIT
VK_F1 - VK_F12
VK_HELP
VK_HOLDSCREEN
VK_HOME
VK_HYPHEN
VK_INSERT
Keypad 0 - 9
Keypad Add (+)
Keypad Divide (/)
Keypad Decimal (.)
Keypad Multiply (*)
Keypad Subtract (-)
Num Lock
Off (` ¬ |) 102 key kbd
Page Down
Page Up
Paste
Pause
Period
Print
Print Screen
Quote (back)
Return
Scroll Lock
Select
Semicolon (; :)
Separator
Setup
Shift (right)
Slash (backward)
Slash (forward)
Spacebar
Square Bracket (left)
Square Bracket (right)
Tab
Windows (left)
Windows (right)
VK_NUMPAD0 - 9
VK_ADD
VK_DIVIDE
VK_DECIMAL
VK_MULTIPLY
VK_SUBTRACT
VK_NUMLOCK
VK_OFF
VK_NEXT
VK_PRIOR
VK_PASTE
VK_PAUSE
VK_PERIOD
VK_PRINT
VK_SNAPSHOT
VK_BACKQUOTE
VK_RETURN
VK_SCROLL
VK_SELECT
VK_SEMICOLON
VK_SEPARATOR
VK_SETUP
VK_RSHIFT
VK_BACKSLASH
VK_SLASH
VK_SPACE
VK_LBRACKET
VK_RBRACKET
VK_TAB
VK_LWIN
VK_RWIN
A-1
Virtual Key Names
AT&T 4410 Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Backspace
Break
Clear
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Delete
Escape
AT_BACKSPACE
AT_BREAK
AT_CLEAR
AT_DOWN
AT_LEFT
AT_RIGHT
AT_UP
AT_DELETE
AT_ESCAPE
F1 - F8
Home Down
Home Up
Line Feed
Num Lock
Return
Setup
Tab
AT_F1 - AT_F8
AT_HOMEDOWN
AT_HOMEUP
AT_LINEFEED
AT_NUMLOCK
AT_RETURN
AT_SETUP
AT_TAB
BQ 3107 Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Backspace
Back Tab
Blank
Blink
Clear
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Delete Character
Delete Line
Delete Message
Delete Tab
Erase
Erase End Of Line
Erase End Of Page
Escape
Extend
FKC1 - FKC12
Shift FKC1 - FKC12
Home
Host Message
Initialize Partition
Init. Both Partitions
Insert Character
A-2
Virtual Key Name
BQ_BACKSPACE
BQ_BACKTAB
BQ_BLANK
BQ_BLINK
BQ_CLEAR
BQ_DOWN
BQ_LEFT
BQ_RIGHT
BQ_UP
BQ_DELETECHAR
BQ_DELETELINE
BQ_DELMSG
BQ_DELTAB
BQ_ERASE
BQ_ERASEEOL
BQ_ERASEEOP
BQ_ESCAPE
BQ_EXTEND
BQ_FKC1 - BQ_FKC12
BQ_S_FKC1 - FKC12
BQ_HOME
BQ_HOSTMSG
BQ_INITPART
BQ_INITRIS2
BQ_INSERTCHAR
Key Function
Insert Line
Keypad 0-9
Keypad Comma
Keypad Decimal
Keypad Divide
Keypad Minus
Keypad Multiply
Keypad Plus
Local
Local Message
Menu
Next Line
Num Lock
Online
Print Form
Print Form Screen
Print Partition
Print Screen
Reset
Reset Partition
Return
Set Tab
System
Tab
Transmit
Virtual Key Name
BQ_INSERTLINE
BQ_PAD0 - PAD9
BQ_PADCOMMA
BQ_PADDECIMAL
BQ_PADDIVIDE
BQ_PADMINUS
BQ_PADMULTIPLY
BQ_PADPLUS
BQ_LOCAL
BQ_LOCALMSG
BQ_MENU
BQ_NEXTLINE
BQ_NUMLOCK
BQ_ONLINE
BQ_PRTFORM
BQ_PRTFORMSCREEN
BQ_PRTPART
BQ_PRTSCREEN
BQ_RESET
BQ_PARTRESET
BQ_RETURN
BQ_SETTAB
BQ_SYSTEM
BQ_TAB
BQ_TRANSMIT
Virtual Key Names
DEC VT500 Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Back Tab
Break
Backspace
Compose Character
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Datatalk
Delete
Do (F16)
Enter
Escape
F6 - F14
F17 - F20
Find
Help (F15)
Hold Screen
VT_CSIZ
VT_BREAK
VT_BACKSPACE
VT_COMPOSE
VT_DOWN
VT_LEFT
VT_RIGHT
VT_UP
VT_DATATALK
VT_DELETE
VT_DO
VT_ENTER
VT_ESCAPE
VT_F6 - VT_F14
VT_F17 - VT_F20
VT_FIND
VT_HELP
VT_HOLD
Insert
Keypad 0 - 9
Keypad Comma
Keypad Decimal
Keypad Minus
Next Page
PF1 - PF4
Previous Page
Print
Remove
Return
Scroll Down
Scroll Left
Scroll Right
Scroll Up
Select
Setup
Tab
VT_INSERT
VT_PAD0 - 9
VT_COMMA
VT_PADDECIMAL
VT_MINUS
VT_NEXT
VT_PF1 - VT_PF4
VT_PREV
VT_PRINT
VT_REMOVE
VT_RETURN
VT_PANDOWN
VT_PANLEFT
VT_PANRIGHT
VT_PANUP
VT_SELECT
VT_SETUP
VT_TAB
DG 410/412 Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
C1 - C4
Cursor Type
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Erase Line
Erase Page
F1 - F15
Hold
DG_C1 - DG_C4
DG_CURSOR
DG_DOWN
DG_LEFT
DG_RIGHT
DG_UP
DG_ERASELINE
DG_ERASEPAGE
DG_F1 - DG_F15
DG_HOLD
Home
Keypad Comma
Keypad Enter
Keypad Minus
Local Print
New Line
Normal/Compressed
Print
Scroll Rate
DG_HOME
DG_COMMA
DG_ENTER
DG_MINUS
DG_LOCALPRINT
DG_NEWLINE
DG_SPACING
DG_PRINT
DG_SCROLLRATE
A-3
Virtual Key Names
HP 700-92/96 Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Backspace
Clear Display
Clear Line
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Delete
Delete Character
Delete Line
Delete Wrap
Enter
Escape
F1 - F8
Home Cursor
Home Cursor Shift
Insert Character
Insert Line
HP_BACKSPACE
HP_CLEARMEM
HP_CLEARLINE
HP_DOWN
HP_LEFT
HP_RIGHT
HP_UP
HP_DELETE
HP_DELETECHAR
HP_DELETELINE
HP_DELETEWRAP
HP_SEND
HP_ESCAPE
HP_F1 - HP_F8
HP_HOMEUP
HP_HOMEDOWN
HP_INSERTMODE
HP_INSERTLINE
Insert Wrap
Menu
Next Page
Previous Page
Print
Return
Scroll Down
Scroll Up
Select
Tab
Tab Shifted
User System
HP_INSERTWRAP
HP_MENU
HP_NEXTPAGE
HP_PREVPAGE
HP_PRINT
HP_RETURN
HP_ROLLDOWN
HP_ROLLUP
HP_SELECT
HP_TAB
HP_BACKTAB
HP_SYSTEM
Mode Sel. Keys
User Keys Mode
User Key Def. Menu
Soft Reset
Hard Reset
HP_MODES
HP_USER
HP_FKEYDEFS
HP_SOFTRESET
HP_HARDRESET
IBM 3270 Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Alternate Code Page
Attention
Back Tab
Backspace
Clear
Close (Delete Space)
Copy
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Select
Cursor Up
Cursor Flash On/Off
Cursor Line/Block
Delay 1 Second
Delete Character
Delete Word
Duplicate
Enter
Erase End Of Field
Erase Input
F1 - F24
IB_ALTCP
IB_ATTN
IB_BACKTAB
IB_BACKSPACE
IB_CLEAR
IB_REV_CL
IB_COPY
IB_DOWN
IB_LEFT
IB_RIGHT
IB_CURSORSEL
IB_UP
IB_FLCR
IB_ALTCR
IB_DELAY
IB_DELCHAR
IB_DELWORD
IB_DUP
IB_ENTER
IB_ERASEEOF
IB_ERASEINPUT
IB_F1 - IB_F24
Local National Map
M. Slot Reader Start
M. Slot Reader Send
Mono Case
New Line
Next Word
Notice Board Copy
Notice Board Jump
Notice Board Setup
Notice Board Zoom
Num Lock
PA1 - PA3
Pause
Play Keystrokes
Previous Word
Print Screen
Push Mode On/Off
Quit
Record Keystrokes
Reset
Return
Rev. Input Direction
IB_LCLMAP
IB_MSRATTRIB
IB_OPIDRDR
IB_MONO
IB_NEWLINE
IB_NEXTWORD
IB_NB_COPY
IB_NB_JUMP
IB_NB_SETUP
IB_NB_ZOOM
IB_NUMLOCK
IB_PA1 - IB_PA3
IB_PAUSE
IB_PLAY
IB_PREVWORD
IB_PRINT
IB_PUSH
IB_QUIT
IB_RECORD
IB_RESET
IB_RETURN
IB_REV_IP
A-4
Virtual Key Names
Field Mark
Fn Edit
Go To End Of Line
Home
Insert Mode
IB_FIELDMARK
IB_FEDIT
IB_GO_EOL
IB_HOME
IB_INSERT
Reverse Screen
Rule Display
Selectable Field Tab
System Request
Tab
IB_REV_SC
IB_RULE
IB_FIELDTAB
IB_SYSREQ
IB_TAB
IBM 5250 Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Alternate Code Page
Attention
Back Tab
Backspace
Backspace (non-dest)
Clear
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Fast Left
Cursor Fast Right
Cursor Select
Cursor Up
Delay 1 Second
Delete Character
Duplicate
Enter
Erase End Of Field
Erase Input
F1 - F24
Field Exit
Field Mark
Field Minus
AS_ALTCP
AS_ATTN
AS_BACKTAB
AS_BACKSPACE
AS_NONDESTBS
AS_CLEAR
AS_DOWN
AS_LEFT
AS_RIGHT
AS_FASTLEFT
AS_FASTRIGHT
AS_CURSORSEL
AS_UP
AS_DELAY
AS_DELCHAR
AS_DUP
AS_ENTER
AS_ERASEEOF
AS_ERASEINPUT
AS_F1 - AS_F24
AS_FIELDEXIT
AS_FIELDMARK
AS_FIELDMINUS
Field Plus
Go To End Of Line
Help
Home
Insert Mode
Monochrome
New Line
PA1 - PA3
Pause
Play Keystrokes
Print Local
Print
Push Mode On/Off
Quit
Record Keystrokes
Reset
Roll Down
Roll Up
Rule Display
System Request
Tab
Test
AS_FIELDPLUS
AS_GO_EOL
AS_HELP
AS_HOME
AS_INSERT
AS_MONO
AS_NEWLINE
AS_PA1 - AS_PA3
AS_PAUSE
AS_PLAY
AS_PRINTLOCAL
AS_PRINT
AS_PUSH
AS_QUIT
AS_RECORD
AS_RESET
AS_ROLLDOWN
AS_ROLLUP
AS_RULE
AS_SYSREQ
AS_TAB
AS_TEST
IBM 5250 Word Processing Mode
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Begin Bold
AS_WP_BOLD
Begin Underline
AS_WP_UNDERLINE
Word Underline
AS_WP_WORD_UNDER
End Attribute
AS_WP_END_ATTR
Centre Text
AS_WP_CENTRE
Half-Index Up
AS_WP_HI_UP
Half-Index Down AS_WP_HI_DOWN
Next Text Column AS_WP_NEXT_COL
Beginning of Line AS_WP_BEG_LINE
End of Line
AS_WP_END_LINE
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Top of Page
End of Page
Start New Page
Insert Carrier Return
Insert Stop Code
Find Stop Code
Required Page End
Required Space
Required Tab
Symbols Command
AS_WP_TOP_PAGE
AS_WP_END_PAGE
AS_WP_NEW_PAGE
AS_WP_RETURN
AS_WP_STOP_CODE
AS_WP_FIND_STOP
AS_WP_REQD_PAGE
AS_WP_REQD_SPACE
AS_WP_REQD_TAB
AS_WP_SYMBOLS
A-5
Virtual Key Names
MDIS Prism Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Back Tab
Backspace
Break
Clear
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Delete
Enter
Escape
F1 - F18
Hold Screen
Home
Keypad 0 - 9
MD_BACKTAB
MD_BACKSPACE
MD_BREAK
MD_CLEAR
MD_DOWN
MD_LEFT
MD_RIGHT
MD_UP
MD_DELETE
MD_ENTER
MD_ESCAPE
MD_F1 - MD_F18
MD_HOLD
MD_HOME
MD_PAD0 - 9
Keypad Comma
Keypad Decimal
Keypad Minus
Line Feed
Print Screen
Return
Screen Down
Screen Left
Screen Right
Screen Up
Scroll Down
Scroll Left
Scroll Right
Scroll Up
Tab
MD_PADCOMMA
MD_PADDECIMAL
MD_PADMINUS
MD_LINEFEED
MD_PRINT
MD_RETURN
MD_SCREENDOWN
MD_SCREENLEFT
MD_SCREENRIGHT
MD_SCREENUP
MD_SCROLLDOWN
MD_SCROLLLEFT
MD_SCROLLRIGHT
MD_SCROLLUP
MD_TAB
PT250 Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Back Tab
Backspace
Break
Cancel
Change Mode
Character Set
Clear
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Delete
End/Begin
Enter
Erase
Escape
F1 - F10
Help
Home
Insert
Keypad 00
PT_BACKTAB
PT_BACKSPACE
PT_BREAK
PT_CANCEL
PT_CHNGMODE
PT_CHARSET
PT_CLEAR
PT_DOWN
PT_LEFT
PT_RIGHT
PT_UP
PT_DELETE
PT_ENDBEGIN
PT_ENTER
PT_ERASE
PT_ESC
PT_F1 - PT_F10
PT_HELP
PT_HOME
PT_INSERT
PT_PAD00
Keypad 0 - 9
Keypad Decimal
Keypad Minus
Keypad Plus
Menu
Next
Num Lock
PA1 - PA4
PF1 - PF12
Previous
Print Screen
Return
Scroll Down
Scroll Left
Scroll Lock
Scroll Right
Scroll Up
Stop
Tab
Unlabelled Large
Unlabelled Small
PT_PAD0 - 9
PT_PADDECIMAL
PT_PADMINUS
PT_PADPLUS
PT_MENU
PT_NEXT
PT_NUMLOCK
PT_PA1 - PT_PA4
PT_PF1 - PT_PF12
PT_PREV
PT_PRTSCN
PT_RETURN
PT_SCROLLDOWN
PT_SCROLLLEFT
PT_SCROLLLOCK
PT_SCROLLRIGHT
PT_SCROLLUP
PT_STOP
PT_TAB
PT_UNLLARGE
PT_UNLSMALL
A-6
Virtual Key Names
SCO Console Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Backspace
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Delete
Delete + Shift
Delete + Ctrl + Shift
End
End + Shift
Enter
Escape
SC_BACKSPACE
SC_DOWN
SC_LEFT
SC_RIGHT
SC_UP
SC_DELETE
SC_S_DELETE
SC_CS_DELETE
SC_END
SC_S_END
SC_ENTER
SC_ESCAPE
F1 - F12
F1 - F12 + Shift
F1 - F12 + Ctrl
F1 - F12 + Ctrl + Shift
Home
Insert
Page Down
Page Down + Shift
Page Up
Return
Tab
Tab + Shift
SC_F1 - SC_F21
SC_S_F1 - SC_S_F12
SC_C_F1 - SC_C_F12
SC_CS_F1 - SC_CS_F12
SC_HOME
SC_INSERT
SC_PAGEDOWN
SC_S_PAGEDOWN
SC_PAGEUP
SC_RETURN
SC_TAB
SC_S_TAB
TA6530 Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Backspace
Back Tab
Break
Character Delete
Character Insert
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Delete
End
Erase Line
Erase Page
Escape
F1 - F16
Home
Keypad 0 - 9
TA_BACKSPACE
TA_BACKTAB
TA_BREAK
TA_CHARDEL
TA_CHARINS
TA_DOWN
TA_LEFT
TA_RIGHT
TA_UP
TA_DEL
TA_END
TA_ERASELINE
TA_ERASEPAGE
TA_ESC
TA_F1 - TA_F16
TA_HOME
TA_PAD0 - TA_PAD9
Keypad Comma
Keypad Decimal
Keypad Enter
Keypad Minus
Line Delete
Line Insert
Num Lock
Page Down
Page Up
Print Screen
Return
Roll Down
Roll Up
Tab
Tab Clear
Tab Clear All
Tab Set
TA_PADCOMMA
TA_PADDECIMAL
TA_ENTER
TA_PADMINUS
TA_LINEDEL
TA_LINEINS
TA_NUMLOCK
TA_PAGEDOWN
TA_PAGEUP
TA_PRTSCR
TA_RETURN
TA_ROLLDOWN
TA_ROLLUP
TA_TAB
TA_TABCLEAR
TA_TABCLRALL
TA_TABSET
A-7
Virtual Key Names
TVI 955 Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Back Tab
Backspace
Break
Clear Entry
Clear Space
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Delete
Enter
Escape
TV_BACKTAB
TV_BACKSP
TV_BREAK
TV_CLRENTRY
TV_CLRSPACE
TV_DOWN
TV_LEFT
TV_RIGHT
TV_UP
TV_DELETE
TV_ENTER
TV_ESCAPE
F0 - F22
Go To
Keypad 00
Line Feed
Misc. Functions
No Scroll
Print
Reset
Return
Status
Tab
TV_F0 - TV_F22
TV_GOTO
TV_PAD00
TV_LINEFEED
TV_M0 - TV_M9
TV_NOSCROLL
TV_PRINT
TV_RESET
TV_RETURN
TV_STATUS
TV_TAB
Unisys T27 Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Alt
Alt Lock
Back
Backspace
Block
Bound
Clear
Clear EOL
Clear EOP
Config
Ctrl
Ctrl Lock
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Delete Character
Delete Line
ENV1 - ENV3
Escape
ETX
F1 - F10
Full
GS
Help
Home
Insert Character
UT_ALT
UT_ALTLOCK
UT_BACK
UT_BACKSPACE
UT_BLOCK
UT_BOUND
UT_CLEAR
UT_CLEAREOL
UT_CLEAREOP
UT_CONFIG
UT_CTRL
UT_CTRLLOCK
UT_DOWN
UT_LEFT
UT_RIGHT
UT_UP
UT_DELETECHAR
UT_DELETELINE
UT_ENV1 - UT_ENV3
UT_ESCAPE
UT_ETX
UT_F1 - UT_F10
UT_FULL
UT_GS
UT_HELP
UT_HOME
UT_INSERTCHAR
Insert Line
UT_INSERTLINE
Keypad 00
UT_NUMPAD00
Keypad 0 - 9
UT_NUMPAD0 - 9
Keypad Comma UT_NUMPADCOMMA
Keypad Decimal UT_NUMPADDECIMAL
Local
UT_LOCAL
Lock
UT_LOCK
Lock Shift
UT_LOCKSHIFT
Mark
UT_MARK
Next
UT_NEXT
Print Unprotected
UT_PRINTUNP
Print All
UT_PRINTALL
RCV
UT_RCV
Recall
UT_RECALL
Return
UT_RETURN
Reverse Tab
UT_REVERSETAB
Search Character
UT_SEARCHCHAR
Scroll Down
UT_SCROLLDOWN
Scroll Left
UT_SCROLLLEFT
Scroll Right
UT_SCROLLRIGHT
Scroll Up
UT_SCROLLUP
Specify
UT_SPCFY
Split
UT_SPLIT
Store
UT_STORE
Tab
UT_TAB
Underscore
UT_UNDERSCORE
XMIT
UT_XMIT
A-8
Virtual Key Name
Virtual Key Names
Viewdata Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
* (Star)
# (Hash)
Cancel Print
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
PR_STAR
PR_HASH
PR_CANCEL
PR_DOWN
PR_LEFT
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Exit to ANSI mode
Reveal
PR_RIGHT
PR_UP
PR_EXIT
PR_REVEAL
Wyse Virtual Key Names
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Backspace
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Delete
Del Key
End
Enter
Escape
F1 - F16
Function
Home
Insert
Keypad 5
Page Down
Page Up
Print
Return
Tab
WY_BACKSPACE
WY_DOWN
WY_LEFT
WY_RIGHT
WY_UP
WY_DELETE
WY_DELKEY
WY_END
WY_ENTER
WY_ESC
WY_F1 - WY_F16
WY_FUNCT
WY_HOME
WY_INSERT
WY_KP5
WY_PAGEDOWN
WY_PAGEUP
WY_PRINT
WY_RETURN
WY_TAB
Delete
Delete shifted
End
End shifted
Insert
Insert shifted
Insert shifted
Print shifted
Alt + A
WY_DELCHAR
WY_DELLINE
WY_CLRLINE
WY_CLRSCRN
WY_INSCHAR
WY_INSLINE
WY_REPLACE
WY_SEND
WY_CHARSET
Notes:
To obtain the virtual key names for shifted
functions of the keys listed at left, substitute
WY_ with WY_S_.
The virtual key names listed above are
alternative names that can be used.
A-9
Virtual Key Names
TeemTalk Virtual Key Name Functions
TeemTalk provides additional virtual key name functions for special tasks such as
sending text to a file or the serial port, and reading text from a file to place in the
keyboard buffer as if typed.
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Start Send Text sequence
Start Read Text sequence
End Send/Read Text sequence
Delay (nnn = tenths of a second)
VK_FILE_O
VK_FILE_I
VK_FEND
VK_SLEEPnnn
The following sections describe how to use these virtual key names.
Sending Text To A File
<VK_FILE_O><filename>data string<VK_FEND>
will write the data string to filename. If the file already exists it is replaced.
For example,
<VK_FILE_O><c:\file.txt>text to enter to file_013_010next
line of file<VK_FEND>
will create a file called file.txt containing the following two lines of text:
text to enter to file
next line of file
Sending Text To The Serial Port
The following command will send text to the serial port:
<VK_FILE_O><com1:>text to send to serial port_013_010next
line<VK_FEND>
which will result in the following being sent:
text to send to serial port<CR><LF>
next line
A-10
Virtual Key Names
Reading Text From A File
The following command format is used to read a string from a file and push it into the
keyboard buffer as if typed:
<VK_FILE_I><filename>max length,retries,termination character <VK_FEND>
The string is terminated when the maximum length is read, or the maximum number of
retries is reached, or the termination character is read. Each can be defaulted by
entering 0, so entering 0,0,0 will result in a maximum length of 1024, a single retry,
and a termination character of 26 (EOF). If the file does not exist an error will be
displayed.
For example, the following command will read up to 20 characters, retry 5 times and
end at the first <CR>:
<VK_FILE_I><c:\file.txt>20,5,13<VK_FEND>
There is normally a 100 millisecond delay between retries, however many Unix
systems will round this up to one second.
Insert Delay
The following command can be used to insert a delay of nnn tenths of a second:
<VK_SLEEPnnn>
For example, to insert a delay of 10 seconds you would enter:
<VK_SLEEP100>
The delay can be interrupted by pressing any key.
Note that if you want characters to be processed before the delay, insert any other VK
virtual key name immediately before <VK_SLEEPnnn>. For example:
123<VK_TAB><VK_SLEEP100>456
If you do not include the additional virtual key name, the <VK_SLEEPnnn> delay
will be executed before any preceding characters are processed.
A-11
Virtual Key Names
Notes
A-12
Character Sets
B
Character Sets
This appendix shows the supported character sets.
Introduction
Each character set consists of a series of control characters and displayable characters. Displayable characters are alphanumeric, symbolic or graphic characters that
can be displayed on the screen or printed by a hardcopy device. Control characters
enable the terminal emulation or the printer to perform specific tasks, such as a line
feed or carriage return. These will be actioned when received from the host or when
the emulator is in local mode and they are entered from the keyboard.
Note: When the Display Controls option in the Terminal Settings
dialog box is selected, a representation of most control
characters received will be displayed on the screen instead
of actioned.
To enter a control character from the keyboard, first find the displayable character
equivalent by adding 64 to the decimal value of the control character in the relevant
character set table. For example, the control character CR (carriage return) has a
decimal value of 13. Adding 64 makes 77 which is the decimal value of the
displayable character M. When the Ctrl (control) key is held down and Shift + M is
pressed, this will generate a CR code in local mode.
Some setup options require you to specify one or more control characters. A control
character can be specified by typing ^ to represent the Ctrl key, immediately
followed by the displayable character equivalent of the control character as described
in the previous paragraph. For example, ^M, represents Ctrl + M, which generates
the control character CR.
Another way of specifying control characters is by entering the decimal value of the
ASCII character. Decimal values are entered as three-digit numbers immediately
preceded by an underscore character. Values with only two digits must be preceded
by a zero. For example, the decimal value of CR is 13, so this would be entered as
_013.
B-1
Character Sets
ASCII CHARACTER SET
(Multinational 7 Bit)
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
2
3
6
7
0
1
4
5
01
01
01
00
01
00
00
00
11
10
01
10
00
11
00
01
0 0000 NUL
1 0001 SOH
2 0010 STX
3 0011 ETX
4 0100 EOT
5 0101 ENQ
6 0110 ACK
7 0111 BEL
8 1000 BS
9 1001 HT
10 1010 LF
11 1011 VT
12 1100 FF
13 1101 CR
14 1110 SO
15 1111
KEY:
SI
ESC
0
20
0 DLE 16
0
10
1
21
1 DC1 17
1 XON 11
2
22
2 DC2 18
2
12
3
23
3 DC3 19
3 XOFF 13
4
24
4 DC4 20
4
14
5
25
5 NAK 21
5
15
6
26
6 SYN 22
6
16
7
27
7 ETB 23
7
17
10
30
8 CAN 24
8
18
11
31
9 EM 25
9
19
12
32
10 SUB 26
A
1A
13
33
11 ESC 27
B
1B
14
34
12 FS
28
C
1C
15
35
13 GS 29
D
1D
16
36
14 RS
30
E
1E
17
37
15 US
31
F
1F
33
27
1B
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
´
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
The ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) character set will
be selected when the language is set to North American, or the Character Set Mode
option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational. This table forms
the first half of the Multinational character set, the second half of which may be the
DEC Additional or one of the ISO Latin Additional sets (as determined by the
Preferred Char. Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box).
B-2
Character Sets
NATIONAL REPLACEMENT CHARACTERS
BINARY BIT 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
43
35
23
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
64
40
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
133
91
5B
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
134
92
5C
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
135
93
5D
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
136
94
5E
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
137
95
5F
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
140
96
60
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
173
123
7B
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
174
124
7C
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
175
125
7D
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
176
126
7E
ASCII
#
@
[
\
]
^
_
`
{
|
}
~
British
£
@
[
\
]
^
_
`
{
|
}
~
Canadian
#
à
â
ç
ê
î
_
ô
é
ù
è
û
Danish
Norwegian
#
Ä
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
_
ä
æ
ø
å
ü
Dutch
£
3
/4
ij
1
/2
|
^
_
`
¨
fl
1
/4
´
Finnish
#
@
Ä
Ö
Å
Ü
_
é
ä
ö
å
ü
French
Belgian
£
à
°
ç
§
^
_
`
é
ù
è
¨
German
#
§
Ä
Ö
Ü
^
_
`
ä
ö
ü
ß
Italian
£
§
°
ç
é
^
_
ù
à
ò
è
ì
Portuguese
#
@
Ã
Ç
Õ
^
_
`
ã
ç
õ
~
Spanish
£
§
¡
Ñ
¿
^
_
`
°
ñ
ç
~
Swedish
#
É
Ä
Ö
Å
Ü
_
é
ä
ö
å
ü
Swiss French
Swiss German
ù
à
é
ç
ê
î
è
ô
ä
ö
ü
û
This table shows the characters that replace certain ASCII characters when the
Character Set Mode option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to National.
The national character set consists of the ASCII set with the changed characters listed
on the line for the selected keyboard nationality.
B-3
Character Sets
DEC ADDITIONAL CHARACTER SET
(Multinational 8 Bit)
10
11
14
15
COLUMN
8
9
12
13
8 7 BITS R
11
11
11
10
11
10
10
10
65 O
11
10
01
10
00
11
01
00
4321 W
IND
NEL
SSA
ESA
HTS
HTJ
VTS
PLD
PLU
RI
SS2
SS3
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
203
131
83
204
132
84
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
212
138
8A
213
139
8B
214
140
8C
215
141
8D
216
142
8E
217
143
8F
KEY:
DCS
PU1
PU2
STS
CCH
MW
SPA
EPA
CSI
ST
OSC
PM
APC
ESC
220
144
90
221
145
91
222
146
92
223
147
93
224
148
94
225
149
95
226
150
96
227
151
97
230
152
98
231
153
99
232
154
9A
233
155
9B
234
156
9C
235
157
9D
236
158
9E
237
159
9F
33
27
1B
¡
¢
£
¨
¥
§
¤
©
ª
«
240
160
A0
241
161
A1
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
245
165
A5
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
168
A8
251
169
A9
252
170
AA
253
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF
°
±
2
3
µ
¶
·
1
º
»
/4
1
/2
1
¿
260
176
B0
261
177
B1
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
B6
267
183
B7
270
184
B8
271
185
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Í
Î
Ï
300
192
C0
301
193
C1
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204
CC
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
Œ
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ÿ
ß
320
208
D0
321
209
D1
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
325
213
D5
326
214
D6
327
215
D7
330
216
D8
331
217
D9
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
DF
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
í
î
ï
340
224
E0
341
225
E1
342
226
E2
343
227
E3
344
228
E4
345
229
E5
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
E8
351
233
E9
352
234
EA
353
235
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
œ
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ÿ
360
240
F0
361
241
F1
362
242
F2
363
243
F3
364
244
F4
365
245
F5
366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
248
F8
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
253
FD
376
254
FE
377
255
FF
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
0011 3
0100 4
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 10
1011 11
1100 12
1101 13
1110 14
1111 15
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This is one of three possible second halves of the Multinational character set (the first
half is the ASCII character set and the other possible second halves are the ISO
Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2 Additional character sets). These characters may be
generated when the terminal is in VT500 7 or 8 bit mode, the Character Set Mode
option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational, and the
Preferred Char. Set option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to DECMCS.
B-4
Character Sets
DEC LINE DRAWING CHARACTER SET
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
2
3
6
7
4
5
0
0
0
0
01
00
00
0
11
11
00 101
11
00 001 010
1
0
0
0 0000 NUL
1 0001 SOH
2 0010 STX
3 0011 ETX
4 0100 EOT
5 0101 ENQ
6 0110 ACK
7 0111 BEL
8 1000 BS
9 1001 HT
10 1010 LF
11 1011 VT
12 1100 FF
13 1101 CR
14 1110 SO
15 1111
KEY:
SI
ESC
1
0
20
0 DLE 16
0
10
1
21
1 DC1 17
1 XON 11
2
22
2 DC2 18
2
12
3
23
3 DC3 19
3 XOFF 13
4
24
4 DC4 20
4
14
5
25
5 NAK 21
5
15
6
26
6 SYN 22
6
16
7
27
7 ETB 23
7
17
10
30
8 CAN 24
8
18
11
31
9 EM 25
9
19
12
32
10 SUB 26
A
1A
13
33
11 ESC 27
B
1B
14
34
12 FS
28
C
1C
15
35
13 GS 29
D
1D
16
36
14 RS
30
E
1E
17
37
15 US
31
F
1F
33
27
1B
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
´
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
H
F
F
C
L
T
R
F
°
±
N
V
L
T
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
≤
≥
π
≠
£
·
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This is a special DEC character set which is used by some applications.
B-5
Character Sets
ISO LATIN-1 ADDITIONAL CHARACTER SET
(Multinational 8 Bit)
10
11
14
15
COLUMN
8
9
12
13
8 7 BITS R
11
11
11
10
11
10
10
10
65 O
11
10
01
10
00
11
01
00
4321 W
IND
NEL
SSA
ESA
HTS
HTJ
VTS
PLD
PLU
RI
SS2
SS3
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
203
131
83
204
132
84
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
212
138
8A
213
139
8B
214
140
8C
215
141
8D
216
142
8E
217
143
8F
KEY:
DCS
PU1
PU2
STS
CCH
MW
SPA
EPA
240
220
144 NBSP 160
A0
90
241
221
161
145
91
A1
222
242
146
162
92
A2
223
243
147
163
93
A3
224
244
148
164
94
A4
225
245
149
165
95
A5
226
246
150
166
96
A6
227
247
151
167
97
A7
230
250
152
168
98
A8
231
251
153
169
99
A9
232
252
154
170
9A
AA
233
253
155
171
9B
AB
234
254
156
172
9C
AC
235
255
157
173
9D
AD
236
256
158
174
9E
AE
237
257
159
175
9F
AF
°
¡
±
¢
2
£
3
¤
¥
§
µ
¶
·
¨
CSI
ST
OSC
PM
APC
ESC
33
27
1B
©
1
ª
º
«
»
¬
1
—
1
®
3
–
¿
/4
/2
/4
260
176
B0
261
177
B1
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
B6
267
183
B7
270
184
B8
271
185
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Í
Î
Ï
300
192
C0
301
193
C1
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204
CC
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF
D
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Y´
ß
320
208
D0
321
209
D1
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
325
213
D5
326
214
D6
327
215
D7
330
216
D8
331
217
D9
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
DF
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
í
î
ï
340
224
E0
341
225
E1
342
226
E2
343
227
E3
344
228
E4
345
229
E5
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
E8
351
233
E9
352
234
EA
353
235
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
y´
ÿ
360
240
F0
361
241
F1
362
242
F2
363
243
F3
364
244
F4
365
245
F5
366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
248
F8
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
253
FD
376
254
FE
377
255
FF
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
0011 3
0100 4
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 10
1011 11
1100 12
1101 13
1110 14
1111 15
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This is one of three possible second halves of the Multinational character set (the first
half is the ASCII character set and the other possible second halves are the DEC
Additional and ISO Latin-2 character sets). These characters may be generated when
the terminal is in VT500 7 or 8 bit mode, the Character Set Mode option in the
Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational, and the Preferred Char. Set
option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to ISO Latin-1.
B-6
Character Sets
ISO LATIN-2 ADDITIONAL CHARACTER SET
(Multinational 8 Bit)
10
11
14
15
COLUMN
8
9
12
13
8 7 BITS R
11
11
11
10
11
10
10
10
65 O
11
10
01
10
00
11
01
00
4321 W
t
Z´
z´
^
PM
APC
ESC
Z
z
·
z·
Z
33
27
1B
´´
L´
C´
Ç
C
É
E
Ë
E
Í
Î
^
T
Ä
D
´
N
N
Ó
Ô
´´
O
Ö
R
°
U
Ú
´´
U
Ü
Y´
T
ß
320
208
D0
321
209
D1
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
325
213
D5
326
214
D6
327
215
D7
330
216
D8
331
217
D9
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
DF
r´
á
â
a
ä
´
c´
ç
c
é
e
ë
e
í
î
^
s
^
OSC
S
A
D
^
ST
s
^
KEY:
CSI
S
^
SS3
¨
^
SS2
§
s´
^
RI
S´
Â
^
PLU
EPA
L
Á
300
192
C0
301
193
C1
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204
CC
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF
^
PLD
SPA
´
´
R
^
VTS
MW
¤
260
176
B0
261
177
B1
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
B6
267
183
B7
270
184
B8
271
185
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF
d
340
224
E0
341
225
E1
342
226
E2
343
227
E3
344
228
E4
345
229
E5
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
E8
351
233
E9
352
234
EA
353
235
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF
n´
n
ó
ô
´´
o
ö
÷
^
HTJ
CCH
L
^
HTS
STS
a
^
ESA
PU2
A
°
^
SSA
PU1
240
220
144 NBSP 160
A0
90
241
221
161
145
91
A1
222
242
146
162
92
A2
223
243
147
163
93
A3
224
244
148
164
94
A4
225
245
149
165
95
A5
226
246
150
166
96
A6
227
247
151
167
97
A7
230
250
152
168
98
A8
231
251
153
169
99
A9
232
252
154
170
9A
AA
233
253
155
171
9B
AB
234
254
156
172
9C
AC
235
255
157 SHY 173
9D
AD
236
256
158
174
9E
AE
237
257
159
175
9F
AF
^
NEL
DCS
^
IND
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
203
131
83
204
132
84
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
212
138
8A
213
139
8B
214
140
8C
215
141
8D
216
142
8E
217
143
8F
r
u°
ú
´´
u
ü
y´
t
·
360
240
F0
361
241
F1
362
242
F2
363
243
F3
364
244
F4
365
245
F5
366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
248
F8
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
253
FD
376
254
FE
377
255
FF
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
0011 3
0100 4
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 10
1011 11
1100 12
1101 13
1110 14
1111 15
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This is one of three possible second halves of the Multinational character set (the first
half is the ASCII character set and the other possible second halves are the DEC
Additional and ISO Latin-1 character sets). These characters may be generated when
the terminal is in VT500 7 or 8 bit mode, the Character Set Mode option in the
Emulation Settings dialog box is set to Multinational, and the Preferred Char. Set
option in the Terminal Settings dialog box is set to ISO Latin-2.
B-7
Character Sets
ANSI 437 CHARACTER SET
COLUMN
10
11
14
15
12
13
BITS R
8
1
1
1
1
76
11
10
1
10
11
11
O
00 101
11
00 001 010
1 4 3 2 15 W
0
8
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
î
ì
Ä
Å
9
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
203
131
83
204
132
84
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
212
138
8A
213
139
8B
214
140
8C
215
141
8D
216
142
8E
217
143
8F
KEY:
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
¢
£
¥
Pt
ƒ
Ñ
220
144
90
221
145
91
222
146
92
223
147
93
224
148
94
225
149
95
226
150
96
227
151
97
230
152
98
231
153
99
232
154
9A
233
155
9B
234
156
9C
235
157
9D
236
158
9E
237
159
9F
245
165
A5
á
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
º
¿
/2
1
/4
1
¡
«
»
240
160
A0
241
161
A1
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
245
165
A5
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
168
A8
251
169
A9
252
170
AA
253
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF
260
176
B0
261
177
B1
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
B6
267
183
B7
270
184
B8
271
185
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF
300
192
C0
301
193
C1
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204
CC
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF
320
208
D0
321
209
D1
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
325
213
D5
326
214
D6
327
215
D7
330
216
D8
331
217
D9
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
DF
oc
ß
340
360
224
240
E0
F0
341
361
225
241
E1
F1
342
362
226
242
E2
F2
343
363
227
243
E3
F3
344
364
228
244
E4
F4
345
365
229
245
E5
F5
346
366
230
246
E6
F6
347
367
231
247
E7
F7
350
370
232
248
E8
F8
351
371
233
249
E9
F9
352
372
234
250
EA
FA
353
373
235
251
EB
FB
354
374
236
252
EC
FC
355
375
237
253
ED
FD
356
376
238
254
EE
FE
357 BLANK 377
239
255
FF
EF
FF
∫
µ
≈
Ω
oo
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
0011 3
0100 4
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 10
1011 11
n
1100 12
2
1101 13
1110 14
1111 15
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This table forms the second half of the ANSI 437 character set, the first half being the
ASCII character set.
The ANSI 437 character set is used when the Preferred Char. Set option in the
Terminal Settings dialog box is set to Ansi and the Ansi Code Page option is set to
437.
B-8
Character Sets
ANSI 850 CHARACTER SET
10
11
14
15
COLUMN
12
13
BITS R
8
1
1
1
1
76
11
10
1
10
11
11
O
00 101
11
00 001 010
1 4 3 2 15 W
0
8
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
î
ì
Ä
Å
9
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
203
131
83
204
132
84
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
212
138
8A
213
139
8B
214
140
8C
215
141
8D
216
142
8E
217
143
8F
KEY:
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
ø
£
Ø
ƒ
Ñ
220
144
90
221
145
91
222
146
92
223
147
93
224
148
94
225
149
95
226
150
96
227
151
97
230
152
98
231
153
99
232
154
9A
233
155
9B
234
156
9C
235
157
9D
236
158
9E
237
159
9F
245
165
A5
á
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
º
¿
®
/2
1
/4
1
¡
«
»
240
160
A0
241
161
A1
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
245
165
A5
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
168
A8
251
169
A9
252
170
AA
253
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF
Á
Â
À
©
¢
¥
260
176
B0
261
177
B1
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
B6
267
183
B7
270
184
B8
271
185
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF
ã
Ã
¤
300
192
C0
301
193
C1
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204
CC
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF
Ê
Ë
È
Í
Î
Ï
Ì
320
208
D0
321
209
D1
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
325
213
D5
326
214
D6
327
215
D7
330
216
D8
331
217
D9
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
DF
Ó
ß
Ô
Ò
õ
Õ
µ
Ú
Û
Ù
y´
Y´
´
340
360
224
240
E0
F0
341
361
225
241
E1
F1
342
362
226
242
E2
F2
343
363
227 3
243
4
E3
F3
344
364
228
244
E4
F4
345
365
229
245
E5
F5
346
366
230
246
E6
F6
347
367
231
247
E7
F7
350
370
232
248
E8
F8
351
371
233
249
E9
F9
352
372
234
250
EA
FA
353
373
235
251
EB
FB
354
374
236
252
EC
FC
355
375
237
253
ED
FD
356
376
238
254
EE
FE
357 BLANK 377
239
255
FF
EF
FF
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
/
0011 3
¶
0100 4
§
0101 5
¨
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 10
1
1011 11
3
1100 12
2
1101 13
1110 14
1111 15
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This table forms the second half of the ANSI 850 character set, the first half being the
ASCII character set.
The ANSI 850 character set is used when the Preferred Char. Set option in the
Terminal Settings dialog box is set to Ansi and the Ansi Code Page option is
set to 850.
B-9
Character Sets
ANSI 858 CHARACTER SET
10
11
14
15
COLUMN
12
13
BITS R
8
1
1
1
1
76
11
1
10
10
11
11
O
00 101
11
00 001 010
0
1 4 3 2 15 W
8
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
î
ì
Ä
Å
9
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
203
131
83
204
132
84
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
212
138
8A
213
139
8B
214
140
8C
215
141
8D
216
142
8E
217
143
8F
KEY:
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
ø
£
Ø
ƒ
Ñ
220
144
90
221
145
91
222
146
92
223
147
93
224
148
94
225
149
95
226
150
96
227
151
97
230
152
98
231
153
99
232
154
9A
233
155
9B
234
156
9C
235
157
9D
236
158
9E
237
159
9F
245
165
A5
á
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
º
¿
®
1
/2
/4
1
¡
«
»
240
160
A0
241
161
A1
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
245
165
A5
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
168
A8
251
169
A9
252
170
AA
253
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF
Á
Â
À
©
¢
¥
260
176
B0
261
177
B1
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
B6
267
183
B7
270
184
B8
271
185
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF
ã
Ã
¤
300
192
C0
301
193
C1
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204
CC
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF
Ê
Ë
È
C
Í
Î
Ï
Ì
320
208
D0
321
209
D1
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
325
213
D5
326
214
D6
327
215
D7
330
216
D8
331
217
D9
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
DF
Ó
ß
Ô
Ò
õ
Õ
µ
Ú
Û
Ù
y´
Y´
´
360
340
240
224
F0
E0
361
341
241
225
F1
E1
362
342
242
226
F2
E2
363
343
243
227 3
4
F3
E3
364
344
244
228
F4
E4
365
345
245
229
F5
E5
366
346
246
230
F6
E6
367
347
247
231
F7
E7
370
350
248
232
F8
E8
371
351
249
233
F9
E9
372
352
250
234
FA
EA
373
353
251
235
FB
EB
374
354
252
236
FC
EC
375
355
253
237
FD
ED
376
356
254
238
FE
EE
357 BLANK 377
255
239
FF
FF
EF
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
/
0011 3
¶
0100 4
§
0101 5
¨
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 10
1
1011 11
3
1100 12
2
1101 13
1110 14
1111 15
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This table forms the second half of the ANSI 858 character set, the first half being the
ASCII character set.
The ANSI 858 character set is used when the Preferred Char. Set option in the
Terminal Settings dialog box is set to Ansi and the Ansi Code Page option is set
to 858.
B-10
Character Sets
ANSI 1250 CHARACTER SET
10
11
14
15
COLUMN
12
13
BITS R
8
1
1
1
1
76
11
10
1
10
11
11
O
00 101
11
00 001 010
1 4 3 2 15 W
0
¨
S
s
S
s
CSI
ST
OSC
T
t’
Z´
z´
^
PM
APC
ESC
Z
z
·
z·
Z
33
27
1B
´´
Ä
L´
C´
Ç
C
É
E
Ë
E
Í
Î
^
§
^
KEY:
s´
A
^
SS3
S´
Â
D
300
192
C0
301
193
C1
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204
CC
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF
D
´
N
N
Ó
Ô
´´
O
Ö
R
°
U
Ú
´´
U
Ü
Y´
T
ß
320
208
D0
321
209
D1
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
325
213
D5
326
214
D6
327
215
D7
330
216
D8
331
217
D9
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
DF
r´
á
â
a
ä
´
c´
ç
c
é
e
ë
^
SS2
’
^
RI
EPA
L’
^
PLU
SPA
´
^
PLD
MW
¤
Á
^
VTS
CCH
L
´
R
^
HTJ
STS
a
260
176
B0
261
177
B1
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
B6
267
183
B7
270
184
B8
271
185
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF
^
HTS
PU2
A
°
e
í
î
d’
340
224
E0
341
225
E1
342
226
E2
343
227
E3
344
228
E4
345
229
E5
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
E8
351
233
E9
352
234
EA
353
235
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF
n´
n
ó
ô
´´
o
ö
÷
^
ESA
PU1
240
220
144 NBSP 160
A0
90
241
221
161
145
91
A1
222
242
146
162
92
A2
223
243
147
163
93
A3
224
244
148
164
94
A4
225
245
149
165
95
A5
226
246
150
166
96
A6
227
247
151
167
97
A7
230
250
152
168
98
A8
231
251
153
169
99
A9
232
252
154
170
9A
AA
233
253
155
171
9B
AB
234
254
156
172
9C
AC
235
255
157 SHY 173
9D
AD
236
256
158
174
9E
AE
237
257
159
175
9F
AF
^
SSA
DCS
^
NEL
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
203
131
83
204
132
84
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
212
138
8A
213
139
8B
214
140
8C
215
141
8D
216
142
8E
217
143
8F
^
IND
9
^
8
r
°
u
ú
´´
u
ü
y´
t
·
360
240
F0
361
241
F1
362
242
F2
363
243
F3
364
244
F4
365
245
F5
366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
248
F8
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
253
FD
376
254
FE
377
255
FF
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
0011 3
0100 4
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 10
1011 11
1100 12
1101 13
1110 14
1111 15
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This table forms the second half of the ANSI 1250 character set, the first half being
the ASCII character set.
The ANSI 1250 character set is used when the Preferred Char. Set option in the
Terminal Settings dialog box is set to Ansi and the Ansi Code Page option is set to
1250.
B-11
Character Sets
DG 410/412 WORD PROCESSING, MATH
& GREEK ALPHABET CHARACTER SET
0
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
00
00
0 0000 NUL
1 0001 SOH
2 0010
STX
3 0011 ETX
4 0100 EOT
5 0101 ENQ
6 0110 ACK
7 0111 BEL
8 1000 BS
9 1001 HT
10 1010 LF
11 1011 VT
12 1100 FF
13 1101 CR
14 1110 SO
15 1111
KEY:
B-12
SI
ESC
2
1
00
01
0
20
0 DLE 16
0
10
1
21
1 DC1 17
1 XON 11
2
22
2 DC2 18
2
12
3
23
3 DC3 19
3 XOFF 13
4
24
4 DC4 20
4
14
5
25
5 NAK 21
5
15
6
26
6 SYN 22
6
16
7
27
7 ETB 23
7
17
10
30
8 CAN 24
8
18
11
31
9 EM 25
9
19
12
32
10 SUB 26
A
1A
13
33
11 ESC 27
B
1B
14
34
12 FS
28
C
1C
15
35
13 GS 29
D
1D
16
36
14 RS
30
E
1E
17
37
15 US
31
F
1F
33
27
1B
00
SP
ƒ
oo
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
3
10
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
•
4
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
!!
ß
6
5
00
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
01
Ω
¶
B
P
B
E
F
N
F
E
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
01
7
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
H
F
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
Character Sets
DG 410/412 LINE DRAWING
CHARACTER SET
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
0 0000
1 0001
2 0010
3 0011
4 0100
5 0101
6 0110
7 0111
8 1000
9 1001
10 1010
11 1011
12 1100
13 1101
14 1110
15 1111
KEY:
0
00
2
1
00
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
11
9
9
12
10
A
13
11
B
14
12
C
15
13
D
16
14
E
17
15
F
75
61
3D
00
01
00
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
30
24
18
31
25
19
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
3
10
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
¢
T
M
4
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
R
C
6
5
00
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
01
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
01
7
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
11
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
B-13
Character Sets
WYSE NATIVE MODE
CHARACTER SET
0
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
00
0 0000
1 0001
S
H
2 0010
S
X
3 0011
E
X
4 0100
E
T
5 0101
E
Q
6 0110
A
K
7 0111
B
L
8 1000
B
S
9 1001
H
T
10 1010
L
F
11 1011
V
T
12 1100
F
F
13 1101
C
R
14 1110
S
O
15 1111
S
I
KEY:
2
1
00
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
11
9
9
12
10
A
13
11
B
14
12
C
15
13
D
16
14
E
17
15
F
35
29
1D
00
01
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
30
24
18
31
25
19
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
00
!
"
#
$
%
&
´
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
3
10
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
6
5
00
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
01
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
01
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
11
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This character set is used by all Wyse emulations and associated emulations. In WY-60
mode this is the default primary character set.
B-14
Character Sets
WY-60 MULTINATIONAL
(CODE PAGE 437) CHARACTER SET
8
10
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
î
ì
Ä
Å
10
9
00
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
203
131
83
204
132
84
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
212
138
8A
213
139
8B
214
140
8C
215
141
8D
216
142
8E
217
143
8F
KEY:
10
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
¢
£
¥
Pt
ƒ
Ñ
01
220
144
90
221
145
91
222
146
92
223
147
93
224
148
94
225
149
95
226
150
96
227
151
97
230
152
98
231
153
99
232
154
9A
233
155
9B
234
156
9C
235
157
9D
236
158
9E
237
159
9F
245
165
A5
10
á
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
º
¿
/2
1
/4
1
¡
«
»
10
11
10
240
160
A0
241
161
A1
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
245
165
A5
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
168
A8
251
169
A9
252
170
AA
253
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF
11
260
176
B0
261
177
B1
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
B6
267
183
B7
270
184
B8
271
185
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF
12
11
00
300
192
C0
301
193
C1
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204
CC
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF
13
11
01
320
208
D0
321
209
D1
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
325
213
D5
326
214
D6
327
215
D7
330
216
D8
331
217
D9
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
DF
14
11
oc
ß
10
15
11
∫
µ
≈
Ω
oo
11
340
360
224
240
E0
F0
341
361
225
241
E1
F1
342
362
226
242
E2
F2
343
363
227
243
E3
F3
344
364
228
244
E4
F4
345
365
229
245
E5
F5
346
366
230
246
E6
F6
347
367
231
247
E7
F7
350
370
232
248
E8
F8
351
371
233
249
E9
F9
352
372
234
250
EA
FA
353
373
235
251
EB
FB
354
374
236
252
EC
FC
355
375
237
253
ED
FD
356
376
238
254
EE
FE
357 BLANK 377
239
255
FF
EF
FF
COLUMN
8 7 BITS R
65 O
4321 W
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
0011 3
0100 4
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 10
1011 11
n
1100 12
2
1101 13
1110 14
1111 15
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This Wyse character set is only available in WY-60 mode and is the secondary
character set when the Code Page option in the Wyse Settings dialog box is set to
437.
B-15
Character Sets
WY-60 MULTINATIONAL
(CODE PAGE 850) CHARACTER SET
8
10
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
î
ì
Ä
Å
10
9
00
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
203
131
83
204
132
84
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
212
138
8A
213
139
8B
214
140
8C
215
141
8D
216
142
8E
217
143
8F
KEY:
10
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
ø
£
Ø
ƒ
Ñ
01
220
144
90
221
145
91
222
146
92
223
147
93
224
148
94
225
149
95
226
150
96
227
151
97
230
152
98
231
153
99
232
154
9A
233
155
9B
234
156
9C
235
157
9D
236
158
9E
237
159
9F
245
165
A5
10
á
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
º
¿
®
/2
1
/4
1
¡
«
»
10
240
160
A0
241
161
A1
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
245
165
A5
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
168
A8
251
169
A9
252
170
AA
253
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF
11
10
Á
Â
À
©
¢
¥
11
260
176
B0
261
177
B1
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
B6
267
183
B7
270
184
B8
271
185
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF
12
11
ã
Ã
¤
00
300
192
C0
301
193
C1
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204
CC
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF
13
11
Ê
Ë
È
Í
Î
Ï
Ì
01
320
208
D0
321
209
D1
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
325
213
D5
326
214
D6
327
215
D7
330
216
D8
331
217
D9
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
DF
14
11
Ó
ß
Ô
Ò
õ
Õ
µ
Ú
Û
Ù
y´
Y´
´
10
15
11
11
360
340
240
224
F0
E0
361
341
241
225
F1
E1
362
342
242
226
F2
E2
363
343
243
227 3
4
F3
E3
364
344
244
228
F4
E4
365
345
245
229
F5
E5
366
346
246
230
F6
E6
367
347
247
231
F7
E7
370
350
248
232
F8
E8
371
351
249
233
F9
E9
372
352
250
234
FA
EA
373
353
251
235
FB
EB
374
354
252
236
FC
EC
375
355
253
237
FD
ED
376
356
254
238
FE
EE
357 BLANK 377
255
239
FF
FF
EF
COLUMN
8 7 BITS R
65 O
4321 W
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
/
0011 3
¶
0100 4
§
0101 5
¨
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 10
1
1011 11
3
1100 12
2
1101 13
1110 14
1111 15
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This Wyse character set is only available in WY-60 mode and is the secondary
character set when the Code Page option in the Wyse Settings dialog box is set to
850.
B-16
Character Sets
WY-60 PC EQUIVALENT
CHARACTER SET
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
0 0000
1 0001
2 0010
3 0011
4 0100
5 0101
6 0110
7 0111
8 1000
9 1001
10 1010
11 1011
12 1100
13 1101
14 1110
15 1111
KEY:
0
00
2
1
00
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
11
9
9
12
10
A
13
11
B
14
12
C
15
13
D
16
14
E
17
15
F
33
27
1B
00
!!
¶
§
01
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
30
24
18
31
25
19
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
00
!
"
#
$
%
&
´
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
3
10
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
6
5
00
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
01
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
01
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
11
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This Wyse character set is only available in WY-60 mode.
B-17
Character Sets
WY-60 STANDARD ASCII
CHARACTER SET
0
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
00
0 0000
1 0001
S
H
2 0010
S
X
3 0011
E
X
4 0100
E
T
5 0101
E
Q
6 0110
A
K
7 0111
B
L
8 1000
B
S
9 1001
H
T
10 1010
L
F
11 1011
V
T
12 1100
F
F
13 1101
C
R
14 1110
S
O
15 1111
S
I
KEY:
E
C
2
1
00
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
11
9
9
12
10
A
13
11
B
14
12
C
15
13
D
16
14
E
17
15
F
33
27
1B
00
D
L
D
1
D
2
D
3
D
4
N
K
S
Y
E
B
C
N
E
M
S
B
E
C
F
S
G
S
R
S
U
S
01
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
30
24
18
31
25
19
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
00
!
"
#
$
%
&
´
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
3
10
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
00
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
01
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This Wyse character set is only available in WY-60 mode.
B-18
6
5
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
01
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
11
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
Character Sets
WY-60 STANDARD ANSI
CHARACTER SET
0
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
00
0 0000
1 0001
2 0010
3 0011
H
4 0100
F
5 0101
C
6 0110
L
7 0111
°
T
F
R
F
8 1000
±
9 1001
N
10 1010
V
L
T
11 1011
12 1100
13 1101
14 1110
15 1111
KEY:
≥
2
1
00
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
11
9
9
12
10
A
13
11
B
14
12
C
15
13
D
16
14
E
17
15
F
33
27
1B
00
≤
≥
π
≠
£
·
01
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
30
24
18
31
25
19
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
00
!
"
#
$
%
&
´
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
3
10
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
6
5
00
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
01
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
01
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
11
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This Wyse character set is only available in WY-60 mode.
B-19
Character Sets
WY-60 GRAPHICS 1
CHARACTER SET
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
0 0000
1 0001
2 0010
3 0011
4 0100
5 0101
6 0110
7 0111
8 1000
9 1001
10 1010
11 1011
12 1100
13 1101
14 1110
15 1111
KEY:
0
00
2
1
00
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
11
9
9
12
10
A
13
11
B
14
12
C
15
13
D
16
14
E
17
15
F
156
110
6E
00
01
00
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
30
24
18
31
25
19
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
3
10
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
00
01
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This Wyse character set is only available in WY-60 mode.
B-20
6
5
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
01
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
11
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
Character Sets
WY-60 GRAPHICS 2
CHARACTER SET
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
0 0000
1 0001
2 0010
3 0011
4 0100
5 0101
6 0110
7 0111
8 1000
9 1001
10 1010
11 1011
12 1100
13 1101
14 1110
15 1111
KEY:
0
00
2
1
00
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
11
9
9
12
10
A
13
11
B
14
12
C
15
13
D
16
14
E
17
15
F
114
76
4C
00
01
00
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
30
24
18
31
25
19
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
3
10
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
4
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
6
5
00
01
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
01
7
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
11
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This Wyse character set is only available in WY-60 mode.
B-21
Character Sets
WY-60 GRAPHICS 3
CHARACTER SET
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
0 0000
1 0001
2 0010
3 0011
4 0100
5 0101
6 0110
7 0111
8 1000
9 1001
10 1010
11 1011
12 1100
13 1101
14 1110
15 1111
KEY:
0
00
2
1
00
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
11
9
9
12
10
A
13
11
B
14
12
C
15
13
D
16
14
E
17
15
F
114
76
4C
00
01
00
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
30
24
18
31
25
19
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
3
10
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
4
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
00
01
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This Wyse character set is only available in WY-60 mode.
B-22
6
5
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
01
7
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
11
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
Character Sets
PT250 ADDITIONAL CHARACTER SET
10
11
14
15
COLUMN
12
13
BITS R
8
1
1
1
1
76
11
10
1
10
11
11
O
00 101
11
00 001 010
1 4 3 2 15 W
0
8
9
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
203
131
83
204
132
84
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
212
138
8A
213
139
8B
214
140
8C
215
141
8D
216
142
8E
217
143
8F
KEY:
220
144
90
221
145
91
222
146
92
223
147
93
224
148
94
225
149
95
226
150
96
227
151
97
230
152
98
231
153
99
232
154
9A
233
155
9B
234
156
9C
235
157
9D
236
158
9E
237
159
9F
ESC
33
27
1B
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
§
¨
©
ª
«
®
240
160
A0
241
161
A1
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
245
165
A5
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
168
A8
251
169
A9
252
170
AA
253
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF
°
±
2
3
µ
¶
◆
Ç
1
º
»
1
/4
1
/2
3
/4
¿
260
176
B0
261
177
B1
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
B6
267
183
B7
270
184
B8
271
185
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Í
Î
Ï
300
192
C0
301
193
C1
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204
CC
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF
D
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Y´
ß
320
208
D0
321
209
D1
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
325
213
D5
326
214
D6
327
215
D7
330
216
D8
331
217
D9
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
DF
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
í
î
ï
340
224
E0
341
225
E1
342
226
E2
343
227
E3
344
228
E4
345
229
E5
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
E8
351
233
E9
352
234
EA
353
235
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
y´
ÿ
360
240
F0
361
241
F1
362
242
F2
363
243
F3
364
244
F4
365
245
F5
366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
248
F8
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
253
FD
376
254
FE
377
255
FF
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
0011 3
0100 4
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 10
1011 11
1100 12
1101 13
1110 14
1111 15
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
These characters can normally be displayed in PT250 mode by holding down the Alt +
E keys and pressing the equivalent standard (ASCII) character key.
The equivalent standard character key is generally found by subtracting 128 from the
decimal value of the Additional character, then looking up the character with the
resulting decimal number in the ASCII character set. Exceptions to this rule are the
standard characters ", 6, <, =, [ and ]. 6 should be swapped with ", [ and ] should be
swapped with < and =, and vice versa.
B-23
Character Sets
PT250 LINE DRAWING CHARACTER SET
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
0 0000
1 0001
2 0010
3 0011
4 0100
5 0101
6 0110
7 0111
8 1000
9 1001
10 1010
11 1011
12 1100
13 1101
14 1110
15 1111
KEY:
2
3
6
7
4
5
0
0
0
0
01
00
00
0
11
11
00 101
11
00 001 010
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
11
9
9
12
10
A
13
11
B
14
12
C
15
13
D
16
14
E
17
15
F
57
47
2F
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
30
24
18
31
25
19
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This is a special PT250 character set which is used by some applications.
B-24
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
Character Sets
PT250 BLOCK GRAPHICS CHARACTER SET
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
0 0000
1 0001
2 0010
3 0011
4 0100
5 0101
6 0110
7 0111
8 1000
9 1001
10 1010
11 1011
12 1100
13 1101
14 1110
15 1111
KEY:
2
3
6
7
4
5
0
0
0
0
01
00
00
0
11
11
00 101
11
00 001 010
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
11
9
9
12
10
A
13
11
B
14
12
C
15
13
D
16
14
E
17
15
F
57
47
2F
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
30
24
18
31
25
19
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This is a special PT250 character set which is used by some applications.
B-25
Character Sets
SIEMENS 97801 INTERNATIONAL A
CHARACTER SET
0
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
00
00
0 0000 NUL
1 0001 SOH
2 0010 STX
3 0011 ETX
4 0100 EOT
5 0101 ENQ
6 0110 ACK
7 0111 BEL
8 1000 BS
9 1001 HT
10 1010 LF
11 1011 VT
12 1100 FF
13 1101 CR
14 1110 SO
15 1111
KEY:
B-26
SI
ESC
2
1
00
01
0
20
0 DLE 16
0
10
1
21
1 DC1 17
1 XON 11
2
22
2 DC2 18
2
12
3
23
3 DC3 19
3 XOFF 13
4
24
4 DC4 20
4
14
5
25
5 NAK 21
5
15
6
26
6 SYN 22
6
16
7
27
7 ETB 23
7
17
10
30
8 CAN 24
8
18
11
31
9 EM 25
9
19
12
32
10 SUB 26
A
1A
13
33
11 ESC 27
B
1B
14
34
12 FS
28
C
1C
15
35
13 GS 29
D
1D
16
36
14 RS
30
E
1E
17
37
15 US
31
F
1F
33
27
1B
00
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
´
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
3
10
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
6
5
00
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
01
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
01
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
11
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
Character Sets
SIEMENS 97801 INTERNATIONAL
CHARACTER SET
0
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
00
00
0 0000 NUL
1 0001 SOH
2 0010 STX
3 0011 ETX
4 0100 EOT
5 0101 ENQ
6 0110 ACK
7 0111 BEL
8 1000 BS
9 1001 HT
10 1010 LF
11 1011 VT
12 1100 FF
13 1101 CR
14 1110 SO
15 1111
KEY:
SI
ESC
2
1
00
01
0
20
0 DLE 16
0
10
1
21
1 DC1 17
1 XON 11
2
22
2 DC2 18
2
12
3
23
3 DC3 19
3 XOFF 13
4
24
4 DC4 20
4
14
5
25
5 NAK 21
5
15
6
26
6 SYN 22
6
16
7
27
7 ETB 23
7
17
10
30
8 CAN 24
8
18
11
31
9 EM 25
9
19
12
32
10 SUB 26
A
1A
13
33
11 ESC 27
B
1B
14
34
12 FS
28
C
1C
15
35
13 GS 29
D
1D
16
36
14 RS
30
E
1E
17
37
15 US
31
F
1F
33
27
1B
00
SP
!
"
#
¤
%
&
´
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
3
10
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
6
5
00
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
01
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
01
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
11
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
¯
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
B-27
Character Sets
SIEMENS 97801 GERMAN
CHARACTER SET
0
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
00
00
0 0000 NUL
1 0001 SOH
2 0010 STX
3 0011 ETX
4 0100 EOT
5 0101 ENQ
6 0110 ACK
7 0111 BEL
8 1000 BS
9 1001 HT
10 1010 LF
11 1011 VT
12 1100 FF
13 1101 CR
14 1110 SO
15 1111
KEY:
B-28
SI
ESC
2
1
00
01
0
20
0 DLE 16
0
10
1
21
1 DC1 17
1 XON 11
2
22
2 DC2 18
2
12
3
23
3 DC3 19
3 XOFF 13
4
24
4 DC4 20
4
14
5
25
5 NAK 21
5
15
6
26
6 SYN 22
6
16
7
27
7 ETB 23
7
17
10
30
8 CAN 24
8
18
11
31
9 EM 25
9
19
12
32
10 SUB 26
A
1A
13
33
11 ESC 27
B
1B
14
34
12 FS
28
C
1C
15
35
13 GS 29
D
1D
16
36
14 RS
30
E
1E
17
37
15 US
31
F
1F
33
27
1B
00
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
´
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
3
10
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
§
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
6
5
00
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
01
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Ä
Ö
Ü
^
_
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
01
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
11
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
ä
ö
ü
ß
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
Character Sets
SIEMENS 97801 EURO
CHARACTER SET
7 0111 BEL
8 1000 BS
9 1001 HT
10 1010 LF
11 1011 VT
12 1100 FF
13 1101 CR
14 1110 SO
15 1111
KEY:
SI
ESC
33
27
1B
ä
å
a
ã
a
æ
ç
c
c´
ð
d
^
6 0110 ACK
â
d
é
ê
ë
e
e
g
î
ì
ï
j
^
5 0101 ENQ
á
è
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
n
n´
ñ
ò
ó
ô
ö
õ
ø
o
´´
œ
þ
r
r´
š
s´
6
5
00
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
01
s
ß
ù
ú
û
ü
u°
´´
u
ý
ÿ
z
z´
·
z
É
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
01
Å
Æ
Ð
·
I
1J
Ø
Œ
Þ
Ä
Ö
Ü
§
$
£
®
7
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
11
©
Ω
µ
°
Ç
Pt
π
´
´´
Ñ
~
^
4 0100 EOT
à
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
^
3 0011 ETX
SP
10
4
^
2 0010 STX
0
20
0 DLE 16
0
10
1
21
1 DC1 17
1 XON 11
2
22
2 DC2 18
2
12
3
23
3 DC3 19
3 XOFF 13
4
24
4 DC4 20
4
14
5
25
5 NAK 21
5
15
6
26
6 SYN 22
6
16
7
27
7 ETB 23
7
17
10
30
8 CAN 24
8
18
11
31
9 EM 25
9
19
12
32
10 SUB 26
A
1A
13
33
11 ESC 27
B
1B
14
34
12 FS
28
C
1C
15
35
13 GS 29
D
1D
16
36
14 RS
30
E
1E
17
37
15 US
31
F
1F
00
^
1 0001 SOH
01
^
0 0000 NUL
00
^
00
3
^
00
2
1
^
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
^
0
COLUMN
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
B-29
Character Sets
SIEMENS 97801 BRACKETS
CHARACTER SET
0
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
00
00
0 0000 NUL
1 0001 SOH
2 0010 STX
3 0011 ETX
4 0100 EOT
5 0101 ENQ
6 0110 ACK
7 0111 BEL
8 1000 BS
9 1001 HT
10 1010 LF
11 1011 VT
12 1100 FF
13 1101 CR
14 1110 SO
15 1111
KEY:
B-30
SI
ESC
2
1
00
01
0
20
0 DLE 16
0
10
1
21
1 DC1 17
1 XON 11
2
22
2 DC2 18
2
12
3
23
3 DC3 19
3 XOFF 13
4
24
4 DC4 20
4
14
5
25
5 NAK 21
5
15
6
26
6 SYN 22
6
16
7
27
7 ETB 23
7
17
10
30
8 CAN 24
8
18
11
31
9 EM 25
9
19
12
32
10 SUB 26
A
1A
13
33
11 ESC 27
B
1B
14
34
12 FS
28
C
1C
15
35
13 GS 29
D
1D
16
36
14 RS
30
E
1E
17
37
15 US
31
F
1F
33
27
1B
00
SP
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
3
10
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
4
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
6
5
00
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
01
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
01
7
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
11
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
Character Sets
IBM 3270 & IBM 5250 ENGLISH (U.S.),
CANADIAN BILINGUAL & NETHERLANDS CHARACTER SET
HEX
4-
5-
6-
7-
8-
9-
A-
B-
C-
D-
E-
F-
-0
SP
&
-
ø
Ø
°
µ
^
{
}
\
0
-1
RSP
é
/
É
a
j
~
£
A
J
÷
1
-2
â
ê
Â
Ê
b
k
s
¥
B
K
S
2
-3
ä
ë
Ä
Ë
c
l
t
·
C
L
T
3
-4
à
è
À
È
d
m
u
©
D
M
U
4
-5
á
í
Á
Í
e
n
v
§
E
N
V
5
-6
ã
î
Ã
Î
f
o
w
¶
F
O
W
6
-7
å
ï
Å
Ï
g
p
x
1
/4
G
P
X
7
-8
ç
ì
Ç
Ì
h
q
y
1
/2
H
Q
Y
8
-9
ñ
ß
Ñ
`
i
r
z
3
/4
I
R
Z
9
-A
¢
!
:
«
ª
¡
[
SHY
1
2
3
-B
.
$
,
#
»
º
¿
ô
û
Ô
Û
-C
<
*
%
@
æ
D
]
_
ö
ü
Ö
Ü
-D
(
)
_
´
Ç
Y´
¨
ò
ù
Ò
Ù
-E
+
;
>
=
´
ó
ú
Ó
Ú
-F
|
¬
?
"
õ
ÿ
Õ
y´
Æ
±
¤
®
Legend: RSP required space, SHY syllable hyphen, SP space.
B-31
Character Sets
IBM 3270 & IBM 5250
ENGLISH (U.K.) CHARACTER SET
HEX
4-
5-
6-
7-
8-
9-
A-
B-
C-
D-
E-
F-
-0
SP
&
-
ø
Ø
°
µ
¢
{
}
\
0
-1
RSP
é
/
É
a
j
-
[
A
J
÷
1
-2
â
ê
Â
Ê
b
k
s
¥
B
K
S
2
-3
ä
ë
Ä
Ë
c
l
t
·
C
L
T
3
-4
à
è
À
È
d
m
u
©
D
M
U
4
-5
á
í
Á
Í
e
n
v
§
E
N
V
5
-6
ã
î
Ã
Î
f
o
w
¶
F
O
W
6
-7
å
ï
Å
Ï
g
p
x
1
/4
G
P
X
7
-8
ç
ì
Ç
Ì
h
q
y
1
/2
H
Q
Y
8
-9
ñ
ß
Ñ
`
i
r
z
3
/4
I
R
Z
9
-A
$
!
:
«
ª
¡
^
SHY
1
2
3
-B
.
£
,
#
»
º
¿
]
ô
û
Ô
Û
-C
<
*
%
@
æ
D
~
ö
ü
Ö
Ü
-D
(
)
_
´
Ç
Y´
¨
ò
ù
Ò
Ù
-E
+
;
>
=
´
ó
ú
Ó
Ú
-F
|
¬
?
"
õ
ÿ
Õ
y´
Æ
±
¤
®
Legend: RSP required space, SHY syllable hyphen, SP space.
B-32
Character Sets
IBM 3270 & IBM 5250
DANISH & NORWEGIAN CHARACTER SET
HEX
4-
5-
6-
-0
SP
&
-
-1
RSP
é
/
-2
â
ê
-3
ä
-4
7-
8-
9-
A-
B-
C-
D-
E-
F-
@
°
µ
¢
æ
å
\
0
É
a
j
ü
£
A
J
÷
1
Â
Ê
b
k
s
¥
B
K
S
2
ë
Ä
Ë
c
l
t
·
C
L
T
3
à
è
À
È
d
m
u
©
D
M
U
4
-5
á
í
Á
Í
e
n
v
§
E
N
V
5
-6
ã
î
Ã
Î
f
o
w
¶
F
O
W
6
-7
}
ï
$
Ï
g
p
x
1
/4
G
P
X
7
-8
ç
ì
Ç
Ì
h
q
y
1
/2
H
Q
Y
8
-9
ñ
ß
Ñ
`
i
r
z
3
/4
I
R
Z
9
-A
#
¤
ø
:
«
ª
¡
¬
SHY
1
2
3
-B
.
Å
,
Æ
»
º
¿
ô
û
Ô
Û
-C
<
*
%
Ø
{
D
|
_
ö
ü
Ö
Ü
-D
(
)
_
´
Ç
Y´
¨
ò
ù
Ò
Ù
-E
+
;
>
=
´
ó
ú
Ó
Ú
-F
!
^
?
"
õ
ÿ
Õ
y´
[
±
]
®
Legend: RSP required space, SHY syllable hyphen, SP space.
B-33
Character Sets
IBM 3270 & IBM 5250
FRENCH CHARACTER SET
HEX
4-
5-
6-
7-
8-
9-
A-
B-
C-
D-
E-
F-
-0
SP
&
-
ø
Ø
[
`
¢
é
è
ç
0
-1
RSP
{
/
É
a
j
¨
#
A
J
÷
1
-2
â
ê
Â
Ê
b
k
s
¥
B
K
S
2
-3
ä
ë
Ä
Ë
c
l
t
·
C
L
T
3
-4
@
}
À
È
d
m
u
©
D
M
U
4
-5
á
í
Á
Í
e
n
v
]
E
N
V
5
-6
ã
î
Ã
Î
f
o
w
¶
F
O
W
6
-7
å
ï
Å
Ï
g
p
x
1
/4
G
P
X
7
-8
\
ì
Ç
Ì
h
q
y
1
/2
H
Q
Y
8
-9
ñ
ß
Ñ
µ
i
r
z
3
/4
I
R
Z
9
-A
°
§
ù
:
«
ª
¡
¬
SHY
1
2
3
-B
.
$
,
£
»
º
¿
ô
û
Ô
Û
-C
<
*
%
à
æ
D
|
_
ö
ü
Ö
Ü
-D
(
)
_
´
Ç
Y´
~
ò
Ò
Ù
-E
+
;
>
=
´
ó
ú
Ó
Ú
-F
!
^
?
"
õ
ÿ
Õ
y´
Æ
±
¤
®
Legend: RSP required space, SHY syllable hyphen, SP space.
B-34
Character Sets
IBM 3270 & IBM 5250
GERMAN & AUSTRIAN CHARACTER SET
HEX
4-
5-
6-
7-
8-
9-
A-
B-
C-
D-
E-
F-
-0
SP
&
-
ø
Ø
°
µ
¢
ä
ü
Ö
0
-1
RSP
é
/
É
a
j
ß
£
A
J
÷
1
-2
â
ê
Â
Ê
b
k
s
¥
B
K
S
2
-3
{
ë
[
Ë
c
l
t
·
C
L
T
3
-4
à
è
À
È
d
m
u
©
D
M
U
4
-5
á
í
Á
Í
e
n
v
@
E
N
V
5
-6
ã
î
Ã
Î
f
o
w
¶
F
O
W
6
-7
å
ï
Å
Ï
g
p
x
1
/4
G
P
X
7
-8
ç
ì
Ç
Ì
h
q
y
1
/2
H
Q
Y
8
-9
ñ
~
Ñ
`
i
r
z
3
/4
I
R
Z
9
-A
Ä
Ü
ö
:
«
ª
¡
¬
SHY
1
2
3
-B
.
$
,
#
»
º
¿
ô
û
Ô
Û
-C
<
*
%
§
æ
D
|
_
}
\
]
-D
(
)
_
´
Ç
Y´
¨
ò
ù
Ò
Ù
-E
+
;
>
=
´
ó
ú
Ó
Ú
-F
!
^
?
"
õ
ÿ
Õ
y´
Æ
±
¤
®
Legend: RSP required space, SHY syllable hyphen, SP space.
B-35
Character Sets
IBM 3270 & IBM 5250
ITALIAN CHARACTER SET
HEX
4-
5-
6-
7-
8-
9-
A-
B-
C-
D-
E-
F-
-0
SP
&
-
ø
Ø
[
µ
¢
à
è
ç
0
-1
RSP
]
/
É
a
j
ì
#
A
J
÷
1
-2
â
ê
Â
Ê
b
k
s
¥
B
K
S
2
-3
ä
ë
Ä
Ë
c
l
t
·
C
L
T
3
-4
{
}
À
È
d
m
u
©
D
M
U
4
-5
á
í
Á
Í
e
n
v
@
E
N
V
5
-6
ã
î
Ã
Î
f
o
w
¶
F
O
W
6
-7
å
ï
Å
Ï
g
p
x
1
/4
G
P
X
7
-8
\
~
Ç
Ì
h
q
y
1
/2
H
Q
Y
8
-9
ñ
ß
Ñ
ù
i
r
z
3
/4
I
R
Z
9
-A
°
é
ò
:
«
ª
¡
¬
SHY
1
2
3
-B
.
$
,
£
»
º
¿
ô
û
Ô
Û
-C
<
*
%
§
æ
D
|
_
ö
ü
Ö
Ü
-D
(
)
_
´
Ç
Y´
`
Ò
Ù
-E
+
;
>
=
ó
ú
Ó
Ú
-F
!
^
?
"
õ
ÿ
Õ
y´
Æ
±
¤
¨
´
®
Legend: RSP required space, SHY syllable hyphen, SP space.
B-36
Character Sets
IBM 3270 & IBM 5250
SPANISH CHARACTER SET
HEX
4-
5-
6-
7-
8-
9-
A-
B-
C-
D-
E-
F-
-0
SP
&
-
ø
Ø
°
µ
¢
{
}
\
0
-1
RSP
é
/
É
a
j
¨
£
A
J
÷
1
-2
â
ê
Â
Ê
b
k
s
¥
B
K
S
2
-3
ä
ë
Ä
Ë
c
l
t
·
C
L
T
3
-4
à
è
À
È
d
m
u
©
D
M
U
4
-5
á
í
Á
Í
e
n
v
§
E
N
V
5
-6
ã
î
Ã
Î
f
o
w
¶
F
O
W
6
-7
å
ï
Å
Ï
g
p
x
1
/4
G
P
X
7
-8
ç
ì
Ç
Ì
h
q
y
1
/2
H
Q
Y
8
ß
#
`
i
r
z
3
/4
I
R
Z
9
-9
-A
[
]
ñ
:
«
ª
¡
^
SHY
1
2
3
-B
.
$
,
Ñ
»
º
¿
!
ô
û
Ô
Û
-C
<
*
%
@
æ
D
ö
ü
Ö
Ü
-D
(
)
_
´
Ç
Y´
~
ò
ù
Ò
Ù
-E
+
;
>
=
´
ó
ú
Ó
Ú
-F
|
¬
?
"
õ
ÿ
Õ
y´
Æ
±
¤
-
®
Legend: RSP required space, SHY syllable hyphen, SP space.
B-37
Character Sets
IBM 3270 & IBM 5250
SWEDISH & FINNISH CHARACTER SET
HEX
4-
5-
6-
7-
8-
9-
A-
B-
C-
D-
E-
F-
-0
SP
&
-
ø
Ø
°
µ
¢
ä
å
É
0
-1
RSP
`
/
\
a
j
ü
£
A
J
÷
1
-2
â
ê
Â
Ê
b
k
s
¥
B
K
S
2
-3
{
ë
#
Ë
c
l
t
·
C
L
T
3
-4
à
è
À
È
d
m
u
©
D
M
U
4
-5
á
í
Á
Í
e
n
v
[
E
N
V
5
-6
ã
î
Ã
Î
f
o
w
¶
F
O
W
6
-7
}
ï
$
Ï
g
p
x
1
/4
G
P
X
7
-8
ç
ì
Ç
Ì
h
q
y
1
/2
H
Q
Y
8
-9
ñ
ß
Ñ
é
i
r
z
3
/4
I
R
Z
9
-A
§
¤
ö
:
«
ª
¡
¬
SHY
1
2
3
-B
.
Å
,
Ä
»
º
¿
ô
û
Ô
Û
-C
<
*
%
Ö
æ
D
|
_
~
@
Ü
-D
(
)
_
´
Ç
Y´
¨
ò
ù
Ò
Ù
-E
+
;
>
=
´
ó
ú
Ó
Ú
-F
!
^
?
"
õ
ÿ
Õ
y´
Æ
±
]
®
Legend: RSP required space, SHY syllable hyphen, SP space.
B-38
Character Sets
IBM 3270 & IBM 5250 BELGIAN &
SWISS-FRENCH/GERMAN CHARACTER SET
HEX
4-
5-
6-
7-
8-
9-
A-
B-
C-
D-
E-
F-
-0
SP
&
-
ø
Ø
°
µ
¢
{
}
\
0
-1
RSP
é
/
É
a
j
~
£
A
J
÷
1
-2
â
ê
Â
Ê
b
k
s
¥
B
K
S
2
-3
ä
ë
Ä
Ë
c
l
t
·
C
L
T
3
-4
à
è
À
È
d
m
u
©
D
M
U
4
-5
á
í
Á
Í
e
n
v
§
E
N
V
5
-6
ã
î
Ã
Î
f
o
w
¶
F
O
W
6
-7
å
ï
Å
Ï
g
p
x
1
/4
G
P
X
7
-8
ç
ì
Ç
Ì
h
q
y
1
/2
H
Q
Y
8
-9
ñ
ß
Ñ
`
i
r
z
3
/4
I
R
Z
9
-A
[
]
:
«
ª
¡
¬
SHY
1
2
3
-B
.
$
,
#
»
º
¿
ô
û
Ô
Û
-C
<
*
%
@
æ
D
|
_
ö
ü
Ö
Ü
-D
(
)
_
´
Ç
Y´
¨
ò
ù
Ò
Ù
-E
+
;
>
=
´
ó
ú
Ó
Ú
-F
!
^
?
"
õ
ÿ
Õ
y´
Æ
±
¤
®
Legend: RSP required space, SHY syllable hyphen, SP space.
B-39
Character Sets
IBM EBCDIC CODEPAGES SUPPLIED
Codepage
B-40
Type
Countries
37
SBCS
USA, Canada, Netherlands, Portugal, Brazil
273
SBCS
Austria, Germany
274
SBCS
Belgium (old)
277
SBCS
Denmark, Norway
278
SBCS
Finland, Sweden
280
SBCS
Italy
284
SBCS
Spain, Latin America (Spanish)
285
SBCS
UK
290
SBCS
Japanese - Katakana
297
SBCS
France
300
DBCS
Japanese - Kanji
420
SBCS
Arabic
424
SBCS
Hebrew New Code
500
SBCS
(Latin 1) Belgium, Canada, Switzerland
803
SBCS
Hebrew Old Code
833
SBCS
Korean
834
DBCS
Korean
835
DBCS
Traditional Chinese
836
SBCS
Simplified Chinese
837
DBCS
Simplified Chinese
838
SBCS
Thai
870
SBCS
(Latin 2) Czech, Slovak, Polish
871
SBCS
Icelandic
875
SBCS
Greek
880
SBCS
Cyrillic
905
SBCS
(Latin 3) Turkish (old)
1025
SBCS
Russian Cyrillic
1026
SBCS
(Latin 5) Turkish
1027
SBCS
Japanese - Latin extended
1140
SBCS
[EURO] USA, Canada, Netherlands, Portugal, Brazil
1141
SBCS
[EURO] Austria, Germany
1142
SBCS
[EURO] Denmark, Norway
1143
SBCS
[EURO] Finland, Sweden
1144
SBCS
[EURO] Italy
1145
SBCS
[EURO] Spain, Latin America
1146
SBCS
[EURO] UK
1147
SBCS
[EURO] France
1148
SBCS
[EURO] Belgium, Canada, Switzerland
1149
SBCS
[EURO] Icelandic
Host Command Summary
C
Host Command Summary
This appendix lists the host commands that are valid in each terminal
emulation mode. Additional special commands are listed at the back.
The following conventions are used in this command list. Spaces in a command are for
clarity only and are not to be entered as part of the command. A space character that is
part of the command will be shown as SP. An asterisk (*) in a command indicates the
location of one or more parameters except otherwise indicated next to the command.
Note that IBM 3270 and IBM 5250 emulation commands are not included because of
their complexity. Refer to the manuals supplied with these terminals for the host
commands that are supported.
VT52 Emulation
CHARACTER SET SELECTION
Invoke G0 character set
Invoke G1 character set
Select G0 character set
Select Line Drawing character set
SI
SO
ESC G
ESC F
CURSOR
Direct cursor addressing (1 to 96 = SP to DEL)
Insert FF character & advance cursor
Line feed
Move cursor down one line
Move cursor down one line
Move cursor home
Move cursor one column left
Move cursor one column left
Move cursor one column right
Move cursor to left margin of current line
Move cursor to next tab stop
Move cursor up one line
Reverse line feed
ESC Y *line *column
FF
LF
ESC B
VT
ESC H
BS
ESC D
ESC C
CR
HT
ESC A
ESC I
C-1
Host Command Summary
TEXT ERASURE
Erase text to end of line
Erase text to end of screen
ESC K
ESC J
GENERAL
Cancel current ESC sequence & display error
Sound audible tone
CAN
BEL
MODE SELECTION
Select numeric keypad application mode
Select numeric keypad normal mode
Select VT100 mode
ESC =
ESC >
ESC <
PRINTING
Auto print off
Auto print on
Print controller off
Print controller on
ESC _
ESC ^
ESC X
ESC W
REPORTS
Request mode identification report
Send terminal emulation mode report
ESC Z
ESC # ! 0
ANSI VT100 Emulation
CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES
Assign * attribute(s) to following characters
Default attributes
Bold on
Dim White
Underline on
Flashing on
Inverse video on
Half intensity off
Underline off
Flashing off
Inverse video off
Black foreground
Red foreground
Green foreground
Yellow foreground
C-2
0
1
2
4
5
7
22
24
25
27
30
31
32
33
Blue foreground
Magenta foreground
Cyan foreground
White foreground
'Normal' foreground
White background
Red background
Red background
Yellow background
Blue background
Magenta background
Cyan background
White background
'Normal' background
ESC [ * m
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
White background
Red background
Red background
Yellow background
Blue background
Magenta background
Cyan background
White background
'Normal' background
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
59
Host Command Summary
Deselect underline character mode
Double width & height (top half) characters
Double width & height (bottom half) characters
Double width single height characters
Select underline character mode
Single width & height (normal) characters
ESC [ < 1 h
ESC # 3
ESC # 4
ESC # 6
ESC [ < 1 l
ESC # 5
CHARACTER SET SELECTION
Assign G0 label to * character set
Assign G1 label to * character set
ASCII / N.American
British
Dutch
Finnish
French
French Canadian
German
B
A
4
5 or C
R
9 or Q
K
ESC ( *
ESC ) *
Italian
Danish / Norwegian
Portuguese
Spanish
Swedish
Swiss
Line Drawing
Assign G0 labelled set to 7 bit codes
Assign G1 labelled set to 7 bit codes
Y
' or E or 6
%6
Z
7 or H
=
0
SI
SO
CURSOR
Cursor on
Cursor off
Clear tab stops (0 = cursor position, 2 or 3 = all)
Deselect auto carriage return
Disable cursor
Disable cursor autowrap
Enable cursor
Enable cursor autowrap
Index cursor (move down one line)
Insert FF character & advance cursor
Line feed
Move cursor down * lines
Move cursor down one line
Move cursor left * columns
Move cursor one column left
Move cursor right * columns
Move cursor to beginning of next line
Move cursor to left margin of current line
Move cursor to line (*l) column (*c)
Move cursor to line (*l) column (*c)
Move cursor to next tab stop
Move cursor up * lines
Reverse index cursor (move up one line)
Select absolute origin mode
Select auto carriage return
Select relative origin mode
Set tab stop at current cursor position
Tab cursor backward * tabs
Tab cursor forward * tabs
ESC [ ? 25 h
ESC [ ? 25 l
ESC [ * g
ESC [ 20 l
ESC [ ? 50 l
ESC [ ? 7 l
ESC [ ? 50 h
ESC [ ? 7 h
ESC D
FF
LF
ESC [ * B
VT
ESC [ * D
BS
ESC [ * C
ESC E
CR
ESC [ *l ; *c H
ESC [ *l ; *c f
HT
ESC [ * A
ESC M
ESC [ ? 6 l
ESC [ 20 h
ESC [ ? 6 h
ESC H
ESC [ * Z
ESC [ * I
C-3
Host Command Summary
DISPLAY
Scroll display down * lines
Scroll display up * lines
Select 80 column display mode
Select 132 column display mode
Select invisible display
Select normal colour display mode
Select reverse colour display mode
Select thin-line graphics in ANSI BBS mode
Select visible display
Set top (*t) and bottom (*b) margin positions
ESC [ * T
ESC [ * S
ESC [ ? 3 l
ESC [ ? 3 h
ESC [ ? 75 l
ESC [ ? 5 l
ESC [ ? 5 h
ESC 10 m
ESC [ ? 75 h
ESC [ *t ; *b r
EDITING
Delete * characters from cursor position right
Delete * lines from cursor position down
Enable all characters to be erased
Enable erasure of unprotected characters only
End protected area
Erase * characters & attributes from cursor right
Erase line portion (0 = from, 1 = to, 2 = all)
Erase screen portion (0 = from, 1 = to, 2 = all)
Insert * blank lines
Insert * space characters
Protect characters with * attribute(s)
Select insert mode
Select replace mode
Start protected area
ESC [ * P
ESC [ * M
ESC [ 6 h
ESC [ 6 l
ESC W
ESC [ * X
ESC [ * K
ESC [ * J
ESC [ * L
ESC [ * @
ESC [ * }
ESC [ 4 h
ESC [ 4 l
ESC V
GENERAL OPERATION
Cancel current ESC sequence & display error
Local echo mode on
Local echo mode off
Reset features (* = * in ESC [ * h commands)
Reset terminal emulation
Restore saved features
Save features (char. set, attrib's, cursor, origin)
Select VT52 mode
Select VT100 mode from VT320 mode
Select VT400 7 bit mode
Select VT400 8 bit mode
Select VT400 8 bit mode (* can be 0 or 2)
Select Wyse 60 mode
Set features (* = * in ESC [ * h commands)
Soft reset
Sound audible tone
Transmit rate limited to 150-180 cps
Transmit rate unlimited
C-4
CAN
ESC [ 12 l
ESC [ 12 h
ESC [ * l
ESC c
ESC 8
ESC 7
ESC [ ? 2 l
ESC [ 61 " p
ESC [ 62 ; 1 " p
ESC [ 62 " p
ESC [ 62 ; * " p
ESC [ 42 h
ESC [ * h
ESC [ ! p
BEL
ESC [ ? 73 h
ESC [ ? 73 l
Host Command Summary
KEYBOARD
Backspace key performs backspace only
Backspace key performs delete
Data processing keys mode
Disable key autorepeat
Disable keyboard
Disable keyboard input
Enable key autorepeat
Enable keyboard
Enable keyboard input
Select cursor key application mode
Select cursor key normal mode
Select keypad application mode
Select keypad numeric mode
Typewriter keys mode
ESC [ ? 67 h
ESC [ ? 67 l
ESC [ ? 68 h
ESC [ ? 8 l
ESC `
ESC [ 2 h
ESC [ ? 8 h
ESC b
ESC [ 2 l
ESC [ ? 1 h
ESC [ ? 1 l
ESC =
ESC >
ESC [ ? 68 l
LOCAL EDITING
Data block for transmission is cursor line
Data block for transmission is page
Disable transmission of protected areas
Edit key changes mode immediately
Edit key waits for host to enable mode change
Enable all selected areas to be transmitted
Enable only cursor area to be transmitted
Enable transmission of all characters
Enable transmission of protected areas
Enable transmission of selected characters only
End of block indicator character(s)
(0 = no, 1 = FF, 2 = ETX, 3 = EOT, 4 = CR, 5 = DC3)
End selected area
Enter edit mode
Enter interactive mode
Function according to ANSI rules
Function as VT131 terminal
Line termination characters (ASCII decimal)
Space compression mode off
Space compression mode on
Start selected area
Transmission occurs immediately
Transmission waits for host
Transmit block of data
Transmit scrolling region
Transmit VT131 or ANSI partial page
ESC [ ? 11 h
ESC [ ? 11 l
ESC [ 1 l
ESC [ ? 16 h
ESC [ ? 16 l
ESC [ 15 h
ESC [ 15 l
ESC [ 17 h
ESC [ 1 h
ESC [ 17 l
ESC [ * |
ESC G
ESC [ ? 10 h
ESC [ ? 10 l
ESC [ ? 53 l
ESC [ ? 53 h
ESC [ ? * ' s
ESC [ ? 13 l
ESC [ ? 13 h
ESC F
ESC [ ? 14 h
ESC [ ? 14 l
ESC 5
ESC [ 16 h
ESC [ 16 l
PRINTING
Auto print off
Auto print on
Form feed at end of print
No form feed at end of print
Print controller on
Print controller off
ESC [ ? 4 i
ESC [ ? 5 i
ESC [ ? 18 h
ESC [ ? 18 l
ESC [ 5 i
ESC [ 4 i
C-5
Host Command Summary
Print cursor line
Print page
Print page prints complete page
Print page prints scrolling region only
ESC [ ? 1 i
ESC [ i
ESC [ ? 19 h
ESC [ ? 19 l
REPORTS
Report compatibility level
Report current colour
Report cursor position
Report keyboard nationality
Report operating status
Report terminal emulation mode
Report VT terminal identity
Report VT terminal identity
Report VT terminal identity
ESC [ > c
ESC [ = M
ESC [ 6 n
ESC [ ? 26 n
ESC [ 5 n
ESC # ! 0
ESC [ 0 c
ESC [ c
ESC Z
ANSI VT500 Emulation
When running the VT500 7 or 8 bit emulation, the following commands will be
executed in addition those listed previously for ANSI VT100.
CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES
Assign * attribute(s) to following characters
Attributes: Invisible
8
Flashing off
Bold off
22
Reverse video off
Underline off 24
Invisible off
ESC [ * m
25
27
28
Non-erase attribute on
Non-erase attribute off (* = 0 or 2)
ESC [ 1 " q
ESC [ * " q
CHARACTER SET SELECTION
C-6
Assign G2 label to * character set
Assign G3 label to * character set
Extra character sets: DEC Additional
ISO Latin-1 Additional
ESC * * (second * is parameter)
ESC + *
%5
A
Assign G1 labelled set to 8 bit codes
Assign G2 labelled set to 7 bit codes
Assign G2 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character
Assign G2 labelled set to 8 bit codes
Assign G3 labelled set to 7 bit codes
Assign G3 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character
Assign G3 labelled set to 8 bit codes
Clear redefinable character set
Load redefinable character set
Preferred Additional set is DEC
Preferred Additional set is ISO Latin-1
Select Multinational character set mode
Select National character set mode
ESC ~
ESC n
ESC N
ESC }
ESC o
ESC O
ESC |
ESC P 1 ; 1 ; 2 { SP @ ESC \
ESC P * { * ESC \
ESC P 0 ! u %5 ESC \
ESC P 1 ! u A ESC \
ESC [ ? 42 l
ESC [ ? 42 h
Host Command Summary
DISPLAY
Display host-writable status line
Display indicator status line
Display no status line
Send data to main display
Send data to status line
Display time on status line (*h = hour (24) *m = minutes)
Display controls on
Display controls off
Rectangular fill (*c = fill character, *sr = start row
*sc = start column, *er = end row, *ec = end column
ESC [ 2 $ ~
ESC [ 1 $ ~
ESC [ 0 $ ~
ESC [ 0 $ }
ESC [ 1 $ }
ESC [ *h ; *m , p
ESC [ 3 h
ESC [ 3 l
ESC [ *c ; *sr ; *sc ; *er ; *ec $ z
EDITING
Selective erase line (0 = from, 1 = to, 2 = all)
Selective erase screen (0 = from, 1 = to, 2 = all)
ESC [ ? * K
ESC [ ? * J
GENERAL OPERATION
Enter HP 700-92/96 mode (0 = zero)
Select C1 7 bit control mode
Select C1 8 bit control mode
ESC & k 0 \
ESC SP F
ESC SP G
KEYBOARD
Set national keyboard
*=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
American
British
Belgian
Canadian
Danish
Finnish
German
Dutch
Italian
Swiss French
Swiss German
Swedish
Norwegian
Select application keypad mode
Select numeric keypad mode
Set DEC keyboard mode
Reset DEC keyboard mode
14
15
16
19
22
29
31
33
34
35
36
38
39
ESC [ 2 ; * space }
French
Spanish
Portuguese
Hebrew
Greek
Turkish
Hungarian
Slovak
Czech
Polish
Romanian
Serbian
Russian
ESC [ ? 66 h
ESC [ ? 66 l
ESC [ ? 99 h
ESC [ ? 99 l
PF KEYS
Clear all PF keys
Lock PF keys
Program a PF key
ESC P 0 ; 1 | ESC \
ESC P 1 ; 0 | ESC \
ESC P * ; * | * / * ESC \
C-7
Host Command Summary
PRINTING
Enable bidirectional printing
Disable bidirectional printing
Enable printer/tablet to talk directly to host (one way)
Disable printer/tablet from talking directly to host
Destination port (only first * is parameter: 0 = None,
1 = LPT 1/2, 2 = COM 1, 3 = COM 2, etc.)
ESC [ 7 i
ESC [ 6 i
ESC [ ? 9 i
ESC [ ? 8 i
ESC [ * * u
REPORTS
Request colour table report
Request control function settings
Request cursor information report
Request emulation state report
Request locator device port status
Request locator device type
Request mode settings
Request tab stop report
Request user-preferred Additional set
Restore colour table
Restore cursor information
Restore emulation state
Restore tab stops
C-8
ESC [ 2 $ u
ESC P $ q
ESC [ 1 $ w
ESC [ 1 $ u
ESC [ ? 55 n
ESC [ ? 56 n
ESC [ * $ p
ESC [ 2 $ w
ESC [ & u
ESC P 2 $ p
ESC P 1 $ t
ESC P 1 $ p
ESC P 2 $ t
Host Command Summary
ANSI VT420 Emulation
When running the VT420 emulation, the following commands will be executed in
addition those listed for ANSI VT100 and VT500.
CURSOR MOVEMENT & PANNING
Back index
Forward index
Pan down (*l = number of lines)
Pan up (*l = number of lines)
Vertical cursor coupled mode
Vertical cursor uncoupled mode
Page cursor coupled mode
Page cursor uncoupled mode
ESC 6
ESC 9
ESC [ *l S
ESC [ *l T
ESC [ ? 61 h
ESC [ ? 61 l
ESC [ ? 64 h
ESC [ ? 64 l
EDITING
Delete column(s) (*c = number of columns to delete)
Insert column(s) (*c = number of columns to insert)
ESC [ *c ' ~
ESC [ *c ' }
GENERAL OPERATION
Secure reset (*n = any number in range 0 - 16383)
Secure reset confirmation (*n = number in range 0 - 16383)
ESC [ *n + p
ESC [ *n * q
MACROS
Define macro
ESC P *n ; *d ; *e ! z D...D ESC \
*n = Macro ID number
0-63
*d = Delete all macros
Delete current macro
0
1
*e = Encoding format for macro text:
Standard ASCII characters
Hex pairs for each ASCII character
0
1
Control data string
Repeat sequence introducer
Invoke macro (*n = macro ID number)
D...D
!
ESC [ *n * z
KEYBOARD
Enable local functions
*n = Function number:
All local functions
Local copy & paste
Local panning
Local window resize
ESC [ *n ; *c ; ... *n ; *c + q
0
1
2
3
*c = Control performed:
Factory default
Enable local function
Disable local function
0
1
2
C-9
Host Command Summary
Local function key control
ESC [ *k ; *f ; ... *k ; *f * }
*k = Function key number:
All local function keys
F1 or Hold
F2 or Print
F3 or Set-Up
F4 or Session
*f = Function performed:
Factory default
Local function
Send key sequence
Disable key
0
1
2
3
4
Select modifier key reporting
*k = Key number:
All keys
Left Shift
Right Shift
Lock key
Ctrl key
Left Alt Function
Right Alt Function
Left Compose Char
Right Compose Char
0
1
2
3
ESC [ *k ; *c ... *k ; *c + r
*c = Control performed:
Factory default
0
Modifier function
1
Extended keyboard report 2
Key disabled
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PAGE MEMORY
Set lines per page
ESC [ *l t
Session: Dual
*l = 3 pages
2 pages
2 pages
1 page
1 page
-
Single
6 pages
5 pages
4 pages
3 pages
2 pages
1 page
Set left & right margins (*l = left column, *r = right)
Vertical split screen mode - L&R margins can be changed
Vertical split screen mode - L&R margins cannot be changed
Move cursor to page *n at same position
24
25
36
48
72
144
ESC [ *l ; *r s
ESC [ ? 69 h
ESC [ ? 69 l
ESC [ *n SP P
RECTANGULAR AREA OPERATIONS
Copy rectangular area
*t
*l
*b
*r
Top-line border
Left-column border
Bottom-line border
Right-column border
ESC [ *t ; *l ; *b ; *r ; *s ; *dt ; *dl ; *dp $ v
*s
*dt
*dl
*dp
Source page number
Destination top-line border
Destination left-column border
Destination page number
Erase rectangular area
*t Top-line border
*b Bottom-line border
*l Left-column border *r Right-column border
C-10
ESC [ *t ; *l ; *b ; *r $ z
Host Command Summary
Fill rectangular area
ESC [ *f ; *t ; *l ; *b ; *r $ x
*f Decimal code of fill character
*t Top-line border
*l Left-column border
*b Bottom-line border
*r Right-column border
Selective erase rectangular area
ESC [ *t ; *l ; *b ; *r $ {
*t Top-line border
*b Bottom-line border
*l Left-column border *r Right-column border
Select attribute change extent
ESC [ *c * x
*c = character positions affected:
Stream of character positions
Rectangular area of character positions
0 or 1
2
Change attributes in rectangular area
ESC [ *t ; *l ; *b ; *r *a $ r
*t Top-line border
*r Right-column border
*l Left-column border *a Visual character attributes
*b Bottom-line border
Reverse attributes in rectangular area
ESC [ *t ; *l ; *b ; *r *a $ t
*t Top-line border
*r Right-column border
*l Left-column border *a Visual character attributes
*b Bottom-line border
VT420 REPORTS
Tertiary device attribute request
Request extended cursor position report
Request checksum of rectangular area
*id Request label
*p Page number
*t Top-line border
ESC [ = c or ESC [ = 0 c
ESC [ ? 6 n
ESC [ *id ; *p ; *t ; *l ; *b ; *r * y
*l Left-column border
*b Bottom-line border
*r Right-column border
Request macro space report
Request memory checksum report (*l = request label)
Request multiple session status report
Request window report
ESC [ ? 62 n
ESC [ ? 63 ; *l n
ESC [ ? 85 n
ESC [ " v
C-11
Host Command Summary
ANSI VT510 Emulation
When running the VT510 emulation, the following commands will be executed in
addition those listed for ANSI VT100 and VT500.
USER-DEFINED KEYS
Download definitions for user-defined keys
DCS *c ; *l ; *m | D...D ST
*c 0 or none
1
Clear all keys before loading new values (0 is default).
Load new UDK values; clear old values only when redefined.
*l 0 or none
1
Lock the keys.
Do not lock the keys against future redefinition.
*m 0, 2 or none
1
3
4
Defines the shifted function key.
Defines the unshifted function key.
Defines the alternate unshifted function key.
Defines the alternate shifted function key.
|
(vertical bar) The final character. Key definition strings follow and these
are terminated by ST.
D...D are the key definition strings in the following format:
Key1/UDS/UDS Direction;Key2/UDS/UDS Direction;........;
Key#
Is the key selection number of the key to be defined as listed below:
F1
F2
F3
F4
/
11
12
13
14
F5
F6
F7
F8
15
17
18
19
F9
F10
F11
F12
20
21
23
24
Is a delimiter.
UDS
Is the user-defined string consisting of hex pairs in the
following ranges:
3/0 through 3/9 (0 through 9)
4/1 through 4/6 (A through F)
6/1 through 6/6 (a through f)
For example, the hex encoding for "PRINT" would be
as follows: 5 0 5 2 4 9 4 E 5 4
This enables you to use any of the 256 character codes in the
key string. You can enter key definition strings in any order.
UDS Direction
Specifies the transmission direction:
0 or none
1
2
C-12
Normal (Host and/or terminal) default
Local (Terminal only)
Remote (Host only)
Host Command Summary
PROGRAMMING ALPHANUMERIC KEYS
Program Alphanumeric Key(s)
DCS " y D...D ST
where the data string D...D format is as follows:
Key1/Hex Code String/Function #/UDS/UDS Direction;Key2/...;
Key#
Is the key station number of the key to be programmed as listed below:
Esc
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
/
110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
F10
F11
F12
Print Screen
Scroll Lock
Pause
Insert
Delete
Home
End
121
122
123
124
125
126
75
76
80
81
Page Up
Page Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Cursor Down
Keypad Enter
Return
Backspace
Tab
85
86
79
89
83
84
108
43
15
16
Is a delimiter.
Hex Code String
Specifies the hex code of the character to be transmitted
with each of the four modifier states in the following order:
Unshifted, Shifted, Alternate Shifted (Shift 2), and Control
(if omitted, use default). Use a period "." as a place holder
for an undefined modifier combination.
The hex code represents a valid code in the current 7-bit or
8-bit character set.
Use a minus "-" preceding the hex representation of a diacritical
sign if a diacritical mark is to be defined.
Function #
Is a number associated with a local function as listed below. For
example, function number "0" makes the key or key/modifier
inoperative. Function number "100" indicates a user-defined
sequence (UDS), and a UDS direction is defined following the
slash "/" delimiter.
0
No Function
100 UDS
91
92
Backspace
Cancel
93
94
Escape
Delete
UDS
Is the user-defined sequence specified in Hex format. Each hex code
in this string represents a value transmitted by the defined key
combined with the modifiers.
UDS Direction
Specifies the transmission direction:
0 or none
1
2
Normal (Host and/or terminal) default
Local (Terminal only)
Remote (Host only)
C-13
Host Command Summary
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION KEYS
Program Function Key(s)
DCS " x D...D ST
where the data string D...D format is as follows:
Key1/Mod1/Function #/UDS/UDS Direction;
Key2/Mod2/Function #/UDS/UDS Direction;........;
Key#
Is the key station number of the key to be programmed as listed below:
Esc
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
/
110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
F10
F11
F12
Print Screen
Scroll Lock
Pause
Insert
Delete
Home
End
Page Up
Page Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Cursor Down
Keypad Enter
Return
Backspace
Tab
85
86
79
89
83
84
108
43
15
16
Is a delimiter.
Mod#
Is an integer that specifies the modifier key that is to be pressed at
the same time as the defined key:
0 or none
1
2
3
4
Function #
Normal
Normal
Shift
Alt
Alt+Shift
5
6
7
8
Control
Shift+Control
Alt+Control
Alt+Control+Shift
Is a number associated with a local function as listed below. For
example, function number "0" makes the key or key/modifier
inoperative. Function number "100" indicates a user-defined
sequence (UDS), and a UDS direction is defined following the
slash "/" delimiter.
0
No Function
100 UDS
91
92
Backspace
Cancel
93
94
Escape
Delete
UDS
Is the user-defined sequence specified in Hex format. Each hex code
in this string represents a value transmitted by the defined key
combined with the modifiers.
UDS Direction
Specifies the transmission direction:
0 or none
1
2
C-14
121
122
123
124
125
126
75
76
80
81
Normal (Host and/or terminal) default
Local (Terminal only)
Remote (Host only)
Host Command Summary
ANSI VT520 Emulation
When running the VT520 emulation, the following commands will be executed in
addition to those listed for ANSI VT100 and VT500. Note that an * (asterisk) before a
command description indicates the command is accepted but not actioned.
Sessions
* Enable session
* Session page memory (*ps# = pages per session 1-4)
* Update session
* = Only when active
When available
At regular intervals
CSI & x
CSI *ps1 ; *ps2 ; *ps3 ; *ps4 ; , x
CSI * , y
1
2
3
Window Management
Auto reset mode enabled
Auto reset mode disabled
Framed windows mode enabled
Framed windows mode disabled
* Set icon name (12 characters max.)
Set window title (30 characters max.)
CSI ? 98 h
CSI ? 98 l
CSI ? 111 h
CSI ? 111 l
OSC 2 L ; name ST
OSC 2 1 ; name ST
Audible Attributes
* Margin bell volume
CSI * SP u
* = Off
Low
High
* Warning bell volume
none, 0, 1
2, 3, 4
5, 6, 7, 8
CSI * SP t
* = Off
Low
High
* Play sound
1
2, 3, 4
none, 0, 5, 6, 7, 8
CSI *v , *d ; *n , ~
*n = Note
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Silent
C5
C#5
D5
D#5(Eb)
E5
F5
F#5
G5
*v = Volume
*d = Duration
0 - 7 (0 = silent)
0 - 255 (1/32nd of a sec)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C6
C#6
D6
D#6
E6
F6
F#6
G6
G#6
A6
A#6
B6
C7
C-15
Host Command Summary
Colour Selection
Assign colour
CSI *i *f *b , |
*i = Item
Normal text
Window frame
1
2 (not actioned)
*f = Foreground colour index 0 - 15
*b = Background colour index 0 - 15
Alternate text colour
*a = Attribute
CSI *a *f *b , }
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Normal text
Bold
Reverse
Underline
Blink
Bold reverse
Bold underline
Bold blink
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Reverse underline
Reverse blink
Underline blink
Bold reverse underline
Bold reverse blink
Bold underline blink
Reverse underline blink
Bold reverse underline blink
*f = Foreground colour index 0 - 15
*b = Background colour index 0 - 15
Alternate text colour blink enabled
Alternate text colour blink disabled
Alternate text colour underline enabled
Alternate text colour underline disabled
Bold and blink foreground & background enabled
Bold and blink foreground only enabled
Colour table request (* value: 1 = HLS, 2 = RGB)
Colour table reply to host (*...* = parameter group)
Colour table restore format (*...* = parameter group)
CSI ? 115 h
CSI ? 115 l
CSI ? 114 h
CSI ? 114 l
CSI ? 116 h
CSI ? 116 l
CSI 2 ; * $ u
DCS 2 $ s *...* ST
DCS 2 $ p *...* ST
*...* = group of 5 parameters: *n ; *s ; *1 ; *2 ; *3 /
*n = Colour number: 0 - 255
*s = Colour coordinate system: 0 = illegal, 1 = HLS, 2 = RGB
*1 = HLS hue: 0 - 360
or RGB red: 0 - 100
*2 = HLS lightness: 0 - 100 or RGB green: 0 - 100
*3 = HLS saturation: 0 - 100 or RGB blue: 0 - 100
Select colour look-up table
CSI * ) {
*= 0
1
2
3
Mono
Alternate colour (use text attributes)
Alternate colour
ANSI SGR colour
Text Processing
Cursor backward tabulation (* = no. of active tab positions)
Cursor horizontal absolute (* = no. of active char. positions)
Cursor horizontal forward tab (* = no. of active tab positions)
Cursor next line (* = number of active position)
Cursor previous line (* = number of active position)
Save cursor position (SCO)
C-16
CSI * Z
CSI * G
CSI * I
CSI * E
CSI * F
CSI s
Host Command Summary
Restore saved cursor (SCO)
Set cursor style
CSI u
CSI * SP q
* = Blinking block
Steady block
Blinking underline
Steady underline
Right-to-left copy enabled
Right-to-left copy disabled
Right-to-left mode enabled
Right-to-left mode disabled
Vertical line position absolute
Vertical line position relative
Set tab every 8 columns
* Set scroll speed
none, 0, 1
2
3
4
CSI ? 96 h
CSI ? 96 l
CSI ? 34 h
CSI ? 34 l
CSI * d
CSI * e
CSI ? 5 W
CSI * SP p
* = Smooth 2
Smooth 4
Jump
Clear screen on column change
Do not clear screen on column change
none, 0, 1, 2, 3
4, 5, 6, 7, 8
9
CSI ? 95 l
CSI ? 95 h
Character Sets
Assign user-preferred supplemental character set
DCS *s ! u *c ST
*s = 94-character set 0
96-character set 1
*c = character set as follows:
Default 94-Character Set
%5
DEC Supplemental
"?
DEC Greek
"4
DEC Hebrew
%0
DEC Turkish
&4
DEC Cyrillic
<
User-pref. Supplemental
Default 96-Character Set
A
ISO Latin-1 Supplemental
B
ISO Latin-2 Supplemental
F
ISO Greek Supplemental
H
ISO Hebrew Supplemental
L
ISO Latin-Cyrillic
M
ISO Latin-5 Supplemental
<
User-pref. Supplemental
* Down-line load allocation
CSI * , z
* = One each
Two each S1 & S2
Select character set
1
2
ESC *g *c
*g = G-set as follows:
94-Character Set
( G0
) G1
* G2
+ G3
96-Character Set
- G1
.
G2
/
G3
C-17
Host Command Summary
*c = character set as follows:
Default 94-Character Set
%4
Cyrillic (DEC)
"?
Greek (DEC)
">
Greek NRCS
"4
Hebrew (DEC)
%=
Hebrew NRCS
%6
Portuguese NRCS
&5
Russian NRCS
%3
SCS NRCS
%0
Turkish (DEC)
%2
Turkish NRCS
Default 96-Character Set
A
ISO Latin-1 Supplemental
B
ISO Latin-2 Supplemental
F
ISO Greek Supplemental
H
ISO Hebrew Supplemental
M
ISO Latin-5 Supplemental
L
ISO Latin-Cyrillic
Select zero symbol
CSI * , {
* = Oval zero
Zero with slash
Zero with dot
Request user-preferred supplemental set
1
2
3
CSI & u
Keyboard
Auto repeat rate
CSI * - p
* = Off
Slow (10 cps)
Fast (30 cps)
Copy key default (*...* = Key-source/Key-dest;K-s/K-d...;)
Define function key (SCO)
Extended keyboard report
Hebrew encoding mode set (8-bit char.)
Hebrew encoding mode reset (7-bit char.)
Keyboard language selection
*t = keyboard type:
DEC keyboard layout
Enhanced PC layout
0-5
6 - 15
16 - 30
DCS " z *...* ST
ESC Q Fn string
APC : ppp mm ST
CSI ? 36 h
CSI ? 36 l
CSI *t ; *l SP }
0, 1
2
*l = keyboard language as follows:
Keyboard language (VT/PC)
none, North American
0 or 1
2
British
3
Belgian
4
French Canadian
5
Danish
6
Finnish
7
German
8
Dutch
9
Italian
10
Swiss-French
11
Swiss-German
C-18
Keyboard language (VT/PC)
15
Spanish
16
Portuguese
19
Hebrew
22
Greek
28
Canadian English
29
Turkish Q/Turkish
30
Turkish F/Turkish
31
Hungarian
33
Slovak
34
Czech
35
Polish
36
Romanian
Host Command Summary
12
13
14
Swedish
Norwegian
French
38
39
40
SCS
Russian
Latin-American
Key position mode set (key position)
Key position mode reset (char. codes)
North American/Greek selection set (North American)
North American/Greek selection reset (Greek keyboard)
Program alphanumeric key (for *...* see below)
Program function key (for *...* see below)
CSI ? 81 h
CSI ? 81 l
CSI ? 57 h
CSI ? 57 l
DCS " y *...* ST
DCS " x *...* ST
*...* =
Key# / Mod# / Func# / UDS / Dir ; Key# / Mod# / Func# / UDS / Dir ;
Key#
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
31
32
33
34
VT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
PC Keyboard
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
Mod#
0, none
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Modifier Key
Normal
Normal
Shift
Alt
Alt + Shift
Control
Shift + Ctrl
Alt + Ctrl
Alt + Ctrl + Shift
Func# = Local function number
UDS = User-defined sequence
Dir
0, none
1
2
UDS Direction
Normal
Local
Remote
Program key action
CSI * + z
* = None
Lock keys & modifiers
Restore factory defaults
Recall key definitions
Program key free memory report (*t = total bytes, *f = free)
Request program key free memory
Request key definition
*n = Key station number
*m = Modifier key:
Normal
Shift
Alt
Alt + Shift
Control
Shift + Ctrl
Alt + Ctrl
Alt + Ctrl + Shift
none, 0
1
2
3
CSI *t ; *f + y
CSI + x
CSI *n ; *m , w
0, none, 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C-19
Host Command Summary
Request key type (* = decimal key station number)
Report key type
CSI * , u
CSI *n ; *t , v
*n = decimal key station number
*t = key type:
Alphanumeric key
Function key
Report function key definition (for *...* see below)
Report modifiers/key state (for *...* see below)
0
1
DCS " } *...* ST
DCS " ~ *...* ST
*...* = Key# / Mod# / Func# / UDS / Dir (except no Func# for function key report)
Key#
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
31
32
33
34
VT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
PC Keyboard
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
Mod#
0, none
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Func# = Local function number
UDS = User-defined sequence
Dir
0, none
1
2
UDS Direction
Normal
Local
Remote
* Set key click volume
CSI * SP r
* = Off
Low
High
* Set lock key style
1
2, 3, 4
none, 0, 5, 6, 7, 8
CSI * SP v
* = Caps lock
Shift lock
Reverse lock
* Load LEDs
none, 0, 1
2
3
CSI * q
* = Clear all LEDs
Light Num lock
Light Caps lock
Light Scroll lock
Extinguish Num lock
Extinguish Caps lock
Extinguish Scroll lock
C-20
Modifier Key
Normal
Normal
Shift
Alt
Alt + Shift
Control
Shift + Ctrl
Alt + Ctrl
Alt + Ctrl + Shift
0
1
2
3
21
22
23
Host Command Summary
Printer
Media copy - send screen data
Select digital printed data type
CSI 2 i
CSI * ) p
* = Print National only
National & Line Drawing
Print Multinational
Print all characters
* Select printer type
none, 0, 1
2
3
4
CSI * $ s
* = DEC ANSI
none, 0, 1
IBM ProPrinter 2
DEC + IBM
3
* Select ProPrinter character set
*c = PC Greek
PC Spanish
PC International
PC Multilingual
PC Slavic (Latin 2)
PC Turkish
210
220
437
850
852
857
CSI *c * p
PC Portuguese
PC Hebrew
PC French-Canada
PC Danish-Norway
PC Cyrillic
860
862
863
865
866
Terminal Management
* Select Setup language
CSI * p
* = English
French
German
Spanish
Italian
Load time of day (*h = hour 00 - 23, *m = minutes 00 - 59)
* CRT saver timing
none, 0, 1
2
3
4
5
CSI *h ; *m , p
CSI * - q
* = Never
5 min
15 min
30 min
60 min
0
5
15
30
60
* = Never
5 min
15 min
30 min
0
5
15
30
* Energy saver timing
CSI * - r
Report terminal ID (*...* = 4 hexadecimal pairs)
Set terminal unit ID (*...* = 4 hexadecimal pairs)
DCS ! | *...* ST
DCS ! { *...* ST
C-21
Host Command Summary
Enter/exit VT PC Term mode / select ASCII or scancodes
*m =
VT Emulation Mode
VT Mode
VT PCTerm Mode
*c =
SCO Console Mode
ASCII characters
none, 0
Scancodes
1
character set as follows:
VT Emulation Mode
210
PC Greek
220
PC Spanish
437
PC International
850
PC Multilingual
852
PC Slavic (Latin-2)
857
PC Turkish
860
PC Portuguese
862
PC Hebrew
863
PC French-Canadian
865
PC Danish
866
PC Cyrillic
SCO Console Mode
none, 0 No change
1
PC Multilingual
2
PC International
3
PC Danish/Norwegian
4
PC Spanish
5
PC Portuguese
6
DEC Supplemental
7
ISO Latin-1
Select conformance (operating) level
*l = level:
*b = data bits:
CSI *l ; *b ; " p
1 - VT100
5 - VT520/525
none, 0, 1
2, 3, 4, 5
8-bit controls
7-bit controls
none, 0, 2
1
Terminal mode emulation
* = terminal mode:
CSI * SP ~
VT520/525 (VT level 5)
VT100
VT52
VT PCTerm
WYSE 160/60
WYSE PCTerm
WYSE 50/50+
WYSE 150/120
TVI 950
TVI 925
TVI 910+
ADDS A2
SCO Console
WYSE 325
Auto answerback mode set
Auto answerback mode reset
Conceal answerback message mode set
Conceal answerback message mode reset
Load answerback message (*...* = data string of hex pairs)
Load banner message (*...* = string of up to 30 chars.)
*e = message encoding: ASCII hexadecimal pairs
Text as VT default char. set
C-22
CSI ? *m ; *c r
VT mode or SCO ASCII/Scancodes as follows:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
CSI ? 100 h
CSI ? 100 l
CSI ? 101 h
CSI ? 101 l
CSI 1 v *...* ST
CSI *e r *...* ST
1
2, none, 0
Host Command Summary
Status line type
CSI * $ ~
* = No status line
0
Indicator status line
1
Host-writable status line 2
Communications
Select communication port
CSI *p ; *h * u
*p = printer port:
*h = host port:
None
0
Centronics 1
Comm3
4
Comm1
Comm2
Comm3
1
2
3
(note that the last * is part of the command)
Select communication speed
CSI *l ; *s * r
*l = comm line:
Host transmit
Host receive
Printer
Modem Hi
Modem Lo
*s = speed:
none, 0, 1
2
3
4
5
Use default
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
76800
115200
none, 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
(note that the last * is part of the command)
Set port parameters
CSI *p ; *d ; *y ; *s + w
*p = port:
*d = data:
Comm port none, 0, 1
Printer port 2
*y = parity:
8 bits
7 bits
1, 0, none
2
*s = stop bits:
No parity
none, 0, 1
Even
2
Odd
3
Even
4
Odd, unchecked 5
Mark
6
Space
7
1 bit
2 bits
none, 0, 1
2
Set transmit rate limit
CSI *k ; *s " u
*k = key type:
All keys
Graphic key
Function key
none, 0, 1
2
3
C-23
Host Command Summary
*s = characters per second:
150 cps
50 cps
30 cps
Transmit rate limiting mode set (limited)
Transmit rate limiting mode reset (unlimited)
none, 0, 1
2
3
CSI ? 73 h
CSI ? 73 l
Terminal Synchronization
Disconnect delay time
CSI * $ q
* = delay time:
None
60 ms
2 seconds
Flow control
1
2
none, 0, 3
CSI *p ; *d ; *f ; *t * s
*p = port type:
*d = direction:
Comm port none, 0, 1
Printer port 2
*f = flow control type:
XON/XOFF or XPC
DTR
Both
None
Transmit
Receive
Tx & Receive
1, 0, none
2
3
*t = flow control threshold:
1, 0, none
2
3
4
Low (64)
none, 0, 1
High (768) 2
(note that the last * is part of the command)
Null mode set (ignore NUL)
Null mode reset (accept NUL)
C-24
CSI ? 102 h
CSI ? 102 l
Host Command Summary
AIXTerm Emulation
All commands are supported in both VT100 and HFT (High Function Terminal)
modes unless indicated otherwise.
SINGLE BYTE CONTROLS
Bell
Backspace
Horizontal tab
Linefeed
Vertical tab
Form feed
Carriage return
Shift out
Shift in
Device control 1
Device control 3
Cancel
Substitute
Escape
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DC1
DC3
CAN
SUB
ESC
CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES
Assign * attribute(s) to following characters
Normal
Bold
Underscore
Blink (appears bold)
Reverse
Invisible (HFT)
Foreground colours (HFT)
Background colours (HFT)
Foreground colours (HFT)
Background colours (HFT)
ESC [ * m
0
1
4
5
7
8
30...37
40...47
90...97
100...107
CHARACTER SET SELECTION
United Kingdom character set G0 (VT100)
United Kingdom character set G1 (VT100)
United Kingdom character set G2 (VT100)
United Kingdom character set G3 (VT100)
ASCII (USASCII) character set G0 (VT100)
ASCII (USASCII) character set G1 (VT100)
ASCII (USASCII) character set G2 (VT100)
ASCII (USASCII) character set G3 (VT100)
Special graphics character set G0 (VT100)
Special graphics character set G1 (VT100)
Special graphics character set G2 (VT100)
Special graphics character set G3 (VT100)
Single shift G2 (VT100)
ESC ( A
ESC ) A
ESC * A
ESC + A
ESC ( B
ESC ) B
ESC * B
ESC + B
ESC ( 0
ESC ) 0
ESC * 0
ESC + 0
ESC N
C-25
Host Command Summary
Single shift G3 (VT100)
Set G0 character set (HFT)
Set G1 character set (HFT)
Lock shift G2 (VT100)
Lock shift G3 (VT100)
ESC O
ESC ( <
ESC ) <
ESC n
ESC o
COLOUR
Set foreground & background colour
*fg and *bg are integers as listed below:
Dull
Colour
Bold
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Black
Blue
Green
Cyan
Red
Magenta
Yellow
White
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Set inverse & foreground & background colour (* as above)
Set normal foreground colour (* = integer as above)
Set normal background colour (* = integer as above)
Set reverse foreground colour (* = integer as above)
Set reverse background colour (* = integer as above)
Set graphic foreground colour (* = integer as above)
Set graphic background colour (* = integer as above)
Request current colour attribute (* = integer as above)
ESC [ 2 ; *fg ; *bg m
ESC [ 7 ; *fg ; *bg ; m
ESC [ = * F
ESC [ = * G
ESC [ = * H
ESC [ = * I
ESC [ = * J
ESC [ = * K
ESC [ = * M
CURSOR
Clear tab stop
ESC [ * g
Clear horizontal tab stop at active position
Vertical tab at cursor line (HFT)
Horizontal tabs on line (HFT)
All horizontal tabs
All vertical tabs (HFT)
Vertical tab stop (HFT)
Cursor backward * tabs
Cursor horizontal absolute
Cursor forward * tabs (HFT)
Cursor tab stop control (HFT)
Cursor down * lines (HFT)
Cursor up * lines
Horizontal tab stop
Index cursor (move down one line)
Reverse index cursor (move up one line)
Move cursor to beginning of next line
Move cursor left * columns
Move cursor down * lines
Move cursor right * columns
Move cursor to line (*l) column (*c)
C-26
0
1
2
3
4
ESC I
ESC [ * Z
ESC [ * G
ESC [ * I
ESC [ * W
ESC [ * E
ESC [ * F
ESC H
ESC D
ESC M
ESC E
ESC [ * D
ESC [ * B
ESC [ * C
ESC [ *l ; *c f
Host Command Summary
Move cursor to line (*l) column (*c)
Move cursor up * lines
Move cursor up * tabs (HFT)
Restore cursor position
Save cursor position
ESC [ *l ; *c H
ESC [ * A
ESC [ * Y
ESC [ u
ESC [ s
DISPLAY
Restore cursor & attributes
Save cursor & attributes
Scroll display down * lines (HFT)
Scroll display up * lines
Scroll left * columns (HFT)
Scroll right * columns (HFT)
Select screen direction (HFT)
ESC 8
ESC 7
ESC [ * T
ESC [ * S
ESC [ * SP @
ESC [ * SP A
ESC [ * 1 ; 1 S
Left-to-right, set to Latin keyboard
Right-to-left, set to National keyboard
Screen alignment display
Set top & bottom margins
Erase status line
Return from status line
Hide status line
Show status line
Go to column * of status line
Set text parameters
0
1
ESC # 8
ESC [ *t ; *b r
ESC [ ? E
ESC [ ? F
ESC [ ? H
ESC [ ? S
ESC [ ? * T
ESC ] * ; *t \007
Change window name & title to *t
Sets only the icon name
Sets only the title name
0
1
2
EDITING
Delete * characters from cursor position right
Delete * lines from cursor position down
Erase * characters from cursor right
Erase area (* is one of the following)
Erase to end of area
Erase from area start
Erase entire area
Erase display (* is one of the following)
Erase to end of display
Erase from display start
Erase entire display
Erase field (* is one of the following)
Erase to end of field
Erase from field start
Erase entire field
Erase line (* is one of the following)
Erase to end of line
Erase from line start
Erase entire line
ESC [ * P
ESC [ * M
ESC [ * X
ESC [ * O
0
1
2
ESC [ * J
0
1
2
ESC [ * N
0
1
2
ESC [ * K
0
1
2
C-27
Host Command Summary
Insert * blank lines
Insert * space characters
ESC [ * L
ESC [ * @
GENERAL OPERATION
Lock shift G2
Lock shift G3
Reset to initial state
ANSI specified modes
ESC n
ESC o
ESC c
ESC [ *;...;* h
IRM insert mode
SRM send/rec mode (HFT)
TSM tab stop mode (HFT)
LNM linefeed/newline
XTERM private modes
4
12
18
20
ESC [ ? *;...;* h
132/80 column mode
Scrollbar hide/show
Save scroll text on/off
Margin bell on/off
Reverse wraparound on/off
Screen buffer alternate/normal
Status line reverse/normal
Scroll mode page/normal
Other private modes
40
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
ESC [ ? *;...;* h
Normal/application cursor (VT100)
80/132 columns
Reverse/normal video
Origin/normal
Autowrap on/off
Autorept on/off
CNM CR-NL (HFT)
Reset mode, ANSI specified modes
Reset mode, other private modes & XTERM private modes
Restore mode, other private modes & XTERM private modes
Save mode, other private modes & XTERM private modes
Ignore everything between ESC - P and ESC \.
AIXTerm works as normal after ESC \
1
3
5
6
7
8
21
ESC [ * ;...; *
ESC [ ? *;...;* l
ESC [ ? *;...;* r
ESC [ ? *;...;* s
ESC - P ... ESC \
KEYBOARD & MOUSE
Select numeric keypad application mode (VT100)
Select numeric keypad normal mode (VT100)
Disable manual input (HFT)
Enable manual input (HFT)
ESC =
ESC >
ESC `
ESC b
REPORTS
Device status report (* is one of the following)
Response from VT100: ready
Command from host: please report status
Command from host: report active position
Keyboard status information
C-28
ESC [ * n
0
5
6
ESC [ * p
Host Command Summary
PF key report (HFT)
Report cursor position
Report terminal identity (host to VT100)
Report terminal identity (host to VT100)
Terminal response (VT100 to host)
ESC [ * q
ESC [ *l ; *c R
ESC [ c
ESC [ 0 c
ESC [ ? 1 ; 2 c
C-29
Host Command Summary
AT&T 4410 Emulation
CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES
Normal
Dimmed
Underline
Flashing
Reverse video
Blanked
ESC [ 0 m
ESC [ 2 m
ESC [ 4 m
ESC [ 5 m
ESC [ 7 m
ESC [ 8 m
CURSOR
Cursor down one line or * lines
Cursor left one column or * columns
Cursor right one column or * columns
Cursor up one line or * lines
Cursor to line 1, column 1
Origin mode
Origin mode reset
Move cursor to line (*l) and column (*c)
Move cursor to line (*l) and column (*c)
Save cursor location
Restore cursor location
Reverse index
ESC [ B or ESC [ * B
ESC [ D or ESC [ * D
ESC [ C or ESC [ * C
ESC [ A or ESC [ * A
ESC [ H
ESC [ ? 6 h
ESC [ ? 6 l
ESC [ *l ; *c f
ESC [ *l ; *c H
ESC 7
ESC 8
ESC M
DISPLAY
132 column display
80 column display
Clear all
Clear to cursor
Clear to end of display
Clear to end of line
Clear line to cursor
Clear entire line
Download label entry (*1 = 1-8, *2 = no. of chrs in def.)
Reverse video screen
Reverse video screen reset
Scrolling region
ESC [ ? 3 h
ESC [ ? 3 l
ESC [ 2 J
ESC [ 1 J
ESC [ J
ESC [ K or ESC [ 0 K
ESC [ 1 K
ESC [ 2 K
ESC [ *1 ; *2 q label definition
ESC [ 5 ? h
ESC [ 5 ? l
ESC [ *1 ; *2 r
EDITING
Delete character or * characters
Delete line or * lines
Insert character or * characters
Insert line or * lines
ESC [ P or ESC [ * P
ESC [ M or ESC [ * M
ESC [ @ or ESC [ * @
ESC [ L or ESC [ * L
GENERAL OPERATION
Reset terminal
Report status
Test passed
C-30
ESC c
ESC [ 5 n
ESC [ 0 n
Host Command Summary
BQ 3107 Emulation
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Blank area rendition
Blink area rendition
Select graphic rendition
Select G0, national or ASCII character set
Select G1 graphic symbols character set
Select G2 accented characters and special symbols set
~
^
ESC [ * ; * ; * m
SI
SO
ESC E
CURSOR
Cursor addressing (1 to 80 = SP to g
Cursor position is end of next transmitted text
Cursor position is start of next transmitted text
Cursor On (* = 0) or Off (* = 1)
Move cursor to left margin of current line
Move cursor one column left
Move cursor one column right
Move cursor to begining of partition or field
Move cursor down one line
Move cursor up one line
Move cursor to next tab stop
Set tab stop
Cancel tab stop
DC3 *line *column
ESC U
ESC T
ESC [ * r
CR
BS
DC2
DC4
LF
DC1
HT
ESC 1
ESC 2
ERASE
Active partition erasure
Erase in field (0 = from cursor, 1 = to cursor, 2 = all)
Erase in line (0 = from cursor, 1 = to cursor, 2 = all)
Erase in partition (0 = from cursor, 1 = to cursor, 2 = all)
FF
ESC [ * N
ESC [ * K
ESC [ * J
FIELDS
Start of a fixed field
Start of a variable field
Repeat fields
FS
GS *
RS X
GENERAL
Buffer character repetition (* = @ to DEL)
Define area qualification
Format mode
Normal mode
Message waiting
Set mode (? = SDP mode, ? < extended mode)
Reset mode (? = VIP mode, ? < 94 character mode)
Reset both partitions
Select current partition (0 = partition 0, 1 = partition 1)
Warning (bell)
US *
ESC [ * o
ESC M
ESC N
ESC R
ESC [ ? = ; ? < ; ? 0 h
ESC [ ? = ; ? < ; ? 0 l
ESC c
ESC [ * v
BEL
C-31
Host Command Summary
DG 410/412 Emulation
DG Mode
In the following command sequences, <n> represents a 1-byte argument, <nn>
represents a 2-byte argument, and <nnn> represents a 3-byte argument. Bytes are
entered as ASCII characters. Only the four least significant bits are used in each byte.
Commands that are D100/200 compatible are indicated by an ◆.
CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES
Change attributes (<count><on><off>)
◆ Blink enable
◆ Blink disable
◆ Blink on
◆ Blink off
◆ Dim on
◆ Dim off
Protect enable
Protect disable
Protect on
Protect off
◆ Reverse video on
◆ Reverse video off
◆ Underscore on
◆ Underscore off
RS F N <nnn><n><n>
ETX
EOT
SO
SI
FS
GS
RS F V
RS F W
RS F L
RS F M
RS D or SYN
RS E or STX
DC4
NAK
CURSOR
◆ Carriage return
◆ Cursor left
◆ Cursor right
◆ Cursor down
◆ Cursor up
◆ New line
Read screen address
Write screen address (<column><row>)
◆ Read window address
◆ Write window address
Screen home
◆ Window home
Set cursor type
CR
EM
CAN
SUB
ETB
LF
RS F b
RS F P <nn><nn>
ENQ
DLE *column *row
RS F G
BS
RS F Q <nn>
DISPLAY
◆ Roll enable
◆ Roll disable
C-32
DC2
DC3
Host Command Summary
Scroll down
Scroll up
Scroll left
Scroll right
Select compressed spacing
Select normal spacing
Set margins
Set alternate margins
Set scroll rate
Set windows (<rows><0 = 81 cols, 1 = 135 cols>)
Show columns
Horizontal scroll enable
Horizontal scroll disable
Restore normal margins
RS I
RS H
RS F C <n>
RS F D <n>
RS F K
RS F J
RS F X <nn><nn>
RS F Y <nn><nn><nn>
RS F T <n>
RS F B <nn><n>...
RS F <nn><nn>
RS F ^
RS F ]
RS F Z
EDITING
Delete character
Delete line
Delete line between margins
◆ Erase window
Erase screen
Erase unprotected
◆ Erase to end of line
Insert character
Insert line
Insert line between margins
RS K
RS F I
RS F \
FF
RS F E
RS F F
VT
RS J
RS F H
RS F [
GENERAL
◆ Bell
Read horizontal scroll offset
◆ Read model ID
Reset
Select ANSI mode
Select 7/8 bit operation (0 = 7-bit, 1 = 8-bit)
Select character set
Set keyboard language (0 = match native language,
1 = US ASCII & DG International)
Shift in
Shift out
BEL
RS F O
RS C
RS F A
RS F @
RS F U *bit
RS F S <nn>
RS F f *
RS N
RS O
PRINTING
Form bit dump
Window bit dump
◆ Print form
Print pass through on
Print pass through off
◆ Print window
RS F ? 6
RS F ? 5
SOH
RS F `
RS F a
DC1
C-33
Host Command Summary
DG 410/412 ANSI Standard Mode
CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES
Change attributes
CSI *count ; *on ; *off q
CURSOR
Backspace
Carriage return
Cursor left * columns
Cursor right * columns
Cursor down * lines
Cursor up * lines
Cursor position (line ; column)
Cursor position (line ; column)
Form feed
Index
Insert * space characters
Insert * lines
New line
Next line
BS
CR
CSI * D
CSI * C
CSI * B
CSI * A
CSI *l ; *c f
CSI *l ; *c H
FF
ESC D
CSI * @
CSI * L
LF
ESC E
EDITING
Delete * character(s) from cursor
Delete * lines from & including cursor line
End protected area
Erase line portion (0 = from cursor, 1 = to, 2 = all)
Erase window portion (0 = from cursor, 1 = to, 2 = all)
CSI * P
CSI * M
ESC w
CSI * K
CSI * J
GENERAL
Bell
Device status report
BEL
CSI 6 n
PRINTING
Media copy
C-34
CSI i
Host Command Summary
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES
Assign * attribute(s) to following characters
Assign invisible & * attribute(s) to following chars.
Dim
Flashing
Inverse video
Invisible
Underline
Dim & Flash
Dim & Inverse
Dim & Underline
Dim, Flash & Inverse
H
A
B
S
D
I
J
L
K
Dim, Flash & Underline
Dim, Under & Inverse
Dim, Flash, Und. & Inv.
Flash & Inverse
Flash & Underline
Flash, Inverse & Under
Inverse & Underline
Attributes off
ESC & d *
ESC & d s *
M
N
O
C
E
G
F
@
CHARACTER SETS
Select ROMAN 8 (normal) character set
Select Line Drawing character set
SI
SO
CURSOR
Clear all tab stops
Clear tab stop at current cursor position
Cursor relative addressing (column)
Cursor relative addressing (column/line)
Cursor relative addressing (line)
Cursor relative addressing (line/column)
Cursor sensing absolute
Cursor sensing relative
End of line wrap inhibited
End of line wrap enabled
Memory absolute addressing (column)
Memory absolute addressing (column/line)
Memory absolute addressing (line)
Memory absolute addressing (line/column)
Move cursor home down
Move cursor home up
Move cursor one column left
Move cursor one column right
Move cursor one line down
Move cursor one line up
Move cursor to left margin
Move cursor to next tab stop
Move cursor to previous tab stop
Screen relative addressing (column)
Screen relative addressing (column/line)
Screen relative addressing (line)
Screen relative addressing (line/column)
Set tab stop at current cursor position
ESC 3
ESC 2
ESC & +/- * C
ESC & a +/- *c c +/- *l R
ESC & a +/- * R
ESC & a +/- *l r +/- *c C
ESC a
ESC `
ESC & s 1 C
ESC & s 0 C
ESC & a * C
ESC & a *c c *l R
ESC & a * R
ESC & a *l r *c C
ESC F
ESC H or ESC h
ESC D
ESC C
ESC B
ESC A
ESC G
ESC I (uppercase i)
ESC i
ESC & a * C
ESC & a *c c *l Y
ESC & a * Y
ESC & a *l y *c C
ESC 1
C-35
Host Command Summary
DISPLAY
80 column display
132 column display
Clear all margins
Display next page
Display previous page
Format mode off
Format mode on
Jump scroll enabled
Memory lock disabled
Memory lock enabled
Scroll down one line
Scroll up one line
Select invisible display
Select visible display
Set left margin
Set right margin
Smooth scroll enabled
Define colour pair
ESC & w 6 f 80 X
ESC & w 6 f 132 X
ESC 9
ESC U
ESC V
ESC X
ESC W
ESC & k 0 [
ESC m
ESC l
ESC T
ESC S
ESC & w 13 F
ESC & w 12 F
ESC 4
ESC 5
ESC & k 1 [
ESC & v *parameters
*parameters can be one or more of the following:
<0/1> m
<decimal> a
<decimal> b
<decimal> c
<decimal> x
<decimal> y
<decimal> z
<0 - 7> i
<0 - 7> s
<0 - 7> ^
RGB (0) or HSL (1) colour specification method
Red or Hue colour value for foreground
Green or Saturation colour value for foreground
Blue or Luminosity colour value for foreground
Red or Hue colour value for background
Green or Saturation colour value for background
Blue or Luminosity colour value for background
Colour pair # to be initialized
Colour pair # to be selected
Colour pair definition status
Assign colours to colour pair (* = decimal #) ESC & v * a * b * c * x * y * z <colour pair #> i
Select an alpha colour pair (* = 0 - 7)
ESC & v * S
EDITING
Clear display memory from cursor
Clear line or field from cursor
Delete character
Delete line
Insert character mode
Insert line
Modify all mode disabled
Modify all mode enabled
Replace character mode
Unprotected field end
Unprotected field start
C-36
ESC J
ESC K
ESC P
ESC M
ESC Q
ESC L
ESC & k 0 M
ESC & k 1 M
ESC R
ESC ]
ESC [
Host Command Summary
FUNCTION KEYS
Begin user key definition mode
Default definition for f1 key
Default definition for f2 key
Default definition for f3 key
Default definition for f4 key
Default definition for f5 key
Default definition for f6 key
Default definition for f7 key
Default definition for f8 key
Define f-key
Disable User System & Menu and label Modes
Enable User System & Menu and label Modes
Enable f-keys & remove labels and status line
Enable & display Modes labels
Enable & display user function key labels
End user key definition mode
Replace key labels with character string
Restore labels
ESC j
ESC p
ESC q
ESC r
ESC s
ESC t
ESC u
ESC v
ESC w
ESC & f *
ESC & j S
ESC & j R
ESC & j @
ESC & j A
ESC & j B
ESC k
ESC & j *n L *s
ESC & j C
GENERAL OPERATION
7 bits & existing parity
8 bits & no parity
Audible tone disabled
Audible tone enabled
Check parity no
Check parity yes
Configuration menus locked
Configuration menus unlocked
Data speed high
Data speed low
DC2 not inhibited
DC2 inhibited
Delay one second
Display functions mode disabled
Display functions mode enabled
Enter VT220 7-bit mode (25 line display, keypad F1 - F4
mapped to top left F1 - F4 keys, F5 - F12 as per VT220)
Hand shake not inhibited
Hand shake inhibited
Hard reset
Local echo disabled
Local echo enabled
Local mode disabled (only for user f-key)
Local mode enabled (only for user f-key)
Modem disconnect
Self test
Soft reset
ESC & k 0 I
ESC & k 1 I
ESC & k 0 D
ESC & k 1 D
ESC & s 0 Z
ESC & s 1 Z
ESC & q 1 L
ESC & q 0 L
ESC & s 1 X
ESC & s 0 X
ESC & s 0 H
ESC & s 1 H
ESC @
ESC Z
ESC Y
ESC & k 1 \
ESC & s 0 G
ESC & s 1 G
ESC E
ESC & k 0 L
ESC & k 1 L
ESC & k 1 R
ESC & k 0 R
ESC f
ESC z
ESC g
C-37
Host Command Summary
KEYBOARD
Auto keyboard lock off
Auto keyboard lock on
Auto line feed mode off
Auto line feed mode on
Caps lock off
Caps lock on
Caps mode off
Caps mode on
Function key codes local only
Function key codes transmitted to host
Lock keyboard
Space overwrite latch disabled
Space overwrite latch enabled
SPOW latch off
SPOW latch on
Unlock keyboard
ESC & k 0 K
ESC & k 1 K
ESC & k 0 A
ESC & k 1 A
ESC & k 0 C
ESC & k 1 C
ESC & k 0 P
ESC & k 1 P
ESC & s 0 A
ESC & s 1 A
ESC c
ESC & s 0 B
ESC & s 1 B
ESC & k 0 N
ESC & k 1 N
ESC b
LOCAL EDITING MODE
Data block for transmission is cursor line
Data block for transmission is page
Enter edit mode
Enter interactive mode
Transmit block of text to host
ESC & s 0 D
ESC & s 1 D
ESC & k 1 B
ESC & k 0 B
ESC d
PRINTING
Copy all to printer
Copy display memory to printer
Copy line to printer
Copy page to printer
Data transfer host to printer (* = 1-256)
Disable logging
Enable bottom logging
Enable top logging
Execute form feed
Execute * line feeds
Record mode on (* is optional)
Select external device
Transfer display escape sequences no
Transfer display escape sequences yes
ESC & p M or ESC & p 0 M
ESC 0
ESC & p B or ESC & p 0 B
ESC & p F or ESC & p 0 F
ESC & p * W
ESC & p 13 C
ESC & p 11 C
ESC & p 12 C
ESC & p 4 u 0 C
ESC & p 1 * 4 u 1 C
ESC & p * 20 C
ESC & p 4 D
ESC & s 0 N
ESC & s 1 N
REPORTS
Request cursor position report disabled
Request cursor position report enabled
Request external printer status report
Request primary terminal status report
Request secondary terminal status report
Request terminal identity report
Request application program name report
C-38
ESC & x 0 C
ESC & x 1 C
ESC & p 4 ^
ESC ^
ESC ~
ESC * s ^
ESC * s 12347 ^
Host Command Summary
IBM 3151 Emulation
CHARACTER SET SELECTION
Select G0
Select G1
Select character set G0
Select character set G1
SI
SO
ESC < *set
ESC > *set
CURSOR
Backspace
Carriage return, new line or LTA
Cursor down
Cursor left
Cursor right
Cursor up
Cursor home
Index
Insert cursor
Line feed
Line feed or new line
Line feed or erase input
Next line
Page down AID
Reverse index
Read cursor address
Set buffer address
Set cursor address
Reset buffer address mode
Tab
Back tab
Set column tab
Clear column tab
Clear all column tabs
BS
CR
ESC B
ESC D
ESC C
ESC A
ESC H
ESC SP M
ESC Z
VT
LF
FF
ESC M
ESC ! B
ESC ! M
ESC 5
ESC X *row *column
ESC Y *row *column
ESC SP Z
HT
ESC 2
ESC 0
ESC 1
ESC SP 1
DISPLAY
Clear all
Clear page
Create viewport
Disable default field attribute
Disable field attribute visible renditions
Disable host protect
Disable OIA divide line
Disable host protect
Disable OIA divide line
Disable partition separate line
Disable read unprotected field
Display machine status
Enable default field attribute
Enable field attribute visible renditions
ESC ! L
ESC L
ESC SP r *...*
ESC ' ;
ESC , ;
ESC & ;
ESC * ;
ESC & ;
ESC * ;
ESC + ;
ESC % ;
ESC # :
ESC ' :
ESC , :
C-39
Host Command Summary
Enable host protect
Enable OIA divide line
Enable read unprotected field
Host message write
Host message display
Set character attribute
Set field attribute
Set field attribute response
ESC & :
ESC * :
ESC % :
ESC = *message ESC =
ESC # ;
ESC 4 *attrib *operation
ESC 3 *attrib *attrib *operation
ESC 3 *attrib *attrib
Create 1 viewport 24 rows x 80 columns
Create 1 viewport 25 rows x 80 columns
Create 1 viewport 28 rows x 80 columns
Create 1 viewport 24 rows x 132 columns
Create 1 viewport 25 rows x 132 columns
Create 1 viewport 28 rows x 132 columns
Create 2 viewports in 80 column screen
Create 2 viewports in 132 column screen
Create 3 viewports in 80 column screen
Create 3 viewports in 132 column screen
ESC SP r ! ! SP 8 " P
ESC SP r ! ! SP 9 " P
ESC SP r ! ! SP " D
ESC SP r ! ! SP 8 $ D
ESC SP r ! ! SP 9 $ D
ESC SP r ! ! SP $ D
ESC SP r " ! SP *r1 " 0 " SP *r2 " P
ESC SP r " ! SP *r1 $ $ " SP *r2 $ D
ESC SP r # ! SP *r1 " 0 " SP *r2 " 0 # SP *r3 " P
ESC SP r # ! SP *r1 $ $ " SP *r2 $ $ # SP *r3 $ D
The ASCII character values of *r1, *r2 and *r3 are listed below. When creating two viewports,
*r1 + *r2 must be 24 or 25. When creating three viewports, *r1 + *r2 + *r3 must be 24 or 25.
Rows
ASCII
Rows
ASCII
Rows
ASCII
Rows
ASCII
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
8
9
10
11
12
13
(
)
*
+
,
-
14
15
16
17
18
19
.
/
0
1
2
3
20
21
22
23
24
25
4
5
6
7
8
9
Select active partition command/response (not model 11)
Select host partition command/response (not model 11)
* A = Viewport 1, B = Viewport 2, C = Viewport 3
ESC ! q *
ESC SP q *
Jump partition command/response (not model 11)
Enable partition separator line (not model 11)
Disable partition separator line (not model 11)
ESC " A
ESC + :
ESC + ;
EDITING
Delete character
Delete line
Erase to end of field/line
Erase to end of page
Erase input
Insert character
Insert line
ESC Q
ESC O
ESC I
ESC J
ESC K
ESC P *character
ESC N
GENERAL OPERATION
Bell
Cancel
Disable write Null
Enable write Null
Line turnaround character (if selected)
C-40
BEL
ESC S or CAN
ESC " ;
ESC " :
ETX, CR, EOT or DC3
Host Command Summary
Read status
Enter transparent mode (control characters displayed)
Exit transparent mode
Mandatory disconnect
Begin pass-through data stream
End pass-through data stream
Restart transmission (pacing)
Stop transmission (pacing)
Begin outbound trace
End outbound trace
Reset to initial state
Reset keyboard lock & keep MDT bit
Read control 1
Read control 2
Read control 3
Read control 4
Read control 5
Read control 6
Read control 7
Read model
Read model (extended)
Read terminal ID
Read all
Read line/send line
Read message/send message
Read page/send page
Write send mark
Set control 1
Set control 2
Set control 3
Set control 4
Set control 5
Set control 6
Set control 7
ESC 6
DLE STX
DLE ETX
DLE EOT
DLE DC2
DLE DC4
DC1 (XON)
DC3 (XOFF)
ESC SP :
ESC SP ;
ESC SP S
ESC ! S
ESC SP 7
ESC ! 7
ESC " 7
ESC # 7
ESC $ 7
ESC % 7
ESC & 7
ESC SP 6
ESC " 6
ESC ! 6
ESC # 8
ESC ! 8
ESC SP 8
ESC 8
ESC E
ESC SP 9 *mode1 *mode2 *op
ESC ! 9 *mode1 *mode2 *op
ESC " 9 *mode1 *mode2 *op
ESC # 9 *mode *operation
ESC $ 9 *m1 *m2 *m3 *m4 *op
ESC % 9 *m1 *m2 *m3 *m4 *op
ESC & 9 *m1 *m2 *m3 *op
KEYBOARD
Disable print key attention
Disable reset key attention
Enable print key attention
Enable reset key attention
Keyboard lock
Keyboard unlock
Load programmable function key
Set all default function keys
Set default function key
ESC ) ;
ESC ( ;
ESC ) :
ESC ( :
ESC :
ESC ;
ESC ! = *fn *fnx *ff *fp ESC =
ESC SP t
ESC t *key
PRINTING
Print line
Print message
Print screen
Print viewport
ESC U
ESC V
ESC SP W
ESC W
C-41
Host Command Summary
MDIS Prism-8 & Prism-9 Emulations
CHARACTER SET SELECTION
Assign G0 label to * character set
Assign G1 label to * character set
Assign G2 label to * character set
Assign G3 label to * character set
Assign G0 labelled set to 7 bit codes
Assign G1 labelled set to 7 bit codes
Assign G2 labelled set to 7 bit codes
Assign G3 labelled set to 7 bit codes
Assign G1 labelled set to 8 bit codes
Assign G2 labelled set to 8 bit codes
Assign G3 labelled set to 8 bit codes
Assign G1 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character
Assign G2 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character
Assign G3 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character
Load redefinable character set
ESC ( *
ESC ) *
ESC * * (second * is parameter)
ESC + *
SI
SO
ESC n
ESC o
ESC ~
ESC }
ESC |
ESC R
ESC N
ESC O
ESC P *b ; *c ; *e % q S1 ;....Sn ESC \
COMMUNICATIONS
Transmission on
Transmission off
Select 7-bit C1 code transmission
Select 8-bit C1 code transmission
XON
XOFF
ESC SP F
ESC SP G
CURSOR
Cursor off
Cursor on
Move cursor * lines up (default 1)
Move cursor * lines down (default 1)
Move cursor * columns right (default 1)
Move cursor * columns left (default 1)
Move cursor * lines down and to start of line (default 1)
Move cursor * lines up and to start of line (default 1)
Move cursor to specified line (*l) and column (*c) on page
Move cursor to specified line (*l) and column (*c) on page
Move cursor to absolute column number * position
Move cursor to absolute column number * position
Horizontal position relative
Move cursor * columns left (default 1)
Move cursor to absolute line number * position
Move cursor * lines down (default 1)
Move cursor * lines up (default 1)
Move cursor * columns right (default 1)
Line addressing relative to top line of page
Line addressing relative to scroll region
Make cursor invisible
Make cursor visible
Set tab stop at current cursor position
C-42
Hex E4
Hex E2
ESC [ * A
ESC [ * B
ESC [ * C
ESC [ * D
ESC [ * E
ESC [ * F
ESC [ *l ; *c ; H
ESC [ *l ; *c ; f
ESC [ * G
ESC [ * `
ESC [ * a
ESC [ * j
ESC [ * d
ESC [ * e
ESC [ * k
ESC [ * o
ESC [ < 6 l
ESC [ < 6 h
ESC [ < 4 1
ESC [ < 4 h
ESC H
Host Command Summary
Set tab stops at specified * column numbers
Clear tab stops (0 = at cursor position, 2 & 3 = all on page)
Set tab stop at current cursor position
Clear tab stops (2 = at cursor position, 4 & 5 = all on page)
Move cursor to next tab stop
Move cursor to next tab stop
Move cursor to previous tab stop
ESC [ *c ; *c ; .... *c SP N
ESC [ * g
ESC [ 0 W
ESC [ * W
HT
ESC [ * I
ESC [ * Z
DISPLAY
Status line off
Status line on
Hex E5
Hex E3
Assign * attribute(s) to following characters (default 0)
Attributes: Flashing
1
Bold
Underline
2
Protected
Inverse video
4
ESC [ * % {
8
32
Select graphic rendition
Attributes: Clear all
Bold
Underline
Flashing
Inverse video
ESC [ Pa;...Pa m
22
24
25
27
0
1
4
5
7
Normal intensity
Underline off
Flashing off
Inverse video off
Assign * line attributes to current line
Attributes: Single width, single height (default)
Double width
Double height & width top half
Double height & width bottom half
ESC [ * % |
0
1
2
3
No attributes
Bold attribute
Flashing attribute
Bold & Flashing attributes
Inverse attribute
Bold & Inverse attributes
Flashing & Inverse attributes
Bold, Flashing & Inverse attributes
Blank attribute
Bold & Blank attributes
Flashing & Blank attributes
Bold, Flashing & Blank attributes
Inverse & Blank attributes
Bold, Inverse & Blank attributes
Flashing, Inverse & Blank attributes
Bold, Flashing, Invers & Blank attributes
Underline attribute
Bold & Underline attributes
Flashing & Underline attributes
Bold, Flashing & Underline attributes
Inverse & Underline attributes
Bold, Inverse & Underline attributes
Flashing & Underline attributes
ETX SP
ETX A
ETX B
ETX C
ETX D
ETX E
ETX F
ETX G
ETX H
ETX I
ETX J
ETX K
ETX L
ETX M
ETX N
ETX O
ETX P
ETX Q
ETX R
ETX S
ETX T
ETX U
ETX V
C-43
Host Command Summary
Bold, Flashing, Inverse & Underline attributes
Blank & Underline attributes
Bold, Blank & Underline attributes
Flashing, Blank & Underline attributes
Bold, Flashing, Blank & Underline attributes
Inverse, Blank & Underline attributes
Bold, Inverse & Underline attributes
Underline attribute
Bold & Underline attributes
Flashing & Underline attributes
Bold, Flashing & Underline attributes
Inverse & Underline attributes
Bold, Inverse & Underline attributes
Flashing, Inverse & Underline attributes
Bold, Flashing, Inverse & Underline attributes
Blank & Underline attributes
Inverse, Blank & Underline attributes
Flashing, Inverse, Blank & Underline attributes
Flashing, Inverse, Blank & Underline attributes
ETX W
ETX X
ETX Y
ETX Z
ETX [
ETX \
ETX ]
ETX 0
ETX 1
ETX 2
ETX 3
ETX 4
ETX 5
ETX 6
ETX 7
ETX 8
ETX /
ETX ^
ETX _
EDITING
Insert * number of blank characters from cursor position
Delete * number of characters from cursor position
Insert * number of blank lines from cursor position
Delete * number of lines from cursor position
Replace character mode
Insert character mode
Blank * number of columns from cursor position
Erase in field (0 = from cursor, 1 = to cursor, 2 = all)
Erase in line (0 = from cursor, 1 = to cursor, 2 = all)
Erase in page (0 = from cursor, 1 = to cursor, 2 = all)
Enable erasure of unprotected characters only
Enable all characters to be erased, including protected
Erasing characters clears display attributes to default
Erasing characters retains display attributes
ESC [ * @
ESC [ * P
ESC [ * L
ESC [ * M
ESC [ 4 l
ESC [ 4 h
ESC [ * X
ESC [ * N
ESC [ * K
ESC [ * J
ESC [ 6 l
ESC [ 6 h
ESC [ < 5 l
ESC [ < 5 h
ENCODING DATA
Escape sequence introducer
Control sequence introducer
Device control string
String terminator
Cancel
Abort control sequence & display error
Set mode
Reset mode
ESC
ESC [
ESC P
ESC \
CAN
SUB
ESC [ *m ; *m ; ... *m h
ESC [ *m ; *m ; ... *m l
FORMATTING DATA
Move cursor to left margin of current line
Move cursor down one line
Move cursor down one line
Move cursor down one line
C-44
CR
LF
ESC D
VT
Host Command Summary
Move cursor to start of next line
Move cursor up one line
Move cursor to start of new page
Move cursor one column left
Repeat last displayable character * times (default 1)
ESC E
ESC M
FF
BS
ESC [ * b
KEYBOARD
Key presses generate codes which are sent to host
Key presses are ignored (except Break)
Define function key
Extended keypad mode reset
Extended keypad mode set
ESC [ 2 l
ESC [ 2 h
ESC P *k % p *n ESC \
ESC [ < 15 l
ESC [ < 15 h
PAGE MANIPULATION
Page layout definition
where *p = page number in range 1 - 8, default 1
*l = number of lines, default 24
*c = number of columns, default 80 or 132
*s = start of scroll area, default 1
*e = end of scroll area, default as *l
ESC [ *p ; *l ; *c ; *s ; *e % w
Display buffer & video format definition
ESC [ *p ; *c ; *f % x
where *p = number of pages, default 8 (80 col) or 4 (132 col)
*c = number of columns, default 80
*f = format options: 0 =single active page, 1 = multiple active page
Set scrolling area
ESC [ *s ; *e % v
where *s = starting line number, default 1
*e = ending line number, default is page length
80 column display mode
132 column display mode
Move active position to absolute page number
Move forward by * number of pages
Move backward by * number of pages
Save page state mode reset
Save page state mode set
Save current active page state
Restore last saved page state
Page display absolute
Display page number *
Move forward by * number of pages
Move backward by * number of pages
Scroll up * lines (forward)
Scroll down * lines (backward)
Active page display mode reset
Active page display mode set
Screen/scroll keys action mode reset
Screen/scroll keys action mode set
ESC [ 14 l
ESC [ 14 h
ESC [ * SP P
ESC [ * SP Q
ESC [ * SP R
ESC [ < 11 l
ESC [ < 11 h
ESC [ % y
ESC [ % z
ESC [ *p 5 p
ESC [ * % p
ESC [ * U
ESC [ * V
ESC [ * S
ESC [ * T
ESC [ < 7 l
ESC [ < 7 h
ESC [ < 13 l
ESC [ < 13 h
PRINTING
Printer output control
ESC [ < *o ; *s ; *e i
C-45
Host Command Summary
where
*o = output type as listed below, default 0
0 = print page, 1 = print partial page, 2 = hardcopy off
3 = hardcopy on, 4 = direct print off, 5 = direct print on
*s = starting line number, default start of scrolled region
*e = ending line number, default end of scrolled region
Media copy
ESC [ *o i
where *o = 0 = print page, 4 = direct print off, 5 = direct print on
REPORTS
Report on device configuration (* = 0 by default)
Give terminal configuration report
Give screen configuration report
Give printer configuration report
Give keyboard configuration report
ESC [ < * c
0
1
2
3
Device attributes (* = device type, 0)
ESC [ * c
Terminal configuration report
ESC [ < 10 ; *m ; *f ; *h ; *v c
where *m = model number (9 for 12090)
*f = features (1 = down-loadable charcter set,
2 = programmable function keys,
4 = software down-load capability
16 = field-read capability)
*h = hardware options
*v = version number
Screen configuration report
ESC [ < 11 ; *p ; *l ; *c ; *f c
where *p = number of (80 x 25) pages available
*l = maximum lines displayable on screen
*c = maximum columns displayable on screen
*f = features (1 = per field attribute capability,
2 = per character attribute capability,
4 = 80/132 screen width selectable)
Printer configuration report (* = printer type)
ESC [ < 12 ; * c
Keyboard configuration report
ESC [ < 13 ; *l ; *n c
where *l = keyboard layout (1 = standard, 2 = data entry)
*n = nationality (1 = UK, 2 = USA, 3 = German, 4 = French,
5 = Swiss (Ger), 6 = Swiss (Fre), 7 = French Canadian)
STATUS REPORTING
Report on device status (* = device identifier)
ESC [ < * n
Device status report (5 = device status, 6 = cursor position)
ESC [ * n
Terminal status report
ESC [ < 10 ; *e ; *g n
where *e = emulation mode (1 = ANSI 7-bit,
2 = ANSI 8-bit, 3 = 12080 mode)
*g = general status (1 = 7-bit comms link,
2 = flow control enabled, 4 = foreground executive active)
Screen status report
where *p = number of pages currently defined
*l = number of lines displayed (24 or 25)
C-46
ESC [ < 11 ; *p ; *l ; *c ; *g n
Host Command Summary
*c = number of columns displayed (80 or 132)
*g = general status (1 = multiple active page format,
2 = per-character attributes)
Printer status report (*g = general status, *b = buffer left)
Keyboard status report (*m = mode, *g = general status)
Cursor position report (*l = line, *c = column)
ESC [ < 12 ; *g ; *b n
ESC [ < 13 ; *m ; *g n
ESC [ < *l ; *c R
SYSTEM MESSAGES
Write data into system message area starting at column *
System messages not visible
System messages displayed on last screen line
ESC [ * % }
ESC [ < 8 l
ESC [ < 8 h
TERMINAL CONTROL
Soft reset
Reset to initial state
ANSI terminal emulation mode
Model 12080 terminal emulation mode
Sound alarm
ESC [ & p
ESC c
ESC [ < 12 l
ESC [ < 12 h
BEL
MDIS Prism-12 Emulation
When teemtalk is running the Prism-12 emulation, the following commands will be
executed in addition those listed previously for Prism-8 and Prism-9.
Data stream filler character
Cursor home
Function key control
* = Generate user defined codes
Do not generate any codes
Generate standard codes
Generate short codes (hex 80 - B3)
Set video attributes for next display field
Cursor forward 1 character position
Sound bell
Backspace
Line feed
Cursor vertical position
Form feed
Carriage return
Select Multinational character set (in Multinational mode)
Select ASCII character set (in Multinational mode)
Horizontal position
Cursor back
Cursor up
Escape sequence introducer
Special single shift
Space compression codes
Reserved
NUL
SOH
STX *
90
91
92
93
ETX *
ACK
BEL
BS
LF
VT *
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE *
NAK
SUB
ESC
GS *
Hex A0 to Hex BF
Hex E0
C-47
Host Command Summary
Set S-mode
Cursor on
Start of system message
Cursor off
End of system message
Give terminal status
Set screen format
Display system message
Display user line 25
Select active screen
Set R-mode
Set video prior conditions
Screen move
Filler
Character fill
Page back
Page forward
Scroll back
Scroll forward
Run diagnostics
Erase to end of page
Erase to end of line
DCS sequence
Printer on
Printer off
Print screen
CSI sequence introducer
C-48
Hex E1
Hex E2
Hex E3 *
Hex E4
Hex E5
Hex E6
Hex E7 *
Hex E8
Hex E9
Hex EA *
Hex EB
Hex EC *
Hex ED *
Hex EE
Hex EF *
Hex F5
Hex F6
Hex F7
Hex F8
ESC D
ESC J
ESC K
ESC P
ESC R
ESC T
ESC U
ESC [
Host Command Summary
PT250 Emulation
AREA & LOGICAL ATTRIBUTES
Assert defined logical attributes
Assert defined logical attributes disabled
Clear (reset) selected areas
Define area qualification
* = All printing characters
Numeric characters
Alphabetic characters
Right-justify in area
Protected; no input accepted (default)
Must enter the area
Must fill the whole area
Set modified data tag
Define logical attributes
* = All printing characters
Numeric characters
Alphabetic characters
Right-justify in area
Protected; no input accepted (default)
Must enter the area
Must fill the whole area
Set modified data tag
Field entry check
Logical attributes start
Logical attributes end
Protected area start
Protected area end
Reset modified tags
Selected area start
Selected area end
ESC [ > 3 h
ESC [ > 3 l
ESC $ K
ESC [ * o
2
3
4
5
>0
>1
>2
>3
ESC [ * v
2
3
4
5
>0
>1
>2
>3
ESC $ C
ESC $ L
ESC $ M
ESC V
ESC W
ESC $ J
ESC F
ESC G
CHARACTER SET SELECTION
Set G0 alternate character set
Set G0 ASCII character set
Set G1 alternate character set
Set G1 ASCII character set
ESC $ 2
ESC $ 0
ESC $ 3
ESC $ 1
COMPRESSED COMMANDS
Compressed cursor position (*l = line, *c = column)
Compressed logical area (* = logical attribute)
Compressed logical attributes (*l = line, *c = column
*a = logical attributes *n = number of characters)
Compressed visual area (* = visual attributes)
Compressed visual attributes (* = visual attributes)
ESC 0 *l *c
ESC 3 *
ESC 1 *l *c *a *n
ESC 4 *
ESC 2 *
C-49
Host Command Summary
CURSOR
Autowrap disabled
Autowrap enabled
Carriage return = carriage return only
Carriage return = carriage return & line feed
Cursor invisible
Cursor movement keys immediate effect
Cursor movement keys require host permission
Cursor position report (*l = line, *c = column)
Cursor tabulation control
* = Set tab at cursor position
Clear tab at cursor postion
Clear all tab stops
Cursor visible
Home cursor absolute
Home cursor relative
Index (cursor down to next unlocked line)
Line feed = line feed only
Line feed = line feed & carriage return
Move cursor down to next unlocked line 1st column
Move cursor down * lines
Move cursor down * unlocked lines to 1st column
Move cursor left * columns
Move cursor right * columns
Move cursor to column * (absolute)
Move cursor to line * (absolute)
Move cursor to absolute line (*l) & column (*c)
Move cursor to relative line (*l) & column (*c)
Move cursor up * unlocked lines
Move cursor up * unlocked lines to 1st column
Restore cursor & attributes
Reverse index (cursor up to next unlocked line)
Save cursor & attributes
Set tab stop at current cursor position
Tab cursor backward * tab stops
Tab cursor forward * tab stops
ESC [ > 9 h
ESC [ > 9 l
ESC [ > 1 l
ESC [ > 1 h
ESC $ S
ESC [ > 13 l
ESC [ > 13 h
ESC [ *l ; *c R
ESC [ * W
0
2
5
ESC $ R
ESC $ B
ESC $ A
ESC D
ESC [ 20 h
ESC [ 20 l
ESC E
ESC [ * B
ESC [ * E
ESC [ * D
ESC [ * C
ESC [ * G
ESC [ * d
ESC [ *l ; *c H
ESC [ *l ; *c f
ESC [ * A
ESC [ * F
ESC $ Q
ESC M
ESC $ O
ESC H
ESC [ * Z
ESC [ * I
DISPLAY
Clear display memory (except locked lines)
Display size
* = 80 columns by 24 lines
80 columns by 48 lines (2 pages)
132 columns by 27 lines
80 columns by 25 lines
Display error message (* = string)
Display invisible
Display memory 24 lines (1 page)
Display memory 48 lines (2 pages)
Display status line
C-50
ESC ?
ESC [ * N
1
2
3
4
ESC : * ESC \
ESC $ E
ESC [ > 11 l
ESC [ > 11 h
ESC $ T
Host Command Summary
Display system line (data on line preserved)
Display system line (blank)
Display visible
Jump scroll enabled
Lock lines (*l = screen line number to begin, *n = # of lines)
Next page (* = 1 page one, 2 page two)
Page down
Page up
Previous page (* = 1 page one, 2 page two)
Repeat previous character * times
Screen wrap mode enabled
Screen wrap mode disabled
Scroll automatically
Scroll manually only
Scroll unlocked lines down * lines
Scroll unlocked lines up * lines
Smooth scroll enabled
Unlock lines (*l = screen line # to begin, *n = # of lines)
ESC $ U
ESC $ V
ESC $ P
ESC [ > 5 l
ESC [ *l ; *n u
ESC [ * U
ESC $ b
ESC $ a
ESC [ * V
ESC [ * b
ESC [ > 8 h
ESC [ > 8 l
ESC $ W
ESC $ X
ESC [ * T
ESC [ * S
ESC [ > 5 h
ESC [ *l ; *n y
EDITING
Delete * characters from cursor position right
Delete * lines from cursor position down
Editing extent mode
* = Entire display
Line only
Area only
Enable all characters to be erased
Enable erasure of unprotected characters only
Enter character mode
Enter edit (block) mode
Erase * characters & substitute with pad characters
Erase in area & substitute with pad characters
* = Erase to end of area, line, or display
Erase from start of area, line, or display
Erase entire area, line, or display
Erase in display & substitute with pad characters
* = Erase to end of display
Erase from start of display
Erase entire display
Erase in line & substitute with pad characters
* = Erase to end of line
Erase from start of line
Erase entire line
Insert * blank lines
Insert * space or null characters
Insert mode disabled (replace mode selected)
Insert mode enabled
Pad character is null
Pad character is space
ESC [ * P
ESC [ * M
ESC [ * Q
0
1
2
ESC [ 6 h
ESC [ 6 l
ESC [ > 2 l
ESC [ > 2 h
ESC [ * X
ESC [ * O
0
1
2
ESC [ * J
0
1
2
ESC [ * K
0
1
2
ESC [ * L
ESC [ * @
ESC [ 4 l
ESC [ 4 h
ESC [ > 7 l
ESC [ > 7 h
C-51
Host Command Summary
Read cursor character
Read cursor character normal mode
Read cursor character erase mode
ESC ;
ESC [ > 23 l
ESC [ > 23 h
GENERAL OPERATION
Action all control characters except CR & HT
Action all control characters including CR & HT
DOS merge mode disabled
DOS merge mode enabled
Host notification mode disabled
Host notification mode enabled
Local echo mode on
Local echo mode off
Reset to initial state
Tab characters separate fields enabled
Tab characters separate fields disabled
ESC [ > 14 h
ESC [ > 14 l
ESC [ > 25 l
ESC [ > 25 h
ESC [ > 16 l
ESC [ > 16 h
ESC [ 12 l
ESC [ 12 h
ESC c
ESC [ > 17 h
ESC [ > 17 l
KEYBOARD
Application program command
Menu
Help
Shift + Help
Ctrl + Help
ESC _ * ESC \
0
1
2
3
Ctrl + Shift + Help
Shift + Menu
Ctrl + Menu
Ctrl + Shift + Menu
Cursor movement keys immediate effect
Cursor movement keys require host permission
E2 mode enabled (Enter = 4 ESC sequences)
E2 mode disabled (Enter functions as normal)
Escape key disabled
Escape key enabled
Flow control codes from kbd not sent immediately
Flow control codes from keyboard sent immediately
Function keys (F#, PF#, PA#) terminated with CR
Function keys not terminated with CR
Hard keyboard lock disabled
Hard keyboard lock enabled
Load keyboard table (*d = data, *c = checksum)
Numeric keypad application mode
Numeric keypad numeric mode
Print screen key local function
Print screen key normal function
Single shift three (* = key identifier)
Single shift two (* = key identifier)
Soft keyboard lock enabled
Soft keyboard lock disabled
Soft lock keyboard on illegal command enabled
Soft lock keyboard on illegal command disabled
C-52
4
5
6
7
ESC [ > 13 l
ESC [ > 13 h
ESC [ > 21 h
ESC [ > 21 l
ESC $ H
ESC $ I
ESC [ > 15 h
ESC [ > 15 l
ESC [ > 18 h
ESC [ > 18 l
ESC '
ESC b
ESC < *d *c ESC \
ESC [ > 10 h
ESC [ > 10 l
ESC [ > 24 h
ESC [ > 24 l
ESC 0 *
ESC N *
ESC $ F
ESC $ G
ESC [ > 19 h
ESC [ > 19 l
Host Command Summary
LOCAL EDITING
Data block is cursor line
Data block is page(s) (depends on display memory)
Dump block data
Enter character mode
Enter edit (block) mode
Modified unprotected areas only transmitted
Modified & unmodified unprotected areas transmitted
Page dump waits for host request
Transmission waits for host request
Transmit block data (excluding locked lines)
Transmit selected areas
Transmit unprotected areas (depends on modified mode)
ESC [ > 4 h
ESC [ > 4 l
ESC 6
ESC [ > 2 l
ESC [ > 2 h
ESC [ > 6 h
ESC [ > 6 l
ESC =
ESC S
ESC 5
ESC [ 17 l
ESC [ 17 h
PRINTING
Auto print off
Auto print on (data not displayed)
Initiate page dump
Initiate screen transfer
Print & display received host data
Print screen
Print screen qualified areas
ESC [ 4 i
ESC [ 5 i
ESC [ > 2 i
ESC [ > 1 i
ESC [ > 3 i
ESC [ 0 i
ESC [ > 0 i
REPORTS
Device control string (* = string)
Display revision
Report potentially destructive action to host
* = Reset to original state notification
Clear screen notification
Load keyboard table command failed
Load keyboard table command successful
Report terminal identity
Report terminal identity
Report terminal status
ESC P * ESC \
ESC $ Z
ESC ] * ESC \
0
2
3
4
ESC [ c
ESC [ 0 c
ESC [ * n
* = Ready
Report status
Report cursor position
0
5
6
VISUAL ATTRIBUTES
Change visual attributes of area
* = Active position to end of area
Start of area to active position
Entire area
Change visual attributes of character
Change visual attributes of display
ESC [ * p
0
1
2
ESC [ * q
ESC [ * r
* = Active position to end of display 0
Start of display to active position 1
Entire display
2
C-53
Host Command Summary
Change visual attributes of line
ESC [ * t
* = Active position to end of line
Start of line to active position
Entire line
Select graphic rendition
Normal video
Dimmed
Underline
Flashing
Inverse video
Visual attributes locked
Visual attributes unlocked
C-54
0
1
2
ESC [ * m
0
2
4
5
7
Strike-through
Invisible
Line drawing graphics
Block drawing graphics
>1
>2
>3
>4
ESC [ > 12 h
ESC [ > 12 l
Host Command Summary
ReGIS Emulation
MODE SELECTION
Exit to VT100/VT200 mode
ESC \
MOUSE BUTTON PROGRAMMING
Program a mouse button (*c = clear, *b = button,
*p = press code, *r = release code)
ESC P *c $ w *b/*p/*r ESC \
SIXEL GRAPHICS
Direct sixels to host
ESC [ ? 2 i
Direct sixels to printer
ESC [ ? 0 i or ESC [ ? 1 i
Transmit sixel data (*p = pixel shape,
ESC P *p ; *b ; *h ; q *..* ESC \
*b = backgrnd colour *h = horiz. spacing, *..* = sixel data)
COMMAND LEVEL INPUT SELECTION
Select command level input
;
COMMAND SET STORING/INVOKING
Clear all stored command sets
Clear stored command set
Invoke command set
Store command set
@.
@: character @;
@ character
@: character set definition @;
CURVE DRAWING
Draw arc from specified start position
Draw arc with specified centre position
Draw circle with specified centre
Draw circle specified circum. point
Draw closed interpolated curve intersecting current & specified positions
Draw closed interpolated curve intersecting current &
specified positions, closed with a straight line
Draw open interpolated curve
Draw open interpolated curve intersecting current & all specified positions
Set temporary writing controls effective only for the
command, using 'W' Writing Control cmd & options
C(A deg of drawing ) start posn
C(A deg of drawing C) centre posn
C(C) centre position
C circumference point
C(B) positions (E)
C(B)[] positions [](E)
C(S) positions (E)
C(S)[] positions [](E)
C options (W( sub-opts )) opts
FILLING SHAPES
Define curved boundary shape for filling
using 'C' Curve Drawing com. & options
Define straight boundary shape for filling
using 'V' Draw Vector command & options
Set cursor position using 'P' command & options
Set temporary writing controls effective only for the
command using 'W' Writing Control cmd & options
F(C sub-options )
F(V sub-options )
F(P( sub-options ))
F(W( sub-options ) options)
C-55
Host Command Summary
LOADING CHARACTER SETS
Assign name to set currently selected for loading
Select set for loading & assign name
Select specified character set for loading
Specify character form in hex codes &
ASCII reference character
L(A ' set name ')
L(A set number ' set name ')
L(A set number )
L' ascii char ' hex codes
POSITION SELECTION
Select active position & move cursor to it
Specify position to move to via a PCV
using PCV active only for current command
Specify series of positions to move to. Postcommand active position = last specified position
Specify series of positions to move to. Post-command
active position = pre-command active position
Specify writing with first bit of pattern
P[ coordinates ]
P(W(M pcm )) pcv
P(S) positions & options (E)
P(B) positions & options (E)
P[]
REQUESTING REPORTS
Request report of active position
Request report of command set stored
for specified character
Request report of last detected error
Request report of name assigned to char.
set currently selected for loading
Request report of total & remaining space
available for storage of command sets
Select GIN mode
R(P)
R(M( character ))
R(E)
R(L)
R(M(=))
R(P(I)
SCREEN SETTING
Select display addresing range
Scroll from specified coordinates
Scroll from specified position
Define hardcopy region
Specify printed image offset
Specify output map location lightness
value (monochrome monitor)
Specify output map location RGB character
Specify output map location HLS colour val.
Select specifed output map location
colour for background
Select output map location colour approx.
specified RGB character for background
Select output map location colour approx.
specified HLS values for background
Erase screen to current background
Erase screen to specified background
Specify time delay before command
Control cursor display
Set temporary writing controls
C-56
S(A[ coords ][ coords ]
S[ coordinates ]
S(W(M pcm )) pcv
S(H positions )
S(H( positions )
S(M location (lightness ))
S(M location ( rgb character ))
S(M location ( hls values ))
S(I location )
S(I( rgb character ))
S(I( hls values ))
S(E)
S(I location ,E)
S(T time )
S(C control value )
S(W( sub-options ))
Host Command Summary
TEXT DISPLAY
Select 1 of 17 standard sets of char. cell,
character matrix & char. cell spacing
Select character cell size
Select character cell & matrix height multiplier
Select character cell spacing
Select character matrix size
Select character slant
Select character string & orientation
Select character string orientation
Select font
Select subscript/superscript/overstrike
Select width & height multipliers for
standard set 1 character matrix
Set temporary writing controls
Set temporary text controls
Specify text
T(S standard set )
T(S[ cell width , cell height ])
T(H cell & matrix height mult )
T[ relative position ]
T(U[ matrix width , height ])
T(I tilt )
T(D string or S set D char or )
T(D orientation S set )
T(A font )
T pcv
T(M[ width mult , height mult ])
T(W sub-options ))
T(B) options (E)
T' text'
VECTOR DRAWING
Draw point
Draw vector to specified coordinates
Draw vector to specified PCV
Draw closed vector sequence
Draw open vector sequence
Set temporary writing controls
V[]
V [ coordinates ]
V pcv
V(B) positions & options (E)
V(S) positions & options (E)
V(W( sub-options ))
WRITING CONTROL
Character shading
Define writing pattern
Define writing pattern & set multiplier
Pattern reversal control
Pixel memory bit plane selection
Select comp. writing with plane 0 enabled
Select comp. writing with plane 1 enabled
Select comp. writing both planes enabled
Select comp. writing for current write plane selection
Select erase writing mode
Select output map location colour approx.
specified HLS values for foreground
Select output map location colour approx.
specified RGB character for foreground
Select overlay writing mode
Select replace writing mode
Select specified output map location foreground colour
Select standard writing pattern
Select standard writing pattern & multiplier
Set pixel change multiplier (PCM)
Shading control
Shading horizontal limit selection
Shading vertical limit selection
W(S' chading character ')
W(P binary pattern )
W(P pattern def (M multiplier ))
W(N pattern control value )
W(F plane selection value )
W(F1,C)
W(F2,C)
W(F3,C)
W(C)
W(E)
W(I( hls values ))
W(I( rgb character))
W(V)
W(R)
W(I location )
W(P standard pattern number )
W(P std pattern (M multiplier ))
W(M multiplier )
W(S( shading control value ))
W(S(X)[ x coordinate ])
W(S([, y coordinate ]))
C-57
Host Command Summary
SCO Console Emulation
CONTROLLING TERMINAL PROCESSING
Sound audible tone
Select iBCSe2 compliance
Deselect iBCSe2 compliance
Save cursor position
Restore cursor position
BEL
ESC [ = 2 L
ESC [ = 3 L
ESC 7
ESC 8
KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS
Disable keyboard input
Enable keyboard input
Program function keys
ASCII
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
ESC [ 2 h
ESC [ 2 l
ESC Q *key ' *data '
105-Key Enhanced
ANSI
PC-Style
*key
Unshifted
*key
Shifted
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
Help
Do
F17
F18
F19
F20
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
`
a
b
c
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
d
e
f
g
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
*data = data string of up to 29 characters
' = a string delimiter (any character except contained in string)
COLOUR
Set foreground & background colour
*fg and *bg are integers as listed below:
C-58
Dull
Colour
Bold
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Black
Blue
Green
Cyan
Red
Magenta
Yellow
White
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ESC [ 2 ; *fg ; *bg m
Host Command Summary
Set inverse & foreground & background colour (* as above)
Set normal foreground colour (* = integer as above)
Set normal background colour (* = integer as above)
Set reverse foreground colour (* = integer as above)
Set reverse background colour (* = integer as above)
Set graphic foreground colour (* = integer as above)
Set graphic background colour (* = integer as above)
Request current colour attribute (* = integer as above)
ESC [ 7 ; *fg ; *bg ; m
ESC [ = * F
ESC [ = * G
ESC [ = * H
ESC [ = * I
ESC [ = * J
ESC [ = * K
ESC [ = * M
CONTROLLING THE SCREEN DISPLAY
Assign * attribute(s) to following characters
Default attributes
Bold on
Underline on
Flashing on
Inverse video on
Blank
ESC [ * m
0
1
4
5
7
8
Fill regions with attribute (* = integer as below)
*= 0
1
Fill with current attribute
Fill with normal attribute
2
3
ESC [ = * L
Select iBCSe2 compliance
Deselect iBCSe2 compliance
Select page (* = 1 - 6)
Clear page
Scroll display up * lines, insert blank lines
Scroll display down * lines, insert blank lines
Access bank 1 & 2 characters using decimal values
Clear tab stops (0 = cursor position, 3 = all)
ESC [ * z
FF
ESC [ * S
ESC [ * T
ESC [ = * g
ESC [ * g
(* = 0 - 255)
CURSOR
Cursor on
Cursor off
Move cursor to specified column (* = integer)
Move cursor up * lines
Move cursor down * lines
Move cursor right * columns
Move cursor left * columns
Move cursor to specified line (* = integer)
Move cursor to line (*l) column (*c)
Move cursor to line (*l) column (*c)
Move cursor down 1 line & to column 1
Move cursor to start of line
Move cursor down 1 line in current column
Move cursor up * lines & to first column
Move cursor down * lines & to first column
Move cursor one column left
Move cursor to next tab stop
Tab cursor backward * tabs
Enable cursor autowrap
Disable cursor autowrap
ESC [ ? 25 h
ESC [ ? 25 l
ESC [ * ` or ESC [ * G
ESC [ * A
ESC [ * B or ESC [ * e
ESC [ * C or ESC [ * a
ESC [ * D
ESC [ * d
ESC [ *l ; *c H
ESC [ *l ; *c f
NAK
CR
LF
ESC [ * F
ESC [ * E
BS
HT
ESC [ * Z
ESC [ ? 7 h
ESC [ ? 7 l
C-59
Host Command Summary
EDITING
Erase from cursor to end of display
Erase from start of display to cursor
Erase entire display
Erase from cursor to end of line
Erase from start of line to cursor
Erase entire line
Erase * characters from cursor right
Insert * blank characters
Insert * blank lines
Delete * lines from cursor position down
Delete * characters
Set tab at cursor position
ESC [ 0 J
ESC [ 1 J
ESC [ 2 J
ESC [ 0 K
ESC [ 1 K
ESC [ 2 K
ESC [ * X
ESC [ * @
ESC [ * L
ESC [ * M
ESC [ * P
ESC H
PRINTING
Send page
Send line
Print page
Print all pages
Print cursor line
Transparent print mode off
Transparent print mode on
Auxiliary print mode on
Auxiliary print mode off
C-60
ESC [ 2 i
ESC [ ? 3 i
ESC [ 0 i
ESC [ ? 11 i
ESC [ ? 1 i
ESC [ ? 4 i
ESC [ ? 5 i
ESC [ 5 i
ESC [ 4 i
Host Command Summary
Siemens 97801 Emulation
CHARACTER SET SELECTION
Assign International character set to G0
ESC ( @
Assign International character set to G1
ESC ) @
Assign International A character set to G0
ESC ( B
Assign International A character set to G1
ESC ) B
Assign German character set to G0
ESC ( K
Assign German character set to G1
ESC ) K
Assign Brackets character set to G0
ESC ( w
Assign Brackets character set to G1
ESC ) w
Assign FACET character set to G0
ESC ( c
Assign FACET character set to G1
ESC ) c
Assign IBM character set to G0
ESC ( v
Assign IBM character set to G1
ESC ) v
Assign Euro character set to G0
ESC ( u
Assign Euro character set to G1
ESC ) u
Assign Mathematics Symbols character set to G0
ESC ( t
Assign Mathematics Symbols character set to G1
ESC ) t
Assign Blanks character set to G0
ESC ( y
Assign Blanks character set to G1
ESC ) y
Assign G2 to G0
ESC ( x
Assign G2 to G1
ESC ) x
Load G2 with character set (*s = @ or B, K, w ...)
ESC * *s
Load character generator address(es) with new symbol
ESC R B ... ESC \
(Three bytes address and 28 byte description of pattern in hex format)
Switch to G0 (same as keyboard Ctrl + O)
SI
Switch to G1 (same as keyboard Ctrl + N)
SO
Switch within G0 (national/international)
ESC [ 5 v
Lock Change Code key
ESC [ 10 v
Unlock Change Code key
ESC [ 11 v
Report current code set
ESC [ 13 v
CURSOR
Cursor on
Cursor off
Move cursor up * lines
Move cursor down * lines
Move cursor right * columns
Move cursor left * columns
Move cursor to line *l and column *c
Report cursor position
Short poll of cursor position
Move cursor left one column
Move cursor one tab to the right
Move cursor * tabs to the left
Line Feed
Carriage Return
Move cursor to begining of next line
ESC [ 7 p
ESC [ 6 p
ESC [ * A
ESC [ * B
ESC [ * C
ESC [ * D
ESC [ *l ; *c H
ESC [ 6 n
ESC [ 5 p
BS
HT
ESC [ * Z
LF
CR
ESC E
C-61
Host Command Summary
Save cursor position
Move cursor to last saved position
ESC [ s
ESC [ u
DISPLAY AREA MOVEMENT
Roll mode (do not destroy data)
Scroll mode (destroy data)
Move display up * lines
Move display down * lines
ESC [ 10 u
ESC [ 11 u
ESC [ * S
ESC [ * T
EDITING
Insert * (1-80) blanks to the right starting at cursor position
Insert * (1-24 or 25) lines, starting at cursor position
Delete * character(s) ,including attributes, at cursor position
Delete * line(s), including attributes, at cursor position
Erase line - * determines extent
Erase in screen area - * determines extent
ESC [ * @
ESC [ * L
ESC [ * P
ESC [ * M
ESC [ * K
ESC [ * J
INITIALIZING SCREEN & ATTRIBUTES
Define screen moving area at line *t (top) to line *b (bottom)
Set 24 line mode
Set 25 line mode
Switch on/off blinking in 24/25th line
* = Flashing on, Line 1-25 / 1-24 (25/24 line mode)
Flashing off, Line 1-25 / 1-24 (25/24 line mode)
Flashing on, line 25
Flashing off, line 25
Auto roll mode enabled
Page mode enabled
Set attribute(s) for the following character
*a = Normal
Screen
Underline
Blink
0
2
4
5
ESC [ *t ; *b r
ESC [ 1 u
ESC [ 0 u
ESC [ * p
0
1
2
3
ESC [ 9 u
ESC [ 8 u
ESC [ *a ; ...*a m
Inverse
Hidden
Store attributes
Set delete character to blank
Set delete character to nil
Dim screen
Undim screen
Set background dark (white characters on black screen)
Set background highlight (black characters on white screen)
Set off cursor position
Video timeout enabled
Video timeout disabled
Reset screen to initial state
7
8
50
ESC [ 3 u
ESC [ 2 u
ESC [ 8 p
ESC [ 9 p
ESC [ 20 u
ESC [ 21 u
ESC [ 10 p
ESC [ 5 u
ESC [ 4 u
ESC c
KEYBOARD
Lock keyboard
Unlock keyboard
Keyboard repeat rate off
Keyboard repeat rate on
C-62
ESC `
ESC b
ESC [ 0 s
ESC [ 1 s
Host Command Summary
Sound bell
Key click disabled
Key click enabled
Report keyswitch status
Map scan codes corresponding to German keyboard values
Map scan codes corresponding to all other keyboard values
Load more national keyboards
(Multiuser systems: 1024 Byte, PC-X/PC-X10: 10280 Byte)
Read actual keyboard layout
BEL
ESC [ 2 s
ESC [ 3 s
ESC [ 0 w
ESC [ 7 u
ESC [ 6 u
ESC R A ... ESC \
ESC E " y
SERVICE
Display all ESCape sequences (except ESC) on screen
Switch to standard mode
Display all ESCape sequences - system must
be switched off to return to standard mode
Start system test and poll result
Poll firmware
Poll keyboard firmware
Fill the screen moving area with the following character
Display complete character generator
Reset the previous two commands
ESC [ 3 v
ESC [ 2 v
ESC [ 4 v
ESC [ 3 y
ESC [ 4 y
ESC [ 5 y
ESC [ 8 v
ESC [ 9 v
ESC [ 7 v
C-63
Host Command Summary
TA6530 Emulation
Conversational & Block Mode
ATTRIBUTES
Set display attribute *
Normal video
Dimmed
Inverse video
Italics
Invisible
Underline
Inverse dim
Inverse italics
ESC 6 *
SP
!
$
"
(
0
%
&
Inverse invisible
Underline dim
Underline italics
Underline inverse
Underline inverse dim
Underline inverse italics
Underline invisible
Underline inverse invisible
Set video prior condition register (* = attribute as above)
Set/reset colour map table
Read colour configuration (Block mode)
Set colour configuration (Block mode)
Read colour mapping table (Block mode)
Set colour mapping table (Block mode)
,
1
2
4
5
6
8
?
ESC 7 *
ESC - q
ESC - u
ESC - t
ESC - v
ESC - x
CURSOR
Back tab (Block mode)
Clear all tabs
Clear tab at current position
Move cursor down one line
Move cursor home
Move cursor home down
Move cursor left one column
Move cursor right one column
Move cursor to beginning of current line
Move cursor to next tab stop
Move cursor up one line
Report cursor address
Set cursor address
Set cursor address extended (Block mode)
Set tab at current position
ESC i
ESC 3
ESC 2
LF
ESC H
ESC F
BS
ESC C
CR
HT
ESC A
ESC a
DC3
ESC - D
ESC 1
DISPLAY
Clear memory to spaces
Clear memory to spaces extended
Display message on 25th line
Display next page (Conversational mode)
Display previous page (Conversational mode)
Display page *
Scroll down one line (Conversational mode)
Scroll up one line (Conversational mode)
C-64
ESC I
ESC - I
ESC o
ESC U
ESC V
ESC ; *
ESC T
ESC S
Host Command Summary
Select page * (Block mode)
Set current line to 40 (double width) columns
Set current line to 80 (single width) columns
Set max. number of pages for display (Block mode)
Set page size to 24 lines by 40 characters
Start field (Block mode)
Start field extended (Block mode)
Start enhanced colour field (Block mode)
Define field using pre-defined attributes (Block mode)
Write message (*m) on 25th line
ESC : *
ESC 8
ESC 9
ESC p *
ESC t
GS
ESC [ *display *data *case
ESC `
FS
ESC o *m
EDITING
Delete character (Block mode)
Delete line (Block mode)
Disable local line editing (Block mode)
Erase to end of line/field
Erase to end of page/memory
Insert character (Block mode)
Insert line (Block mode)
Reset modified data tags (Block mode)
ESC P
ESC M
ESC N
ESC K
ESC J
ESC O
ESC L
ESC >
GENERAL OPERATION
Data compression (Enhanced) (Block mode)
Data compression (Limited) (Block mode)
Define data-type table (Block mode)
Define data-type table extended (Block mode)
Define/update variable table (Block mode)
Delay processing for one second
End of transmission (Block mode)
Enter protect submode (Block mode)
Exit protect submode (Block mode)
Execute self tests
Execute self test while loading
Print current screen (Conv) or selected page (Block)
Read buffer (Block mode)
Read emulation configuration
Read with address (Block mode)
Read with address extended (Block mode)
Read with address all (Block mode)
Read with address all extended (Block mode)
Read with all attributes (Block mode)
Reinitialize (Block mode)
Set buffer address (Block mode)
Set buffer address extended
Set emulation configuration
Soft reset
Text start (Block mode)
Text end (Block mode)
Sound bell
DC2
DC4
ESC r
ESC - r
ESC - s
ESC @
EOT
ESC W
ESC X
ESC - P
ESC z
ESC 0 (zero)
ESC <
ESC ?
ESC = *
ESC - J *
ESC ] *
ESC - K *
ESC Q
ESC q
DC1
ESC - C
ESC v *
ESC [ ! p
STX
ETX
BEL
C-65
Host Command Summary
KEYBOARD
Define Return key (Conversational mode)
Lock keyboard
Unlock keyboard
Simulate function key
ESC u *
ESC c
ESC b
ESC d *
REPORTS
Report cursor address
Report emulation status
Report firmware revision level
ESC a
ESC ^
ESC _
ANSI Mode
CHARACTER SETS
Select G0 character set *
Select G1 character set *
Shift out to G0 character set
Shift out to G1 character set
ESC ( *
ESC ) *
SI
SO
CURSOR
Autowrap enabled
Autowrap disabled
Clear tab stops (0 = cursor position, 2 or 3 = all)
Cursor enabled
Cursor disabled
Horizontal tab
LF is LFCR (new line mode)
LF is LF only
Move cursor left one column
Move cursor left * columns
Move cursor right * columns
Move cursor down one line
Move cursor down one line
Move cursor down * lines
Move cursor up one line
Move cursor up * lines
Move cursor to beginning of line
Move cursor to column one of next line
Move cursor to column one of next line
Move cursor to column one & down * lines
Move cursor to column one & up * lines
Move cursor to column * on current line
Move cursor to line *l and column *c
Move cursor * tab stops
Move cursor * previous tab stops
Set/clear * tab stops
Set horizontal tab
C-66
ESC [ ? 7 h
ESC [ ? 7 l
ESC [ * g
ESC [ ? 25 h
ESC [ ? 25 l
HT
ESC [ 20 h
ESC [ 20 l
BS
ESC [ * D
ESC [ * C
LF or VT or FF
ESC D or IND
ESC [ * B
ESC M or RI
ESC [ * A
CR
NEL
ESC E
ESC [ * E
ESC [ * F
ESC [ * G
ESC [ *l ; *c H
ESC [ * I
ESC [ * Z
ESC [ * W
ESC H or HTS
Host Command Summary
DISPLAY
Insert * spaces at cursor location
Restore cursor position & video attribute
Save cursor position & video attribute
Set current line to single width (80 columns)
Set current line to double width (40 columns)
Scroll display down * lines
Scroll display up * lines
Set current video attributes
Write to message field
ESC [ * @
ESC 8
ESC 7
ESC # 5
ESC # 6
ESC [ * T
ESC [ * S
ESC [ * m
ESC P * = * ESC \
EDITING
Delete * blank lines at cursor position
Delete * characters at cursor position
Erase * characters & attributes at cursor
Erase field *
Erase line portion (0 = from, 1 = to, 2 = all)
Erase screen portion (0 = from, 1 = to, 2 = all)
Insert * blank lines at cursor position
Repeat last character * times
ESC [ * M
ESC [ * P
ESC [ * X
ESC [ * N
ESC [ * K
ESC [ * J
ESC [ * L
ESC [ * b
GENERAL OPERATION
Cancel current escape sequence
Execute self tests
Reset emulation
Set emulation configuration
Set mode
Reset mode
Sound bell
Read screen contents
Terminate current escape sequence
Transmission enabled (XON)
Transmission disabled (XOFF)
CAN
ESC [ * y
ESC c
ESC P * ? * ESC \
ESC [ * h
ESC [ * l
BEL
ESC [ * ; * ; * ; * v
SUB
DC1
DC3
KEYBOARD
Lock keyboard
Lock keyboard
Unlock keyboard
Unlock keyboard
ESC `
ESC [ 2 h
ESC b
ESC [ 2 l
REPORTS
Report configuration values
Report cursor position
Report terminal ID & version
Report status of last self test
ESC [ * x
ESC [ 6 *
ESC [ * c
ESC [ 5 *
C-67
Host Command Summary
Tek 4010/4014 Emulation
ALPHANUMARIC MODE
Select G0 character set for alpha text
Select G1 character set for alpha text
ESC SI
ESC SO
CURSOR MOVEMENT
Move cursor down 1 pixel
Move cursor down 16 pixels
Move cursor left 1 pixel
Move cursor left 16 pixels
Move cursor right 1 pixel
Move cursor right 16 pixels
Move cursor up 1 pixel
Move cursor up 16 pixels
Move cursor to beginning of line
Move text cursor down
Move text cursor left
Move text cursor right
Move text cursor up
Move text cursor to start of line
ESC \ b
ESC \ B
ESC \ d
ESC \ D
ESC \ c
ESC \ C
ESC \ a
ESC \ A
ESC \ CR
LF
BS
HT
VT
CR
GENERAL OPERATION
Clear screen & enter Graphics Text mode
Copy screen data to parallel port
Request status report
Select bypass mode
Sound bell
ESC FF
ESC ETB
ESC ENQ
ESC CAN
BEL
GRAPHICS TEXT MODE
Select character size 0 (80x34)
Select character size 1 (40x17)
Select character size 2 (26x11)
Select character size 3 (20x8)
Select Graphics Text font 1 (74x35)
Select Graphics Text font 2 (81x38)
Select Graphics Text font 3 (121x58)
Select Graphics Text font 4 (133x64)
Select text zoom factor 1
Select text zoom factor 2
Select text zoom factor 3
Select text zoom factor 4
ESC 0
ESC 1
ESC 2
ESC 3
ESC 8
ESC 9
ESC :
ESC ;
ESC \ e
ESC \ f
ESC \ g
ESC \ h
MODE SELECTION
Select Alphanumeric mode
Select Alphanumeric mode
Select Alphanumeric mode
Select GIN mode
C-68
ACK
CAN
ESC \ CAN
ESC SUB
Host Command Summary
Select Graphics Text mode
Select Graphics Text mode
Select Graphics Text mode
Select Incremental Point mode
Select Point mode
Select Vector mode
Select Vector mode
CR
US
ESC FF
RS
FS
GS
ESC \ GS
VECTOR MODE
Clear Vector mode screen
Deselect write-through & selective erase
Disable block fill/erase
Disable dark vector
Disable dark vector
Disable rectangle drawing
Enable block fill/erase
Enable circle plotting (* = ASCII equiv. of coords)
Enable dark vector
Enable dark vector
Enable rectangle drawing (*c = corner coords)
Enable selective erase
Enable write-through mode
Select dot-dash line style
Select dot-dash line style
Select dotted line style
Select dotted line style
Select long dash line style
Select long dash line style
Select short dash line style
Select short dash line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
ESC \ FF
ESC SOH
ESC ETX
BEL
ESC BEL
ESC \ r
ESC STX
ESC \ O *
GS
ESC GS
ESC \ R *c *c
ESC DLE
ESC NAK
ESC b
ESC j
ESC a
ESC i
ESC d
ESC I
ESC c
ESC k
ESC `
ESC e
ESC f
ESC g
ESC h
ESC m
ESC n
ESC o
C-69
Host Command Summary
TVI 955 Emulation
GENERAL OPERATION
Block mode on
Local mode on
Half duplex mode on
Full duplex mode on
Return to previous conversational mode
Set terminal operating mode(s) (0 = 955, 1 = 950)
Reset terminal operating mode(s) (0 = 955, 1 = 950)
Select a terminal operating value (0 = 955, 1 = 950)
Select a programming compatibility mode (0 = 955, 1 = 950)
Reset terminal to factory default values
Reset terminal to saved settings values
Reset function keys to factory default values
Reset editing keys to factory default values
Monitor mode on
Monitor mode off
ESC B
ESC c
ESC D H
ESC D F
ESC C
ESC [ = * h
ESC [ = * l
ESC [ *1 ; *2 v
ESC [ 10 ; * v
ESC ~ 0
ESC ~ 1
ESC ~ 2
ESC ~ 3
ESC U
ESC X or ESC u
CHARACTER SETS & BLOCK GRAPHICS
Select character set (0 = US ASCII, 1 = UK ASCII)
Special graphics mode on
Special graphics mode off
Select a character from the multinational character set
Read 7-bit data words
Read 8-bit data words
Define block graphics area
ESC [ 9 ; * v
ESC $
ESC %
CTRL U *
ESC [ = 1 l
ESC [ = 1 h
ESC H w h
CURSOR
Cursor home
Line feed
Reverse line feed
New line (line feed/carriage return)
Carriage return
Move cursor up * lines
Move cursor up one line
Move cursor down one line
Move cursor down * lines
Move cursor right * columns
Move cursor right one column
Move cursor left * columns
Move cursor left one column
Move cursor to line (*l) and column (*c)
Move cursor to line (*l) and column (*c)
Send cursor to line (*l) & columns 1 - 80 (*c)
Send cursor to line (*l) & columns 81 - 132 (*c)
Send cursor to page (*p), line (*l) & columns 1 - 80 (*c)
Send cursor to page (*p), line (*l) & columns 81 - 132 (*c)
Read cursor's line & column position
C-70
ESC [ H or RS
LF
ESC j
US
CR
ESC [ * A
VT
SYN
ESC [ * B
ESC [ * C
FF
ESC [ * D
BS
ESC [ *l ; *c H
ESC [ *l ; *c f
ESC = *l *c
ESC = *l ~ *c
ESC - *p *l *c
ESC - *p *l ~ *c
ESC ?
Host Command Summary
Read cursor's page, line & column position
Read cursor's line & column position in decimal units
Read cursor's page, line & column position in decimal units
ESC /
ESC [ 6 n
ESC [ ? 6 n
DISPLAY
Turn screen on
Turn screen off
Light background with dark characters
Dark background with light characters
Define visual attribute(s) *
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ESC n
ESC o
ESC b
ESC d
ESC G *
Normal (default) video
Invisible normal video
Flash
Invisible flash
Reverse current background
Invisible reverse
Reverse and flash
Invisible reverse & flash
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
Underline
Invisible underline
Underline & flash
Invisible underline & flash
Reverse & underline
Invisible reverse & underline
Reverse, underline & flash
Invisible reverse, underline & flash
Attributes occupy a character space
Attributes do not occupy a character space
Half intensity mode
Full intensity mode
Page base attribute mode
Line base attribute mode
Select status line visual attribute(s)
0
1
Normal
Reverse
2
3
ESC F 0
ESC F 1
ESC [ = 5 h
ESC [ = 5 l
ESC [ = 2 h
ESC [ = 2 l
ESC [ 3 ; * v
Normal underline
Reverse underline
Set cursor style to *
0
1
2
Cursor not displayed
Flashing block cursor
Steady block cursor
Enable 132 columns per line
Enable 80 columns per line
ESC . *
3
4
Flashing underline cursor
Steady underline cursor
ESC [ = 3 h
ESC [ = 3 l
EDITING MODES
Autowrap mode on
Autowrap mode off
New line mode on
New line mode off
DOWN key sends CTRL J
DOWN key sends CTRL V
Turn on write protect mode
Turn off write protect mode
Turn on protect mode
Turn off protect mode
ESC [ = 7 h
ESC [ = 7 l
ESC [ = 6 h
ESC [ = 6 l
ESC [ = 9 h
ESC [ = 9 l
ESC )
ESC (
ESC &
ESC '
C-71
Host Command Summary
EDITING DATA
Enable page edit mode
Enable line edit mode
Enable insert mode
Enable replace mode
Load a replacement character
Insert a replacement character at cursor position
Insert * replacement characters at cursor position
Insert line of replacement characters on current line
Insert * lines of replacement characters starting at cursor line
Delete character at cursor position
Delete * characters starting at cursor position
Delete current line & replace with replacement characters
Delete * lines at cursor line & replace with replacement characters
Erase from cursor to end of line & replace with replacement characters
Erase line portion & replace with replacement characters
(0 = from cursor, 1 = to cursor, 2 = all unprotected)
Erase from cursor to end of line & replace with null characters
Erase from cursor to end of page & replace with replacement characters
Erase page portion & replace with replacement characters
(0 = from cursor, 1 = to cursor, 2 = all unprotected)
Erase from cursor to end of page & replace with null characters
Clear current unprotected field, replace with replacement characters
Clear all characters & replace with null characters
955 mode: Clear all characters & replace with replacement characters
(reset protect and write protect modes)
950 mode: Clear unprotected characters & replace with replacement
characters (do not reset protect and write protect modes)
955 mode: Clear unprotected characters & replace with write protected
space characters (reset protect mode)
950 mode: Clear unprotected characters & replace with write-protected
space characters (do not reset protect mode)
Clear unprotected characters & replace with replacement characters
Clear unprotected characters & replace with null characters
ESC N
ESC O
ESC q
ESC r
ESC e *
ESC Q
ESC [ * @
ESC E
ESC [ * L
ESC W
ESC [ * P
ESC R
ESC [ * M
ESC T
ESC [ * K
ESC t
ESC Y
ESC [ * J
ESC y
CAN
ESC *
ESC +
ESC +
ESC ,
ESC ,
ESC ; or SUB
ESC :
FUNCTION KEYS
Select function key set (0 = set one, 1 = set two)
Reprogram a function key
C-72
ESC [ 7 ; * v
ESC ¦ *1 *2 <message> EM
Key
955 compatible *1 value
Unshifted Shifted
955 compatible *1 value
Key
Unshifted Shifted
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Host Command Summary
Additional *1 values:
<space>
Clear entire current function key set
from memory
Load function keys in sequence
0
*2 message destination values:
1
2
3
Send message to host
Send message to terminal
Send message to both host and terminal
Save function key reprogramming in non-volatile memory
Do not save function key reprogramming in non-volatile memory
Invoke a function key
ESC [ = 10 h
ESC [ = 10 l
ESC [ * ¦
REPROGRAMMING EDITING KEYS
Reprogram the SEND key (950 mode)
ESC 0 *k *c
*k =
1
Unshifted
2
Shifted
*c =
4
5
6
ESC 4 command
ESC 5 command
ESC 6 command
7
S
s
ESC 7 command
ESC S command
ESC s command
Reprogram any individual editing key (955 mode)
Reprogram all editing keys
ESC 0 *Ps *p1 *p2 *p3
ESC ] *Ps *p1 ... *p60
KEYBOARD & BELL
Keyboard locked
Keyboard unlocked
Lock keys
Unlock keys
* = 11 Set Up
12 Esc
ESC #
ESC "
ESC [ = * l
ESC [ = * h
13 Clear Space
14 Break
Local editing key mode enabled
Duplex editing key mode enabled
Load the margin bell column
Margin bell on
Margin bell off
Sound bell
ESC k
ESC l
ETB
ESC [ = 4 h
ESC [ = 4 l
BEL
LOADING & SENDING MESSAGES
Send terminal's identification
Program the answerback message
Send the answerback message
Display user message 1 on bottom screen line
Display status line on bottom screen line
Select contents of top information line
Select contents of bottom information line
*= 0
1
Blank
Status line
Load text into user message 1
Load text into a user message
2
3
ESC M
ESC ^ <text> EM
ENQ
ESC g
ESC h
ESC [ 4 ; * v
ESC [ 5 ; * v
User message 1
User message 2
ESC f <text> CR
ESC _ *m *e <text> CR
C-73
Host Command Summary
User Message
*m = 0 Status line message field
1 User message 1
2 User message 2
Effect
*e = 0
1
Clears message before loading
Writes over existing message
Send contents of information line
*= 0
1
2
ESC Z *
User message 1
Status line
User message 2
PRINTING
Buffered copy print mode on
Buffered copy print mode off
Buffered transparent print mode on
Buffered transparent print mode off
Buffered bidirectional print mode on
Buffered bidirectional print mode off
Print unprotected formatted page
Print all unformatted page
Page print
*= 0
1
Formatted all
Formatted unprotected
ESC @
ESC A
ESC `
ESC a
DC2
DC4
ESC P
ESC L
ESC [ 0 ; * i
4
5
Unformatted all
Unformatted unprotected
Define page print terminator
ESC p *
SCREEN MEMORY
Define number of lines on each page
*= 1
2
3
Lines
per Page
24
48
96
ESC \ *
Number of Pages
4-Page Memory
2-Page Memory
4
2
2
1
1
-
Autopage mode on
Autopage mode off
Display previous page
Display next page
Display page *
ESC v
ESC w
ESC J
ESC K
ESC [ 1 ; * }
SCROLLING
Define a scrolling region
Enable line lock
Disable line lock
ESC [ *t ; *b r
ESC ! 1
ESC ! 2
SENDING SCREEN DATA
Reprogram delimiter (*d) characters *1 & *2
0
1
C-74
Field Separator
End of line
2
3
Start of protected field
End of protected field
ESC x *d *1 *2
4
Message terminator
Host Command Summary
Send unprotected characters in cursor line up to & including cursor
Send unprotected page up to & including cursor
Send entire cursor line characters up to & including cursor
Send entire page up to & including cursor
Send unprotected message between start of text and end of text
Send whole message between start of text (STX) and end of text (ETX)
ESC 4
ESC 5
ESC 6
ESC 7
ESC S
ESC s
TAB STOPS
Clear typewriter tab stop at cursor position
Clear all typewriter tab stops
Create column of tab stops at cursor position
Move cursor forward to next typewriter or field tab stop
Move cursor forward to next field tab stop
Move cursor backward to previous typewriter or field tab stop
ESC 2
ESC 3
ESC 1
HT
ESC i
ESC I
C-75
Host Command Summary
Unisys T27 Emulation
FORM OPERATIONS
Set forms mode
Reset forms mode
Toggle forms mode
Exit forms mode
ESC W
ESC X
DC2
SOH
SEARCH OPERATIONS
Set search mode
Set search character (if 80 hex or less)
Set search character (if greater than 80 hex)
Reset search mode
ESC E
ESC - *
ESC - ESC SO * ESC SI
ESC F
POINTER MOVEMENT
Move pointer up
Move pointer down
Move pointer right
Move pointer left
Align KBC to DCP
Tab right
Clear variable tabs
Vertical tab down
Home
Jump to page *
Position pointer at *c column & *r row (using hex values)
Position pointer at *c column & *r row (using ASCII chars.)
Carriage return
Prevent align in cursor page
DC3
LF
ESC C or DC2
BS
ESC &
HT
ESC #
VT
DC4
ESC $ *
ESC ^ *c *r
ESC " *c *r
CR or LF
ESC 6
EDITING SEQUENCES
Insert character by line
Insert character by page
Delete character by line
Delete character by page
Line insert
Line delete
Move line up
Move line down
Clear to end of line
Clear to end of page
Roll page up
Roll page down
Clear page
C-76
ESC !
ESC @
ESC %
ESC P
ESC L
EC M
ESC >
ESC <
ESC K or DC1
ESC J
ESC S
ESC T
SOH or FF or ESC FF
Host Command Summary
VIDEO ATTRIBUTE SEQUENCES
Underline video highlight
Reverse video highlight
End highlight
Start video blink
Start secure video
Start bright video
Set reverse video
Set normal video
ESC 3
ESC 4
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC N
ESC O
TERMINAL RECONFIGURATION SEQUENCES
Store ASCII codes as data
Configure Data Comm, Screen & KPT buffer sizes
Reconfigure terminal
Selective key programming
ESC R A *start *length *data ESC R C
ESC R B *dc *s *kpt
ESC R C
ESC R D *hex *prog 00 ... *hex *prog
00 00
Store data in hexadecimal codes
ESC R H *start *length *data ESC R C
Program function keys F1 - F10
ESC R K *length *key *prog A 9 ...
*length *key *prog A 9 A 9
Transmit error log
ESC R L
Copy temporary storage into nonvolatile RAM
ESC R P
Display message in environmental user status line
ESC R S *number of bytes *data
Transmit memory (temporary storage) contents to host ESC R T *start *number of bytes
MISCELLANEOUS SEQUENCES
Start escape sequence
Set shift out (to extended character set)
Reset shift out (shift in)
Character translation
*=
:
/
.
bright
underscore
reverse
7
8
9
ESC
ESC SO or SO
ESC SI or SI
ESC ' *
end highlight
blink
secure
Reset keystroke lockout
Fill with character *
Transmit terminal screen to host
Toggle audible alarm
Display character set
Load contents of permanent storage & reconfigure
Display version number
Toggle variable tabs
Set mobile home
Lowercase disable
Lowercase enable
End of text processing
End of transmission
ESC =
ESC _ *
ESC (
ESC ? or BEL
ESC space C
ESC space D
ESC space V
ESC . or VT
ESC D
ESC Y
ESC Z
ETX
EOT
C-77
Host Command Summary
Viewdata Mode
COLOUR SELECTION
Background cell colour = previous character colour
Cell background colour black (default)
Select blue alphanumeric character set
Select blue graphics character set
Select cyan alphanumeric character set
Select cyan graphics character set
Select green alphanumeric character set
Select green graphics character set
Select magenta alphanumeric character set
Select magenta graphics character set
Select red alphanumeric character set
Select red graphics character set
Select white alphanumeric character set
Select white graphics character set
Select yellow alphanumeric character set
Select yellow graphics character set
ESC ]
ESC \
ESC D
ESC T
ESC F
ESC V
ESC B
ESC R
ESC E
ESC U
ESC A
ESC Q
ESC G
ESC W
ESC C
ESC S
CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES
Block graphics
Border graphics
Flashing on
Flashing off
Single line height
Double line height
ESC Y
ESC Z
ESC H
ESC I
ESC L
ESC M
CURSOR
Cursor display on
Cursor display off
Home cursor
Move cursor down one line
Move cursor left one column
Move cursor right one column
Move cursor up one line
Move cursor to beginning of line
DC1
DC2
RS
LF
BS
HT
VT
CR
DISPLAY
Clear screen & home cursor
Conceal display
Hold graphics character
Release graphics character
FF
ESC X
ESC ^
ESC _
GENERAL OPERATION
Enter 40 column viewdata mode
Enter 80 column viewdata mode
Send Answerback string
C-78
ESC # 6
ESC # 5
ENQ
Host Command Summary
VT640 Emulation
ALPHANUMARIC MODE
Select G0 character set for alpha text
Select G1 character set for alpha text
ESC SI
ESC SO
CURSOR MOVEMENT
Move cursor down 1 pixel
Move cursor down 16 pixels
Move cursor left 1 pixel
Move cursor left 16 pixels
Move cursor right 1 pixel
Move cursor right 16 pixels
Move cursor up 1 pixel
Move cursor up 16 pixels
Move cursor to beginning of line
Move text cursor down
Move text cursor left
Move text cursor right
Move text cursor up
Move text cursor to start of line
ESC \ b
ESC \ B
ESC \ d
ESC \ D
ESC \ c
ESC \ C
ESC \ a
ESC \ A
ESC \ CR
LF
BS
HT
VT
CR
GENERAL OPERATION
Clear screen & enter Graphics Text mode
Copy screen data to parallel port
Request status report
Select bypass mode
Sound bell
Specify data (*) for graphics memory loading
Specify screen address for g. memory load
Specify writing mode (0 = pix. off, 1 = on, 2 = comp)
Transmit graphics memory (*h *v coords, *s bit sets)
ESC FF
ESC ETB
ESC ENQ
ESC CAN
BEL
ESC + * #
ESC " *h ; *v a
ESC / * d
ESC " *h ; *v *s c
GRAPHICS TEXT MODE
Select character size 0 (80x34)
Select character size 1 (40x17)
Select character size 2 (26x11)
Select character size 3 (20x8)
Select Graphics Text font 1 (74x35)
Select Graphics Text font 2 (81x38)
Select Graphics Text font 3 (121x58)
Select Graphics Text font 4 (133x64)
Select text zoom factor 1
Select text zoom factor 2
Select text zoom factor 3
Select text zoom factor 4
ESC 0
ESC 1
ESC 2
ESC 3
ESC 8
ESC 9
ESC :
ESC ;
ESC \ e
ESC \ f
ESC \ g
ESC \ h
C-79
Host Command Summary
MODE SELECTION
Select Alphanumeric mode
Select Alphanumeric mode
Select Alphanumeric mode
Select GIN mode
Select GIN mode
Select GIN mode
Select Graphics Text mode
Select Graphics Text mode
Select Graphics Text mode
Select Incremental Point mode
Select Point mode
Select Vector mode
Select Vector mode
ACK
CAN
ESC \ CAN
ESC SUB
ESC " 4 g
ESC " 5 g
CR
US
ESC FF
RS
FS
GS
ESC \ GS
VECTOR MODE
Clear Vector mode screen
Define user line style x (* = # pixels on ; # pixels off)
Define user line style y (* = # pixels on ; # pixels off)
Define user line style z (* = # pixels on ; # pixels off)
Disable block fill/erase
Disable dark vector
Disable dark vector
Disable rectangle drawing
Enable block fill/erase
Enable circle plotting (* = ASCII equiv. of coordinates)
Enable dark vector
Enable dark vector
Enable rectangle drawing (*c = corner coordinates)
Select 3 dot-dash line style
Select 3 dot-dash line style
Select dot-dash line style
Select dot-dash line style
Select dotted line style
Select dotted line style
Select long dot-dash line style
Select long dot-dash line style
Select long dash line style
Select long dash line style
Select medium dash line style
Select medium dash line style
Select short dash line style
Select short dash line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select user defined line style a
Select user defined line style b
Select user defined line style c
C-80
ESC \ FF
ESC / * a
ESC / * b
ESC / * c
ESC ETX
BEL
ESC BEL
ESC \ r
ESC STX
ESC \ O *
GS
ESC GS
ESC \ R *c *c
ESC e
ESC m
ESC b
ESC j
ESC a
ESC i
ESC f
ESC n
ESC d
ESC I
ESC g
ESC o
ESC c
ESC k
ESC `
ESC h
ESC x
ESC y
ESC z
Host Command Summary
W2119 Emulation
ALPHANUMARIC MODE
Select G0 character set for alpha text
Select G1 character set for alpha text
ESC SI
ESC SO
CURSOR MOVEMENT
Move cursor down 1 pixel
Move cursor down 16 pixels
Move cursor left 1 pixel
Move cursor left 16 pixels
Move cursor right 1 pixel
Move cursor right 16 pixels
Move cursor up 1 pixel
Move cursor up 16 pixels
Move cursor to beginning of line
Move text cursor down
Move text cursor left
Move text cursor right
Move text cursor up
Move text cursor to start of line
ESC \ b
ESC \ B
ESC \ d
ESC \ D
ESC \ c
ESC \ C
ESC \ a
ESC \ A
ESC \ CR
LF
BS
HT
VT
CR
GENERAL OPERATION
Clear screen & enter Graphics Text mode
Copy screen data to parallel port
Deselect write-through & selective erase
Enable selective erase
Enable write-through
Request cursor position report
Select bypass mode
Sound bell
ESC FF
ESC ETB
ESC SOH
ESC DLE
ESC NAK
ESC ENQ
ESC CAN
BEL
GRAPHICS TEXT MODE
Select graphics text font (120x58)
Select graphics text font (132x38)
Select graphics text font (132x64)
Select graphics text font (146x70)
Select graphics text font (73x35)
Select graphics text font (80x38)
Select graphics text font (80x64)
Select text zoom factor 1
Select text zoom factor 2
Select text zoom factor 3
Select text zoom factor 4
ESC :
ESC <
ESC ;
ESC >
ESC 8
ESC 9
ESC =
ESC \ e
ESC \ f
ESC \ g
ESC \ h
C-81
Host Command Summary
MODE SELECTION
Select Alpha mode & erase alpha memory
Select Alphanumeric mode
Select Alphanumeric mode
Select Alphanumeric mode
Select Alphanumeric mode
Select GIN mode
Select Graphics Text mode
Select Graphics Text mode
Select Graphics Text mode
Select Graphics Text mode
Select Incremental Point mode
Select Point mode
Select Vector mode
ESC EOT
ACK
CAN
ESC 2
ESC \ CAN
ESC SUB
CR
US
ESC 1
ESC FF
RS
FS
GS
VECTOR MODE
Clear Vector mode screen
Disable block fill/erase
Disable dark vector
Disable dark vector
Disable rectangle drawing
Enable block fill/erase
Enable circle plotting (* = ASCII equiv. of coords)
Enable dark vector
Enable dark vector
Enable rectangle drawing (*c = corner coords)
Select dot-dash line style
Select dot-dash line style
Select dot-dash line style
Select dotted line style
Select dotted line style
Select dotted line style
Select long dash line style
Select long dash line style
Select long dash line style
Select short dash line style
Select short dash line style
Select short dash line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
Select solid line style
C-82
ESC \ FF
ESC ETX
BEL
ESC BEL
ESC \ r
ESC STX
ESC \ O *
GS
ESC GS
ESC \ R *c *c
ESC b
ESC j
ESC r
ESC a
ESC i
ESC q
ESC d
ESC I
ESC t
ESC c
ESC k
ESC s
ESC `
ESC e
ESC f
ESC g
ESC h
ESC m
ESC n
ESC o
ESC p
ESC u
ESC v
ESC w
Host Command Summary
Wyse Emulations
ATTRIBUTES
Assign character display attribute
Assign line attribute
Assign write-protected character attribute
Line attribute mode on
Page attribute mode on
Wyse 60 character attribute mode on
Wyse 60 character attribute mode off
ESC G *attribute
ESC G *line attribute
ESC ' *attribute
ESC e 3
ESC e 2
ESC e 1
ESC e 0
CHARACTER SETS (WY-60 only)
Define & load soft character
ESC c A *b *p *...*c CTRL Y
*b = bank 0-3, *p = position in character set (2-byte hex)
*...*c = character bit pattern (32-byte character string)
Automatic font loading enabled
Automatic font loading disabled
Load font bank with predefined character set
ESC e O
ESC e N
ESC c @ *bank *set
Bank: 0 = Bank 0, 1 = Bank 1, 2 = Bank 2, 3 = Bank 3
Set: Native mode
Multinational
Standard ASCII
Graphics 1
PC Equivalent
Graphics 2
Graphics 3
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
Standard ANSI
44-line Native mode
44-line Multinational
44-line PC Equivalent
44-line Standard ASCII
44-line Standard ANSI
Clear font bank (* = 0 - 3)
Specify font bank for primary character set (* = 0 - 3)
Specify font bank for secondary character set (* = 0 - 3)
Select primary character set for display
Select secondary character set for display
G
'
a
b
c
d
ESC c ? *
ESC c B *
ESC c C *
ESC c D
ESC c E
CLEARING DATA
Clear cursor column
Clear entire rectangle in 80 column page
Clear entire rectangle in 132 column page
Clear page to nulls
Clear page to spaces
Clear page to write-protected spaces
Clear unprotected column to nulls
Clear unprotected column to specified character
Clear unprotected line to nulls from cursor
Clear unprotected line foreground to nulls from cursor
Clear unprotected line to spaces from cursor
Clear unprotected line foreground to spaces from cursor
Clear unprotected page to attribute character
ESC V
ESC c H *line *col *character
ESC c H *line ~ *col *character
ESC *
ESC +
ESC ,
ESC c K
ESC c I *character
ESC t
ESC c S
ESC T
ESC c R
ESC !
C-83
Host Command Summary
Clear unprotected page to nulls
Clear unprotected page to nulls from cursor
Clear unprotected page foreground to nulls from cursor
Clear unprotected page to spaces
Clear unprotected page to spaces from cursor
Clear unprotected page foreground to spaces from cursor
Clear unprotected page to specified character
Clear unprotected rectangle in 80 column page
Clear unprotected rectangle in 132 column page
Clear unprotected to end of line with nulls
Clear unprotected to end of line with spaces
Box rectangle in 80 column page
Box rectangle in 132 column page
Box rectangle to right of cursor
ESC :
ESC y
ESC c Q
ESC ; or SUB
ESC Y
ESC c P
ESC . *character
ESC c F *line *col *character
ESC c F *line ~ *col *character
ESC c L
ESC c O
ESC c G *line *column
ESC c G *line ~ *column
ESC c N *width *height
COLOUR SELECTION
Wyse 350 colour:
Select colour palette (* = palette ID in range 0 - ?)
ESC % *
Redefine attribute association
ESC m *r *c *m
*r = display attribute group or write protect to be redefined (range 0 - 8)
*c = the colour assigned (range ! - 6)
*m = the monochrome attributes assigned:
0 = Normal, - = Reverse, . = Underline, / = Underline & reverse
Wyse 60 ASCII colour:
Foreground colour palette
Select border colour
Background colour
Assign foreground colour
Assign background colour
Assign display attribute to unprotected characters
Redefine character attribute association
Assign foreground/background colours
Assign fore/background colours to write-prot. chars.
Assign foreground colours to write-protected chars.
Assign background colours to write-protected chars.
Assign display attribute to write-protected characters
Assign replacement character colours & attributes
ESC A a *
ESC A b *
ESC A c *
ESC A d *
ESC A e *
ESC A f *
ESC A g *attr *f *b *assoc
ESC A h *
ESC A i *
ESC A j *
ESC A k *
ESC A l *
ESC A y *f *b *a
CURSOR
Address cursor in current 80/132 column page
Address cursor in current 80 column page
Address cursor in specific 80 column page
Address cursor in specific 80 column window/page
Address cursor column
Address cursor row
Autowrap mode off
Autowrap mode on
Clear all tab stops
Clear tab stop
Cursor down (scroll)
Cursor left
C-84
ESC a *line R *column C
ESC = *line *column
ESC w @ *page *line *column
ESC - *win/pg *line *column
ESC _
ESC [
ESC d .
ESC d /
ESC 0
ESC 2 or ESC 3
LF
BS
Host Command Summary
Cursor right
Cursor up (no scroll)
Cursor to start of current line
Cursor to start of next line
Home cursor
Line lock mode on
Line lock mode off
Move cursor up; scroll
Read 80 column window/page & cursor address
Read 80 column page number & cursor address
Read cursor address in current 80 column page
Read cursor address in current 80/132 column page
Redefine screen as one window & clear pages
Set cursor display features
Set tab stop
Tabulate cursor
Tab cursor
Tab cursor backward
Tabs are not initialized
Tabs are initialized
FF
VT
CR
US
ESC { or RS
ESC ` H
ESC ` I
ESC j
ESC /
ESC w '
ESC ?
ESC b
ESC x 0
ESC ' *cursor
ESC 1
ESC i
HT
ESC I
ESC e :
ESC e ;
DISPLAY
80 column display
132 column display
80/132 change clears screen on
80/132 change clears screen off
Activate lower window
Activate other window/display previous page
Activate other window/display next page
Activate upper window
Autopage mode off
Autopage on
Autoscrolling mode on
Autoscrolling mode off
Display 24 data lines
Display 25 data lines
Display 42 data lines
Display 43 data lines
Display graphics character
Display next page
Display previous page
Display specific page
Divide memory into pages
Economy 80 column mode on
Economy 80 column mode off
Horizontal split higher
Horizontal split lower
Program label line
Protect mode on
Protect mode off
Redefine screen as one window
Redefine screen as one window & clear pages
ESC ' :
ESC ' ;
ESC e /
ESC e .
ESC }
ESC J
ESC K
ESC ]
ESC d *
ESC d +
ESC 0
ESC N
ESC e (
ESC e )
ESC e *
ESC e +
ESC H *key
ESC w C
ESC w B
ESC w *page
ESC w *length
ESC e G
ESC e F
ESC x R
ESC x P
ESC f
ESC &
ESC '
ESC x @
ESC x 0
C-85
Host Command Summary
Restore normal display
Reverse display
Roll window up in page
Roll window down in page
Split screen
Split screen (two pages only)
Split screen & clear pages
Split screen & clear pages (2 pages only)
Status line format (a = extended, b = standard)
Status line message
Status line not displayed
Turn display off
Turn display on
ESC ^ 0
ESC ^ 1
ESC w E
ESC w F
ESC x C *line
ESC x A *line
ESC x 3 *line
ESC x 1 *line
ESC ' *
ESC F *message CR
ESC ' c
ESC ' 8
ESC ' 9
EDITING
Begin send at top of page
Begin send at top of screen
Delete cursor character
Delete cursor column
Delete cursor line
Insert column of nulls
Insert line of spaces
Insert mode on, replace mode off
Insert mode off, replace mode on
Insert space character
Page edit mode on (Wyse 60 mode)
Page edit mode off (Wyse 60 mode)
Write-protect mode off
Write-protect mode on
ESC d '
ESC d &
ESC W
ESC c j
ESC R
ESC c M
ESC E
ESC q
ESC r
ESC Q
ESC e #
ESC e "
ESC (
ESC )
GENERAL OPERATION
Answerback mode off
Answerback mode on
Graphics mode on
Graphics mode off
Received CR mode off
Received CR mode on
Run script in Wyse and TVI/ADDS/HZ enhanced modes
Set MODEM port receive handshake
Set MODEM port transmit handshake
ESC e SP
ESC e !
ESC H CTRL B
ESC H CTRL C
ESC e 4
ESC e 5
ESC c s *filename CR
ESC c 2 *handshake
ESC c 4 *handshake
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
Select terminal emulation
*emulation: Wyse 50
Wyse 50+
Wyse 60
TVI 910+
TVI 912/920
TVI 925
ADDS VP A2
HZ 1500
C-86
@
"
4
#
'
$
%
&
VT52
VT100
VT220-7
VT220-8
VT320-7
VT320-8
ESC ~ *emulation
6
;
<
=
B
C
Host Command Summary
Enhance mode on
Enhance mode off
Monitor mode on (display control codes)
Monitor mode off
Block mode on
Half-duplex mode on
Half-duplex block mode on
Full-duplex mode on
ACK mode (6 = off, 7 = on)
Set MODEM port operating parameters
Set maximum data transmission speed
Send terminal ID
Program answerback message
Answerback message (= = conceal, < = send)
ESC ~ !
ESC ~ SP
ESC U
ESC u or ESC X
ESC B
ESC C ESC D H
ESC D H ESC B
ESC C ESC D F
ESC e *
ESC c 0 *b *s *p *w
ESC c 6 *max
ESC SP
ESC c ; *answer CTRL Y
ESC c *
KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS
Application key mode on
Application key mode off
Keyboard locked
Keyboard unlocked
Caps lock on
Caps lock off
Clear all programmable keys
Clear key definition
Key repeat on
Key repeat off
Margin bell on
Margin bell off
Set margin bell at cursor position
Program function key definition
Program key direction & definition
Read key direction & definition
Sound Bell
Turn local edit mode on, duplex edit mode off
Turn local edit mode off, duplex edit mode on
ESC ~ 3
ESC ~ 2
ESC # or SI
ESC " or SO
ESC e &
ESC e ‘
ESC c U
ESC z *key DEL
ESC e ESC e ,
ESC e M
ESC e L
ESC ` J
ESC z *fkey seq DEL
ESC Z *dir key seq DEL
ESC Z ~ *key
BEL
ESC k
ESC l
LABEL LINE
Clear function key label
Clear shifted label line message
Clear unshifted label line message
Display shifted label line
Program/display function key label
Program/display unshifted label line
Program shifted label line
Shifted label line off
ESC z *field CR
ESC z ) CR
ESC z ( CR
ESC z P CR
ESC z *field *label CR
ESC z ( *text CR
ESC z ) *text CR
ESC z DEL
SENDING DATA
Begin print/send at top of page
Begin print/send at top of screen
Bidirectional mode off
ESC d '
ESC d &
ESC d $
C-87
Host Command Summary
Bidirectional mode on
Enable transmission (XON/XOFF handshaking)
Stop transmission (XON/XOFF handshaking)
Mark block beginning
Mark block end
Print entire formatted page
Print formatted unprotected page
Print unformatted page
Secondary receive mode off
Secondary receive mode on
Send ACK
Send cursor character
Send entire block
Send entire cursor line
Send entire page
Send unprotected characters in block
Send unprotected cursor line
Send unprotected page
Send next incoming character to printer port
Transparent print mode on
Turn auxiliary print mode on
Turn print modes off
C-88
ESC d %
DC1 (XON)
DC3 (XOFF)
ESC 8
ESC 9
ESC P
ESC @
ESC p or ESC L
ESC d SP
ESC d !
ENQ
ESC M
ESC s
ESC 6
ESC 7
ESC S
ESC 4
ESC 5
DLE
ESC d # or CAN
DC2
DC4
Host Command Summary
Wyse PC Term Emulation
MONITOR MODE
Monitor mode on
Monitor mode off
ESC U
ESC u or ESC X
SELECTING PERSONALITIES
Enhance mode off
Enhance mode on
Select WYSE 50+ personality
Select WYSE 50 personality
Select WYSE ASCII personality
Select TeleVideo 905 personality
Select TeleVideo 910+ personality
Select TeleVideo 925 personality
Select TeleVideo 950 personality
Select ADDS A2 personality
Select PC Term personality
Select HZ 1500 personality
Select VT52 personality
Select VT100 personality
Select VT220 7-bit personality
Select VT220 8-bit personality
Select UNIX Console personality
ESC v SPACE
ESC v !
ESC v "
ESC v @
ESC v 4
ESC v b
ESC v #
ESC v $
ESC v (
ESC v %
ESC v 5
ESC v &
ESC v 6
ESC v ;
ESC v <
ESC v =
ESC v ]
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
Enable transmission
Stop transmission
Send ACK
Full-duplex mode on
Half-duplex mode on
Block mode on
Half-duplex block mode on
Send terminal ID
Assign COMM 1 port as host port (enhanced)
Assign COMM 2 port as host port (enhanced)
Send time of day
Enable DTR COMM 1 port handshaking
Enable XON-XOFF/XPC COMM 1 port handshaking
CTRL Q
CTRL S
CTRL E
ESC C ESC }
ESC C ESC {
ESC B ESC }
ESC B ESC {
ESC M
ESC e 8
ESC e 9
ESC SPACE 2
CTRL N
CTRL O
TERMINAL & KEYBOARD CONTROL
Local edit mode on
Duplex edit mode on
Sound bell
Unlock keyboard
Lock keyboard
Keyclick off
Keyclick on
ESC k
ESC l
CTRL G
ESC "
ESC #
ESC <
ESC >
C-89
Host Command Summary
CAPS LOCK on (enhanced)
CAPS LOCK off (enhanced)
Margin bell off
Margin bell on
Select standard ASCII key code mode
Select PC scan code mode
Key repeat off (enhanced)
Key repeat on (enhanced)
Application key mode off
Application key mode on
Read keyboard status
Default unit
ESC e &
ESC e '
ESC n
ESC o
ESC e H
ESC e I
ESC e ,
ESC e ESC v 2
ESC v 3
ESC [
ESC m
PROGRAMMING KEYS
Program function key definition
Clear function key definition
Program key direction & definition
Read key direction & definition
Clear key direction & definition
Clear all programmable keys
ESC z *key *seq DEL
ESC z *key DEL
ESC ¦ *p1 *p2 *seq CTRL Y
ESC Z ~ *key
ESC z *dir *key DEL
ESC c U
DISPLAY
Screen display off
Screen display on
Reverse screen (light background)
Restore normal screen (dark background)
Set cursor display features
Display 25 data lines
Display 43 data lines
Display next page
Display previous page
Load user line
Display user line
User line display off
Clear unshifted label line
Program & display function key label
Clear function key label
Assign display attribute to a message field
Clear unprotected page to display attribute
Assign line attribute
ESC O
ESC N
ESC b
ESC d
ESC . *cursor
ESC ^
ESC _
ESC K
ESC J
ESC f
ESC g
ESC e or ESC h
ESC z ( CR
ESC z *field *label CR
ESC z *field CR
ESC \ *mf *attr
ESC ! *attr
ESC G *attr
PROTECTING DATA
Write-protect mode off
Write-protect mode on
Clear cursor column to write-protected spaces
Protect mode off
Protect mode on
ESC (
ESC )
ESC V
ESC '
ESC &
GRAPHICS CHARACTERS
Line-drawing graphics mode on
Line-drawing graphics mode off
C-90
ESC $
ESC %
Host Command Summary
CURSOR CONTROL
Cursor left (backspace)
Cursor right
Cursor up - no scroll
Cursor up - scroll
Cursor down - no scroll
Cursor down - scroll
Cursor to start of line
Cursor to start of next line
Move cursor to home position on current page
Move cursor to specific line
End-of-line wrap mode off
End-of-line wrap mode on
Received CR mode = CR
Received CR mode = CRLF
Autopage mode off
Autopage mode on
Address cursor in 80-column current page
Address cursor in specific 80-column page
Address cursor in specific 80-column window
Read cursor address in 80-column current page
Read 80-column window/page number & cursor address
CTRL H
CTRL L
CTRL K
ESC j
CTRL V
CTRL J
CTRL M
CTRL _
ESC { or CTRL ^
ESC [ *line
ESC 0
ESC ~
ESC 9
ESC 8
ESC w
ESC v
ESC = *line *col
ESC - *page *line *col
ESC - *wind/page *line *col
ESC ?
ESC /
EDITING
Clear all tab stops
Set tab stop
Clear tab stop
Tabulate cursor
Backtab
Insert mode on, replace mode off
Insert mode off, replace mode on
Insert space character
Insert line of spaces
Delete cursor character
Delete cursor line
ESC 3
ESC 1
ESC 2
ESC i or CTRL I
ESC I
ESC Z
ESC r
ESC Q
ESC E
ESC W
ESC R
CLEARING DATA
Clear page to nulls
Clear page to spaces
Clear page to write-protected spaces
Clear unprotected page to spaces
Clear unprotected page to nulls
Clear unprotected page to display attribute
Clear unprotected page to spaces from cursor
Clear unprotected page to nulls from cursor
Clear unprotected line to spaces from cursor
Clear unprotected line to nulls from cursor
Fill page with Hs
ESC *
ESC +
ESC ,
ESC ; or ESC +
ESC :
ESC ! *attr
ESC Y
ESC y
ESC T
ESC t
ESC F
C-91
Host Command Summary
SENDING DATA
Send line through cursor
Send unprotected line through cursor
Send page through cursor
Send unprotected page through cursor
Mark block beginning
Mark block end
Send entire block
Send unprotected characters in block
Report terminal status
Report attribute under cursor
ESC 6
ESC 4
ESC 7
ESC 5
ESC CTRL B
ESC CTRL C
ESC s
ESC S
ESC [
ESC D
PRINT FUNCTIONS
Print formatted page through cursor
Print formatted unprotected page through cursor
Print unformatted page through cursor
Auxiliary print mode off
Auxiliary print mode on
Transparent print mode off
Transparent print mode on
Bidirectional mode off
Bidirectional mode on
Pass next incoming character to printer (enhanced)
Set print terminator
Define delimiters
ESC P
ESC P
ESC p or ESC L
ESC A
ESC @
ESC a
ESC `
CTRL T
CTRL R
CTRL P *schar
ESC P *t1 *t2
ESC x *d1 *d2
CHARACTER SETS
Select PC character set
Set national mode
Set multinational mode
ESC SPACE m *charset
ESC SPACE U
ESC SPACE T
325 COLOUR PALETTE MODE
Select colour map values
Select a predefined colour palette
Map blank attribute
Map reverse attribute
Select border colour
Disable intensity attribute
Enable intensity attribute
ESC SPACE $ *fc325 *bc *map
ESC SPACE # *pal325
ESC SPACE %
ESC SPACE &
ESC SPACE ` *col325
ESC SPACE "
ESC SPACE !
370/350 COLOUR MAP MODE
Select foreground colour palette
Select background colour
Redefine character attribute association
ESC SPACE a *pal370
ESC SPACE c *col370
ESC SPACE g *a *fc *bc *assoc
370/350 COLOUR DIRECT MODE
Assign foreground colour
Assign background colour
Assign display attribute to unprotected characters
C-92
ESC SPACE d *fc370
ESC SPACE e *bc370
ESC SPACE f *assattr
Host Command Summary
Assign foreground/background colours
Assign fore/background colours to write-protected chars
Assign foreground colours to write-protected chars
Assign background colours to write-protected chars
Assign display attribute to write-protected characters
ESC SPACE h *CGAcol
ESC SPACE i *CGAcol
ESC SPACE j *fc370
ESC SPACE k *fc370
ESC SPACE 1 *assattr
370/350 COLOUR MISCELLANEOUS
Select border colour
Assign replacement character colours & attributes
ESC SPACE b *c370
ESC SPACE y *fc370 *bc *attr
C-93
Host Command Summary
Additional Commands
DISPLAY COLOUR
DEC VT modes:
Foreground colour
Background colour
CSI = * F
CSI = * G
where * is one of the following numbers:
0
1
2
3
Black
Blue
Green
Cyan
4
5
6
7
Reflection 4 compatibility:
Red
Magenta
Brown
White
8
9
10
11
Grey
Light Blue
Light Green
Light Cyan
12
13
14
15
Foreground colour
Foreground+bold colour
Background colour
Background+bold colour
Light Red
Light Magenta
Yellow
Light White
ESC [ 3 x m
ESC [ 4 x m
ESC [ 5 x m
ESC [ 6 x m
DISPLAY SIZE
Number of screen lines
ESC [ = 1 ; * p
MOUSE CURSOR
Mouse cursor style (see table below for * value)
0
Default Cursor
(I-Beam)
ESC [ = 2 ; * p
4
8
1
5
9
2
6
10
3
7
No Cursor
MOUSE REPORTING IN ALPHANUMERIC APPLICATIONS
Arm the emulator for mouse operation
where *arg is of the format: bit 7 - 3
bit 2
bit 1
bit 0
ESC [ = *arg g
00110
when set enables motion events
when set enables button release events
when set enables button press events
If all bits are cleared then any outstanding arming request is cancelled. The mouse remains
armed until cancelled. When any of the selected events occur, the following report format is
sent to the host:
ESC [ = <Event Type> ; <Button Status> ; <Column> ; <Row> r
Where: <Event Type> is the event(s) that caused the report in the same
format as the arming sequence.
C-94
Host Command Summary
<Button Status> is of the format: 00110LMR
where LMR indicates which button caused the event.
<Column> and <Row> are the alphanumeric position of the mouse.
REPORTS
Report application name & version (in DEC VT modes)
ESC [ 0 ; 1234 c
C-95
Host Command Summary
Notes
C-96
Product Specification
D
Product Specification
This appendix describes the level of support provided by each terminal
emulation.
Introduction
The following sections describe the level of support provided by each terminal
emulation throughout the product range. Note that your product version may not
support all the terminal emulations listed here.
General
Limitations:
Key click not supported.
Badge and Magnetic Card reader support are supported via ‘Wedged' data
devices connected to the unit’s keyboard.
No downloadable program module.
The keyboard layouts may differ but substantially provide the same capabilities
as the native terminal.
No screensavers.
File Transfer protocols not supported on embedded products / thin clients.
API’s not supported on embedded products / thin clients.
Smooth Scroll and Variable Scroll rates not supported.
No graphics or APA graphics.
D-1
Product Specification
Telnet
Specification:
Implements RFC 854, 855, 856, 857, 858, 860, 1091, 1408, 1571, 1572.
Implements RFC 1205, 2877 for IBM 5250.
Implements RFC 2355, 1576, 1646, 1647 for IBM 3270.
AixTerm
Limitations:
No Vertical tab stops.
No Select Alternate presentation variant.
No Select reversed string.
No Select font in graphic rendition.
No Virtual terminal commands.
No Set curses fix.
No Page scroll.
No Alternate screen buffer.
No Xwindows capabilities.
Bull BQ3107/7107
Specification:
Reference manual Bull Questar 310, Terminal BQ 3107
(82 A2 78ST REV0. February 1990).
Limitations:
Remote and Line printing are not supported.
D-2
Product Specification
Data General D200/D410
Specification:
Dasher D410 Display Terminals User’s Manual
(014-000761-02 December 1983).
Digital VT Emulation
Specification:
Digital VT 420 Programmer's Manual
(EK-VT420-RM-001).
Limitations:
The DEC Multisession and SSU protocols are not implemented.
HP 700/92 Emulation
Specification:
HP 2392A Reference Guide (02394-90001. April 1984).
IBM 3270 Emulation
Specification:
3270 Information Display System Data Stream Programmer's Reference
(GA23-0059-07).
Limitations:
No Double byte printing.
D-3
Product Specification
IBM 5250 Emulation
Specification:
5494 Remote Control Unit Functions Reference. Release 2.0.
(SC30-3533-02).
Limitations:
No text assist in Right to Left writing mode.
No double-byte printing.
The 3812-1 Non Host Print Transform (Non-HPT) print protocol is not
supported.
No Calculator / Hex key.
No Password encryption.
No Auxillary port support.
No Control Unit customisation.
The specification is also defined by the 5250 Device Capabilities report Bytes 0
thru 5 which are 0x7f,0x11,0x4e,0x00,0x03,0x80 for Display Sessions.
IBM 3151 Native Emulation Model 11 & 31
Specification:
IBM 3151 Ascii Display Station Reference Manual (GA18-2634-01. 1989).
ICL 7561
Specification:
ICL DRS300 manual (R15722/001 Appendix 1 September 1986).
Limitations:
Some field validation checks are not supported.
Load templates are not supported.
Host print protocol is not supported.
D-4
Product Specification
Stratus V102
Specification:
V102 Display Terminal Operator’s Manual (TVI 131974-00 June 1985).
Limitations:
Page print flip mode not supported.
Serial configuration commands not supported.
Select character set commands not supported.
Tandem 6526/6530 Emulation
Specification:
Tandem 653x Multi-Page Terminal Programmer’s Guide
(82310-B00 December 1983).
Limitations:
Telnet Line-Mode is not supported.
Ansi media copy commands are not supported.
No support for auxiliary port.
No support for extended buffer and cursor commands.
String configuration, machine and directory commands not supported.
Data table re-definition commands not supported.
Remote termination not supported.
I/O device and file commands not supported.
Set colour configuration commands not supported.
D-5
Product Specification
Televideo 955
Specification:
Televideo 955 Display Terminal Operator's Manual (131969-00-B Sept 1985).
Limitations:
Page print flip mode not supported.
Serial configuration commands not supported.
Select character set commands not supported.
Unisys T27
Specification:
Burroughs T27 Programmer’s Reference Manual (1196904 Aug 1986).
Limitations:
Print protocol, printer sessions and auxiliary i/o are not supported.
Some local-only keyboard ctrl and esc commands are not supported.
Data sharing and scratchpad functions are not supported.
Wyse 60 Native Emulation
Specification:
WY-60 Programmer’s Guide (880261-01 Rev A).
Limitations:
Only 16 colours supported, not 64.
Some colour commands are not supported.
No page edit mode.
Modem and aux port commands not supported.
No Keyboard scan code mode.
Character cell size commands not supported.
D-6
Product Specification
Function key label save commands not supported.
Automatic font loading not supported.
Remote caps lock commands not supported.
Ignore nulls commands not supported.
Attribute overwrite mode not supported.
Disable intensity commands not supported.
Some select personality commands not supported.
Wyseword mode not supported.
Wyse 50, 50+, TVI 910, 925, 950, ADDS-A2,
HZ 1500, Wyse PC-Term
Specification:
WY355/ES Reference Manual (883227-01 Rev. A).
Limitations:
All modes:
As Wyse 60 above where applicable.
TVI modes:
Select Print / Line termination characters.
Wyse PC-Term:
Default unit command not supported.
Program key with direction not supported.
Set print terminators not supported.
Define delimiters not supported.
D-7
Product Specification
Notes
D-8
Index
Index
Symbols
Status bar 8-3
Virtual key names A-2
4010/4014 Emulation
Screen mapping 6-90
Settings menu 6-89
Buffer Rows
Button Tools
Predefined functions (XPe) 5-1
Redefining (XPe only) 5-3
Windows CE 2-42
Windows XPe 2-45
A
AIXTerm Emulation
Host command summary
Specification D-2
Answerback String
C-25
6-29
Aux Port Settings
Connection Wizard
2-29
2-38
B
Baud Rate Selection
Block Mode
Cursor positioning
Settings 6-85
C
Character Set Selection
AT&T 4410 Emulation
Host command summary C-30
Programming function keys 2-48
Selecting 2-4, 6-26
Virtual key names A-2
Automate Login Process
6-76
2-27, 6-72
4-2
BQ 3107 Emulation
Host command summary C-31
Keyboard mapping 8-4
Session configuration 8-1
Setup 6-69
Specification D-2
6-77
Character Sets B-1
ANSI 1250 B-11
ANSI 437 B-8
ANSI 850 B-9
ANSI 858 B-10
ASCII B-2
Control characters B-1
DEC
Additional B-4
Line Drawing B-5
National characters B-3
DG 410/412 emulation B-12
IBM 3270 emulation B-31
IBM 5250 emulation B-31
ISO Latin-1 Additional B-6
ISO Latin-2 Additional B-7
Multinational B-4
PT250 emulation B-23
Siemens 97801 mode B-26
Wyse emulations B-14
Characters In Setup Entries
6-4
Index-1
Index
Codes In Setup Entries 6-4
Colour Attributes 6-92
Colour Selection
Line styles 6-92
Text attributes 6-92
Command Bar (CE)
2-41
Command Line Options
Action on host connection close 20-5
Aux port bidirectional 20-21
Aux port opened &
bidirectional 20-21
Aux port opened at start-up 20-21
Connection template to use 20-7
Crosshair cursor size 20-18
Disable backing store 20-19
Disable bell 20-7
Disable close window menu
item 20-11
Disable colour palette 20-16
Disable Command bar 20-12
Disable Edit menu 20-14
Disable 'Exit' box 20-6
Disable File menu 20-14
Disable maximize button 20-11
Disable menu bar 20-13
Disable menu bar & pop-up
menus 20-13
Disable Menu bar & toolbar 20-12
Disable Menu bar, pop-ups &
toolbar 20-13
Disable min/maximize & close
button 20-10
Disable minimize button 20-11
Disable mouse editing 20-20
Disable scroll bar 20-15
Disable Settings menu 20-15
Disable sixel graphics scaling 20-19
Disable status bar & DEC status
line 20-16
Disable title bar 20-10
Disable tool buttons 20-12
Disable toolbar 20-13
Disable Tools menu 20-15
Disable window frame resize 20-9
Enable debug (File Capture/
Index-2
Replay) 20-8
Enable Debug Log Send &
Receive 20-8
Enable plane masking 20-19
Flashing for all sessions 20-17
Graphics redraw on resize 20-17
New session warning message 20-5
Preload Winsock DLL for PPP
usage 20-5
Reflection 4 colour support 20-17
Save 4014 graphics display 20-18
Set Tek graphics height 20-18
Set Tek graphics width 20-18
Soft buttons displayed 20-16
Summary 20-2
Window maximized 20-9
Window minimized 20-9
Window subtitle 20-10
Window title 20-10
Workspace fills screen 20-9
Compose Character Sequences
3-4
Connection Information
Connection Wizard 2-1
Connection Template (CE)
Creating 6-5
Selecting 6-6
Connection Template (XPe)
Creating 6-6
Connection Wizard
Automate Login Process 2-29
Aux Port Settings 2-38
Connection Information 2-1
GUI Overrides 2-36
Host Information 2-2
Printer Port Settings 2-31
Control Characters B-1
Displaying 6-79
Keyboard equivalents
Conventions
B-1
1-3
Copy & Paste
Edit menu options 6-23
Using mouse 4-2
Cursor
Positioning in block mode
4-2
Index
D
DEC Multinational Set
Status line
DEC VT emulations 7-4
IBM 3151 emulation 13-3
IBM 3270 emulation 11-5
IBM 5250 emulation 12-5
Wyse emulations 19-4
6-77
DEC VT Emulations
Horizontal scrolling 7-5
Keyboard mapping 7-5
Specification D-3
Status bar 7-4
E
Default Setup Settings
Edit Menu
6-4, 6-9
DG 410/412 Emulation
Character sets
Alphabet B-12
Line Drawing B-13
Math B-12
Word Processing B-12
Host command summary C-32
Keyboard mapping 9-3
Session configuration 9-1
Specification D-3
Virtual key names A-3
Display
80 column font 6-75
80/132 columns 6-75
Auto resize 6-81
Buffer size 6-76
Control codes 6-79
Copy right to left 6-80
Cursor moves right to left 6-80
Cursor type 6-76
DEC status line 6-76
Error codes 6-80
Jump/smooth scroll 6-80
Language selection 2-1, 6-24
Preferred font 6-52, 6-58, 6-77
Rows 6-75
Text attributes 6-92
Display Elements
Button tools (CE) 2-42
Button tools (XPe) 2-45
Command bar (CE) 2-41
Hotspots 2-47, 4-3
Menu bar (XPe) 2-44
Soft Buttons (CE) 2-43
Soft Buttons (XPe) 2-45
Status bar 2-46
6-23
Edit Mode Indicator
2-46, 7-4
Editing Text 6-23
Emulation Settings
6-26
Emulation Support Level
D-1
Enhanced AT Keyboard Mapping
BQ 3107 functions 8-5
DEC VT500 functions
DEC mode 7-7
Normal mode 7-6
DG 410/412 functions 9-4
HP 700-92/96 functions 10-4
IBM 3151 functions 13-5
IBM 3270 functions 11-11
IBM 5250 functions 12-7
MDIS Prism functions 14-4
PT250 functions 15-6
Siemens 97801 functions 16-4
TA6530 functions 17-6
Unisys T27 functions 18-5
Wyse functions 19-6
Entering Codes In Setup Entries
6-4
Error Messages
TA6530 emulation 17-3
Euro Character
6-5
F
Factory Default Setup
File Menu
6-4
6-9
Flow Control
2-27, 6-72
Font Selection 6-52, 6-58, 6-77
Index-3
Index
G
Host Information
Connection Wizard
GUI Overrides
Connection Wizard
Hotspots
Displaying all
Using 2-47
2-36
H
Hebrew Language
Typing direction (DEC suite)
6-77, 6-78, 7-8
Host Command Summary
AIXTerm emulation C-25
ANSI VT100 emulation C-2
AT&T 4410 emulation C-30
BQ 3107 emulation C-31
DG 410/412 emulation C-32
HP 700-92/96 emulation C-35
IBM 3151 emulation C-39
MDIS Prism-12 emulation C-47
MDIS Prism-8 emulation C-42
MDIS Prism-9 emulation C-42
PT250 emulation C-49
ReGIS emulation C-55
SCO Console emulation C-58
Siemens 97801 emulation C-61
TA6530 emulation C-64
Tek 4010/4014 emulation C-68
TVI 955 emulation C-70
Unisys T27 emulation C-76
Viewdata mode C-78
VT400 emulation C-6
VT420 emulation C-9
VT510 emulation C-12
VT52 emulation C-1
VT520 emulation C-15
VT640 emulation C-79
W2119 emulation C-81
Wyse emulations C-83
Wyse PC Term emulation C-89
Host Communications
Auxport setup menu 6-74
Serial settings menu 6-72
Host Connection
SSH (Secure Shell) 2-21
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
Index-4
2-18
2-2
2-47
HP 700-92/96 Emulation
Configuration selection 10-8
Device control 10-8
Display attributes 10-16
Function keys & labels 10-3
Host command summary C-35
Key programming 10-13
Keyboard mapping 10-3
Margins, tabs, column 10-11
Mode selection 10-5
Session configuration 10-1
Setup settings 6-30
Specification D-3
Virtual key names A-4
I
IBM 3151 Emulation
Host command summary C-39
Introduction 13-1
Keyboard mapping 13-4
Session configuration 13-1
Setup 6-39
Specification D-4
Status bar 13-3
IBM 3270 Emulation
Bilingual keyboard support 11-9
Character sets
Austrian B-35
Belgian B-39
Canadian bilingual B-31
Danish B-33
English (UK) B-32
English (US) B-31
Finnish B-38
French B-34
German B-35
Italian B-36
Netherlands B-31
Norwegian B-33
Spanish B-37
Index
Swedish B-38
Swiss-French B-39
Swiss-German B-39
Close key 11-9
Display right-to-left 11-9
Display rule 6-51
Introduction 11-1
Keyboard mapping 11-10
National character settings 6-52
Notice Board facility 11-15
Notice Board setup 6-54
NVT mode 11-4
Printer support 6-50, 11-4
Push mode 11-9
Record/playback keystrokes 11-12
Selecting 11-1
Session configuration 11-1
Setup 6-50
Specification D-3
Status line 11-5
SysReq key support 11-4
Text display options 11-9
Typing direction 11-9
Virtual key names A-4
IBM 5250 Emulation
Bilingual keyboard support 12-8
Character sets
Austrian B-35
Belgian B-39
Canadian bilingual B-31
Danish B-33
English (UK) B-32
English (US) B-31
Finnish B-38
French B-34
German B-35
Italian B-36
Netherlands B-31
Norwegian B-33
Spanish B-37
Swedish B-38
Swiss-French B-39
Swiss-German B-39
Close key 12-8
Display right-to-left 12-8
Display rule 6-57
Fax image support 12-11
Introduction 12-1
Keyboard mapping 12-6
National character settings 6-58
Push mode 12-8
Record/playback keystrokes 12-9
Selecting 12-1
Session configuration 12-1
Setup 6-56
Specification D-4
Status line 12-5
Text display options 12-8
Typing direction 12-8
Virtual key names A-5
Word Processing mode 12-6
IBM 5250 Printer Options
2-15
IBM EBCDIC Codepages
B-40
ICL 7561 Emulation
Specification D-4
Initialization Commands
Introduction 20-1
ISO Latin Multinational Set
6-77
K
Key Mapping
Changing 3-1, 6-97
Displaying 3-1, 6-97
Key Programming
HP 700-92/96 emulation 10-13
IBM 3151 emulation 13-6
Macros menu 6-97
Keyboard
Changing key functions 3-1
Composing characters 3-4
Cursor key mode 6-79
Defining keys 3-1, 6-97
Enhanced AT mapping
BQ 3107 functions 8-5
DEC VT500 functions 7-6, 7-7
DG 410/412 functions 9-4
HP 700-92/96 functions 10-4
IBM 3151 functions 13-5
IBM 3270 functions 11-11
IBM 5250 functions 12-7
Index-5
Index
MDIS Prism functions 14-4
PT250 functions 15-6
Siemens 97801 functions 16-4
TA6530 functions 17-6
Unisys T27 functions 18-5
Wyse functions 19-6
Entering control characters B-1
Keypad mode 6-79
Macros 3-1, 6-97
Mapping 3-1
Mapping (changing) 6-97
Mapping (showing) 6-97
Send position codes 6-81
Send scan codes 6-81
Type 6-77
Viewdata function keys 2-49
Virtual key names A-1
Keywords 4-3
L
Language Selection
Line Styles
Colour selection
2-1, 6-24
Mouse
Button tools 6-105
GIN Button definitions 6-91
Middle button emulating 4-3
Mouse Functions 6-103
Action hotspots 4-3
Default 4-1
Move text cursor 4-2
Select rectangle 4-2
Selecting text for copy 4-2
Send keyword 4-3
Show hotspots 4-3
Multinational Character Set
N
National Character Settings
IBM 3270 emulation 6-52
IBM 5250 emulation 6-58
Network
New Connection dialog box
New Connection Dialog Box
Notice Board
Setup settings
6-92
Local Echo 2-28, 6-73
Local Editing Settings 6-83
6-54
On Line/Local Setting
M
Operating Language
Macros 3-1, 6-97
P
MDIS Prism Emulations
Session configuration 14-1
Virtual key names A-6
MDIS Prism-12 Emulation
Host command summary
C-47
MDIS Prism-8 Emulation
Host command summary
C-42
MDIS Prism-9 Emulation
Host command summary
Middle Button
Modem Settings
Index-6
2-44
4-3
2-26
Parity Selection
Print Manager
C-42
6-73
2-1, 6-24
2-27, 6-72
Print
Auto 6-22
Buffer 6-22
Cancel 6-22
Screen 6-21
2-32, 6-17
Printer Port Settings
Connection Wizard
Printer Setup
2-31
6-15
Product Specification
D-1
6-10
6-10
O
Local/On Line Setting 6-73
Menu Bar (XPe)
6-77
Index
PT250 Emulation
Character sets
Additional B-23
Block Graphics B-25
Line Drawing B-24
Displaying alternate characters 15-7
Host command summary C-49
Keyboard mapping 15-5
Session configuration 15-1
Setup settings 6-36
Status line 15-3
Virtual key names A-6
Disable Tools menu 20-15
Enable plane masking 20-19
Graphics redraw on resize 20-17
New session warning message 20-5
Reflection 4 colour support 20-17
Save 4014 graphics display 20-18
Set Tek graphics height 20-18
Set Tek graphics width 20-18
Soft buttons displayed 20-16
Startup command group to
action 20-7
Window maximized 20-9
Window minimized 20-9
Workspace fills screen 20-9
R
ReGIS Emulation
Host command summary
C-55
Registry Commands
Action on host connection close 20-5
Convert £ to $ (MDIS P9) 20-20
Crosshair cursor size 20-18
Disable backing store 20-19
Disable bell 20-7
Disable close window menu
item 20-11
Disable colour palette 20-16
Disable Command bar 20-12
Disable Edit menu 20-14
Disable Edit menu items 20-14
Disable 'Exit' box 20-6
Disable File menu 20-14
Disable File menu items 20-14
Disable maximize button 20-11
Disable minimize button 20-11
Disable mouse editing 20-20
Disable scroll bar 20-15
Disable Settings menu 20-15
Disable Settings menu items 20-15
Disable sixel graphics scaling 20-19
Disable status bar & DEC status
line 20-16
Disable System menu 20-11
Disable System menu & Min/Max
buttons 20-12
Disable tool buttons on command
bar 20-12
Registry Entries
Command summary 20-2
Reset Terminal
6-9
S
Save Session
6-13
Save Session (CE)
Save Session (XPe)
6-5
6-6
SCO Console Emulation
Host command summary
Virtual key names A-7
C-58
Scrolling Horizontally
DEC VT emulations 7-5
Serial Connection Settings
2-27
Serial Port
Sending text to A-10
Virtual key names A-10
Session
Management (XPe) 2-39
Opening new 6-12
Save 6-13
Save as 6-14
Session Configuration
BQ 3107 emulation 8-1
DEC VT emulations 7-1
DG 410/412 emulation 9-1
HP 700-92/96 emulation 10-1
IBM 3151 emulation 13-1
Index-7
Index
IBM 3270 emulation 11-1
IBM 5250 emulation 12-1
MDIS Prism emulations 14-1
PT250 emulation 15-1
Siemens 97801 emulation 16-1
TA6530 emulation 17-1
Unisys T27 emulation 18-1
Wyse emulations 19-1
Session Configuration (XPe)
Selecting 6-7
Set Tabs
6-82
Settings Menu
6-24
Setup Menus
Attributes 6-92
Auxport settings 6-74
Block Transmission 6-85
BQ 3107 settings 6-69
Button Tools 6-105
Closing 6-2
Codes in entries 6-4
Default settings 6-4
Define Keyboard Macros 3-1
Displaying 6-1
Edit Menu 6-23
Emulation settings 6-26
File menu 6-9
GIN Mouse Definitions 6-91
HP 700-92/96 settings 6-30
IBM 3151 settings 6-39
IBM 3270 settings 6-50
IBM 5250 settings 6-56
Keyboard Macros 6-97
Local Editing settings 6-83
Menu descriptions 6-9
Mouse Button Actions 6-103
New Connection 6-10
Notice Board Setup 6-54
Open Session 6-12
Option selection 6-2
PT250 settings 6-36
Save Session As 6-14
Serial settings 6-72
Settings menu 6-24
Soft Buttons 6-100
Specifying characters in entries 6-4
Index-8
Startup options 6-15
TA6530 settings 6-48
Tab Stops 6-82
Tek 4014 settings 6-89
Terminal settings 6-75
Unisys T27 settings 6-61
Wyse settings 6-43
Siemens 97801 Emulation
Character sets
Brackets B-30
Euro B-29
German B-28
International B-27
International A B-26
Host command summary C-61
Keyboard mapping 14-3, 16-3
Session configuration 16-1
Soft Buttons
Settings menu 6-100
Windows CE 2-43
Windows XPe 2-45
Special Characters
6-4
Specification D-1
AIXTerm D-2
Bull BQ 3107/7107 D-2
Data General D200/D410 D-3
Digital VT emulation D-3
General D-1
HP 700/92 D-3
IBM 3151 D-4
IBM 3270 D-3
IBM 5250 D-4
ICL 7561 D-4
Stratus V102 D-5
Tandem 6526/6530 D-5
Televideo 955 D-6
Telnet D-2
Unisys T27 D-6
Wyse 60 Native D-6
Wyse emulations D-7
SSH Connection Settings
2-21
SSL Connection Settings
2-18
Startup Options
Status Bar
2-46
6-15
Index
DEC VT emulations 7-4
Unisys T27 emulation 18-3
Terminal Settings
6-75
Terms & Conventions
1-3
Status Line
DEC host writable 6-76
IBM 3151 emulation 13-3
IBM 3270 emulation 11-5
IBM 5250 emulation 12-5
PT250 emulation 15-3
TA6530 emulation 17-3
Wyse emulations 19-4
TN3270 Options
2-11
TN5250 Options
2-13
Stratus V102 Emulation
Specification D-5
TVI 955 Emulation
Host command summary
Specification D-6
Virtual key names A-8
Support Level
D-1
T
TA6530 Emulation
Host command summary C-64
Keyboard mapping 17-5
Operating modes 17-4
Rule cursor 17-5
Session configuration 17-1
Setup settings 6-48
Specification D-5
Status line 17-3
Virtual key names A-7
Tab Stops 6-82
TCP/IP Connection Settings
2-9
Tek 4010/4014 Emulation
Host command summary
C-68
Tek 4014 Emulation
Screen mapping 6-90
Settings menu 6-89
Telnet
Specification D-2
Terminal Emulation
Level of support
Selecting 6-26
Terminal ID
DEC VT 6-29
HP 6-34
IBM 3151 6-42
Terminal Reset
6-9
D-1
Toolbar
Predefined button tools (XPe)
Redefining (XPe only) 5-3
Windows XPe version 5-1
Toolbar (XPe)
5-1
2-45
C-70
Typing Direction
Hebrew language (DEC suite)
6-77, 6-78, 7-8
U
Unicode
Entering values in Setup entries
6-4
Unisys T27 Emulation
Host command summary C-76
Keyboard mapping 18-4
Session configuration 18-1
Setup 6-61
Specification D-6
Status bar 18-3
Virtual key names A-8
V
Viewdata Mode
Display formats 2-49
Host command summary
Key functions 2-49
Virtual key names A-9
C-78
Virtual Key Names A-1
AT&T 4410 emulation A-2
BQ 3107 emulation A-2
DG 410/412 emulation A-3
HP 700-92/96 emulation A-4
IBM 3270 emulation A-4
IBM 5250 emulation A-5
Index-9
Index
IBM 5250 Word Processing A-5
Insert delay A-11
MDIS Prism emulations A-6
PT250 emulation A-6
Reading text from a file A-11
SCO Console emulation A-7
Serial port functions A-10
Standard A-1
TA6530 emulation A-7
TVI 955 emulation A-8
Unisys T27 emulation A-8
Viewdata mode A-9
VT500 emulation A-3
Writing text to a file A-10
Wyse emulations A-9
VT+HP220 Emulation
VT-UTF8 Emulation
2-6, 6-28
2-6, 6-28
VT100 Emulation
Host command summary C-2
Session configuration 7-1
VT100+ Emulation
2-6, 6-28
VT400 Emulation
Host command summary
C-6
VT420 Emulation
Host command summary
C-9
VT500 Emulation
Keyboard mapping 7-5
Session configuration 7-1
Virtual key names A-3
VT510 Emulation
Host command summary
C-12
VT520 Emulation
Host command summary
C-15
VT640 Emulation
Host command summary
C-79
W
Index-10
6-90
15-3
Wyse 60 Native Emulation
Specification D-6
Wyse Emulations
Character sets
Native Mode (ALL) B-14
WY-60 Graphics 1 B-20
WY-60 Graphics 2 B-21
WY-60 Graphics 3 B-22
WY-60 Multinational (437)
B-15
WY-60 Multinational (850)
B-16
WY-60 PC Equivalent B-17
WY-60 Standard ANSI B-19
WY-60 Standard ASCII B-18
Host command summary C-83
Keyboard mapping 19-5
Session configuration 19-1
Setup 6-43
Specification D-7
Status line 19-4
Virtual key names A-9
Wyse PC Term Emulation
Host command summary
VT52 Emulation
Host command summary C-1
Session configuration 7-1
W2119 Emulation
Host command summary
Screen mapping
Window Elements
Status line
PT250 emulation
C-81
C-89
Download PDF

advertising